Quotation/Order Number: 6506422918
LineItemNumbers: 000500
Created On: 5/6/2026
ReferenceNumbers: 05360983-0006
Business Unit: LVMCC_2100
Customer Name: Onesource Distributors Inc
Project Name/ID: CITY OF CARLSBAD CHINQUAPIN LIFT STATION Critical or Intelligent Spare Parts are highlighted with Bold Text:
Quantity Unit
Location
Spare Part # Spare Part Description List Price Min/Max
Quantity
4 03A, 03G 100-FSV136 100-F Surge Suppressor, Varistor Module, 56...136VAC / 78...180VDC
1/1
2 01L, 02J 140G-G6C3-C30 140G-G Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 65 kA, T/M - Fixed Thermal / Fixed Magnetic TMF, Rated Current 30
A
1/1
1 01D 140G-G6C3-C60 140G-G Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 65 kA, T/M - Fixed Thermal / Fixed Magnetic TMF, Rated Current 60
A
1/1
2 03A, 03G 140G-G6C3-C70 140G-G Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 65 kA, T/M - Fixed Thermal / Fixed Magnetic TMF, Rated Current 70
A
1/1
2 01D, 01L 140G-G-TLC13 140G-G Terminal Lug, FCCu 1x14-1/0(2.5-50) 1/1 1 01A 140G-J6X3 140G-J Frame Molded Case Circuit Breaker, 65kA, 250A 3p
1/1
1 01A 140G-J-TC3H 140G-J Terminal Cover, 3p 1/1
Quantity Unit
Location
Spare Part # Spare Part Description List Price Min/Max
Quantity
1 01A 140G-JTH3-D15 140G-J Molded Case Circuit Breaker Trip Unit, Electronic LSI, High Instant, Rated Current 150 A
1/1
1 01A 140G-J-TLC13 140G-J Terminal Lug, FCCu 1x10-250(6-185) 1/1 2 03A, 03G 1489-M1C020 TERMINAL STRIP ASSY WITH 1606-XLSDNET8 1/1 1 01G 1489-M1C100 TERMINAL STRIP ASSY WITH 1606-XLSDNET8 1/1 9 000 1492-CA1 1492 No bulk Pack, Single Block White 1/1 12 01D, 03A, 03G 1492-EC85 5 Pole Pull apart Control Terminal Block 1/2 2 03A, 03G 1492-ED103 3 Pole Pull-apart Power Terminal Block 1/1 2 03A, 03G 1492-H1 1492 H-Block, Code 1, White, No Bulk Pack Single Block
1/1
2 03A, 03G 1497-F-BASX-3-N BUL 1497 Transformer 350VA, 2 Pri- 1 Sec Fuse Blocks
1/1
2 03A, 03G 150-F43NBDB SMC-Flex, Solid State Controller, Open, 43 A,
7.5...30Hp @ 460V AC, Input Volt.: 200...480V, Control
Volt.: 100...240V AC, Pump Control Option
1/1
2 03A, 03G 150-F84 SMC, Protective Module 480V, 5-85A 1/1 2 03A, 03G 20-COMM-E PowerFlex Arch. Class EtherNet/IP to DPI Comm.
Adapter
1/1
2 03A, 03G 20-HIM-C6S PowerFlex Class Remote Enhanced HIM, IP66 (NEMA 4X/12) Includes 1202-C30 cable
1/1
2 000 2100H-NC2 Horizontal Ground Bus Splice Kit, 0.25 x 2 In Unplated Copper Bus
1/1
3 000 2100H-NH2 Space Heater Kit, 200 Watt, 120 Volt Strip Heater With Thermostat Set at 21°C (70°F)
1/1
3 000 2100H-NMC1 External Mounting Channel Kits, (Two) 1.5 x 3 In Mounting Channels, 20 In Wide Vertical Section
1/1
Quantity Unit
Location
Spare Part # Spare Part Description List Price Min/Max
Quantity
1 01D 2100H-UA1 X Unit Support Pan, Style 3, 1.0 SF, NEMA Enclosure Type 1
1/1
8 01A, 01G, 01L,
02A, 02C, 02E,
03A, 03G
2100H-UJ1 X Unit Support Pan, Style 3, 1.0 SF, NEMA Enclosure Type 1 w/Gasket and Type 12
1/1
11 01A, 01D,
01G, 01L, 02A,
02C, 02J, 03A,
03G
2100R-DL141621 DR.LATCH ASSEM. 1/2
1 02E 2100R-DL141621T DR.LATCH ASSEM. 1/1
1 01A 2100R-DL1416SE DOOR LATCH ASM 1/1
2 01A, 01L 2100R-DLHPL DOOR LATCH ASSY 1/1
3 000 2100R-SCAB SPLICE COVER ASM 1/1
1 02E 2100R-TH T HANDLE ASSEMBLY 1/1
6 01D, 01G, 01L,
02J, 03A, 03G
2100R-VSGO VERT. GRND. BUS STAB ASSY 1/1
3 01G, 03A, 03G 700-AR2 RC Surge Suppressor 110-240V AC/DC 1/1 4 03A, 03G 700-CF310D Control Relay,3NO/1NC, 110V 50Hz/120V 60Hz 1/1 3 01G, 03A, 03G 700-HA33A1 700-HA General Purpose Tube Base Relay, 10 Amp Contact, 3PDT, 120V 50/60Hz
1/1
1 01G 700-HN101 11-Pin Tube Base Socket, Screw Terminals, Guarded Touch Safe Terminal Construction
1/1
1 01G 700-HN131 Retainer Clip for 700-HR Relay 1/1
3 01G, 03A, 03G 700-HN157 Retainer Clip for 700-HA Relay 1/1 3 01G, 03A, 03G 700-HN205 11-Pin Tube Base Socket, Screw Terminals, Guarded Touch Safe Terminal Construction with Optional Timing
Attachment Space
1/1
Quantity Unit
Location
Spare Part # Spare Part Description List Price Min/Max
Quantity
1 01G 700-HR52TA17 700-HR Dial Timing Relay, Multi-Function, 2 Timed Contacts, 100-240V AC/100-125V DC
1/1
2 03A, 03G 800H-AR2D2 800H 30mm Type 4/4X/13 Mom. Contact PB, Non-Illum., Black, Flush Hd, 1 NC
1/1
1 01G 800H-HR2A 800H 30mm Type 4/4X/13 2 Pos Sel.
Switch-Non-Illum., White, Std. Knob Maint., 1 NO-1 NC
1/1
2 03A, 03G 800H-JR2B 800H 30mm Type 4/4X/13 3 Pos. Sel.
Switch-Non-Illum., White, Std. Knob Maint, 2NO-2 NC
1/1
1 01G 800H-JR2KC1ANAX 800H 30mm Type 4/4X/13 3 Pos. Sel.
Switch-Non-Illum., White, Std. Knob Maint. 1 NO-1 NC
& 1 NC-1 NC & 1 NO-1 NC
1/1
2 03A, 03G 800H-PRTH16G 800H 30mm Type 4/4X/13 Pilot Light, Xfmr, Push-to-Test, LED,Green, 120V AC 50/60 Hz, 1 NO-1
NC
1/1
2 03A, 03G 800H-PRTH16R 800H 30mm Type 4/4X/13 Pilot Light, Xfmr, Push-to-Test, LED,Red, 120V AC 50/60 Hz, 1 NO-1 NC
1/1
2 03A, 03G 800H-PRTH16W 800H 30mm Type 4/4X/13 Pilot Light, Xfmr, Push-to-Test, LED,White, 120V AC 50/60 Hz, 1 NO-1
NC
1/1
2 03A, 03G 825-CBCT Core Banlance Current Transformer, 100:1 1/1 6 01A, 01D, 01L,
02J, 03A, 03G
BOM 22190-002-01 Terminal Strip, 1 to 12 Poles, 10mm 1/1 5 02E BOM 25105-010-02 Thermal Magnetic Miniature Circuit Breaker, 1 Pole, 120/240V, 15A
1/1
11 02E BOM 25105-010-03 Thermal Magnetic Miniature Circuit Breaker, 1 Pole, 120/240V, 20A
1/2
1 02E BOM 25105-011-05 Thermal Magnetic Miniature Circuit Breaker, 2 Pole, 120/240V, 30A
1/1
Quantity Unit
Location
Spare Part # Spare Part Description List Price Min/Max
Quantity
1 02E BOM 25111-030-01 Lighting Panel, 1PH 3W, 100Amp Main Breaker, AL 16 CKT
1/1
2 02J BOM 25183-161-34 Cktpro Fuse TD Rk5 250V 25A Cartridge 1/1 3 000 BOM 25325-010-01 Thermostat,Red, NC. 1/1
1 02J BOM 40121-518-01 Control Transformer 5KVA 1/1
12 000, 03A, 03G BOM PN-106806 LUG #8-1 HOLE-1/4 IN STUD 1/2 5 01D BOM PN-106807 LUG #6-1 HOLE-1/4 IN STUD 1/1
2 03A, 03G BOM PN-183463 MiniCAS II, 120VAC Relay 1/1
1 000 BOM PN-333689 Thermal Transfer, White Polyester Label 1/1 4 03A, 03G BOM PN-D182973 Fuse,TD,CC,600V,5A 1/1
2 03A, 03G BOM PN-D183687 Fuse TD Class J 600V 50A 1/1
2 03A, 03G BOM X-276122 Cktpro Fuse TD 250V 3.2A Cartridge 1/1 Startup Documentation
Rockwell Automation Order Number:
6506422918
Date:
5/6/2026
MCC level
1 Publication 2100-IN010D-EN-P—February 2007
Instructions
CENTERLINE® 2100 Motor Control Centers
Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections
Application The following instructions illustrate the recommended procedures that should be used when joining and splicing CENTERLINE® 2100 Motor Control Centers (MCCs).
For more splicing information related to specific MCCs, refer to the bus splicing drawing included in the documentation shipped with the MCC.
Recommended Tools Assorted screwdrivers, sockets (including 9/16” deep well and 5/16” sockets), and torque wrench
Joining MCCs NEMA 1, 1G, and 12
Physical restrictions at your installation may not allow the following sequence to be followed exactly as stated.
1. The splice kit(s), if required, are located within a horizontal wireway or blank unit space. On six space factor frame-mounted units, the splice kit is within the unit. A fluorescent pink, removable label (on the outside of the compartment) designates the location. Locate splice kit(s) and set aside for later use.
ATTENTION
!
De-energize all power sources to the motor control center before joining and splicing vertical sections. Failure to de-energize all power sources can result in severe injury or death.
IMPORTAN T Note for NO-OX-ID - If using corrosion inhibitor on bus bars do not get any on the bus splicing hardware
. It will not
allow the hardware to be properly torqued. Damage may
occur.
tab
Publication 2100-IN010D-EN-P—February 2007
2 CENTERLINE® 2100 Motor Control Centers Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections
2. Remove top and bottom horizontal wireway covers as shown in Figure 2 and Figure 3. Remove the wood shim used in transportation from the side of the MCC.
3. Remove top, bottom and center end closing plates, if present, exposing joining holes (referred to as A and B in Figure 2 and Figure 3) of the MCC. Joining holes not covered by end closing plates may contain 1/4-20 hex head thread-forming screws on the left side and removable plastic plugs on the right side. These screws and plugs are accessible both from within the vertical wireway and from the outside surface of the vertical side plate and must be removed from the side plates to be joined. See Figure 2 and Figure 3.
4. Remove the vertical wireway cover and horizontal bus splice access cover from the sections to be joined. See Figure 1 and Figure 7.
5. Pull all “bottom entry” cables, if any are present, through the conduits to a point where they will be accessible when the center is positioned.
6. NOTE: For NEMA 12 MCCs refer to publication 2100-IN037x-EN-P , NEMA 12 Sealing Instructions. This publication was shipped with the splice kit.
7. Slide sections together making sure cabinets are level and holes in side sheets line-up with adjacent holes. See Figure 2.
NOTE: Make sure cabinets are level and pushed together, tightly. Do not use hardware to draw cabinets together.
8. Join the two MCCs using the hardware furnished with the splice kit. • Pass the 1/4-20 hex head thread forming screw from inside the left MCC through joining holes (A in Figure 2 and Figure 3) and engage the screws with the holes located in the right center. Refer to Torque Requirements on page 15
• Pass the 1/4-20 x 5/8 hex screw from inside the left center through joining hole (B in Figure 2 and Figure 3) and secure with the 1/4-20 steel nut. Refer to Torque Requirements on page 15
9. Secure the MCC to the floor as required by local code.
10. Inspect the interior for dust and dirt; vacuum cleaning is recommended.
Do not clean using compressed air—it contains moisture and may blow debris into the control equipment.
Publication 2100-IN010D-EN-P—February 2007
CENTERLINE® 2100 Motor Control Centers Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections 3 Figure 1 Typical 15” Deep MCC Construction
Removable top plate
Lift Angle
Bus Splice Access Cover
Right Hand Unit Support
(Vertical Wireway)
Top Horizontal Wireway Cover
Top Horizontal Wireway Pan
Top Horizontal Wireway Baffles
Unit Support Pan
Vertical Wireway Door
Vertical Bus Covers
(3 Piece Assembly)
Vertical to Horizontal Bus
Connection Access Cover
Section Nameplate
Left Hand Side Plate Assembly
Vertical Plug-In
Ground Bus
Left Hand Center
End Closing Plate
Sealing Strap
(Top and Bottom)
Bottom Support Angle
Bottom Horizontal
Wireway Cover
Left Hand Bottom End Closing Plate
(2 on 20” Deep Sections)
Horizontal Ground Bus,
Top or Bottom
Horizontal Power Bus
Vertical Power Bus
Horizontal and
Vertical Bus
Support
Left Hand Top End Closing Plate
(2 on 20” Deep Sections)
Vertical Wireway Cover
Publication 2100-IN010D-EN-P—February 2007
4 CENTERLINE® 2100 Motor Control Centers Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Figure 2 Example of 15” Deep MCC
15 "
7 "
Ground Bus
(Top Option*)
Ground Bus
(Bottom Option*)
Top Wireway
Phase 1 Power Bus
Phase 2 Power Bus
Phase 3 Power Bus
Bottom Mounted
Neutral (Optional)
Top Mounted
Neutral (Optional)
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
Bottom Wireway
Bottom Horizontal
Wireway Cover
* Ground bus is required. The ground bus can be in the bottom, top or bottom and top.
Top
Horizontal
Wireway
Cover
A - Use a 1/4-20 hex head thread forming screw
B - Use a 1/4-20 x5/8 hex screw and secure with a
1/4-20 steel nut
Refer to Torque Requirements on page 15
Publication 2100-IN010D-EN-P—February 2007
CENTERLINE
®
2100 Motor Control Centers Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections 5 Figure 3 Example of 20” Deep MCCs
12 "
20 "
Ground Bus
(Top Option*)
Ground Bus
(Bottom Option*)
Top Wireway with
closing plate Top Wireway
Phase 1 Power Bus
Phase 2 Power Bus
Phase 3 Power Bus
Bottom Mounted
Neutral (Optional)
Top Mounted
Neutral (Optional)
A
A
B
A
A
A
A
Bottom WirewayBottom Wireway
with closing plate
Bottom Horizontal
Wireway Cover
20” MCC with
Bumped Back Bus
12 "
20 "
Ground Bus
(Top Option*)
Ground Bus
(Bottom Option*)
Top Wireway with
closing plate Top Wireway
Phase 1 Power Bus
Phase 2 Power Bus
Phase 3 Power Bus
Bottom Mounted
Neutral (Optional)
Top Mounted
Neutral (Optional)
A
A
B
A
A
A
A
Bottom WirewayBottom Wireway
with closing plate
20” MCC with
Standard Bus
Top
Horizontal
Wireway
Cover
* Ground bus is required. The ground bus can be in the bottom, top or bottom and top.
Top
Horizontal
Wireway
Cover
A - Use a 1/4-20 hex head thread forming screw
B - Use a 1/4-20 x5/8 hex screw and secure with a
1/4-20 steel nut
Refer to Torque Requirements on page 15
Bottom Horizontal
Wireway Cover
□
0 '
Publication 2100-IN010D-EN-P—February 2007
6 CENTERLINE® 2100 Motor Control Centers Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections NEMA 3R and 4
1. Remove 3R/4 side sheet from end of section, being spliced, if present (3R End Closing Plate). See Figure 5.
Figure 4 NEMA 3R/4 Without Side Sheet.
2. Mount cabinet spacer (supplied with Splice Kit) to right hand shipping block, using 1/4 - 20 X 3/4” thread-forming screws. (Pass thread- forming screws through large hole in cabinet spacer and bolt to cabinet.) See Figure 4 and Figure 5. Refer to Torque Requirements on page 15.
Holes to Tie Cabinet
Front Together
Holes to Tie Cabinet
Front Together
Holes to Tie
Cabinet Front
Together
Holes to Tie
Cabinet Front
Together
Holes to Mount Cabinet Spacer
Holes to Mount Cabinet Spacer
00 00
00 00
00 00
00 00
Publication 2100-IN010D-EN-P—February 2007
CENTERLINE
®
2100 Motor Control Centers Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections 7 Figure 5 NEMA 3R/4
3. Remove drip hood angle from shipping block being spliced. See Figure
5. 4. Install gasket (supplied with splice kit) on back plate and top plate (If not present on cabinet.). See Figure 5.
Wireway Extension
Drip Hood Angle Cabinet
Spacer Gasket
Left Hand
Shipping Block
Right Hand
Shipping Block
Gasket to be
installed in the
field
Cabinet Spacer
Wireway
Extension
Front View
Top View
Side Sheet
Side Sheet
fJ -ill til
b
~ ~ ~
lg
I
" w----------===,-i
v
v
r
I
l y l,..______
Publication 2100-IN010D-EN-P—February 2007
8 CENTERLINE® 2100 Motor Control Centers Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections
5. Slide sections together making sure cabinets are level and cabinet spacers and holes in front flange lines-up with adjacent holes. See Figure
5. 6. Install 1/4-20 X 3/4” thread-forming screws through left hand shipping block side plate into cabinet spacer. These can be accessed through the top and bottom horizontal wireways. Refer to Torque Requirements on page 15.
NOTE: Make sure cabinets are level and pushed tight together. Do not use hardware to draw sections together.
7. Install (6) 1/4-20 X 3/4” thread-forming screws in the front flange to secure sections together. (Screws must be installed from the left shipping block through into the right block.) This area can be accessed by opening the NEMA 3R/4 doors. See Figure 4. Refer to Torque Requirements on page 15.
8. Replace the drip hood angle removed in Step 3. Make sure hardware is placed through the drip angle and clearance hole in top plate before threading into adjacent top plate. Refer to Torque Requirements on page 15.
9. Install Wireway extensions. From top and bottom wireway in right hand shipping block, insert extension through wireway opening and hook lip on wireway opening of left hand section. Install 1/4-20 X 1/2” thread-forming screw in wireway extension to secure to wireway opening in right hand section. (This does not bolt into the cabinet, but is clamped onto the wireway opening.) See Figure 5.
Splicing MCCs A main horizontal bus splice kit must be added between the horizontal bus work of the MCCs. In addition, the neutral bus splice kit, if required, and the ground bus splice kit must be installed to complete the splicing operation.
Refer to Splicing Procedures for instructions.
To gain access to the horizontal bus, remove the plug-in units in front of the horizontal bus in the first vertical section of the right center.
Publication 2100-IN010D-EN-P—February 2007
CENTERLINE® 2100 Motor Control Centers Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections 9 Plug-In Unit Removal
To complete plug-in unit removal refer to publication, 2100-IN007x-EN-P , Installing Units with Horizontal Operating Handles and publication 2100-IN014x-EN-P , Installing Units with Vertical Operating Handles.
The following is an overview of the removal process for a plug-in unit:
1. Open unit door by turning door latch a quarter turn. Door removal is not necessary when removing a unit; however, if door removal is desired, follow steps a-d below. Step b may be required even if the door is not removed.
a. Open the door completely.
b. If present, remove control station housing by loosening the two (2) captive screws located at the top and bottom of the control station housing on the front of the unit door.
c. Remove hinge pins by sliding up with screwdriver.
d. Swing door to near closed position and lift off.
2. Loosen the screw type latches located at the front of the unit. Most units have one (1) at the top and one (1) at the bottom, but units two space factors and larger have two (2) at the top.
3. Detach necessary wiring from unit.
4. Place wire/terminal block in line with wiring clearance tunnel at lower right of unit. Pull unit forward to unplug from bus, using the upper right latch assembly and the lower left tab handle.
5. Remove the unit support pan. Refer to Figure 6.
a. Using a screwdriver, pry the plastic retaining clip from the right side of the support pan. It is visible in the vertical wireway. b. Lift right side of pan approximately four (4) inches. c. Pull right side of pan forward to release from left rear slot. d. Push back on left side of pan until it is free.
Publication 2100-IN010D-EN-P—February 2007
10 CENTERLINE® 2100 Motor Control Centers Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Figure 6 Removal of Support Pan
Splicing Procedures 1. Remove the horizontal bus splice access cover to expose the horizontal bus splicing. See Figure 7.
Figure 7 Bus Splice Access Cover
Bus Splice Access Cover RemovedBus Splice Access Cover In Place Publication 2100-IN010D-EN-P—February 2007
CENTERLINE® 2100 Motor Control Centers Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections 11
2. Assemble splice bars to the bus work of the vertical sections as shown in figure 8 - 13. If additional access to the splice is desired, loosen the fastening screws and remove the bus access plate located in the vertical wireway of the center (to the left of the splice). The horizontal bus now is exposed to the left and right of the splice for added convenience. The splicing kit will contain either two or four sets of hardware per splice bar, depending on the current rating of the horizontal bus.
3. See Table A on page -14 for bus dimensions and mounting holes.
4. Tighten to torque specifications as listed in the Torque Requirements on page -15 or tighten until the conical spring washer is flattened on the one-piece nut and washer assembly. Do not grease or lubricate the hardware.
5. Replace covers and plates and check all bolts and nuts for tightness.
Replace units in their respective stations.
Figure 8 600 - 1200 Amp Main Horizontal (and Neutral) Bus Splicing Detail and Configuration Example
One-piece assembly of
nut and conical spring
washer
Two Hole Main
Horizontal Splice
Front Flat Washers
Main Horizontal Bus
or Neutral Bus
Bus Clamps
Main Horizontal Bus
or Neutral Bus
Refer to Table A for bus size and thickness.
Splice Kit Configuration Example (Top View - 2 Sections) 1-r-1
Publication 2100-IN010D-EN-P—February 2007
12 CENTERLINE® 2100 Motor Control Centers Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Figure 9 1600 - 3000 Amp Horizontal (and Neutral) Bus Splicing Detail and Configuration Example
Figure 10 2000 Amp Main Breaker and 1600 Amp Horizontal Bus Splicing Detail and Configuration Example
One-piece assembly of
nut and conical spring
washer
Four Hole Main
Horizontal Splice
Bus Clamps
Front
Flat Washers
Main Horizontal Bus or
Neutral Bus
Four Hole Main Horizontal Splice
Refer to Table A for bus size and thickness.
Splice Kit Configuration Example (Top View - 2 Sections) 2000A Main Horizontal
Bus or Neutral Bus
One-piece assembly of
nut and conical spring
washer
Main Horizontal Splice
Main Horizontal Splice
Bus Clamps
Splice Spacer Bar
Front
1600A Main Horizontal
Bus or Neutral Bus
Flat Washers
Refer to Table A for bus size and thickness.
Splice Kit Configuration Example
(Top View - 2 Sections)
Publication 2100-IN010D-EN-P—February 2007
CENTERLINE® 2100 Motor Control Centers Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections 13 Figure 11 Offset “Z” 600 - 1200 Amp Bus Spli cing Detail and Configuration Example Figure 12 Offset “Z” 1600 - 3000 Amp Bus Splicing Detail and Configuration Example
Refer to Table A for bus size and thickness.
Refer to Table A for bus size and thickness.
Splice Kit Configuration Example (Top View - 3 Sections) Splice Kit Configuration Example (Top View - 3 Sections) Horizontal Bus or
Neutral Bus (5" deeper)
One-piece assembly of n
and conical spring washe
~
!:)
✓
@)~ / 0
Fr~ ~ / 0 /
@)!:)~~
Flat Washers
' ,_____I J._____-i....___________l
One-piece assembly of n
and conical spring washe
~ ~®//
~ l2l f;;i
f;;i
Horizontal Bus or
Neutral Bus (5" deeper)
✓
Main Horizontal Splice
'
Horizontal Bus or
Neutral Bus (standard location)
Main Horizontal Splice
'
Horizontal Bus or
~
Fr~~~ /
~<®';:
.....___ Neutral Bus (standard location)
Main Horizontal Splice
(used only for 2500 - 3000 A
Flat Washers configurations)
' ._____I J._____-f....___________l
Publication 2100-IN010D-EN-P—February 2007
14 CENTERLINE® 2100 Motor Control Centers Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Figure 13 Insulated “Z” 600 - 1200 Amp Bu s Splicing Detail and Configuration Example
Table A Bus and Splice Bar Dimensions
Main Horizontal Bus or
Neutral Bus (5” Deeper)
Main Horizontal Splice or Neutral
Bus (standard location)
Main Horizontal Splice
Front
Bus Clamps
Refer to Table A for bus size and thickness.
Insulated
One-piece assembly of
nut and conical spring
washer
Flat Washers
Splice Kit Configuration Example
(Top View - 3 Sections)
STANDARD NEMA 1, 1G, 12 & 3R SPLICE BAR INFORMATION
AMP MATERIAL QTY THICKNESS WIDTH SPLICE MTG. HOLES
600
Copper/Tin 1 .125”
3”
2Copper/Silver 1 .125”
Aluminum/Tin 1 .125” 4”
800
Copper/Tin 1 .125”
4” 2Copper/Silver 1 .125”
Aluminum/Tin 1 .1875”
1200
Copper/Tin 1 .250”
4” 2
Copper/Silver 1 .250”
1600
Copper/Tin 2 .250”
4” 4
Copper/Silver 2 .250”
2000
Copper/Tin 1 .250”
4” 4
1 .375”
Copper/Silver 1 .250”
4” 4
1 .375”
2500/
3000
Copper/Tin 2 .375”
4” 4
Copper/Silver 2 .375”
\
Publication 2100-IN010D-EN-P—February 2007
CENTERLINE® 2100 Motor Control Centers Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections 15 Table B Conversions
Torque Specifications and
Table
Tighten all bus connections with a torque wrench and socket according to intervals established by your maintenance policy. If a torque wrench is not available, tighten until conical spring washer is flat. Do not grease or lubricate the hardware.
Table C Torque Requirements
“Z” SPLICE BAR
(Used to Splice Standard Depth Bus to Bus 5” Deeper)
Note: 600-1200 AMP Bus is the same thickness as a standard Splice Bar AMP MATERIAL QTY THICKNESS WIDTH SPLICE MTG. HOLES
1600
Copper/Tin 1 .500”
4” 4
Copper/Silver 1 .500”
2000
Copper/Tin 1 .625”
4” 4
Copper/Silver 1 .625”
DECIMAL FRACTION MILLIMETE R DECIMAL FRACTION MILLIMETER .125” 1/8” 3.175 .375” 3/8” 9.525
.250 1/4” 6.350 .625” 5/8” 15.875
.500” 1/2” 12.700 3” 3” 76.200
.1875” 3/16” 4.763 4” 4” 101.600
Description Torque in Ft./Lb.
Lug attachment bolts
1/2-13 Hardware
45 lb.-ft. ± 5 lb.-ft.
61 N-m ± 6 N-m
Horizontal to vertical bus connection
3/8-16 Hardware
28 lb.-ft. ± 4 lb.-ft.
38 N-m ± 5 N-m
Horizontal splice connection
3/8-16 Hardware
28 lb.-ft. ± 4lb.-ft.
38 N-m ± 5 N-m
Connecting Hardware
1/4-20 Hardware
55 lb.-in. ± 3lb.-in.
6.2 N-m ± 0.6 N-m
10-32 Hardware
32 lb.-in. ± 3lb.-in.
3.6 N-m ± 0.4 N-m
Publication 2100-IN010D-EN-P—February 2007 6
Supersedes Publication 2100-IN010C-EN-P— September 2006 © 2007 Rockwell International Corporation. Printed in the U.S.A. www.rockwellautomation.com
Power, Control and Information Solutions Headquarters
Americas: Rockwell Automation , 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204-2496 USA, Tel: (1) 414.382.2000, Fax: (1) 414.382.4444 Europe/Middle East/Africa: Rockwell Automation , Vorstlaan/Boulevard du Souverain 36, 1170 Brussels, Belgium , Tel: (32) 2 663 0600, Fax: (32) 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific: Rockwell Automation , Level 14, Core F, Cyberport 3, 100 Cyberport Road, Hong Kong, Tel: (852) 2887 4788, Fax: (852) 2508 1846 CENTERLINE 2100 Low Voltage Motor Control Centers
Bulletin Numbers 2100
Installation Instructions
Original Instructions
Gi) Allen-Bradley
Rockwell
~ Allen-Bradley • Rockwell Software Automation
Important User Information
Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and operation of this equipment before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws, and standards.
Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are required to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.
If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc., is prohibited
Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.
Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.
WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.
IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures.
ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 3 Summary of Changes
This manual contains new and updated information as indicated in the following table.
Topic Page
Added instructions to install a fixed-mount 24V DC two-branch redundant power unit.
64 Added instructions to remove a circuit breaker in a vertical handle unit. 113 Added instructions to remove a circuit breaker in horizontal handle and space saving units.
119
4 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Summary of Changes
Notes:
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 5 Table of Contents
Summary of Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 About This Publication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Purchased Components and Additional Instruction Sheets . . . . . . . 10 Chapter 1
General Information Nameplate Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 MCC Sequence Numbering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 UL/CSA Marking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Short-circuit Rating Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 ArcShield Rating Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Series Number and Series ID as Manufactured in the
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Series Lettering - Units and Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Receiving, Handling, and Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Receiving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Storage and Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Chapter 2
Installation Procedures Location Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Height Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 ArcShield Clearance Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Securing an MCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Seismic Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Joining and Splicing New MCCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Joining and Splicing Existing MCCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Joining and Splicing MCCs with ArcShield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Installing and Joining Pull Boxes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Joining and Splicing NEMA Type 12 MCCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Joining and Splicing NEMA Type 3R and Type 4 MCCs . . . . . . . . . 40 Bus Torque Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 6 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Table of Contents
Chapter 3
Installing Conduit and Cable Installing Conduit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Bottom Entry Conduit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Top Entry Conduit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Installing Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Incoming Line Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Main Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Cable Bracing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Incoming Line Brace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Chapter 4
Installing and Removing Plug-in
Units
Installing Plug-in Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Remove a SecureConnect Unit from a Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Remove a Plug-in Unit with a Vertical Operating Handle
from a Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Remove a Plug-in Unit with a Horizontal Operating
Handle from a Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Remove the Support Pan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Install Fixed-mount 24V DC Two-branch Redundant
Power Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Chapter 5
Arc Flash Protection Marking as
Required by the National
Electrical Code
Flash Protection Marking Requirement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 110.16 Flash Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Arc Flash Marking Clarification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Rockwell Automation Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Chapter 6
Operator Handle and Unit
Interlock
Defeating the Unit Door Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Open the Door When Operating Handle Is in the
ON/I Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Defeating the Unit Interlock Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Energize a Unit with the Unit Door Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Locking Provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Lock Vertical Operating Handles in the OFF/O Position . . . . . 72 Lock Horizontal Operating Handles in the OFF/O Position . . 73 Lock Units with Operating Handles in the ON/I Position . . . . 73 Unit Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 7 Table of Contents
Chapter 7
Final Checklist Before Energizing Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Pre-energizing Check Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Perform the Pre-energizing Check Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Door Latch Position Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 ArcShield Components Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 SecureConnect Unit Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Required Minimum Electrical Spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Chapter 8
Energizing the Equipment Energize the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Chapter 9
Maintenance Maintain the MCC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Disconnect Switch and Contact Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Use Thermal Infrared or Other Temperature Measurement
Techniques for Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Inspect the Units for Signs of Overheating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Chapter 10
Maintenance after Fault
Condition
Maintain the MCC after a Fault Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Chapter 11
Renewal Parts Order Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Chapter 12
Parts Illustrations Typical Section Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Typical Construction of a Unit with a Vertical
Operating Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Typical Construction of a Half Space Factor Unit with
a Horizontal Operating Handle and Door Mounted
Pilot Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Typical Construction of a Unit with a Horizontal
Operating Handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 8 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Table of Contents
Appendix A
Bulletin 140G Unit Assembly
Instructions
Vertical Handle Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Remove Circuit Breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Install Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 Verify Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Adjust Circuit Breaker Position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Horizontal Handle and Space Saving Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Remove Circuit Breaker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Install Circuit Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Verify Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Adjust the Circuit Breaker Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Appendix B
Auxiliary Contact Adapters Install External Auxiliary Contact Adapter on G, H, and J Frame Horizontal Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 Install the Auxiliary Contact Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Install External Auxiliary Contact Adapter on G, H, J,
and K Frame Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Install External Auxiliary Contact Adapter on M and
N Frame Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Required Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Install the Auxiliary Contact Adapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 9 Preface
About This Publication This manual provides detailed installation instructions for installing, using the operator handle, energizing, and maintaining your CENTERLINE® 2100 Motor Control Center.
This manual is intended for engineers or technicians directly involved in the installation, connection, energizing, and maintenance of the CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Center.
If you do not have a basic understanding of the CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Center, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative for information on available training courses.
Additional Resources These documents contain additional information concerning related products from Rockwell Automation.
Resource Description
CENTERLINE 2100 MCC Instantaneous Trip Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) in Combination NEMA Starter, Soft Starter (SMC), and Variable Frequency AC Drive Units Technical Data, publication 2100-TD001
Provides information on using motor circuit protectors in a motor control center.
CENTERLINE 2100 MCC Inverse Time Circuit Breakers in Combination NEMA Starter, Soft Starter (SMC), and Variable Frequency AC Drive Units Technical Data, publication 2100-TD002
Provides information and specifications for circuit breaker use in motor control centers.
CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Power Fuses Product Data, publication 2100-TD003 Provides information and specifications for fuse use in motor control centers.
DeviceNet Motor Control Centers (MCC) Technical Data, publication 2100-TD019 Provides information for motor control centers using a DeviceNet network.
CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers with EtherNet/IP , publication 2100-TD031 Provides information for motor control centers using an EtherNet/IP network.
Arc-Flash Resistant Low Voltage Motor Control Center Designs White Paper, publication 2100-AP003
Provides information about arc-resistant motor control centers.
Power Factor Correction Capacitors for Bulletin 2100 MCC Starter Units Application Techniques, publication 2100-AT001
Provides information about the use of power factor correction capacitors.
CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Joining and Splicing Vertical Sections Instructions, publication 2100-IN010
Provides information for joining and splicing vertical sections.
CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers (MCC) Units with Vertical Operating Handles Installation Instructions, publication 2100-IN014
Provides information on installing vertical handle units.
CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers NEMA Type 12 Sealing Instructions, publication 2100-IN037
Provides information on sealing motor control centers to NEMA Type 12 specifications.
Receiving, Handling, and Storing Motor Control Centers Instructions, publication 2100-IN040
Provides information on how to receive, handle, and store motor control centers.
CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Center End Closing Plates Installation Instructions, publication 2100-IN069
Provides instructions for installing end closing plates.
CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Center (MCC) Units with Horizontal Operating Handles Installation Instructions, publication 2100-IN060
Provides information to install units with horizontal operating handles.
CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimensions Reference, publication 2100-4.2
Provides dimension drawings for lug compartments, main fusible disconnects, main circuit breakers, and conduit entry.
CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Installing a Pull Box on a Bulletin 2100 Vertical Section Installation Instructions, publication 2100-5.28
Provides instructions on installing a Pull Box on a motor control center. 10 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Preface
Y ou can view or download publications at
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/literature-library/overview.page.
T o order paper copies of technical documentation, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative.
The documents in the following table are referenced in this document and can be obtained from their respective organizations.
Purchased Components and
Additional Instruction Sheets
When equipment such as transformers, metering, programmable controllers, or drives are supplied with the motor control center (MCC), specific publications are shipped with the units. Read and understand these documents before installing and operating the MCC.
Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation, and Maintenance of Solid-state Control Installation Instructions, publication SGI-1.1
Provides safety guidelines for the application, installation, and maintenance of solid- state control.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1 Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system.
Product Certifications website, http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/ certification/overview.page
Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other certification details.
Resource Description
Resource Website
National Electrical Manufacturer’ s Association (NEMA)
• NEMA ICS 1-2000 Industrial Control and Systems: General Requirements • NEMA ICS 2.3-1995, Instructions for Handling, Operation and Maintenance of Motor Control Centers Rated Not More Than 600V
http://www.nema.org
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
• NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
• NFPA 70A - Recommended Practice fo r Electrical Equipment Maintenance • NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace http://www.nfpa.org
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) IEEE standard C37.20.7 - IEEE Guide for Testing Metal-Enclosed Switchgear Rated Up to 38 kV for Internal Arcing Faults
http://www.ieee.org
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 11 Chapter 1
General Information
Allen-Bradley® CENTERLINE® Motor Control Centers (MCCs) consist of one or more vertical sections containing electromagnetic or solid state control devices that are prewired and tested within modular (plug-in) or frame mounted (hard-wired) units.
These are the standard dimensions for CENTERLINE MCCs:
•S t a n d a r d w i d t h s
– 20 in. (508 mm)
– 25 in. (635 mm)
– 30 in. (762 mm)
– 35 in. (789 mm)
– and 40 in. (1016 mm)
• Standard front-mounted depths
– 15 in. (381 mm)
– 20 in. (508 mm)
• Standard back-to-back mounted depths
– 30 in. (762 mm)
– 40 in. (1016 mm)
•S t a n d a r d h e i g h t
– 90 in. (2286 mm)
– 70.5 in. (1791 mm)
All MCC sections are supplied with top and bottom horizontal wireways.
Sections that are designed to accommodate plug-in units include a vertical wireway. Each 90 in. (2286 mm) vertical section can accommodate up to 6.0 space factors or 78 in. (1981 mm) for units.
Units (buckets) are designed in increments of 0.5 space factors. Each 0.5 space factor is approximately 6.5 in. (165.1 mm) high. Units are designed as either removable (plug-in) or frame-mounted (non-plug-in).
Individual units house a wide variety of power and logic devices. Plug-in units are mounted on unit support pans within the section. Stab assemblies on the back of the unit plug onto the vertical bus. A mechanical interlock prevents the unit door from being opened when the disconnect is not in the OFF position.
An additional mechanical interlock prevents the unit from being plugged-in or unplugged when the disconnect is not in the OFF position. 12 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 1 General Information
Line power is distributed throughout the MCC via an isolated bus work structure. The main horizontal bus is in the center of each section. Standard, center-fed, 300 A rated vertical bus supplies power to the individual units above and below the horizontal bus for an effective 600 A capacity, providing virtually unrestricted unit arrangement. An optional 600 A vertical bus provides 1200 A effective rating.
The CENTERLINE MCC is also available with an ArcShield™ rating. The ArcShield rating includes arc-resistant features that are intended to help provide enhanced protection to you during internal arcing faults (when compared to MCCs that are designed only to meet UL 845 requirements).
Arcing faults can be caused, for example, by accidental touching, closing into faulted lines, or loose connections. Depending on the application, MCCs with the ArcShield rating can provide up to T ype 2 accessibility per IEEE standard C37.20.7, which helps protect you when you are at the front, sides, and rear of the enclosure in the unlikely event of an arcing fault.
A label on the MCC with the ArcShield rating provides information in regard to the accessibility level and arc fault ratings.
For more information about accessibility levels, performance, and testing requirements, refer to IEEE standard C37.20.7, IEEE Guide for T esting Metal- Enclosed Switchgear Rated up to 38 kV for Internal Arcing Faults.
MCCs with the ArcShield rating provide a reinforced structure and arc- containment latches on all doors. T o help protect you during an arc-fault, arc- containment latches, when closed and latched properly, provide pressure relief and help keep the doors from unlatching or detaching from the structure.
Nameplate Data Each MCC section has a nameplate on the enclosure or vertical wireway door.
The nameplate includes the following information:
• Catalog number/serial number
• Series letter of section
• Bus bar voltage and current rating
•S e c t i o n n u m b e r
• UL and cUL certification marking
• UL registration number
•E n c l o s u r e t y p e
Figure 1 - Section Nameplate
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 13 General Information Chapter 1
Section Number
UL and cUL Certification Marking
Catalog Number/Serial Number
Series Letter of Section
Bus Bar Voltage and
Current Rating
UL Registration Number
Enclosure Type
14 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 1 General Information
Each plug-in and frame mounted unit also has an identification label. The unit label is on the interior of the bottom plate of plug-in units or on the interior right-hand side plate of the frame mounted units. The unit label for each plug- in or frame mounted unit includes the following information:
• Catalog number/serial number
• Series letter of the unit
• V oltage rating
•U n i t l o c a t i o n
• UL and cUL certification marking
• Device type and size
Figure 2 - Unit Label
The catalog number or serial number and series letter are required to properly identify the equipment to sales or factory personnel.
MCC Sequence Numbering CENTERLINE MCCs are designed so functionality is not affected by the section installation order, for example, vertical section-numbering sequence order.
All MCC sections carry a serial plate that identifies vertical section sequence numbering. For example, MCC section 1 of 1, 1 of 5, and so on.
Figure 3 - Section Nameplate
cUL Certification Marking
Catalog Number / Serial Number Unit Location
Device Type and Size Voltage Rating
Series Letter of Unit
Identifies Vertical Section
Sequence Numbering
AB 2113B-BAB- 4G-22-4040CA U
CAT:
SERIAL NO:
DESCRIPTION:
RATING:
PLANT:
MANUFACTURED ON:
Allen-Bradley PRODUCT OF:
WIRING DIAGRAM,
# _______ _
ELEMENT LIST,
# _______ _
IF CENTRALIZED DRAWINGS REQUESTED,
DRAWINGS ARE LOCATED BEHIND THE
MARKED HORIZONTAL WIREWAY COVER.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 15 General Information Chapter 1
Sections are numbered to match factory-supplied MCC elevation drawings.
Numbering each section helps installers and users easily identify MCCs, sections, and units. If there are questions about section numbering during field installation, inspection, or operation, the following information can provide guidance on equipment acceptability, listing, and certification.
CENTERLINE MCC sections can be installed or added as follows:
•I n n o n - s e q u e n t i a l o r d e r
• Addition of a single section (add-on section)
• Addition of multiple sections (add-on lineup of sections) • Addition of single section or multiple section between MCC sections If sections are added to an existing lineup and not installed in sequential order, the installation is not considered a misapplication or in conflict with Underwriter Laboratories (UL) listing and Canadian Standards Association (CSA) certification.
The paramount criteria for additions of sections to existing MCCs is matching the horizontal bus electrical and ingress protection (enclosure type) ratings for the total MCC line up. For example, the voltage, current rating, short circuit withstand, and NEMA enclosure type (IP rating) for all sections must match.
Non-sequential numbering cannot create a functional or listing/certification issue. However, install MCCs sin sequential order. Installing MCCs in sequential order helps ensure proper installation and ensures that factory- supplied documentation matches the equipment.
Y ou can rearrange MCC sections. However, if a section that uses a right-hand side sheet with integral, internal mounting flanges is on the outside of a lineup, an additional closing kit plate is required. Refer to CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Center End Closing Plates Installation Instructions, publication 2100-IN069
. MCCs that contain arc resistant features cannot use
a section with integral mounting flanges on the outside of a lineup.
UL/CSA Marking CENTERLINE MCCs are listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. (UL), Standard for Safety UL 845, and certified by the Canadian Standards Associate (CSA), Standard C22-2, No. 14.
Due to standards harmonization, an MCC can also carry the cUL designation.
The cUL designation is comparable to CSA certification.
V ertical sections and units are labeled independently. It is possible to have combinations of labeled and non-labeled sections and units in the same MCC. 16 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 1 General Information
V ertical sections and structure options that are UL listed and CSA/cUL certified are marked accordingly. All components in a UL or CSA listed section must be UL listed and cUL/CSA certified. The UL and/or CSA/cUL designation is an integral part of the section nameplate as shown on page 14.
Units and unit options that are UL listed and CSA/cUL certified are marked accordingly. All options and components in a UL and/or cUL/CSA listed unit must be UL listed or recognized and/or cUL/CSA certified. The UL designation is on the interior of the bottom plate of plug-in units or on the interior right-hand side plate of frame mounted units.
Figure 4 - UL Label Designation for Units
Short-circuit Rating Label MCC vertical sections that are UL listed and/or CSA/cUL certified carry a short-circuit rating label. The short-circuit rating label for a vertical section is on the inside of the vertical wireway door of standard sections or on the interior right-hand side plate of a section that contains a unit that occupies the full section and does not contain a vertical wireway.
Figure 5 - Short Circuit Label for Sections
MCC units that are UL listed and/or CSA/cUL certified carry a short-circuit rating label on the bottom plate of plug-in units or on interior right-hand side plate of frame mounted units.
Figure 6 - Short Circuit Label for Units
UNDERWRITERS
LABORATORIES
LISTED INC.
MOTOR CONTR OL CENTER UNIT
NO. R-3959 16
~ PLANT~ Allen-Bradley
SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING
65,000 AMPERES
RMS SYMMETRICAL 600 VOL TS MAXIMUM.
DO NOT INSTA LL ON CIRCUITS WITH
A.VAILABLE SHORT-CIRCUIT CURRENTS
GREATER THAN THE ABOVE RATING
OF ANY INSTAL LED UNIT .
Al/en-Bradley
UNIT SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING
100,000 RMS SYMMETRICAL AMPERES,
480 VOL TS MAXIMUM
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 17 General Information Chapter 1
ArcShield Rating Labels MCC units that have the arc resistant rating carry a rating label on the vertical wireway door. This label serves as the arc resistant nameplate and provides information on the arc resistant rating. There are labels on other parts that need to be in place before operating an arc resistant MCC.
Figure 7 - ArcShield Labels
Series Number and Series ID
as Manufactured in the
United States
ARC RESISTANT EQUIPMENT
ACCESSIBILITY: TYPE 2
ARC SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT: ≤ 65 kA
ARC DURATION: DEVICE LIMITED
PROTECTIVE DEVICE:
UL LISTED FUSES
CLASS L – ANY FUSE ≤ 1200 A
CLASS R – ANY FUSE ≤ 600 A
CLASS J – ANY FUSE ≤ 600 A
UL LISTED MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
ALLEN-BRADLEY – BULLETIN 140U, FRAME I, JD, or K
CUTLER-HAMMER – SERIES C, FRAME F, J, K, L, M, or N
SQUARE D - POWERPACT FRAME M (480V AC ONLY)
WARNING
PER IEEE C37.20.7 2007
ARC FLASH HAZARD
THE ARC CONTAINMENT CAPABILITY OF THE MOTOR
CONTROL CENTER IS DEPENDENT UPON THE MAIN
PROTECTIVE DEVICE. PROTECT ONLY WITH UL LISTED
PROTECTIVE DEVICE SPECIFIED ABOVE.
DOORS AND COVERS MUST BE PROPERLY CLOSED,
LATCHED, AND SECURED. EQUIPMENT MUST BE INSTALLED
PER MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.
REFER TO PUBLICATION 2100-IN012.
EQUIPMENT WILL NOT FUNCTION AS ARC RESISTANT IF
ABOVE GUIDELINES ARE NOT FOLLOWED.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE GUIDELINES COULD RESULT IN
SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH.
PN-240698
ALLEN-BRADLEY – BULLETIN 140G, FRAME G, H, J, K, M, or N NOTE: 140G-N MUST HAVE INSTANTANEOUS TRIP FUNCTION
ON AND SET NO HIGHER THAN 12,000A
100 ms Arc Duration Device Limited Rating
ATTENTION: Read tables 1 through 4 before adding new sections or units to an existing CENTERLINE MCC.
Table 1 - Sections
Series
Letter
Scope Description of Change Date Implemented in
the U.S.
A (1) — Original design February 1971
B (1) All Changed terminal blocks November 1976
C(1) All Elimination of external mounting channels June 1979 D(1) All Reverse fed 2192 and 2193 April 1981
E(1) All Redesign gasketing October 1982
F (1) All Modified top horizontal wireway pan to accept units with handle interlock in topmost space factor October 1983 G (1) 42K 42 k bracing-incorporates new bus support and cover January 1985 G(1) 65K 65 k bracing-incorporates new bus support and cover July 1985 H All New hinge design January 1986
J All Changed handle, operating mechanism, and circuit breaker to Cutler-Hammer series C, 150 A, 250 A, 400 A frame October 1986 K All Changed to new unit grounding system May 1990
L All Changed to new 600…1200 A circuit breaker operating mechanism February 1996
ARC RESISTANT EQUIPMENT
PER IEEEC3 7.20.7-2007
ACCESSIBILITY : TYPE 2
ARC SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT: s 65 kA
ARC DURATION: s 100 ms
OPERATIONAL VOLTAGE: s 480 V
AWARNING
ARC FLASH HAZARD
DOORS AND COVERS MUST BE PROPERLY
-
CLOSED, LATCHED , ANO SECURED .
EQUIPMENT MUST BE INSTALLED PER
MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS. REFER TO
PUBLICATION 2100-IN012 .
ONLY INSTALL ArcShleld 100ms / 480V / 65kA
RA TED UNITS IN THIS STRUCTURE .
EQUIPMENT WILL NOT FUNCTION AS
ARC RESISTANT IF ABOVE GUIOLINES
ARE NOT FOLLOWED .
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE GUIDELINES COULD
RESULT IN SEVERE INJURY OR OEATH.
41006-402-0 1 {1)
18 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 1 General Information
M All Changed to serpentine DeviceNet cabling system May 2001 N All New design for 100,000 A bus bracing and begin use of ri ght-hand sidesheet with integral mounting flanges. May 2009 P All New design for bus covers February 2012
(1) Replacement and renewal parts are no longer supported. For more information, contact Rockwell Automation LV MCC Technical Support at 1.440.646.5800 and follow the prompts to Allen-Bradley > Low Voltage Motor Control Centers > Post Shipment Support.
Table 1 - Sections
Series
Letter
Scope Description of Change Date Implemented in
the U.S.
Table 2 - 2100 Units
Series
Letter
Scope Description of Change Date Implemented in
U.S.
A
(1) — Original design February 1971
B (1) All sizes Changed terminal blocks November 1976
C (1) All sizes Changed handle mechanism to Cutler-Hammer MCPs June 1979 D(1) Size 5 Changed from ITE to Allen-Bradley 400A disconnect April 1981 E (1) All sizes Changed from Bulletin 709 series K st arters to Bulletin 500 line starters April 1981 F(1) All sizes Redesign of gasketing, wraparound and unit support pan for Bulletin 700 line October 1982 G(1) All sizes Redesign of gasketing, wraparound and unit support pan for Bulletin 500 line October 1982 H (1) All sizes Changed to new door, circuit breaker mechanism and control station April 1984 J (1) Size 5 Changed to Bulletin 500 series L October 1984 Size 3 Changed to new PCP 100A disconnect December 1988 Size 6 Changed to Bulletin 500 series B starters October 1988 K Size 1-5 CB units
and size 1-2 disc
units
Changed handle, operating mechanism and circuit breaker to Cutler-Hammer series C, 150 A, 250 A, 400 A frame
October 1986
L 21A through 54A Changed to Bulletin 100 line contactors in 21 A, 30 A, 45 A SMC units and original design 24 A, 35 A, 54 A SMC units
November 1989
M All sizes Changed to new unit grounding system and 600 A, 800 A, 1200 A bolted pressure switch May 1990 N All sizes Changed to PCP 200 A and 400 A disconnect, dera ted vacuum Bulletin 2112 and 2113 and new pilot device offerings
January 1993
P0 . 5 S F C B u n i t s
2103L, 2113, 2193
External auxiliary on circuit breakers April 1994
Q All sizes and ratings New disconnect external auxiliary contacts and new 600 A…1200 A circuit breaker operating mechanism May 19 96 R SMC units Redesign and upgrade of ratings for 24 A…500 A SM C-2 and SMC-PLUS units. Original design of SMC Dialog Plus units
August 1997
1200A 2193 Redesign of 1200A, 2193F and 2193M units November 1997 800A 2193 Changed circuit breakers to MDL Frame November 1998 225A 2193F Changed circuit breakers from J Frame to F Frame October 1999 T 2000A 2193 Changed to flange mounted operating handle November 2000 All sizes Changed the Bulletin 800MR and Bulletin 800T -PS pilot devices to Bulletin 800Es November 2000 All 1.5 space factor
units
Changed unit bottom plate November 2000
U All except 2100-SD1 Changed to new Bulletin 1497 control circuit transformer July 2001 2100-SD1 Changed smoke detector head and base components November 2001 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 19 General Information Chapter 1
V 2162Q, 2163Q,
2164Q, 2165Q
Redesign of 240-480V PowerFlex® 70 and release of 600V PowerFlex 70 April 2002 2162R, 2163R,
2164R, 2165R
Original release of PowerFlex 700 July 2002
2154H, 2155H Original release of SMC™-3 November 2002
2154J, 2155J Original release of SMC Flex April 2004
2112, size 3, 4 and 5 Redesign to reduced space factor with Class J fuse clip April 2004 2162T , 2163T Original release of PowerFlex 40 September 2004 2107, 2113, size 3 Reduced space factor April 2005
X 2162Q, 2163Q Reduced space factor, changed CCT with integral fuses April 2005 All sizes 800F pilot devices August 2005
Y 2154J, 2155J, 108 A
and 135 A
Redesign to change units from frame mounted to plug-in March 2006 2164Q, 2164R,
2165Q, 2165R
(Drive with manual
bypass)
Redesign for change from SMP overload relay to E1Plus overload relay August 2006 2107, 2113, size 2
and 3
Redesign due to starter component series letter change December 2009 Z Changed to Bulletin 140G and 140MG circuit breakers. December 2013 (1) Replacement and renewal parts are no longer supported. For more information contact Rockwell Automation LV MCC Technical Sup port at 1.440.646.5800 and follow the prompts to Allen-Bradley > Low Voltage Motor Control Centers > Post Shipment Support.
Table 2 - 2100 Units
Series
Letter
Scope Description of Change Date Implemented in
U.S.
Table 3 - 2400 Units
Series
Letter
Scope Description of Change Date Implemented
in U.S.
A — Original design June 1990
B 18A, 24A, 30A Changed to series B, Bulletin 194R, 30 A disconnect March 1992 C 18A, 24A, 30A Changed to three Bulletin 800E pilot devices on 0.5 space factor units July 1992 D All sizes New disconnect external auxili ary contacts and new 600 A...1200 A circuit breaker operating mechanism February 1996 16A-85A Original design of units with a Bulletin 100-C contactor September 1999 20 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 1 General Information
Series Lettering - Units and
Sections
When using sections in conjunction with units of different series letters, consult the table below.
(
Table 4 - MCC Modifications for Unit and Structure Compatibility If Mounted in this
Type of
Section
(1),(2)
Plug-in Units No
Additional
Parts
Required
Requires
Style 1 Unit
Support Pan
Requires
Style 3 Unit
Support
Pan
Requires
Style 3 Unit
Support Pan
w/ Bushing
Requires
Alternate
Top
Horizontal
Wireway Pan
Requires
Door
Gasketing
Kit
Requires
Retrofit
Kit
(3)
Requires
Ground
Bus Kit
Space
Factor
Series — 2100H-UAJ1 2100H-
UA12100H-
UJ1
2100H-
USPA1
2100H-USPJ1
2100H-
NA4A1
2100H-NA4J1
2100H-
NA4A2
2100H-NA4J2
2100-GJ10 2100H-R1
2100H-R2
2100H-
GS1
NEMA Type 1 Series
A...D
(4) 1.0 or
larger
A-E
(4) — — ——— — —
F-L(4) — —— (5) —— —
M or
later
(6) — —— (5) ——
NEMA Type 1 Series
E...J
(4)
0.5(2) N or later — — — ——
1.0 or
larger
A-E
(4) —— ——— — (8)
F-L(4) — — ——— — —
M or later(6) — — — ——— —
NEMA Type 1 Series
K or later
0.5 (2) N or later — — ——— — —
1.0 or
larger
A-L
(4) —— ——— — (8)
M or later — — ——— — —
NEMA Type 1 w/
gasket or Type 12
Series A...D
1.0 or
larger
A-E
(4) — — ——— — —
F-L(4) — —— (5) ——
M or later — —— (5) —
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 21 General Information Chapter 1
NEMA Type 1 w/
gasket or Type 12
Series E...J
(7)
0.5(2) N or later — — — ——
1.0 or
larger
A-E
(4) —— ——— — (8)
F-L(4) — — ——— — —
M o r l a t e r — — — ——— —
NEMA Type 1 w/
gasket or Type 12
Series K or later
0.5 (2) N or later — — ——— — —
1.0 or
larger
A-L
(4) —— ——— — (8)
M or later — — ——— — —
(1) When installing unit in topmos t location in vertical sections, care must be taken to comply with the National Electric Code 6.7 ft (2000 mm) unit handle-to-floor height limitation. A unit operating handle extender (catalog number 2100-NE1) that provides 3 in. (76.2 mm) added height flexibility is available. (2) When CENTERLINE 2100, 0.5 space factor or Space Saving NEMA Starter plug-in units are ordered unassembled or ordered for existing sections, order a centralized wiring diagram holder kit (catalog number 2100H-WDH).
(3) Permits installation of 0.5 space factor or Space Saving NEMA Starter plug-in units in existing series E...J CENTERLINE 2100 vertical sections. (4) Replacement and renewal parts are no longer supported. Contact Rockwell Automation LV MCC Technical Support at 1.440.646.580 0 and follow the prompts to Allen-Bradley > Low Voltage Motor Control Centers > Post Shipment Support.
(5) Required only if series F or later, 1.0 space factor or larger CENTERLINE 2100 unit is installed in topmost location of series A...E vertical sections. (6) For more information regarding possible door hinge requiremen ts, contact Rockwell Automation LV MCC Technical Support at 1.440.646.5800 and follow the prompts to Allen-Bradley > Low Voltage Motor Control Centers > Post Shipment Support.
(7) Series E...J sections cannot accommodate 0.5 space factor or Sp ace Saving NEMA Starter plug-in units in bottom-most unit location. (8) A ground strap can be used to ground units rather than instal ling a ground bus. Refer to the CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers (MCC) Units with Vertical Operating Handles Installation Instructions, publication 2100-IN014.
Table 4 - MCC Modifications for Unit and Structure Compatibility If Mounted in this
Type of
Section
(1),(2)
Plug-in Units No
Additional
Parts
Required
Requires
Style 1 Unit
Support Pan
Requires
Style 3 Unit
Support
Pan
Requires
Style 3 Unit
Support Pan
w/ Bushing
Requires
Alternate
Top
Horizontal
Wireway Pan
Requires
Door
Gasketing
Kit
Requires
Retrofit
Kit
(3)
Requires
Ground
Bus Kit
Space
Factor
Series — 2100H-UAJ1 2100H-
UA12100H-
UJ1
2100H-
USPA1
2100H-USPJ1
2100H-
NA4A1
2100H-NA4J1
2100H-
NA4A2
2100H-NA4J2
2100-GJ10 2100H-R1
2100H-R2
2100H-
GS1
22 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 1 General Information
Receiving, Handling, and
Storage
Refer to the following sections for information on receiving, handling, and storage of MCC units.
Receiving
As standard, CENTERLINE MCCs are shipped upright in shipping blocks of one to three front-mounted sections or two to six back-to-back sections. Each shipping block of an MCC is provided with a lifting angle. The lifting angle is optional on NEMA Type 3R and Type 4 MCCs. Each vertical section in a shipping block is bolted to the shipping skid and covered with clear plastic wrap. Equipment that extends from the structures is also protected. Protection is for upright shipping and is not waterproof or watertight. If necessary, other types of packaging are available.
Refer to publication 2100-IN040
for receiving, handling, and storage
instructions. This publication is shipped with each MCC, attached to the outside of the MCC within the layer of clear plastic wrap. For additional information about the handling, installation, operation, and maintenance of MCCs rated more than 600V , consult NEMA ICS 2.3-1995.
Export Packaging
A maximum of three vertical sections standing upright can be shipped with export packaging together in one block. The MCC is bolted to a skid and wrapped in poly wrap suitable for occasional water-spray; a wooden frame and chipboard surround the sections. Export packaging is not watertight, waterproof, or intended for long-term storage. Extended storage can require space heaters and other considerations. Export packing adds extra weight and dimensions to the shipping block.
Figure 8 - Handling and Receiving MCCs
Shipping Skid
Lifting Angle
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 23 General Information Chapter 1
Handling
Lifting with a forklift, overhead lifting, sling lifting, and pipe or rod rolling are methods that can be used to handle vertical sections. See the following tables for typical weights and dimensions for standard 20 in. (508 mm) wide and 15 in. (381 mm) or 20 in. (508 mm) deep sections. For sizes not listed, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative.
Table 5 - Shipping Weights and Dimensions - Standard Packaging Standard Packing (1)
(1) Standard packing for shipments in the United States and Canada . The MCC shipping block is mounted on a skid and covered in clear plastic wrap. This packaging is not watertight or waterproof.
Weight
lb (kg), approx.
Height
in. (cm), approx.
Depth
in. (cm), approx.
Width
in. (cm), approx.
Front mounted
1-section block
500 (227) 96 (244) 36 (91) 43 (109)
Front mounted
2-section block
1000 (454) 96 (244) 36 (91) 43 (109)
Front mounted
3-section block
1500 (680) 96 (244) 36 (91) 63 (160)
Back-to-back
2-section block
1000 (454) 96 (244) 42 (107) 43 (109)
Back-to-back
4-section block
1800 (816) 96 (244) 42 (107) 43 (109)
Back-to-back
6-section block
2200 (998) 96 (244) 42 (107) 63 (160)
Table 6 - Shipping Weights and Dimensions - Export Packaging Export Packing
(below deck)
(1)
(1) Export packing for below deck is required for all internationa l shipments. The MCC shipping block is mounted on a skid and covered in clear plastic wrap. This packaging is not watertight or waterproof. Additional packing materials surround the shipping block. The export packing adds extra weight and increases the dimension of the shipping block.
Weight
lb (kg), approx.
Height
in. (cm), approx.
Depth
in. (cm), approx.
Width
in. (cm), approx.
Front mounted
1-section block
600 (295) 99 (252) 37 (94) 44 (112)
Front mounted
2-section block
1150 (522) 99 (252) 37 (94) 44 (112)
Front mounted
3-section block
1650 (748) 99 (252) 37 (94) 64 (163)
Back-to-back
2-section block
1200 (544) 99 (252) 43 (109) 44 (112)
Back-to-back
4-section block
2000 (907) 99 (252) 43 (109) 44 (112)
Back-to-back
6-section block
2450 (1111) 99 (252) 43 (109) 64 (163)
ATTENTION: MCCs are top and front heavy. To avoid personal injury or structural damage, never attempt to lift or move the MCC by any means other than the methods outlined in Receiving, Handling, and Storing Motor Control Centers, publication 2100-IN040.
24 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 1 General Information
Storage and Operation
CENTERLINE MCCs conform to NEMA standard ICS 1-2000 for service and storage conditions. MCC ambient operating temperature range is 0…40 °C (32…104 °F) at 95% noncondensing humidity. Ambient storage temperature range is -30…65 °C (-22…149 °F). In addition, MCCs have an altitude class of 2 km (1 km for MCCs that contain variable frequency drives).
The altitude class of 2 km designates equipment for installation where the altitude does not exceed 2000 m (6600 ft). For installation above 2000 m (6600 ft), contact Rockwell Automation LV MCC T echnical Support at
1.440.646.5800 and follow the prompts to Allen-Bradley > Low V oltage Motor Control Centers > Post Shipment Support.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 25 Chapter 2
Installation Procedures
Location Planning When planning the location for your CENTERLINE® MCC, consider the following:
•C o n d u i t s
•B u s w a y s
• Overall height of installation area
•A l i g n m e n t w i t h o t h e r e q u i p m e n t • Future needs
•A m b i e n t t e m p e r a t u r e
The area must be level and the environment must be compatible with the NEMA enclosure rating of the equipment
Documentation packages shipped with assembled MCCs include an MCC elevation drawing and an MCC floor plan layout.
Height Considerations If the MCC is equipped with optional external mounting channels or is mounted on a pad, the height from the floor to the center of the top handles must be checked for compliance with NFPA 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) Article 404.8 and UL Standard 845. If the distance from the floor to the center of the highest handle is greater than 6.7 ft (2042.16 mm), add a unit operating handle extender (catalog number 2100H-NE1).
Figure 9 - Height Planning Dimensions
Height of Handle
Cement Pad
Floor Line
6.7 ft (2042.16 mm)
Maximum
26 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 2 Installation Procedures
ArcShield Clearance Height
The area above the MCC top plate must be unrestricted for the proper operation of the pressure relief venting system.
• A minimum clearance above the top of the MCC of 12 in. (305 mm) must be available for pressure relief and/or venting if an internal arcing fault occurs.
• Conduit, cable, and wiring must be installed in such a way so that it does not interfere with the opening of the top plate vent (no cable or conduit in the top-rear of cabinet; cable trays must be a minimum of 12 in. (305 mm) above the top plate).
Figure 10 - ArcShield Planning Dimensions
Securing an MCC Anchor bolts [1/2 in. (13 mm)] can be embedded in the foundation prior to installation. T wo bolts per vertical section fasten the MCC through its internal mounting angle to the foundation [corner sections require three bolts and 40 in. (1016 mm) wide sections require four bolts]. See the following illustrations and tables for general dimensions. Dimensions matching your equipment can be found on the elevation drawings shipped with your MCC.
IMPORTANT Do not remove the lifting angle from ArcShield™ sections with 100 ms arc resistant rating.
12 in. (305 mm)
ArcShield Sections with 100 ms
Arc Rating Only
,~------- ---:::-i
, , / I l ( --+ y/
i I : I I
I : I I i , , =-._,.__ ~ I
I
:
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 27 Installation Procedures Chapter 2
Figure 11 - Mounting Dimensions for 15 in. and 20 in. Sections IMPORTANT The external vertical support angle on MCC sections with 100 ms arc- resistant rating add an additional 2 in. (50.8 mm) to each end of the lineup.
WIREWAY
1:----- ---;,,
~'-----'~
1:----- ---:,,
~'-----'~
1:----- ---;~
~o _____ o~
WIREWAY
6"
(152mm)
90"
(2286 mm)
6"
(152mm)
rr
□
□ I
(381 mm)
" ,, ,,
!..!
□ I □ _)
" ,, ,,
!..!
" ,, ,,
!..!
" ,, ,,
!..!
----
□ I □ _)
L2o·_j
(508mm)
,--,0,,--------,0,,--, ·-! ____G!~~ )
WIREWAY
r---------1
1:: ::1
r---------1
1:: ::1
r---------1
1:: ::1
6"
{152 mm)
T
90"
{2286mm)
.._ __ w_1R_Ew_ A_v __ _, <+• I
28 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 2 Installation Procedures
Figure 12 - Mounting Dimensions for 15 in. and 20 in. Sections - continued The optional external mounting channels add 1.5 in. (38.1 mm) to the height. (2) Mounting Slots
0.56 in. x 1.13 in. Slots
(14 mm x 29 mm) Slots
A
D D
B C
E E
Rear
Front
For seismic bolt-down applications: first section
of the MCC lineup.
For seismic bolt-down applications: last section of the MCC lineup, extra bolt-down locations (2 bolts).
Standard Ground Bus
7.38 in.
(187 mm)
0.25 in.
(6.35 mm)
Dimensions,
approx.
15 in. Deep 20 in. Deep
20 in. Wide
in. (mm)
25 in. Wide
in. (mm)
30 in. Wide
in. (mm)
35 in. Wide
in. (mm)
20 in. Wide
in. (mm)
25 in. Wide
in. (mm)
30 in. Wide
in. (mm)
35 in. Wide
in. (mm)
A 20.00 (508) 25.00 (635) 30.00 (762) 35.00 (889) 20.00 (508) 25.00 (635) 30.00 (762) 35.00 (889) B 15.00 (381) 15.00 (381) 15.00 (381) 15.00 (381) 20.00 (508) 20.00 (508) 20.00 (508) 20.00 (508) C 11.56 (294) 11.56 (294) 11.56 (294) 11.56 (294) 16.56 (421) 16.56 (421) 16.56 (421) 16.56 (421) D 10.00 (254) 12.50 (318) 15.00 (381) 17.50 (445) 10.00 (254) 12.50 (318) 15.00 (381) 17.50 (445) E(1) 9.25 (235) 11.75 (299) 14.25 (362) 16.75 (426) 9.25 (235) 11.75 (299) 14.25 (362) 16.75 (426) (1) Applies to first and last sections that require seismic ratings.
Ii:- -
-tt rr===~
~ --
_____,,,
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 29 Installation Procedures Chapter 2
Figure 13 - Mounting Dimensions for 30 in. and 40 in. Deep Back-to-Back Section A
B
D D
Rear
Front
C
Standard Ground Bus
Rear
C
7.38 in. (187 mm)
Front
7.38 in. (187 mm)
0.25 in. (6 mm)
0.25 in. (6 mm)
1.69 in. (43 mm)
3.19 in. (81 mm)
(4) Mounting Slots
0.56 in. x 1.13 in. in Slots
(14 mm x 29 mm) Slots
Dimensions,
approx.
20 in. Deep 40 in. Deep
20 in. Wide
in. (mm)
25 in. Wide
in. (mm)
30 in. Wide
in. (mm)
35 in. Wide
in. (mm)
20 in. Wide
in. (mm)
25 in. Wide
in. (mm)
30 in. Wide
in. (mm)
35 in. Wide
in. (mm)
A 20.00 (508) 25.00 (635) 30.00 (762) 35.00 (889) 20.00 (508) 25.00 (635) 30.00 (762) 35.00 (889) B 30.00 (762) 30.00 (762) 30.00 (762) 30.00 (762) 40.00 (1016) 40.00 (1016) 40.00 (1016) 40.00 (1016) C 11.56 (294) 11.56 (294) 11.56 (294) 11.56 (294) 16.56 (421) 16.56 (421) 16.56 (421) 16.56 (421) D 10.00 (254) 12.50 (318) 15.00 (381) 17.50 (445) 10.00 (254) 12.50 (318) 15.00 (381) 17.50 (445) t f
□
=-=
30 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 2 Installation Procedures
Figure 14 - Mounting Dimensions for 25 in. Wide Section with 9 in. (228.6 mm) Wireway [90 in. (2286 mm) high]
The optional external mounting channels add 1.5 in. (38.1 mm) to the height.
WIREWAY
I•• ool
100 __ _ ool
loo ool
1••___ _ ool
loo ool
1~·--- -~.:.!
6"
(152mm )
2.50~
♦( 64mm )
90"
(2286 mm)
I--------'-------, _L
WIREWAY
6"
(152mm )
[_J
[ -ii
(381 mm)
" " " ~
n
[_J □ _J
I
□□
l~,o·_j
(508mm)
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 31 Installation Procedures Chapter 2
Figure 15 - Mounting Dimensions for 10 in. Wide Section with 10 in. (254 mm) Incoming Line Section
Dimension,
approx.
Section Depth
15 in. (381 mm) Deep
in. (mm)
20 in. (508 mm) Deep
in. (mm)
A 12.75 (324) 17.75 (451)
B 14.75 (375) 19.75 (502)
A (L1)
A (L2)
A (L3)
A B
1.25 in. (32 mm)
7.5 in. (191 mm)
10 in. (254 mm)
1.12 in. (28 mm)
Power Wires
' I••
. . .
. .
• • •
• • •
l
-
o,-- o,--
• • • -- "
••
Pr
L •••
,--
.. ......... - •
- ••
urr •• .[IT r1. n ... . . ,-- •• µ II
- - 8 •• • •• •• . .. - -• • -=-- ·- -
• • •
• • •
. .
.
" .
~ . . /. I··
h
/// / / ////
/ / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / / / / /
/ / / / / /
/ /
l!
/ / / / / / / / /
/ // ///// /
/ // ///// /
32 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 2 Installation Procedures
Figure 16 - Mounting Dimensions for NEMA 3R and 4 Section [90 in. (2866 mm) high] I --------~
{765 mm) ~30.12·~1
92.50"
(2330m m)
1.so·
(38 mm)
HIGH MTG.
CHANNEL
L!: 0
t;==,,,;,,r---rrl=;I
l?oo -l,6.56J I_ 2.87"
"""~ ""7 ,,..,
MAX (TO REAR
OF CABINET)
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 33 Installation Procedures Chapter 2
Figure 17 - Mounting Dimensions for NEMA 3R and 4 Section If the optional non-removal lifting angle is supplied, add 3.63 in. (92.2 mm) to height.
Rear
Front
A
Ground Bus
B C
Interior Section
0.25 in. (6
mm)
14.06 in. (337 mm)
2.87 in. (73 mm)
16.56 in. (421 mm)
(2) Mounting Holes
0.63 in. (16 mm) Diameter
12.37 in.
(314 mm)
Dimension,
approx.
Exterior Section Width
20 in. (508 mm) Wide(1)
in. (mm)
(1) This measurement is the interior section width.
25 in. (635 mm) Wide(1)
in. (mm)
30 in. (762 mm) Wide(1)
in. (mm)
A 25.00 (635) 30.00 (762) 35.00 (889)
B 13.75 (349) 16.25 (413) 18.75 (476)
C 11.25 (286) 13.75 (349) 16.25 (413)
l_.______________.
34 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 2 Installation Procedures
Figure 18 - Mounting Dimensions for 15 in. and 20 in. Deep Corner Section [90 in. (2866 mm) high]
The optional external mounting channels add 1.5 in. (38.1 mm) to the height.
Dimension,
approx.
Section Depth
15 in. (381 mm) Deep
in. (mm)
20 in.(635 mm) Deep
in. (mm)
A 25.13 (638) 30.13 (765)
B 12.63 (321) 15.13 (384)
C 16.81 (427) 21.81 (554)
D 17.62 (448) 22.62 (575)
B
A
A
B
D
C
D
C
0.25 in. (6 mm)
0.25 in. (6 mm)
1.41 in. (36 mm)
1.41 in. (36 mm)
(2) Mounting Holes
0.63 in. (16 mm) Diameter
Ground Bus
(2) Mounting Slots
0.56 in. x 1.13 in. in Slots
(14 mm x 29 mm) Slots
Ii
L
0 0
~
✓
□·
r- 7-,
•' ' 1''1
·~ ~ -'~ "...!
r - -,- ,
, •• 1 11 1
·~ ~ _1~ '...!
r - -,- ,
1 11 1 11 1
·~~-'~'_I
□·
I
2.50"
___I(63.Smm ) ~~---~
o o I
90.00"
(2286mm )
t---------1. □ □
• I
I
I
1;-0-,--0-;1 -----t-;;-fi1 I
1 00 1 00 1 I •• , ,: I
l __ l __ _:L _____ t---•1 I
,;-.-,- -.-;, - - - - -t-; ;-r, I
1 •• 1 •• 1 I .. ,,: I
'= ='= = =L: ====I===~ I
: •• : 0 •: I 00 ,:: I
I~ 0_1_ -·~L - - - - - L - ~ ~:~ I
·□
I
'
i
t
I
I
□
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 35 Installation Procedures Chapter 2
Figure 19 - Mounting Dimensions for 15 in. and 20 in. Deep x 40 in. Wide Front-mounted Section
The optional external mounting channels add 1.5 in. (38.1 mm) to the height.
Dimensions,
approx.
Section Width(1)
(1) When a horizontal bus or a disconnectin g means (switch or circuit breaker) is specified, reduce the ‘A’ dimension by 5 in. (127 mm).
20 in. Wide
in. (mm)
25 in. Wide
in. (mm)
30 in. Wide
in. (mm)
35 in. Wide
in. (mm)
40 in. Wide
in. (mm)
A 17.25 (438) 22.25 (565) 27.25 (692) 32.25 (819) 37.25 (946) B 16.50 (419) 21.50 (546) 26.50 (673) 31.50 (800) 36.50 (927) C 5.25 (133) 7.75 (197) 10.25 (260) 12.75 (324) 15.25 (387) 0 0
. WIREWAY .
~
0 WIREWAY 0
!
6'
1152 rm1I
T
00'
12286 nvn)
_L
6'
1152 rm1I
f
□
□
L 1s·
--1
I
,, I
:: I
!..! I
" I
:: I
!..! I
" I
:: I
!..! I
I
1~1=1
n
□□
□□
L 20. _J
(508mml
1.06'
(27mm)
16.25'
1413mm)
L
11.13'
1537mm)
21.13'
1537mm)
16.25'
(413mm)
L
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A ----- -i
8 --------i
6 00'
(152m C
----<;>
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1 ______________ ...1,
MTG HOLES FOR 5/16' HOWE
Blank mountin~ plate
O.~•
(10mml
76.88"
11953mm)
36 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 2 Installation Procedures
Figure 20 - Mounting Dimensions for 15 in. and 20 in. Deep x 40 in. Wide Front-mounted Section
Rear
10.00 in. (254 mm)
B
Front
A
10.00 in. (254 mm)
40.00 in. (1016 mm)
1.69 in. (43 mm)
20.00 in. (508 mm)
7.15 in. (102 mm)
0.25 in. (6 mm)
Standard Ground Bus
(4) Mounting Slots
0.56 in. x 1.13 in. in Slots
(14 mm x 29 mm) Slots
Dimension,
approx.
Section Depth
15 in. (381 mm) Deep
in. (mm)
20 in. (508 mm) Deep
in. (mm)
A 15 (381) 20 (508)
B 11.56 (294) 16.56 (421)
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 37 Installation Procedures Chapter 2
Figure 21 - Mounting Dimensions for 71 in. H (reduced height) MCC Sections A
D
C
B
E
20 in.
(508 mm)
20 in.
(508 mm)
70.48 in.
(1790.19 mm) 70.48 in.
(1790.19 mm)
0.25 in. (6 mm) 0.25 in. (6 mm)
71 in. High Section
(1803.4 mm)
Dimension,
approx.
Section Depth
15 in. (381 mm) Deep
in. (mm)
20 in.(635 mm) Deep
in. (mm)
A 15.00 (380) 20.00 (508)
B 14.75 (374) 19.75 (500)
C 5.12 (130) 10.12 (256)
D 4 (101) 8 (203)
E — 4.40 (112)
[ _I I
-r--- 0 0 r----~...J
• •
r- ~
0--D
[ _I I
0 0
• •
1~------7
loo ::1 _______ _J
1~------7
loo ::1 _______ _J
1~------7
loo ::1 _______ _J
38 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 2 Installation Procedures
Seismic Requirements T o demonstrate the seismic withstand of various CENTERLINE MCCs [20 in. deep (508 mm), 30 in. deep (762 mm) back-to-back, and 40 in. deep (1016 mm) back-to-back], the MCC design construction has been qualified by seismic calculations per the Uniform Building Code (UBC). CENTERLINE 2100 MCC samples have been seismically qualified by dynamic (triaxial multi- frequency testing) seismic tests per IEEE 344 Seismic T est Standards. The results of the MCC seismic testing demonstrated compliance with the 100% g level of Uniform Building Code 1997 (UBC) zone 4 (the maximum UBC zone) and 100% g level of The International Building Code 2006 (IBC), for example, the MCC structure, the MCC units, and the MCC components or electrical functions were not compromised when subjected to a UBC Zone 4 earthquake, or the IBC seismic event. Per the IEEE 344 standard, the equipment was under power and operated before, during, and after the seismic tests.
T o obtain a UBC or IBC seismic withstandability, each individual CENTERLINE 2100 MCC lineup (for example, both front and back MCCs in ‘back-to-back applications), must be mounted on an adequate seismic foundation and installed per the seismic anchoring requirements as shown in the following illustrations.
In seismic application dimensions ‘E’ applies to the first and last sections of the MCC lineup. See Figure 11 -Mounting Dimensions for 15 in. and 20 in.
Sections for dimensions.
Figure 22 - Seismic Bolt Down Requirements
IMPORTANT Variable frequency drive units using ‘rollout’ drive configurations are not seismically tested.
EE Rear
FrontFirst Section Last Section
Second Section and
Additional Sections
MCC Lineup
1The hardware required is 1/2 in.-13 Grade 5 or HSL-3 M12 or better bolts embedded in the foundation. 1 1 1
l J
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 39 Installation Procedures Chapter 2
Figure 23 - Seismic Weld Down Requirements
Joining and Splicing New
MCCs
A main horizontal bus splice kit must be installed between shipping blocks of new MCCs to connect the main horizontal bus. In addition, the neutral bus splice kit (if required) and the ground bus splice kit must be installed between shipping blocks. Refer to CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Joining and Splicing V ertical Sections Instructions, publication 2100-IN010 .
Joining and Splicing Existing
MCCs
A main horizontal bus, a neutral bus (if required), and a ground bus splice kit must be installed when adding to existing CENTERLINE MCCs. When adding to existing MCCs, you must identify the series of the MCC that you are adding to. If the existing MCC is series A or B, you must consult MCC technical support at 1.440.646.5800 and follow the prompts to Allen-Bradley > Low V oltage Motor Control Centers > Post Shipment Support for joining and splicing procedures. When the existing MCC is series C or later, refer to CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Joining and Splicing V ertical Sections Instructions, publication 2100-IN010
.
Also, be sure to connect network cables and other control cables as required.
0.25 in. (6 mm)
1.50 in. (38 mm)
1.50 in.
(38 mm)
1.50 in. (38 mm)
1.50 in. (38 mm)
1.50 in. (38 mm) 1.50 in.
(38 mm)
Rear
Front
First Section Last Section
Second Section and
Additional Sections
MCC Lineup
Rear FrontOptional Location
for Rear Welds
Floor Line
Left-hand Side View
40 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 2 Installation Procedures
Joining and Splicing MCCs
with ArcShield
In addition to the horizontal, neutral (if required), and ground bus splicing kits, CENTERLINE MCCs with arc-resistant ratings have these additional requirements:
• MCCs with the 100 ms arc-resistant rating have a back-corner baffle at the end of each lineup and insulation on the side closing-plate at the end of the lineup. They also have external vertical support angles at each end of the lineup.
• MCCs with the device-limited rating have insulation on the horizontal bus side closing-plates at each end of the lineup.
Installing and Joining Pull
Boxes
When pull boxes are supplied with your MCC, refer to Installing a Pull Box on a Bulletin 2100 V ertical Section, publication 2100-IN029, for installing and joining the pull box onto the vertical section.
Joining and Splicing NEMA
Type 12 MCCs
NEMA T ype 12 MCCs must be properly installed to prevent the ingress of dust and dirt. Follow the caulking instructions in the NEMA T ype 12 Sealing Instructions, publication 2100-IN037
, supplied with the NEMA 12 MCC.
Use caulk to close any mounting holes in the bottom plates and bolt holes between shipping splits.
It is necessary that all door latches and wireway doors be fully latched to prevent dust and dirt from entering the enclosure and to meet NEMA Type 12 requirements.
Joining and Splicing NEMA
Type 3R and Type 4 MCCs
A main horizontal bus, a neutral bus (if required) and a ground bus splice kit must be installed between the internal sections for new and existing NEMA T ype 3R and T ype 4 MCCs. Refer to CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Joining and Splicing V ertical Sections Instructions, publication 2100- IN010, for splicing Type 3R and Type 4 internal sections.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 41 Installation Procedures Chapter 2
Figure 24 - Joining Instructions for NEMA Type 3R and 4 Sections
MCC MCC MCC
Cabinet Spacer
(2) 0.25 in. (6 mm) x 0.50 in. (12.7 mm) Taptites
Cabinet Spacer
(2) 0.25 in. (6 mm) x 0.50 in. (12.7
mm) Taptites
(2) 0.25 in. (6 mm) x 0.50 in. (12.7 mm) Taptites
Cabinet Spacer
(2) 0.25 in. (6 mm) x 0
in. (12.7 mm)
Taptites
Gasket
Gasket
Wireway Extensions
(2) or (4) 0.25 in. (6 mm) x 0.50 in. (12.7
mm) Taptites
(2) wireway extensions required for 15 in. (381 mm) deep. (2) wireway extensions required for 20 in. (508 mm) deep. (1) 0.25 in. (6 mm) -20 x 0.70 in. (17.78 mm) taptite per wireway extension.
Remove left-hand driphood angle and remount after the
adjacent driphood has been drilled out.
Remove right-hand driphood angle and
discard. Drill out (5) 0.172 in. (4.36 mm)
diameter holes to 0.25 in. (6 mm) diameter in
driphood.
Remove the right-hand and left-hand side
plates before joining sections. The gasket is
across the top of the driphood and down
the backplate on one of the adjoining
sections.
Gasket
~ \ V r·~ ~ ' ....\} &~'
42 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 2 Installation Procedures
Bus Torque Specifications Tighten all bus splice connections with a torque wrench and socket at intervals established by your maintenance policy. See Chapter 9 for suggested maintenance. If a torque wrench is not available, tighten until the conical spring washer is flat.
T orque values can be found on the information label on the interior of the vertical wireway door or on the interior right-hand side plate of frame mounted units.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 43 Chapter 3
Installing Conduit and Cable
Installing Conduit When installing conduit, make sure it is installed according to local codes - to assure water and moisture cannot enter or accumulate in the MCC enclosure.
Conduit must be installed so they are compatible with the NEMA rating of the MCC. Place the conduit away from the horizontal ground bus to avoid damage. W e recommend that the conduit be positioned to minimize cable bending and maintain relative vertical alignment to incoming connections.
Bottom Entry Conduit
If your conduit is entering from the bottom, follow this procedure.
1. Prepare the installation site so the foundation is level.
2. Before the MCC is installed, place and stub up conduit approximately 2 in. (51 mm) above floor level, making sure all incoming conduit is clear of the horizontal ground bus.
For approximate section base dimensions and ground bus locations, refer to Installation Procedures, Chapter 2, or elevation and floor plan drawings shipped with MCC.
For approximate bottom entry locations and wiring schemes for main fusible disconnects, main circuit breakers, and incoming line compartments, refer to Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference, publication 2100-TD018
.
44 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 3 Installing Conduit and Cable
Top Entry Conduit
If your conduit is entering from the top, follow this procedure.
1. After the MCC is in place, leveled, and the sections are joined and spliced, bring conduit into the top of the incoming section.
For approximate top entry locations and wiring schemes for main fusible disconnects, main circuit breakers and incoming line compartments, refer to Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference,
publication 2100-TD018.
2. Remove the lifting angle and top plate.
3. Modify the top plate for necessary conduit entries.
This method helps guard against metal chips falling into the MCC, which can cause serious damage to the components.
4. Replace the top plate and lifting angle bolts to guard against dust or dirt from entering the top horizontal wireway.
5. Make sure that all incoming conduit is clear of the horizontal ground bus.
For approximate location of the horizontal ground bus mounted in the top horizontal wireway, refer to Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference, publication 2100-TD018
.
For space availability for incoming cables, refer to the elevation drawings shipped with assembled MCCs.
Installing Cable Install the cable when the temperature is above freezing 0 °C (32 °F), unless the cable is suitable for installation at temperatures below freezing. This helps prevent cable insulation from cracking or splitting.
MCCs are rated for use with 75 °C (167 °F) cable. Cable must be sized by using a 75 °C (167 °F) column in NEC T able 310–16 (NEC 2005 Edition). The temperature rating of the lugs is not relevant.
ATTENTION: For ArcShield™ units with 100 ms arc duration rating, conduit, cable, and wiring must be installed in such a way so that it does not interfere with the opening of the top plate vent (no cable or conduit in the top-rear of cabinet; cable trays must be a minimum of 12 in. (305 mm) above the top plate).
ATTENTION: Properly connect all line and load cables to avoid a bolted fault and equipment damage.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 45 Installing Conduit and Cable Chapter 3
Lugs
T o install the lugs, follow this procedure.
1. V erify the compatibility of wire size, type, and stranding versus the power lugs furnished.
Use correct lugs in all applications.
2. Crimp compression lugs with manufacturer recommended tools.
3. Use the MCC electrical schematics to verify field wiring connection points.
Incoming Line Compartment
T op or bottom entry to the incoming line-section bus is straight through to the connection terminals. The vertical bus provides pads for the incoming lugs.
Base the lug selection on the size, number, and type of conductor. • Use of mechanical screw-type lugs is acceptable only when the incoming lines’ available short-circuit current is 42,000 A rms symmetrical or less. • Use of crimp or compression type lugs is acceptable when the incoming lines’ available short-circuit current does not exceed 100,000 A rms symmetrical.
Main Disconnect
T op entry is straight through to the line side of the main fusible disconnect or main circuit breaker. For bottom entry, the connection scheme varies depending on the rating of the main device. In some cases, the bottom entry connects to the top or line side of the main fusible disconnect or main circuit breaker. In other cases the connection is reverse-fed, the bottom entry cables connect to the bottom of the main fusible disconnect or main circuit breaker.
For further information refer to Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference, publication 2100-TD018
.
Mechanical screw-type lugs are supplied as standard with all main fusible disconnects or main circuit breakers. Crimp or compression lugs are optional. 46 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 3 Installing Conduit and Cable
Cable Bracing
The CENTERLINE MCC bus work system has been tested and is qualified to withstand maximum short-circuit forces exceeding the short-circuit withstand ratings for the MCC. Incoming line cables and outgoing feeder cables also need to be supported to withstand the same short-circuit forces. Follow NEC and local codes when bracing incoming and outgoing cables. There are many sizes and types of cables, as well as different means that the cables can be supported. Acceptable methods are shown on the following pages.
Securing Cables with Glass T ape
In this example, glass fiber-reinforced tape or glass filament tape is used. Make sure the taping is continuous from the point the cables enter the MCC to the point the cables are terminated. It is important that cables are wrapped several times for additional strength. Draw up the cable slack during wrapping so that individual cables are supported by the tape as a single mass.
Figure 25 - Securing Cables with Glass Tape
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 47 Installing Conduit and Cable Chapter 3
Securing Cables with Nylon Rope
In this example, cables are lashed in a ‘figure 8’-type configuration by using nylon rope. Make sure the rope lashing is continuous from the point the cables enter the MCC to the point the cables are terminated. Other types of rope lashing can be acceptable. Draw up cable slack during wrapping so that individual cables are supported by the rope as a single mass.
Figure 26 - Securing Cables with Nylon Rope
Securing Cables with Hardwood
In this example, a hardwood brace (maple hardwood) made for the specific application is used. Holes are bored approximately the size of the cable diameter. Several bolt holes are also bored the breadth of the hardwood brace.
The brace is cut in two pieces and is used as a clamp to secure the cables.
Through bolts are inserted into the brace and tightened so that cables are held tightly in place.
Figure 27 - Securing Cables with Hardwood
48 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 3 Installing Conduit and Cable
A second form of hardwood brace (not shown) is a yolk type, in which the cables are passed through. Make sure the holes are small enough to provide a snug fit for the cables. The connectors or lugs are attached to the cables and cables are bolted to the terminals.
When using the hardwood bracing method and the short circuit current is less than 42,000 A, brace the cables every 12 in. (305 mm). When the short circuit current is 42,000 A or greater, brace the cables every 6 in. (153 mm).
Incoming Line Brace
Allen-Bradley manufactures an incoming line brace similar to the hardwood clamping-type brace. T o order an incoming line brace, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative and reference assembly number 40113–848.
IMPORTANT Install lugs so they are in line with each other and proper spacing is used between phases. Hardware must be torqued per the torque tables found on the enclosure door.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 49 Chapter 4
Installing and Removing Plug-in Units
Installing Plug-in Units For unit installation, refer to CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers (MCC) Units with V ertical Operating Handles Installation Instructions, publication 2100-IN014, and CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Center (MCC) Units with Horizontal Operating Handles Installation Instructions, publication 2100-IN060.
ATTENTION: When installing or removing MCC units, when possible, de- energize, lockout, and tag-out all sources of power to the MCC. If the MCC units are installed or removed with power applied to the main power bus, follow established electrical safety work practices. Refer to the NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace publication.
R
ATTENTION: Review your company safety lockout and tag-out procedure.
De-energize all units before installing or removing.
ATTENTION: All covers and doors must be in place before applying power to the MCC. If units are removed, they must be replaced with the appropriate items such as units, doors, and unit support pans.
ATTENTION: When installing units for CENTERLINE® 2100 Motor Control Centers with the ArcShield™ rating, you must make sure you are installing a unit that has the same arc resistance rating as the MCC in which it is being installed. The arc resistance rating can be found on the ArcShield label on the vertical wireway door.
Units that are not rated for 100 ms arc duration must not be installed in a section that is rated for 100 ms arc duration. The arc resistant rating does not apply if that is done.
w
w
w
w
50 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 4 Installing and Removing Plug-in Units
Remove a SecureConnect
Unit from a Section
T o remove a SecureConnect™ unit from a section, follow these steps.
1. Make sure the disconnect handle is in the OFF/O position.
2. Slide the shaft port cover open.
3. Insert the 1/4 in. hex tool into the shaft port.
4. Rotate the wrench counter-clockwise to retract the power stabs.
The indicator next to the disconnect handle changes from red to green.
5. Pull out the power stabs lockout lever.
Y ou can attach a lock to the lever to prevent the lever from being pushed in and the power stabs being extended.
6. Remove the cover from the status port.
Shaft Port
Open Closed
Shaft-port Cover
Indicator
Lockout Lever
Status Port
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 51 Installing and Removing Plug-in Units Chapter 4
7. Connect a multi-meter to the status port to verify that there is a closed connection.
a. V erify that the stabs are retracted by checking the continuity in pins 1 and 2.
When the stabs are retracted, they complete the circuit verifying that all three stabs have retracted completely.
b. V erify that the stab housing shutters are closed by checking continuity in pins 3 and 4 of the status port.
A limit switch provides feedback to indicate the stab housing shutters are closed.
8. Continue following the steps with Remove a Plug-in Unit with a V ertical Operating Handle from a Section on page 52.
Stab LockoutStatus Port
POWER STABS
LOCKOUT
+
Pull
POWER STABS AND ♦
STAB SHUTTER , 3
STATUS PORT
PLUG-IN POWER STABS
CONNECTED
VERTICAL POWER BUS
,~~~
c\.JLJLJ~
PLUG-IN POWER STABS
DISCONNECTED
VERTICAL POWER BUS
~
~
3 0-1i-04
PLUG-IN
POWER STABS
SHUTTER CLOSED
m
3 0-1+-<) 4
52 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 4 Installing and Removing Plug-in Units
Remove a Plug-in Unit with a
Vertical Operating Handle
from a Section
T o remove a unit, follow this procedure.
1. Make sure the disconnect handle is in the OFF/O position.
2. For non-arc resistant units, turn the door latches 1/4 turn; for units that are equipped with arc-resistant door latches, push in the latch and rotate 1/4 turn.
Arc Containment Latch
I
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 53 Installing and Removing Plug-in Units Chapter 4
3. Open the door completely.
4. Remove the unit door, if necessary.
a. Remove the door-mounted devices and wiring, if necessary. b. Remove the hinge pins by sliding upward with a flathead screwdriver.
The control station can be hung on the front of the unit by using square holes adjacent to the top unit latch.
c. Swing the door to near closed position.
TIP It is not necessary to remove the unit door to remove a unit from a section.
However, these steps can still be necessary even when the door is not removed.
For Units With Follow This Step
A control station First slide the hinge pin out of the hinge and through the tab on the control station wiring.
ArcShield units with 100 ms arc
duration rating
Two hinges are required for each hinge leaf.
1. The upper hinge on each door must be removed from the structure to remove the uppermost hinge pin.
2. Remove the hinge pin through the lower hinge, then through the hinge leaf and upper hinge.
Only top hinge must
be removed to install
hinge pin.
Hinge
Hinge for ArcShield Units with 100 ms Arc Duration Rating Hinge Leaf
Hinge Pin
54 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 4 Installing and Removing Plug-in Units
d. Lift the door outward to remove.
5. Disengage the captive latches at the front of the unit, one at the top and one at the bottom of the unit.
Units that are 2.0 space factor and larger have two latches at the top. All units with the 100 ms arc-resistant rating have two latches at the top.
6. Detach the front portion of the pull-apart terminal blocks from the unit base and place the wires and terminal blocks in line with the wiring clearance tunnel.
Wiring
Tunnel
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 55 Installing and Removing Plug-in Units Chapter 4
7. Remove other cables or devices that can prevent the unit from being withdrawn.
.
8. Pull the unit forward (outward) approximately 3 in. (7.5 cm) out of the MCC by using the handle provided at the lower left of the unit and the tab in the upper right of the unit as finger holds.
Reposition your hands, as necessary, to properly support the unit while you are removing the unit from the MCC.
TIP It is not necessary to place wires and terminal blocks into the vertical wireway to remove a plug-in unit that includes the wiring clearance tunnel.
ATTENTION: Plug-in MCC units can be heavy or awkward to handle. Use an assistant or a platform lift device, if necessary, to help you handle the unit.
56 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 4 Installing and Removing Plug-in Units
For the CENTERLINE 2100 MCC units with arc-resistant door latches, you can tilt the top of the unit slightly to the rear to avoid interference with the top arc latch bracket before removing the unit. If you do not have enough clearance, you need to loosen the latch bracket screw (approximately two turns) to remove the unit.
9. Remove the unit from the MCC.
10. Carefully install protective caps or close manual shutters after the unit is removed.
Automatic shutters close as units are removed.
TIP For dual-mounted, fusible-feeder disconnect switch units, you need to remove the bottom arc latch bracket. You can do this by first removing the unit below the dual disconnect unit.
ATTENTION: All covers and doors must be in place before applying power to the MCC. If units are removed, they must be replaced with the appropriate items such as units, doors, and unit support pans.
When installing units for CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers with the ArcShield rating, you must make sure you are installing a unit that has the same arc resistance rating as the MCC in which it is being installed. The arc resistance rating can be found on the ArcShield label on the vertical wireway door.
Units that are not rated for 100 ms arc duration must not be installed in a section that is rated for 100 ms arc duration. The arc resistant rating does not apply if that is done.
Latch Bracket
Latch Bracket
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 57 Installing and Removing Plug-in Units Chapter 4
Remove a Plug-in Unit with a
Horizontal Operating Handle
from a Section
T o remove a unit, follow this procedure.
1. Make sure the disconnect handle is in the OFF/O position.
2. For non-arc resistant units, turn the door latch 1/4 turn; for units that are equipped with arc-resistant door latches, push in the latch and rotate 1/4 turn.
3. Open the door completely.
4. Remove the unit door, if necessary.
a. Remove the door-mounted devices and wiring, if necessary.
TIP It is not necessary to remove the unit door to remove a unit from a section.
However, these steps can still be necessary even when the door is not removed.
Arc Containment Latch
"\l1r' , - .;.. "' i..',
OM . I ~ I OFF
-.,,;
58 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 4 Installing and Removing Plug-in Units
b. Remove the hinge pins by sliding upward with a flathead screwdriver.
The control station can be hung on the front of the unit by using square holes adjacent to the top unit latch.
For Units With Follow This Step
A control station First slide the hinge pin out of the hinge and through the tab on the control station wiring.
ArcShield units with 100 ms
arc duration rating
Two hinges are required for each hinge leaf.
1. The upper hinge on each door must be removed from the structure to remove the uppermost hinge pin.
2. Remove the hinge pin through the lower hinge, then through the hinge leaf and upper hinge.
Only top hinge must
be removed to install
hinge pin.
Hinge for ArcShield Units with 100 ms Arc Duration Rating Hinge
Hinge Leaf
Hinge Pin
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 59 Installing and Removing Plug-in Units Chapter 4
c. Swing the door to near closed position.
d. Lift the door outward to remove.
.
5. Detach the wiring/terminal block from the unit.
60 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 4 Installing and Removing Plug-in Units
6. Place the wiring/terminal block in the vertical wireway to the right of unit.
7. Push the latch mechanism to the left with your right hand.
8. Pull the unit forward (outward) approximately 3 in. (7.62 cm) out of the MCC.
Y ou can reposition your hands, as necessary, to properly support the unit while you are removing the unit from the MCC.
For the CENTERLINE 2100 MCC units with swing-out door latches, you need to rotate the latch bracket 90o clockwise to avoid interference with the unit.
ATTENTION: Plug-in MCC units can be heavy or awkward to handle. Use an assistant or a platform lift device if necessary to help you handle the unit.
Swing-out
Latch
Bracket
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 61 Installing and Removing Plug-in Units Chapter 4
9. Remove the unit from the MCC.
10. Carefully install protective caps or close the manual shutters after unit is removed.
Automatic shutters close as units are removed.
11. See the next section for additional information.
ATTENTION: All covers and doors must be in place before applying power to the MCC. If units are removed, they must be replaced with the appropriate items such as units, doors, and unit support pans.
ATTENTION: All covers and doors must be in place before applying power to the MCC. If units are removed, they must be replaced with the appropriate items such as units, doors, and unit support pans.
When installing units for CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers with the ArcShield rating, you must make sure you are installing a unit that has the same arc resistance rating as the MCC in which it is being installed. The arc resistance rating can be found on the ArcShield label on the vertical wireway door.
Units that are not rated for 100 ms arc duration must not be installed in a section that is rated for 100 ms arc duration. The arc resistant rating does not apply if that is done.
62 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 4 Installing and Removing Plug-in Units
Remove the Support Pan 1. For ArcShield sections with 100 ms arc duration rating, remove the vertical wireway baffle and set aside for installation later.
2. Pry the plastic retaining clip from the right-hand unit support by using a screwdriver.
This is visible in the vertical wireway.
For CENTERLINE MCC units with arc resistant latches, the unit support pan is secured to the right-hand unit support by the screw that retains the arc latch bracket. T o remove the unit support pan, you must remove the arc latch bracket.
Plastic
Retaining
Clip
Arc Latch
Bracket
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 63 Installing and Removing Plug-in Units Chapter 4
For CENTERLINE MCC units with the 100 ms arc duration rating, there is an additional screw that secures the unit support pan. This screw is at the left-rear corner of the unit support pan.
3. Lift the right side of the support pan approximately 4 in. (102 mm).
4. Pull the right side of the support pan forward to release from the left rear slot on the structure.
5. Push back on the left side of the support pan until the support pan is free from the structure.
V ertical sections can be supplied with plug-in stab opening protective caps, manual shutters, or automatic shutters. Refer to the next step if any of these options are supplied.
6. Carefully install the protective caps or close the manual shutters after the unit is removed.
Automatic shutters close as the units are removed.
ATTENTION: All covers and doors must be in place before applying power to the MCC. If units are removed, they must be replaced with the appropriate items such as units, doors, and unit support pans.
Unit Support Pan
Unit Support
Pan Screw
64 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 4 Installing and Removing Plug-in Units
Install Fixed-mount 24V DC
Two-branch Redundant
Power Unit
For IntelliCENTER® EtherNet/IP MCCs with 24V DC redundancy, one option is to include the 24V DC two-branch redundant unit. T o install or remove the 24V DC two-branch redundant unit, follow these steps.
1. T o install the unit support pan, follow the instructions in the CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers (MCC) Units with
V ertical Operating Handles Installation Instructions,
publication 2100-IN014
The redundant power unit requires 0.5 space factor and three bolt locations, as shown.
2. Place the unit into the open space and secure the unit on the right side with two 10-32 self-tapping screw and tighten to 32 lb•in (3.6 N•m) by using a 5/16 in. socket wrench.
3. Secure the unit on the left side with one 1/4-20 self-tapping screw and tighten to 55 lb•in (6.2 N•m) by using a 3/8 in. socket wrench.
T o enable redundant operation, we recommend that you use the existing Ethernet power-supply unit within the MCC as one input to the redundant unit, and then bring in a second input from a source external to the MCC.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 65 Installing and Removing Plug-in Units Chapter 4
Use these guidelines to help size the power supply external to the MCC. •U L L i s t e d
• V oltage: 24V nominal with -5 % /15 % (22.8…27.6V) voltage tolerance over load
• Current: 8 A min to 20 A max rated output
• Load Regulation: 100 m V maximum over 0…8 A
• Load Ripple: 50 m Vpp maximum
The existing power supply is pre-wired at the factory to terminal blocks in the horizontal wireway.
4. Move this 24V DC wire connection from the terminal block within the power supply unit to the output terminal block of the two-branch redundant unit.
T erminals PS+ and PS- are for the left 4 A branch, and RS+ and RS- are for the right 4 A branch.
On the incoming side, for redundant operation, independent power supplies are required.
TIP A separate two-branch redundant unit is required for each 24V, 8 A circuit in the MCC.
Output For Left
4A B r a n c h
Output For Right
4A B r a n c h
66 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 4 Installing and Removing Plug-in Units
5. Wire the existing Ethernet power supply unit output to the ‘1’ terminals, left and right branches.
6. Wire the other unique power supply to the ‘2’ terminals, left and right branches.
7. Repeat this process for each existing power supply unit and two-branch, 8 A circuit within the 24V DC infrastructure.
8. T o validate proper wiring of the two-branch redundant unit, power up both 24V DC power supplies.
At this point, all V-in and V-out status lights on each 1606-XL module illuminate. If you shut off one of the power supply units, the V-in lights on the 1606-XL module that connects to that power source turn off, which indicates input power was lost. However, the V-out light on that same 1606-XL module remains on, which indicates the second power supply is still providing 24V DC power. Therefore, the devices on that circuit remain on.
This process can be repeated by alternating the power supplies that were left on or turned off.
TIP Use the Ethernet Power Supply table in the existing MCC one-line document to help see where the two-branch 24V circuits exists. More information can be found in the CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Center with IntelliCENTER Technology Using an EtherNet/IP Network Technical Data, publication 2100-TD031
.
IMPORTANT If the loss of one power supply causes branch power loss in the MCC 8 A circuit, correct the wiring of the two-branch redundant unit.
Input Source 1
Left and Right
Input Source 2
Left and Right
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 67 Chapter 5
Arc Flash Protection Marking as Required by
the National Electrical Code
Flash Protection Marking
Requirement
The flash protection marking requirement was initially established in 2000 by The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 70E), Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee W orkplaces. NFPA 70E applies to workers who install, maintain, or repair electrical systems.
In 2002, NFPA 70, The National Electrical Code (NEC) added the Article 110.16, and reinforced the flash protection marking of equipment. The 2002 version of the article is stated below.
110.16 Flash Protection
Switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, and MCCs that are in other than dwelling occupancies and are likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized shall be field marked to warn qualified persons of potential electric arc flash hazards. The marking shall be located so as to be clearly visible to qualified persons before examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance of the equipment.
FPN No. 1: NFPA 70E-2000, Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee W orkplaces, provides assistance in determining severity of potential exposure, planning safe work practices, and selecting personal protective equipment.
FPN No. 2: ANSI Z535.4-1998, Product Safety Signs and Labels, provides guidelines for the design of safety signs and labels for application to products.
As Arc Flash T echnology emerges, new developments have caused changes to arc flash criteria. For example, in 2004, the NFPA 70E was reissued in a completely new format along with changes reflecting new developments. The NEC is revised every three years and the NFPA 70E is revised every four years.
Use the latest editions of the NEC and NFPA 70E in establishing potential electric arc flash hazards and arc flash marking.
68 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 5 Arc Flash Protection Marking as Required by the National Electrical Code Arc Flash Marking
Clarification
The flash protection marking per NEC Article 110.16 is a field marking requirement and is to be applied by the MCC end-user for each specific application. The marking is similar to other NEC marking requirements, for example, voltage, voltage hazard labels, and circuits. However, flash protection markings must be based on application information and calculations from the installation site. The intent of the marking is to identify the presence of a potential flash hazard and to provide assistance in determining necessary protective clothing and personal protective equipment (PPE) that is worn by qualified electrical persons when servicing electrical equipment. Y ou must establish field marking requirements based upon the following:
• The level of the on-site personnel safety training
• The level of required clothing and required PPE
• Consistency for the level of marking of various equipment, for example, switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, and MCCs • The available flash energy on each piece of equipment.
This energy is determined from available fault current, arc flash duration due to the type, and degree of short circuit protection equipment.
Rockwell Automation
Services
Rockwell Automation understands the importance of you fulfilling the field arc-flash hazard marking requirements as defined by Article 116.10 in the NEC. Rockwell Automation can assist you in determining the necessary arc flash marking as required by NFPA 70E.
Rockwell Automation offers services that can provide assistance in the following areas:
• Arc-flash hazard analysis
• Providing input on the specific Bulletin 2100 MCC design being used • The zone determination for the NFPA 70E Hazard/Risk levels • Y our required NEC field marking
For information regarding arc-flash hazard analysis, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 69 Chapter 6
Operator Handle and Unit Interlock
The operator handle is an integral part of each MCC unit. Adjustment of the handle is not required. The operator handle is interlocked with each unit door as outlined by UL 845.
Defeating the Unit Door
Interlock
Refer to the following information for defeating the unit door lock.
Open the Door When Operating Handle Is in the ON/I Position When the unit door is closed and the operator handle is in the ON/I position, a defeater screw must be deliberately operated to open the unit door (for example, opening the door of an energized unit).
The defeater screw is just below (on units with a vertically mounted operator handle) or just to the right (on units with a horizontally mounted operator handle) of the pivot point of the operator handle. T o operate the defeater mechanism and defeat the door interlock while the operator handle is in the ON/I position, use a flat-head screwdriver to turn the defeater screw clockwise one-eighth to one-quarter turn.
ATTENTION: When working on or near energized electrical equipment, follow established electrical safety-related work practices. Refer to NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
ATTENTION: Opening the door reduces arc flash safety.
ATTENTION: When working on or near energized electrical equipment, follow established electrical safety-related work practices. Refer to NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
Personal protective equipment (PPE) is not shown for clarity. 70 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 6 Operator Handle and Unit Interlock
Figure 28 - Operating Handle Defeater for Vertical Operator Handle Figure 29 - Operating Handle Defeater for Horizontal Operator Handle
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 71 Operator Handle and Unit Interlock Chapter 6
Defeating the Unit Interlock
Lever
Refer to the following information for defeating the unit interlock lever.
Energize a Unit with the Unit Door Open
When the unit door is open and the operator handle is in the OFF/O position, the defeater lever must be deliberately lifted on the vertical handles or pushed to the left for horizontal handles, to move the operator handle to the ON/I position, and energize the unit.
Figure 30 - Defeater Lever for Vertical Operator Handle ATTENTION: When working on or near energized electrical equipment, follow established electrical safety-related work practices. Refer to NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
Personal protective equipment (PPE) is not shown for clarity.
ATTENTION: When working on or near energized electrical equipment, follow established electrical safety-related work practices. Refer to NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
Personal protective equipment (PPE) is not shown for clarity.
72 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 6 Operator Handle and Unit Interlock
Figure 31 - Defeater Lever for Horizontal Operating Handle Locking Provisions Refer to the following sections for locking provisions.
Lock Vertical Operating Handles in the OFF/O Position
T o lock the small, medium, and large operator handle in the OFF/O position, put the shackle of the lock through the opening in the operator handle assembly. The opening can accommodate up to three padlocks.
Figure 32 - Locking Vertical Handles in OFF/O Position
ATTENTION: When working on or near energized electrical equipment, follow established electrical safety-related work practices. Refer to NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
Small and Medium Vertical Handle Large Handle
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 73 Operator Handle and Unit Interlock Chapter 6
Lock Horizontal Operating Handles in the OFF/O Position Some units use a horizontal operating handle. The horizontal operating handle can be locked in the OFF/O position by putting the shackle of the lock through the open slotted area to the left of the operator handle.
Figure 33 - Locking a Horizontally Mounted Operating Handle in OFF/O Position Lock Units with Operating Handles in the ON/I Position
Follow this procedure to lock the operator handle in the ON/I position.
1. Drill out the hole to 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) diameter maximum.
2. Insert the shackle of the lock.
The following instructions assume that the handle is in the ON/I position:
• For units with small handles, the hole is in the upper portion of the operator handle assembly.
• For units with medium and large operator handles, the hole is underneath the operator handle on the handle assembly.
• For units with a horizontally mounted handle, the hole is on the left- hand side of the handle assembly.
ATTENTION: Locking an operating handle in the ON/I position can be in conflict with local codes and emergency shut down requirements.
74 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 6 Operator Handle and Unit Interlock
Figure 34 - Locking Small Handle in ON/I POSITION, Vertical Operating Handle Figure 35 - Locking the Medium Handle in ON/I Position
Drill Out
Drill Out
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 75 Operator Handle and Unit Interlock Chapter 6
Figure 36 - Locking Large Handle in ON/I Position
Figure 37 - Locking Horizontal Handle in ON/I Position
Drill OutDrill Out
Drill Out
76 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 6 Operator Handle and Unit Interlock
Unit Interlocks
A unit interlock is provided with each plug-in unit. Unit interlocks prevent units from being removed from or inserted into a vertical section when the operator handle is in the ON/I position.
Units can also be locked out with a padlock preventing installation of the unit into a vertical section. The lockout feature of the unit interlock can be used with a padlock to keep the interlock in an extended position, which prevents the unit from being inserted into an MCC section. The unit interlock can also be used with the unit installed in the section, but partially removed from the section.
In this position, the unit is partially removed from the MCC and the slot in the interlock plate is in line with the flange of the unit support pan above this unit.
When the unit is locked in this position, the unit power and ground stabs are disengaged. This position can be used to prevent insertion of a unit into the MCC.
Figure 38 - Unit Interlock to Prevent Insertion - Vertical Operating Handler ATTENTION: When working on or near energized electrical equipment, follow established electrical safety-related work practices. Refer to NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
We recommend that maintenance performed on the MCC units be performed away from the MCC in a suitable work area, when possible.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 77 Operator Handle and Unit Interlock Chapter 6
Figure 39 - Unit Interlock to Prevent Insertion - Unit Completely Withdrawn In this position, the unit is partially removed from the MCC and the intermediate slot in the interlock plate is in line with the bushing in the unit support pan. When the unit is locked in this position, the unit power and ground stabs are disengaged. This position can be used to prevent insertion of a unit into the MCC.
Figure 40 - Unit Interlock to Prevent Insertion - Horizontal Operating Handle ATTENTION: When working on or near energized electrical equipment, follow established electrical safety-related work practices. Refer to NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
We recommend that maintenance performed on the MCC units be performed away from the MCC in a suitable work area, when possible. 78 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 6 Operator Handle and Unit Interlock
Figure 41 - Unit Interlock to Prevent Insertion - Unit Completely Withdrawn
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 79 Chapter 7
Final Checklist Before Energizing
Introduction This section provides guidance for the startup of a newly installed MCC.
W e recommend making an itemized list including the following:
• Serial number
•N u m b e r o f s e c t i o n s
• Number of units and their corresponding voltage
• Current ratings
•H o r s e p o w e r r a t i n g s
•T y p e s o f c i r c u i t s
• Fuse sizes
• Circuit breaker ratings and trip settings
• Heater elements requirements
• Arc resistant components
•O t h e r i m p o r t a n t d a t a
The itemized list could be modeled after the MCC layout drawings supplied with each MCC. Save this itemized list in a file along with other data for the MCC such as, component manuals, heater element instructions, MCC manuals, and wiring diagrams. Blank sample forms are provided at the end of this chapter.
Pre-energizing Check
Procedure
Allow only a ‘qualified person’ to conduct the pre-energizing check. A qualified person is defined by NEMA Standards Publication / No. ICS 2.3, Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Motor Control Centers, Section 1 as follows:
1.4 Qualified Person
For the purpose of this guide, a qualified person is one who is familiar with the installation, construction and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. In addition, he or she has the following qualifications:
1.4.1 Is trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety practices.
80 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 7 Final Checklist Before Energizing
1.4.2 Is trained in the proper care and usage of protective equipment such as rubber gloves, hard hat, safety glasses or face shields, flash clothing, etc., in accordance with established safety practices.
Perform the Pre-energizing
Check Procedure
1. Remove all blocks or temporary holding means used for shipping all component devices in the MCC.
2. Inspect the enclosure and units for damage.
a. If structural damage is present, contact MCC technical support a t
1.440.646.5800 and follow the prompts to Allen-Bradley > Low Voltage Motor Control Centers > Post Shipment Support.
b. If no structural damage is visible, verify the electrical spacings.
Refer to the tables starting on page 91 for the required minimum electrical spacings.
3. Check and verify that the MCC is properly installed, as described in Chapter 2, and inspect and verify that it is level, supported, and anchored.
4. For MCCs with the 100 ms arc-resistant rating, check that clearance height is at least 12 in. (305 mm).
5. Check the integrity of the bus splice connections.
ATTENTION: To ensure the safety of personnel performing the pre- energizing check, make sure the MCC remote power sources are disconnected and locked in the OFF/O position.
Use a voltmeter to verify that the MCC remote power sources are disconnected.
ATTENTION: Power factor correction capacitors (PFCCs) must be applied correctly. For application instructions refer to Power Factor Correction Capacitors for Bulletin 2100 MCC Starter Units Application Techniques, publication 2100-AT001. When PFCCs are connected to the motor circuit and the start-up procedure requires the respective motors to be jogged, inched, or bumped (rotation direction check), temporarily disconnect PFCCs. For more information contact, Rockwell Automation LV MCC Technical Support at
1.440.646.5800 and follow the prompts to Allen-Bradley > Low Voltage Motor Control Centers > Post Shipment Support.
ATTENTION: Verify that motor acceleration times are within specific application specifications.
Excessive starting currents and/or acceleration times can cause inverse time circuit breakers, power fuses, overload relays, and other components to overheat and/or shutdown equipment.
w
w
w
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 81 Final Checklist Before Energizing Chapter 7
Recommended torque values can be found on the information label on the interior of the vertical wireway door or on the interior right-hand side plate of frame mounted units. See Joining and Splicing V ertical Sections, publication 2100-IN010, for splicing information.
The factory-made power bus connections are tightened by a computer- controlled torquing system. The following connections do not require re-torquing:
• V ertical to horizontal bus connections.
• Power conductor to horizontal bus connections.
These factory-made horizontal to vertical bus connections do not require servicing for the life of the MCC.
6. Check and verify that all ground connections are made properly, based on local standards.
If ground bus is not provided or has been removed, check that the MCC sections are connected to provide a continuous ground path. V erify that 100 ms units are connected to the vertical equipment load ground bus.
7. Check the field wiring.
a. Check the field wiring for proper conductor sizing.
Use the National Electrical Code (NEC) 75 °C (167 °F) wire tables to size the MCC field conductors.
b. Check that all barriers and parts that have been removed during installation have been reinstalled.
Some barriers can be required to be removed for field wiring. c. Check that all incoming and outgoing power wiring is secure and braced to withstand the effects of a fault current as detailed in Chapter 3
.
d. Check that conduit and cabling are well supported.
For incoming line compartments, 2.0 space factors, 26 in. (660.4 mm) or less, firmly secure the incoming cables halfway between the top of the section and the incoming line compartment terminals. In a full section (6.0 space factor) incoming line compartments, brace the cables every 12 in. (305 mm); if the system’s available short circuit current is above 42,000 A but less than 65,000 A rms symmetrical.
Above 65,000 A rms symmetrical available current bracing occurs every 6.5 in. (165 mm). This bracing is in accordance with the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listing and is necessary to withstand forces resulting from high fault currents. For information on cable bracing methods, see Chapter 3
of this publication.
e. Check the integrity of all field connections.
Recommended torque values not found on individual devices can be found on the unit wiring diagrams.
TIP We recommend that a barrier checklist is developed including such items as, unit location, and barrier location. Save this checklist for future reference. 82 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 7 Final Checklist Before Energizing
f. Check field wired connections made to the MCC for agreement with wiring diagrams and verify that proper spacings between adjacent phases and/or phases to ground are being used. Refer to page 91 for the minimum electrical spacing requirements.
8. Check that the voltage and horsepower ratings on the motor correspond with the MCC unit ratings.
9. Check that the overload relays or heater elements are selected, installed and/or adjusted to relative full load current shown on the motor rating nameplate.
10. For applications requiring power fuses, install the fuses in the fusible switches in accordance with the NEC application requirements.
Refer to CENTERLINE Motor Control Centers Power Fuses Product Data,
publication 2100-TD003 for fuse information. Do not apply grease or NO-OX-ID to fuse ferrules. All fuses must be completely inserted in the fuse clips. Recommended torque values for fuse clamp screws can be found on the unit wiring diagram. V erify that all fuses fit each application.
11. For circuit breaker applications, verify that the circuit breakers are in accordance with NEC application requirements, and have correct ampacity and trip settings.
Refer to MCC Instantaneous T rip Motor Circuit Protectors (MCP) in Combination NEMA Starter, Soft Starter (SMC), and V ariable Frequency AC Drive Units Technical Data,
publication 2100-TD001,
and MCC Inverse Time Circuit Breakers in Combination NEMA Starter, Soft Starter (SMC), and V ariable Frequency AC Drive Units T echnical Data, 2100-TD002 for circuit breaker information in MCC units.
12. Refer to the device instruction sheets or manuals supplied with the MCC for specific start-up guidance. Component devices in MCC units such as transfer switches, PFCCs, transducers, motor protectors, line monitors, over and under-voltage relays, and motor windings heaters can require unique start-up procedures. Set and verify adjustable current, voltage, and other settings, according to device instructions or wiring diagrams.
IMPORTANT High efficiency motors can have higher locked rotor and inrush currents. Therefore, higher magnetic trip settings, than those required for equivalent standard motors, can be required.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 83 Final Checklist Before Energizing Chapter 7
Allen-Bradley AC drives and soft starter units are shipped with preset factory settings such as ramp speed, current limits, switch positions, and readouts. Preset factory settings are not be suitable for many applications. Refer to instruction manuals, supplied with the MCC for specific startup guidance.
13. Manually exercise all switches, control auxiliary switches, circuit breakers, their respective operators, unit interlocks, trip mechanisms (test by pushing the ‘Push to T rip’ button), and any other operating mechanisms to verify proper operation.
14. Check timing relay settings as required.
15. Check the vents and fans.
a. Check all vents to ensure they are free from obstructions. b. Check all fans, used for forced air cooling to ensure the shaft rotates without obstructions.
c. Check that filters are in place and clean, and set up an in-house program for scheduled cleaning or replacement.
If you have an MCC with arc-resistant design features, if a unit has been provided with arc resistant baffles over door vents and fans, these baffles must be fastened securely in place to maintain the arc resistant capabilities of the MCC. Do not install any type of filter in place of, or in addition to, the arc resistant baffles.
16. Check all current transformers for proper polarity and ensure their secondaries are not ‘open’ , but are either connected to their respective devices or ‘shorted.’
17. Recheck that all barriers and parts that have been removed during installation have been reinstalled.
Refer to your barrier checklist, see step 7
.
18. Before closing the enclosure and/or individual units, remove all tools, metal chips, scrap wire and other debris from the MCC interior.
ATTENTION: Verify that the parameters of configurable devices, such as drives, soft starters, and overload relays, are suitable for the specific application and change them as needed for the specific application.
ATTENTION: Current transformer secondaries are to be ‘closed’ . To avoid possible injury and electrical shock to personnel, do not energize a current transformer with its secondary open. 84 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 7 Final Checklist Before Energizing
If there is an accumulation of dust or dirt, clean out the MCC by using a brush, vacuum cleaner, or clean, lint-free rag. Do not use compressed air; it redistributes contaminates on other surfaces.
19. Conduct an electrical insulation resistance test to verify the MCC wiring integrity.
Conduct this test by using an insulation resistance tester with a potential of 500…1000V. Conduct this insulation resistance test phase-to-phase, phase-to-ground, and when applicable, phase-to-neutral on the MCC buswork. Conduct the test with all switches or circuit breakers in the open or OFF/O positions. Typical insulation resistance values are 50 MΩ or greater.
Next, check the field wiring; for example, motor cables and incoming line cables. Insulation resistance values are affected by temperature, humidity, or dampness, which can cause a considerably lower insulation resistance reading. If the insulation resistance values are below 1 MΩ (for example, affected by dampness, temperature, or humidity) or the MCC has been stored in a damp or humid area, we recommend that the equipment be dried out. Dry out the motor cables by injecting a low voltage current or by using space heaters.
Once the equipment is dry, repeat the insulation resistance test. The minimum value for insulation resistance on a new installation at startup or energizing is 1 MΩ. Record these readings in the Insulation Resistance Reading Recording T able. Use this table to record additional insulation resistance readings during regular maintenance periods.
20. Check that all arc-resistant parts are installed.
See ArcShield Components for more information.
21. Check that all unit latches are secure.
See Door Latch Position Diagrams for more information.
22. Check that all section closing plates are in place.
23. Check that any SecureConnect units are properly installed.
See SecureConnect Unit Checklist for more information.
24. Close and latch all doors, making certain that no wires are pinched.
Certain applications can have latch requirements different from those provided. If you have questions regarding proper latching, contact Rockwell Automation LV MCC T echnical Support at 1.440.646.5800 and follow the prompts to Allen-Bradley > Low V oltage Motor Control Centers > Post Shipment Support.
Refer to the following illustrations for various latch placements.
ATTENTION: When conducting an electrical insulation resistance test, isolate equipment sensitive to high test voltages, such as meters, solid state devices, motor winding heaters, and capacitor units.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 85 Final Checklist Before Energizing Chapter 7
Door Latch Position Diagrams
Figure 42 - Vertical Wireway Door
Figure 43 - 0.5 Space Factor and Units with Horizontal Disconnect Handles Standard Latches Arc Resistant Latches
Standard Latches Arc Resistant Latches
0.5 Space Factor
1 Space Factor or Larger
I ,
0 ®I I ,
0 ®I
0 0 0 0
(]])
0 0 0 0
(]])
86 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 7 Final Checklist Before Energizing
Figure 44 - 1.0 Space Factor and Units with Vertical Disconnect Handles Standard Latches Arc Resistant Latches
1 Space Factor to 2.5
Space Factor
2.5 Space Factor or
Larger
An arc resistant latch is used for
the center latch only for main
incoming power units and
100 ms arc-resistant rating.
For most units, the center latch is a standard quarter-turn latch. For some units a multi-turn latch is used.
Torque the latch to 20 lb•in +/- 2 lb•in.
0 0 CID
0 0 CID
I I
CID CID
0 0 CID
0 0 CID
I I
CID CID,
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 87 Final Checklist Before Energizing Chapter 7
Figure 45 - 6 Space Factor (full section) Units
When properly latched, the slots on all arc resistant latches are vertical and the latch springs are compressed. The spacing of the spring coils are decreased.
Figure 46 - Spring Compression
An arc resistant latch is used
for the second and fourth
positions. Other latches are
standard quarter turn.
All center latches are arc-
resistant latches for units with
100 ms arc-resistant rating.
Arc Resistant LatchesStandard Latches
Uncompressed Spring Compressed Spring
CID <ID
@
. . . .
@
@ ([)
@ @
88 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 7 Final Checklist Before Energizing
ArcShield Components
Checklist
Figure 47 - Arc-resistant MCC with Insulating Sheet (15 in. deep, right side visible) ATTENTION: Arc resistant CENTERLINE 2100 MCCs are provided with certain components to achieve the arc-resistant rating. These components must be in place prior to using the MCC to maintain the arc resistant capabilities.
TIP Not all of the components and features necessary for the arc-resistant rating are shown in these images.
End Closing Plate
Insulation Sheet
I
,•II • /0 fl fl fl
<El
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 89 Final Checklist Before Energizing Chapter 7
Figure 48 - ArcShield Components
41006-404-01 (1)
HOT GASES MAY BE EXHAUSTED IF AN INTERNAL
ARCING FAULT OCCURS.
WARNING
ARC RESISTANT EQUIPMENT
ACCESSIBILITY: TYPE 2
ARC SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT: ≤ 65 kA
ARC DURATION: ≤ 100 ms
OPERATIONAL VOLTAGE: ≤ 480 V
ARC FLASH HAZARD
DOORS AND COVERS MUST BE PROPERLY
CLOSED, LATCHED, AND SECURED.
EQUIPMENT MUST BE INSTALLED PER
MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS. REFER TO
PUBLICATION 2100-IN012.
ONLY INSTALL ArcShield 100ms / 480V / 65kA
RATED UNITS IN THIS STRUCTURE.
EQUIPMENT WILL NOT FUNCTION AS
ARC RESISTANT IF ABOVE GUIDLINES
ARE NOT FOLLOWED.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE GUIDELINES COULD
RESULT IN SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH.
41006-402-01 (1)
WARNING
PER IEEE C37.20.7-2007
ARC RESISTANT EQUIPMENT
ACCESSIBILITY: TYPE 2
ARC SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT: ≤ 65 kA
ARC DURATION: DEVICE LIMITED
PROTECTIVE DEVICE:
UL LISTED FUSES
CLASS L – FERRAZ-SHAWMUT A4BQ ≤ 1200 A
CLASS R – ANY FUSE ≤ 600 A
CLASS J – ANY FUSE ≤ 600 A
UL LISTED MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
ALLEN-BRADLEY – BULLETIN 140U, FRAME I, JD, or K
CUTLER-HAMMER – SERIES C, FRAME F, J, K, L, M, or N
WARNING
PER IEEE C37.20.7 2007
ARC FLASH HAZARD
THE ARC CONTAINMENT CAPABILITY OF THE MOTOR
CONTROL CENTER IS DEPENDENT UPON THE MAIN
PROTECTIVE DEVICE. PROTECT ONLY WITH UL LISTED
PROTECTIVE DEVICE SPECIFIED ABOVE.
DOORS AND COVERS MUST BE PROPERLY CLOSED,
LATCHED, AND SECURED. EQUIPMENT MUST BE INSTALLED
PER MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS.
REFER TO PUBLICATION 2100-IN012.
EQUIPMENT WILL NOT FUNCTION AS ARC RESISTANT IF
ABOVE GUIDELINES ARE NOT FOLLOWED.
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE GUIDELINES COULD RESULT IN
SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH.
41006-401-01 (1)
Pressure Relief Vent
(100 ms ArcShield™ rating only)
ArcShield Door Latches
Support Pan Screws
Support Brackets
Frame-mount Support
ArcShield Rating Label
Back Corner Baffles (end o
lineup only)
Vertical Support Angle (end
of lineup)
Vertical Wireway Baffle
Top and Bottom Horizontal
Wireway U-nuts
100 ms Rating
Device Limited Rating
90 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 7 Final Checklist Before Energizing
SecureConnect Unit Checklist V erify these items before using a SecureConnect™ unit.
1. Make sure the stab lockout is pushed in.
2. V erify the disconnect handle is OFF/O.
3. Insert the tool in the shaft port and rotate the tool to the right.
The status indicator changes from green to red.
Stab LockoutStatus Port
Shaft
Port
Status Indicator
ATTENTION: SecureConnect units are shipped inside the unit location with stabs in the disconnected position. Prior to powering your horizontal bus, you need to place all SecureConnect units in the connected position.
POWER STABS
LOCKOUT
+...
POWER STABS AND ♦
STAB SHUTTER 1 3
STATUS PORT
REFERENCEPUBI..ICAT10N2100-IN012
PWG-IN POWER STABS
CONNECTED
VERTICAL POWER BUS
,~~~
6---l LJ LJ ~
PLUG-IN POWER STABS
DISCONNECTED
VERTICAL POWER BUS
~
~
3 o-t l-0 4
PLUG-IN
POWER STABS
SHUTTER CLOSED
3 o--tl-0 4
SecureConnect™ ,,j@tj@Bj ( •
• Turn handle "OFP'
• Slkie thls cover open
• Insert 1/4" hex tool
into shaft port
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 91 Final Checklist Before Energizing Chapter 7
Required Minimum Electrical
Spacing
.
Table 7 - Electrical Spacing Requirements for MCCs(1)
(1) An isolated dead metal part, such as a screw head or a washer , interposed between uninsulated parts of opposite polarity or between an uninsulated live part and grounded dead metal, is considered to reduce the spacing by an amount equal to the dimension of the interposed part along the path of measurement.
Voltage
Min Spacing, in. (mm)
Between Live Parts of Opposite Polarity Between Live Parts and Grounded Metal Parts, Through
Air and Over SurfaceThrough Air Over Surface
0…150 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) 0.75 in. (19.1 mm) 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) 151…300 0.75 in. (19.1 mm) 1.25 in. (31.8 mm) 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) 301…600 1.0 in. (25.4 mm) 2.0 in. (50.8 mm) 1.0 in. (25.4 mm) (2) (2) A through-air spacing of not less than 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) is acceptable. at a circuit-breaker or fusible disconnecting means
between grounded dead metal and the neutral of a 3-phase, 4-wire motor control center 601…1000(3)
(3) Applies only to rectified output >600V DC.
1.5 in. (38 mm) 2.5 in. (63 mm) (4)
(4) Through-air spacing required is 1.5 in. (38 mm); over-surface spacing required is 2.0 in. (50 mm).
Table 8 - Spacing Requirements within MCC Units
Voltage
Min Spacing, in. (mm)
Between Uninsulated Live Parts of Opposite
Polarity and Between an Uninsulated Live
Part and an Exposed or Uninsulated Dead
Metal Part other than the Enclosure
Between Uninsulated Live Parts and
the Walls of a Metal Enclosure (1),
Including Fittings for Conduit or
Armored Cable
(1) The enclosure refers to the section enclosure.
Through Air Over Surface Shortest Distance
0…150 0.125 in. (3.2 mm) (2)
(2) The spacing between wiring term inals of opposite polarity shall not be less than 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) if the terminals are in the same plane. A metal piece attached to the enclosure shall be considered to be a part of the enclosure for the purpose of this note if deformation of the enclosure is likely to reduce the spacing between the metal piece and a live part.
0.25 in. (6.4 mm) 0.5 in. (12.7 mm)
151…300 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) 0.375 in. (9.5 mm) 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) 301…600 0.375 in. (9.5 mm) 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) 0.5 in. (12.7 mm) 601…1000(3)
(3) DC circuits derived from rectified AC circuits without increases to the peak nominal voltage can comply with the electrical spacings of the AC supply voltage.
0.55 in. (14 mm) 0.85 in (21.6 mm) (4)
(4) Through-air spacing required is 0.8 in. (20.3 mm); over-surface spacing required is 1.0 in. (25.4 mm). 92 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 7 Final Checklist Before Energizing
Figure 49 - Sample MCC Layout Worksheet
Table 9 - Location of Sample Units within above MCC Layout A
B
D
C
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
1A 2A
1E
1G
Full Width
Section
Vertical Wireway
Horizontal Wireway
Horizontal Wireway
1.0 S.F .
113 in.
(330 mm)
Unit Location
Unit Data
Cat. No. Wiring Diagram
Size or Amp Rating
Description
Full Load Current
Horsepower
Overload or
Heater Elements
Kilowatts
Circuit Breaker Trip Setting
Power Fuse Rating
1A 2113B-EDB-48CA CSXXXXXXXX 4 FVNR 77 60 W73 — C —
1E 2112A-BDBD-24J-38-7FEC1A Y-XXXXXX 1 FVNR 4.8 3 7FECIA — — 10 1G 2100-NJ30 N/A — Blank — — — — — —
2A 2113B-2PAB-56WT Y-XXXXXX 450A FVNR(V) 364 250 W43 — 6 —
I I I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I
i i
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 93 Final Checklist Before Energizing Chapter 7
Table 10 - Unit Description
Unit Type Code Code Description
CN2DN ControlNet to DeviceNet
DNC DeviceNet Connector
DNPS DeviceNet Power Supply
EN2DN Ethernet to DeviceNet
FCBX Insert with Circuit Breaker
FDSX Insert with Fusible Disconnect
FVLC Full Voltage Lighting Contactor
FVR Full Voltage Reversing
FVNR (V) Full Voltage Non-Reversing (Vacuum)
INSRT Unit Insert
LPAN Lighting Panel
(M)BPS MAIN Bolted Pressure Switch
(M)CB MAIN Circuit Breaker
(M)FDS MAIN Fusible Disconnect Switch
(M)LUG MAIN Line Lugs
METER Metering Unit
NCP Neutral Connection Plate
NLD ControlNet to DeviceNet
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
RVAT Reduced Voltage Autotransformer
SMC Solid State Motor Controller
SPD Surge Protection Device
TERM Terminal Unit
TS1W (R) Two-Speed One Winding (Reversing)
TS2W (R) Two-Speed Two Winding (Reversing)
VFD (VT) Variable Frequency Drive (Variable Torque)
VFD (CT) Variable Frequency Drive (Constant Torque)
VFDR Variable Frequency Drive Supplemental Unit
XFMR Transformer
94 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 7 Final Checklist Before Energizing
Table 11 - MCC Layout Worksheet
MCC Name / Number ___________________________________________________________ Unit Location
Unit Data
Cat. No. Wiring Diagram
Size or Ampere Rating
Description
Full Load Current
Horsepower
Overload or Heater Elements
Kilowatts
Circuit Breaker Trip Setting
Power Fuse Rating
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 95 Final Checklist Before Energizing Chapter 7
Table 12 - Insulation Resistance Reading Recording Table MCC Name / Number ___________________________________________________________ Date
Circuit / Unit
Name / Number
Phase-to-Phase Phase-to-Ground Phase-to-Neutral
A - B B - C C - A A - Grd. B - Grd. C - Grd. A - Neut. B - Neut. C - Neut. 96 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 7 Final Checklist Before Energizing
Notes:
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 97 Chapter 8
Energizing the Equipment
Energize the Equipment T o energize the equipment, follow these steps.
1. Review any additional instructions supplied for the proper operation of special units such as variable frequency drives and soft starters with appropriate and qualified personnel.
2. Check that there is no load on the MCC when it is energized.
3. De-energize all main and unit disconnect devices.
4. Check to see if any associated remote devices are de-energized.
5. Energize the MCC remote power source.
6. Energize the main devices followed by the feeder devices and the branch circuit devices.
Always energize from the source of the system, working towards the loads.
ATTENTION: This procedure is provided as general guidance for energizing a newly installed CENTERLINE® MCC after the Final Check procedure has been completed. See Final Checklist Before Energizing for more information.
ATTENTION: Energizing a MCC for the first time is potentially dangerous.
Serious damage and or personal injury can result when power is applied.
Therefore, allow only qualified personnel to energize the equipment.
ATTENTION: When working on or near energized electrical equipment, follow established electrical safety-related work practices. Refer to NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
ATTENTION: Operate the disconnect-device handles s with a firm, direct motion. Do not ‘tease’ the handles into the closed (ON/I) position. w
w
w
w
98 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 8 Energizing the Equipment
7. After all of the disconnects have been closed, energize loads such as, lighting circuits, motor starters, and contactors.
a. When power-factor correction capacitors are energized with the motor windings and the start-up procedure requires that the respective motors be jogged or inched, temporarily disconnect the power factor correction capacitors.
For more information on power factor capacitors and MCC units, refer to the Power Factor Correction Capacitors for Bulletin 2100 Motor Control Center Starter Units Application T echniques, publication 2100-A T001.
b. V erify that any acceleration times are within application specifications.
Excessive starting currents and acceleration times can cause inverse time circuit breakers, power fuses, overload relays, and other components to overheat and shut down the equipment.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 99 Chapter 9
Maintenance
Establish a periodic maintenance program for MCCs to avoid unnecessary downtime. The frequency of service to the MCC depends on the equipment usage and the operating environment. The following is a suggested checklist and can be used to establish a maintenance program.
Maintain the MCC T o maintain your MCC, follow these steps.
1. Inspect the MCCs once per year or per established maintenance program.
2. Carefully inspect doors and enclosure sides for evidence of excessive heat.
3. Check for moisture or any signs of dampness or drippings inside the MCC.
a. Seal off conduit, cracks, and openings that have let and/or could let moisture enter the MCC enclosure.
b. Dry or replace and clean insulating material that is damp or wet or shows signs of moisture.
c. Check devices such as contactors, circuit breakers, disconnect switches, relays, and push buttons for wetness or signs of moisture, corrosion, or contamination.
d. Replace damaged or malfunctioning parts.
4. Check the integrity of bus splice connections.
Bus splices can be easily identified by the label on the interior of the vertical wireway door or on the interior right-hand side plate of frame mounted units. Recommended torque values can be found on the information label on the interior of the vertical wireway door or on the interior right-hand side plate of frame mounted units.
ATTENTION: De-energize the MCC before servicing.
IMPORTANT Condensation in conduit or dripping from an outside source is a common cause of MCC failure. Eliminate any source of moisture. 100 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 9 Maintenance
The factory-made power bus connections are tightened by a computer- controlled torquing system. The following connections do not require re-torquing, vertical to horizontal bus connections and power conductor to horizontal bus connections. These factory-made connections do not require servicing for the life of the MCC.
5. Periodically clean or replace the air filters depending on the environmental conditions.
6. Check for the proper function and freedom of movement (no sticking or binding) for the disconnect handle operating and defeater mechanisms.
7. Replace broken, deformed, malfunctioning, or badly worn parts or assemblies.
8. Inspect unit bus-stab connections for wear or corrosion.
W ear and/or corrosion can increase resistance and cause an increased temperature of the contact point, leading to failure. Replace bus stabs if wear or corrosion is excessive. Lubricate bus stabs with NO-OX-ID grease (catalog number 2100H-N18 or 2100H-N18T) before installing the unit into the section.
9. Inspect current carrying parts such as fuse clips, knife blades of disconnects, and line and load terminals of devices for discoloration, corrosion, or other signs of wear or possible failure.
10. Check locking or interlocking devices for proper working condition.
11. Adjust, repair, or replace any device if necessary.
ATTENTION: When working on or near energized electrical equipment, follow established electrical safety-related work practices. Refer to NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
To prevent injury or death to personnel lubricating disconnect switch contacts, make sure the MCC power sources are disconnected and the respective disconnects are locked in the OFF/O position. For plug-in units, remove the unit from the MCC.
To prevent personal injury or damage to equipment, make sure that the unit handle operator is in the OFF/O position before removing the unit.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 101 Maintenance Chapter 9
12. Check power contacts for excessive wear and dirt accumulation and vacuum or wipe contacts with a soft cloth to remove dirt as needed.
Contacts are not harmed by discoloration and slight pitting. Never file contacts, as this could reduce the life of the contacts. Do not use contact spray cleaners, as they cause sticking on magnetic pole faces or in operating mechanisms, interfering with the electrical continuity of the contacts. Replace contacts only after the silver has become badly worn.
Always replace contacts in complete sets to avoid misalignment and uneven contact pressure.
13. Check for loose wire connections on power and control circuit terminals.
Loose connections can cause overheating, hot spots, or arcing faults that could lead to equipment malfunction or failure. Replace any damaged parts or wiring.
14. Check contactor and relay coils for evidence of overheating, such as cracking, melting, or burning of insulation.
If there is evidence of overheating, the coil must be replaced. When replacing a coil, check and correct the overvoltage or undervoltage conditions that can cause the coil failure. Be sure to clean any residue of melted coil insulation from other parts of the device and replace as necessary.
15. Check all pilot lights and replace lamps and damaged lenses as necessary.
16. Check all fuses.
If replacing fuses, install the same type and rated fuse that was originally furnished with the MCC.
17. Remove accumulated dust and dirt from structure and individual units by vacuuming.
Do not use compressed air, as it can contain moisture and blow debris within the enclosure.
18. Refer to individual user policies, NFPA 70B, Recommended Practice for Electrical Equipment Maintenance for MCC Servicing Guidelines. 102 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 9 Maintenance
Disconnect Switch and
Contact Lubrication
If a switch that is used frequently becomes difficult to operate or is in a highly corrosive or caustic environment, it can require lubrication. The lubricant to be used is NO-OX-ID Compound (catalog number 2100H-N18 for a 1 pt can or catalog number 2100H-N18T for a 1 oz tube). T o obtain the lubricant, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative.
1. Determine your unit type.
Plug-in Units
If a disconnect switch requires lubrication and is housed in a plug-in unit, remove the plug-in unit from the MCC (for removal of unit, refer to Chapter 4
, Installing and Removing Plug-in Units, before lubricating the switch).
Frame Mounted Units
If a disconnect switch requires lubrication and is housed in a frame mounted unit, turn off the power sources to the MCC so the switch can be lubricated.
Save all parts for reinstallation.
2. Remove the line guard from the disconnect.
3. For access to the disconnect's stationary contacts, remove the arc hood.
4. Generously apply the NO-OX-ID compound (sufficient enough to cover with a noticeable film) to both sides of the movable contact blades and to the adjacent insides stationary contacts and the hinge.
5. Reinstall the arc hood that was removed in step 3
.
6. Reinstall the line guard cover that was removed in step 2 .
7. If the lubricated disconnect switch is housed in a plug-in unit, reinstall the unit.
ATTENTION: Follow NFPA 70E safety guidelines when working on energized equipment.
To prevent injury or death to personnel lubricating disconnect switch contacts, make sure any MCC power sources are disconnected and the respective disconnects are locked in the OFF/O position. For plug-in units, remove the unit from the MCC.
To prevent personal injury or damage to equipment, make sure that the unit handle operator is in the OFF/O position before removing the unit.
ATTENTION: To prevent injury or death to personnel lubricating disconnect switch contacts, make sure that the MCC remote power sources are disconnected and the respective disconnects are locked in the OFF/O position.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 103 Maintenance Chapter 9
For installation of unit, refer to Installing Units with V ertical Operating Handles, publication 2100-IN014.
If the unit requires lubrication because of corrosion (for example, a sulfuric environment), replacing the unit disconnect can be required to avoid overheating conditions. Lubrication can temporarily resolve overheating, however replacing the disconnect switch is the ideal, long-term solution.
Use Thermal Infrared or
Other Temperature
Measurement Techniques for
Preventive Maintenance
Use the following procedure when using thermal infrared or other temperature measurement techniques as part of a periodic preventative maintenance program on CENTERLINE® 2100 Low V oltage MCCs.
1. Use test equipment to determine the temperature differential and the temperature rise of accessible components within the unit.
2. Determine the services and repair recommendations based on the temperature category in the following guidance chart.
ATTENTION: Temperature measuring techniques are often performed with the units fully energized and the doors and covers open.
Use extreme caution when performing these measurements so that energized parts are not shorted.
If care is not taken, electrical shock, severe injury or death can result.
When working on or near energized electrical equipment, follow established electrical safety-related work practices. Refer to NFPA 70E Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace.
Table 13 - Temperature Guidance
Category Temperature
Differential(1) Temperature
Rise (2) Repair/Service
°C °F °C °F Service Interval Recommended Action
1 < 10° < 18° < 70° < 126° No service or repair required. See step 1 below. 2 10°...25° 18°...45° 70°...100° 126°...180° Service or repair the unit at next maintenance schedule (not greater than six months but continue monitoring as a part of preventive maintenance.)
See step 2 below.
3 25°...50° 45°...90° 100°...115° 180°...207° S ervice or repair the unit within the next two weeks and monitor the unit at the next maintenance interval.
4 > 50° > 90° > 115° > 207° Shutdown the unit and repair. Verify that the temperature is reduced after re-energization.
(1) Temperature (measured or rise) differential between adjacent phases or like elements. Load between phases must be balanced with a normal variation not exceeding seven percent. (2) Measured temperature less ambient.
Due to difficulty obtaining accurate infrared temperature measurements from highly reflective surfaces, we recommend using temperature differential readings in determining the Service/Repair guidelines, for example, emissivity of tin or silver plated material. 104 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 9 Maintenance
Inspect the Units for Signs of Overheating
1. If there are no signs of overheating and thermal infrared tests indicate service is not necessary, document the units as acceptable.
Use this information for reviewing the mean time to maintenance for preventative maintenance for the specific facility.
2. If there are no signs of overheating, but thermal infrared tests indicate service is required, check the power connections for proper torque. a. On disconnect switches, service the knife blades with a Scotch-Brite cleansing pad.
b. Remove all hardened grease.
T ake care not to distort the disconnect jaw (stationary contact). c. Lubricate with a fine film of NO-OX-ID (catalog number 2100H- N18 for a 0.47 L (1 pt) can, or catalog number 2100H-N18T for a
29.5 ml (1 oz) tube).
If the disconnect is subject to environmental conditions causing chronic tarnishing, it can be necessary to determine if there is an incompatibility in the plating material, for example, hydrogen sulfide and silver plating.
On fuses and fuse clips, service by polishing with a Scotch-Brite cleansing pad. Do not lubricate the fuses or the fuse clips.
3. If overheating has occurred as indicated by severe tarnishing, infrared test results, crystallization of insulation on conductors, discoloration of the components, darkening of the molding materials, brittle conductor insulation, or deformation and melting of parts, replace the components that are suspect.
For more information contact, Rockwell Automation LV MCC T echnical Support at 1.440.646.5800 and follow the prompts to Allen-Bradley > Low Voltage Motor Control Centers > Post Shipment Support.
ATTENTION: To service the units, make sure that the MCC remote power sources are disconnected and that the respective disconnects are locked in the OFF/O position.
If servicing a plug-in unit, remove it from the MCC to facilitate servicing. Refer to Chapter 2
of this publication for unit removal guidelines.
When plugging units back in, refer to CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers (MCC) Units with Vertical Operating Handles Installation Instructions, publication 2100-IN014, and CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Center (MCC) Units with Horizontal Operating Handles Installation Instructions, publication 2100-IN060.
w
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 105 Chapter 10
Maintenance after Fault Condition
Maintain the MCC after a
Fault Condition
The opening of the short circuit protective device (such as fuses or circuit breakers) in a properly coordinated motor branch circuit is an indication of a fault condition in excess of operating overload and must be corrected.
Fault conditions can cause damage to control equipment. When a fault occurs, follow this procedure.
1. De-energize the MCC.
2. Investigate the cause of the fault and inspect all equipment thoroughly per NEMA Standards publication ICS 2.3-1995, Instructions for the handling installation operator and maintenance of MCCs not rated more than 600V , Section 11, Maintenance after a Fault has Occurred.
3. Make necessary repairs to units, components and structures as required, prior to reenergizing the equipment.
Be sure that replacement parts are suitably rated for the application.
An insulation resistance test can be required. Refer to Chapter 7 .
ATTENTION: Make sure that the MCC remote power sources are disconnected and that the respective disconnects are locked in the OFF/O position.
106 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 10 Maintenance after Fault Condition
Notes:
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 107 Chapter 11
Renewal Parts
A Renewal Parts Stocking Program for MCCs is recommended in conjunction with a maintenance program. This is important for minimizing expensive downtime and to be able to facilitate critical repairs.
Factors to consider when developing an effective Renewal Parts Stocking Program include the following:
• The frequency of ON-OFF cycling and the amount of ON or operating time.
• The need for items such as continuous operation, inherent design limitations, and environmental considerations.
• The total number of similar devices supplied as original equipment within the MCC.
• Individual user policies governing spare parts.
Consider stocking complete units when the job site is in an area remote from a distributor or district sales office or when it is critical to maintain continuous operation of a system.
Order Information The following information is required when ordering renewal parts:
• Description of part or unit
• Series letter
•P a r t o r c a t a l o g n u m b e r
•Q u a n t i t y
• Shipping address
• MCC serial number and complete nameplate data
Refer to Chapter 12
, Parts Illustration, for pictures and descriptions of
common section and unit parts.
108 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 11 Renewal Parts
Notes:
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 109 Chapter 12
Parts Illustrations
Typical Section Construction
Lifting Angle
Top Horizontal
Wireway Baffle
Top Horizontal
Wireway Cover
Right Hand Unit Support Vertical
Wireway Assembly
Bus Splice Access Cover
Section Nameplate
Vertical Wireway Door
Vertical to Horizontal Bus Connection
Access Cover
Vertical Bus Support Cover
Unit Support Pan
Sealing Strap
Top and Bottom
Bottom Support Angle
Bottom Horizontal
Wireway Cover
Left Hand
Bottom End Closing Plate
Horizontal Ground Bus
Top or Bottom
Left Hand Side Plate Assembly
Vertical Plug-in Ground
Bus
Left Hand
Center End Plate
Horizontal Power Bus
Vertical Power Bus
Horizontal and Vertical Bus
Support
Left Hand
Top End Closing Plate
Removable Top Plate
/,
--......... .,,,.
-~-;(;:;--
;;~r""_/ <)
_,,
110 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 12 Parts Illustrations
Typical Construction of a Unit with a Vertical Operating Handle Unit Stab Assembly
Unit Handle Interlock
Circuit Breaker or Fusible
Disconnect (shown)
Disconnect Handle
Unit Identification Nameplate
Diagram Pocket
Captive Latch
Starter or Contactor
Control Circuit
Fuses and Fuse
Block
Auxiliary
Contacts
Control Transformer Fusing
and Fuse Block
Control Circuit Transformer (not
shown)
Power and Control
Terminal Blocks Short Circuit Rating Label
UL LabelCaptive Latch
Control Station
Pilot Devices
Reset Button
Unit Support Pan
Plastic Retaining Pin
Overload
Handle Cutout
Unit Door
Defeater Mechanism
Bulletin 2112, Size 1, FVNR with
Transformer Shown
Unit Nameplate
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 111 Parts Illustrations Chapter 12
Typical Construction of a Half Space Factor Unit with a Horizontal Operating Handle and Door Mounted Pilot Devices
Unit Support Pan Bushing
Unit Support Pan
Plastic Retaining Pin
Unit Latch/Interlock
Pilot Devices
Control Circuit Fuse block
and Fuses
Control Terminal Block
Handle Mechanism
Circuit Breaker (shown) or
Fusible Disconnect
Control Circuit Transformer Unit Stab Assembly
Overload RelayContactor or Starter
Starter
Unit Nameplate
Unit Door
112 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Chapter 12 Parts Illustrations
Typical Construction of a Unit with a Horizontal Operating Handle Unit Support Pan Bushing
Unit Support Pan
Plastic Retaining Pin
Unit Latch/Interlock
Pilot Devices
Control Circuit Fuse
block and Fuses
Control Terminal BlockHandle Mechanism
Circuit Breaker (shown) or
Fusible Disconnect
Control Circuit Transformer Unit Stab Assembly
Overload Relay
Contactor or Starter
Auxiliary Contacts
Unit Nameplate
Unit Door
Bulletin 2413, IEC Style ShownI ___ _ ---11
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 113 Appendix A
Bulletin 140G Unit Assembly Instructions
Vertical Handle Units These procedures show how to remove, install, verify, and adjust a Bulletin 140G circuit breaker in a vertical handle unit. Some items of the unit are not shown in the illustrations for clarity.
Required Tools
Y ou need a screwdriver, a Phillips screwdriver, a socket set with extension, and a torque wrench to complete the installation.
Remove Circuit Breaker
T o remove a circuit breaker, follow these steps.
1. See Chapter 4 for instruction to remove a unit from the MCC.
2. Place the unit on a clean, flat surface.
IMPORTANT Use caution not to bend power stabs if the unit is resting on a table. 114 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Appendix A Bulletin 140G Unit Assembly Instructions
3. Remove the top plate and handle assembly.
a. Remove the unit interlock screw (5/16 in.), press the tabs together, and remove the unit interlock.
b. T o remove the top plate, remove the top plate screws. c. Optional - remove handle assembly from the right side.
There are two screws on bottom and two screws on the inside top and bottom (5/16 in.).
d. Remove the linkage from the bale.
4. Disconnect the circuit breaker wiring.
a. Remove terminal cover mounting screw and slide the terminal cover forward (click when pulling).
b. T o remove the line side connection (top wires) use an allen wrench (G and H-frame 5 mm hex, J-frame 6 mm).
Make note of the phasing of the cables.
c. T o remove the load side connection (bottom wires) use an allen wrench (G and H-frame 5 mm hex, J-frame 6 mm).
TIP For SecureConnect™ units, cut wire tie and to remove wires.
Unit Interlock
Unit Interlock
Screw
Top Plate
Handle
Assembly
Linkage
Bale
Top Plate Screws
Handle
Assembly
Screws
Handle
Assembly
Screws
Circuit
Breaker
Wiring
Terminals
V ◄-----=,:-::.----»:.,::::-
I I
I
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 115 Bulletin 140G Unit Assembly Instructions Appendix A
5. Place the circuit breaker in the ON position.
Use a large slotted screwdriver (we recommend a 3/8 or 1/2 in. wide blade) to remove the bale.
6. T o remove the bale, on the left side of the bale, place the screwdriver flat on the side and rotate the screwdriver.
7. T o remove the circuit breaker, remove two Phillips screws.
Save the lock washers and screws.
Install Circuit Breaker
T o install the Bulletin 140G circuit breaker in a vertical handle unit, follow these steps.
1. Attach the handle assembly to the mounting plate by using #10-32 x
0.38 thread-forming screws and tighten to 20…40 lb•in
(2.25…4.50 N•m).
2. If optional external auxiliary contacts are used, attach the external auxiliary bracket (not included in the kit) to the circuit breaker base.
3. Position the base on the mounting plate.
Use the vertical mounting holes (2100V).
4. Mount the base to the mounting plate by using #8-32 x 1.62 Pan head screws (G frame units); #8-32 x 0.81 Pan head screws (H and J frame units).
Bale
Circuit
Breaker
Phillips
Screws and
Lock Washers
IMPORTANT Keep the base flat during assembly; do not support it on the side.
Keep the left screw on the bracket base loose to adjust the bracket later. 116 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Appendix A Bulletin 140G Unit Assembly Instructions
5. Tighten to 18 lb•in (2.03 N•m).
6. Mount the circuit breaker to the base by using screws (included with the circuit breaker), split lock washers, and flat washers (use washers from the existing unit).
7. Tighten to 10 lb•in (1.13 N•m).
8. Put the circuit breaker ON/OFF switch to the ‘ON’ position.
9. Install the bale on to the circuit breaker base.
The bale snaps into place on both sides of the circuit breaker base. (If the bale does not snap in easily, check the orientation of the bale.) TIP The wires from internal accessories on the right side of the circuit breaker are routed under the circuit breaker in the ‘trough’ in the base so they exit on the left.
Mounting
Plate
Base
Circuit Breaker bale
Supplied with Circuit Breaker
10 lb•in (1.13 N•m)
#8-32 Pan head screw
18 lb•in (2.03 N•m)
The circuit breaker and the mounting plate are
not included in the repair kit.
Vertical Mounting Holes
2100V
Circuit Breaker
On/Off Switch
IMPORTANT The circuit breaker must be in the ‘ON’ position to install the bale.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 117 Bulletin 140G Unit Assembly Instructions Appendix A
10. Move the circuit breaker/bale to the ‘OFF’ position.
11. Engage the linkage to the bale.
12. V erify that the circuit breaker operates correctly.
See Veri f y O p erati o n and Adjust Circuit Breaker Position.
13. Snap the auxiliary contacts to the bracket.
14. Attach the line-side wiring and tighten to 53 lb•in (6 N•m) for G and H frame units; tighten to 71 lb•in (8 N•m) for J Frame units.
15. Add the line terminal cover to the line side (not included in the kit).
16. Insert the terminal cover screw (not provided with the kit), and tighten to 8 lb•in (0.90 N•m).
17. Attach the load-side wiring and tighten to 53 lb•in (6 N•m) for G and H frame units; tighten to 71 lb•in(8 N•m) for J frame units.
18. Install the load side phase separators on the load side (not supplied with the kit).
V erify that the phase separators are pushed down completely so that they are flush with the cover.
Base Circuit Breaker
Bale
Linkage
Click
Line Terminal Cover
Phase
Separators
TIP If wired accessories are included in the circuit breaker, route accessory wires under the circuit breaker in the ‘trough’ in the base.
Verify that all accessory wires exit on the left side of the assembly, above the bale connection point. Use wire ties to avoid tangled wires in the unit. 118 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Appendix A Bulletin 140G Unit Assembly Instructions
Verify Operation
T o verify operation, follow these steps.
1. Make sure the circuit breaker/bale is in the ‘ON’ position, push the ‘T rip’ button on the circuit breaker, and observe that the toggle on the circuit breaker and the switch on the handle have moved to the tripped position.
2. Attempt to move the handle from the tripped position to the ‘OFF’ position and back again to ‘ON’ to verify reset of the circuit breaker.
If the handle does not move to the ‘ON’ position, adjust the circuit breaker position and retry the trip sequence.
Adjust Circuit Breaker Position
T o adjust the circuit breaker position, follow these steps.
1. Loosen the two circuit breaker mounting screws.
2. T urn the adjustment screw on the top of the base assembly to the right (clockwise) to move the circuit breaker higher in the unit.
T urn the adjustment screw on the top of the base assembly to the left to lower the circuit breaker in the unit.
3. If optional external auxiliary contacts are used, after the external contacts have been snapped on, adjust the auxiliary bracket until the bale contacts the plunger on the front contact when in the ‘ON’ position and tighten to 20 lb•in (2.25 N•m).
4. Tighten the two circuit breaker mounting screws to 10 lb•in (1.13 N•m).
TIP The adjustment distance is limited. If you feel resistance when you turn the adjustment screw (and you confirmed that you have already loosened the circuit breaker mounting screws), you have reached the adjustment limit.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 119 Bulletin 140G Unit Assembly Instructions Appendix A
Horizontal Handle and Space
Saving Design
These procedures show how to remove, install, verify, and adjust a Bulletin 140G circuit breaker in a horizontal handle unit. Some items of the unit are not shown in the illustrations for clarity.
Required Tools
Y ou need a screwdriver, a Phillips screwdriver, a socket set with extension, and a torque wrench to complete the installation.
Remove Circuit Breaker
T o remove a circuit breaker, follow these steps.
1. See Chapter 4 for instruction to remove a unit from the MCC.
2. Place the unit on a clean, flat surface.
3. Remove the white mounting screw from under the handle assembly.
4. Disconnect any terminal blocks if necessary.
5. For space saving design, remove the auxiliary bracket.
6. Disengage linkage from the bale under the circuit breaker.
IMPORTANT Use caution not to bend power stabs if the unit is resting on a table.
White Mounting Screw Linkage From Bale
Auxillary Bracket
(space saving design)
I
I
I
/
/
-
/
,/
----
~
'--
:,/.._
'--
------
-
120 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Appendix A Bulletin 140G Unit Assembly Instructions
7. Place the circuit breaker in the ON position.
Use a large slotted screwdriver (we recommend a 3/8 or 1/2 in. wide blade) to remove the bale.
8. T o remove the bale, on the top side of the bale, place the screwdriver flat on the side and rotate the screwdriver.
9. Disconnect the circuit breaker wiring.
a. Remove terminal cover mounting screw and slide the terminal cover forward (click when pulling).
b. T o remove the line side connection use an allen wrench (G and H- frame 5 mm hex, J-frame 6 mm).
Make note of the phasing of the cables.
c. T o remove the load side connection use an allen wrench (G and H- frame 5 mm hex, J-frame 6 mm).
10. T o remove the circuit breaker, remove two Phillips screws.
Save the lock washers and screws.
Line Side Wiring
Load Side Wiring
Circuit Breaker
Mounting Screws
Bale
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 121 Bulletin 140G Unit Assembly Instructions Appendix A
Install Circuit Breaker
Follow these steps to install the Bulletin 140G circuit breaker in a horizontal handle unit.
1. Mount the circuit breaker base to the mounting plate by using #8-32 x
1.62 Pan head screws (G frame units); #8-32 x 0.81 Pan head screw (H and J frame units).
Use the horizontal mounting holes (2100H).
2. Tighten to 18 lb•in (2.03 N•m)
3. Mount the circuit breaker to the base by using screws (included with the circuit breaker), split lock washers, and flat washers (use washers from the existing unit) and tighten to 10 lb•in (1.13 N•m).
4. Put the circuit breaker ON/OFF switch to the ‘ON’ position.
Mounting
Plate Base
Circuit Breaker
bale
Supplied with Circuit Breaker
10 lb•in (1.13 N•m)
#8-32 Pan head screw
18 lb•in (2.03 N•m)
Adjustment
Screw
Horizontal Mounting
Holes 2100H
122 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Appendix A Bulletin 140G Unit Assembly Instructions
5. Install the bale on to the circuit breaker base.
The bale snaps into place on both sides of the circuit breaker base. (If the bale does not snap in easily, check the orientation of the bale.)
6. Attach the line-side wiring and tighten to 53 lb•in (6 N•m) for G and H frame units; tighten to 71 lb•in (8 N•m) for J Frame units.
7. Add the line terminal cover to the line side (not included in the kit).
8. Insert the terminal cover screw and washer (not provided with the kit), and tighten to 8 lb•in (0.90 N•m).
9. Attach the load-side wiring and tighten to 53 lb•in (6 N•m) for G and H frame units; tighten to 71 lb•in (8 N•m) for J frame units.
10. Install the load-side phase separators on the load side (not supplied with the kit).
V erify that the phase separators are pushed down completely so that they are flush with the cover.
IMPORTANT The circuit breaker must be in the ‘ON’ position to install the bale.
Base
bale
Handle Linkage
Stud
Notch in bale
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 123 Bulletin 140G Unit Assembly Instructions Appendix A
11. Attach the handle assembly to the base plate by using #10-32 x 0.38 hex head thread-forming screws and tighten to 24…40 lb•in
(2.7…4.5 N•m).
12. With the handle in the ‘OFF’ position, align the tab on the bale with the slot in the mounting plate and secure with a #10-32 x 0.38 hex head thread-forming screw.
13. With the handle and the circuit breaker in the ‘OFF’ position, engage the linkage to the notch in the bale.
14. Attach the external auxiliary contacts to the bracket.
Handle Linkage
Stud
Notch in bale
Handle
Assembly
#10-32 x 0.38 hex head
24…40 lb•in (2.7…4.5 N•m)
Handle Linkage
Stud
Notch in bale
Tab on bale
Slot on
Mounting Plate
.
\
' \
I .,,-J _.,,-
-✓
-/
... ___ ... .,.,,,,,-
124 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Appendix A Bulletin 140G Unit Assembly Instructions
Verify Operation
1. Make sure the circuit breaker/bale is in the ‘ON’ position, push the ‘T rip’ button on the circuit breaker, and observe that the toggle on the circuit breaker and the switch on the handle have moved to the tripped position.
2. Attempt to move the handle from the tripped position to the ‘OFF’ position and back again to ‘ON’ to verify reset of the circuit breaker.
If the handle does not move to the ‘ON’ position, adjust the circuit breaker position and retry the trip sequence.
Adjust the Circuit Breaker Position
Follow these steps to adjust the circuit breaker position.
1. Loosen the two circuit breaker mounting screws.
2. T urn the adjustment screw on the top of the base assembly to the right (clockwise) to move the circuit breaker higher in the unit.
T urn the adjustment screw on the top of the base assembly to the left to lower the circuit breaker in the unit.
3. After the external contacts have been snapped on, adjust the auxiliary bracket until the bale contacts the plunger on the front contact when in the ‘ON’ position and tighten to these values:
• 32 lb•in (3.62 N•m) for #8 screws
• 18 lb•in (2.0 N•m) for #6 screws
4. Tighten the two circuit breaker mounting screws to 10 lb•in (1.13 N•m).
TIP The adjustment distance is limited. If you feel resistance when you turn the adjustment screw (and you confirmed that you have already loosened the circuit breaker mounting screws), you have reached the adjustment limit.
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 125 Appendix B
Auxiliary Contact Adapters
Use these instructions to install an external auxiliary contact adapter in CENTERLINE® 2100 Series Z and later units with circuit breakers (Bulletin 140G and 140MG).
The auxiliary contact kits are to be used with the following auxiliary contacts:
catalog numbers 800F-X10, 800F-X01, 800F-X20D, 800F-X11D, and 800F-X02D.
Install External Auxiliary
Contact Adapter on G, H, and
J Frame Horizontal Units
Follow these instructions for installing auxiliary contacts on G, H, and J frame horizontal units.
These kits contain parts to install external auxiliary contacts in units that are the following types:
•U n i t s w i t h h o r i z o n t a l o p e r a t i n g h a n d l e s • Have one of the following circuit breakers: Bulletin 140G, 140MG • Bulletin 2100 Series Z and later
Required Tools
Y ou need a screwdriver, a Phillips screwdriver, and a hexalobular T-15 screwdriver to complete the installation.
ATTENTION: De-energize all of the power sources to the motor control center before installing the auxiliary contact adapter. Failure to de-energize all of the power sources can result in severe injury or death.
ATTENTION: De-energize all of the power sources before installing auxiliary contact. Failure to de-energize all of the power sources can result in severe injury or death.
126 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Appendix B Auxiliary Contact Adapters
Install the Auxiliary Contact Adapter
Follow these steps and refer to Assembly of External Auxiliary Contact Parts to install the auxiliary contact adapter.
1. Remove the unit from the section before attempting to install the auxiliary contacts.
For instructions on removing the unit, refer to Remove a Plug-in Unit with a Horizontal Operating Handle from a Section on page 57.
2. V erify the parts list, see Assembly of External Auxiliary Contact Parts.
3. Attach the auxiliary contact assembly to the handle mounting plate by using two #6-32 x 0.25 hexalobular T-15 pan-head screws.
4. Attach the horizontal handle auliliary bracket to the unit by using two #8-32 x 0.38 thread forming screws.
5. Tighten to these values:
• 32 lb•in (3.62 N•m) for #8 screws
• 18 lb•in (2.0 N•m) for #6 screws
6. T urn the operator handle to the ON/I position to verify that the auxiliary contacts change state.
7. Check continuity to verify proper operation of the auxiliary contacts.
Figure 50 - Horizontal Units
TIP These external auxiliary contacts are actuated by the unit operating handle only, and do not reflect a circuit breaker trip.
Parts List
(1) Auxiliary Contact Assembly
(1) Horizontal Handle Auxiliary Bracket
(2) #8-32 x 0.38 Screw
(2) #6-32 x 0.25 Screw
Auxiliary Contact
Normally Open or
Auxiliary Contact
Normally Closed
#8-32 x 0.38 Screw
Auxiliary Contact
Bracket
Horizontal Handle
Auxiliary Bracket
IMPORTANT: Unit mounting plate and devices
have been omitted in this drawing for clarity.
#6-32 Hexalobular T-15
Pan-head Screw
Handle Mounting
Plate
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 127 Auxiliary Contact Adapters Appendix B
Install External Auxiliary
Contact Adapter on G, H, J,
and K Frame Units
Follow these instructions to install an external auxiliary contact adapter in Bulletin 2100 Series Z or later units with circuit breakers (Bulletin 140G and 140MG). The instructions are the same for single and dual units.
This auxiliary contact kit is to be used with the following auxiliary contacts:
Catalog numbers 800F-X10, 800F-X01, 800F-X20D, 800F-X11D, and 800F-X02D.
Required Tools
Y ou need a screwdriver, a 1/4” wrench or socket, a 5/16” wrench or socket, and a torque wrench.
Installation
Refer to Figure 51 and use the following steps to install external auxiliary contact adapter.
1. Make sure that all of the power has been disconnected.
2. V erify the parts list.
3. Install auxiliary contacts.
4. Attach the external auxiliary contact assembly to the mounting plate by using one #8-32 x 0.38 inch thread-rolling screw.
5. Tighten to these vaules:
• 20 lb•in (2.2 N•m) for #6-20 screws
• 32 lb•in (3.6 N•m) for #8-32 screws
6. Check continuity to ensure proper operation of auxiliary contacts.
TIP De-energize all of the power sources to the motor control center before installing auxiliary contact adapter. Failure to de-energize all of the power sources can result in severe injury or death.
128 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Appendix B Auxiliary Contact Adapters
Figure 51 - External Auxiliary Contact Adapter on G, H, J, and K Frame Units 140G - G, H, and J Frames
140G - K Frames
Parts List
(1) Auxiliary Contact Assembly
(1)Handle Bracket
(2) #8-32 x 0.38 screws,
or
(2) #6-20 x 0.56 screwsAuxiliary Contact
Normally Open or
Auxiliary Contact
Normally Closed
Handle Bracket
#6-20 x 0.56 screw
Auxiliary Contact Normally Open
or Auxiliary Contact Normally
Closed
Handle Bracket
#8-32 x 0.38 screw
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 129 Auxiliary Contact Adapters Appendix B
Install External Auxiliary
Contact Adapter on M and N
Frame Units
Follow these instructions for installing the auxiliary contact adapters on M and N frame units.
Required Tools
Y ou need a socket set with extension and a torque wrench to complete the installation.
Install the Auxiliary Contact Adapter
Follow these steps and refer to Assembly of External Auxiliary Contact Parts to install the auxiliary contact adapter.
1. V erify that all of the power has been disconnected and turn the operator handle to the OFF/O position.
2. V erify the parts list, see Assembly of External Auxiliary Contact Parts.
3. Attach the external auxiliary contact assembly to the mounting plate by using two 1/4-20 thread-rolling screws and tighten to 55 lb•in (6.2 N•m).
Refer to Assembly of External Auxiliary Contact Parts.
4. Attach the actuator to the circuit breaker bail by using two 1/4-20 thread-rolling screws.
5. Position the actuator so the screws are centered in the slots and tighten to 55 lb•in (6.2 N•m).
6. Install the auxiliary contacts (catalog numbers 800F-X10, 800F-X01, 800F-X20D, 800F-X11D, and 800F-X02D).
7. T urn the operator handle to the ON/I position to verify that the auxiliary contacts change state.
8. Check continuity to verify proper operation of auxiliary contacts. 130 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Appendix B Auxiliary Contact Adapters
Figure 52 - Assembly of External Auxiliary Contact Parts Mounting Plate
1/4 - 20 Screws
External Auxiliary Contact Assembly
Parts List
(1) External Auxiliary Contact Assembly
(1) Actuator Arm
(2) 1/4 - 20 Screws
(2) #8-32 Screws
Wheel for Auxiliary Contact
#8-32 Screws
Auxiliary Contact
Auxiliary Contact Bracket
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 131 Index
A
adding sections 15
additional resources 9
adjust circuit breaker position 118
air filter check 100
air filters 83
altitude class 24
arc flash 69
protection marking requirement 67
Rockwell Automation services 68
ArcShield 12, 17
components checklist 88
door hinge removal 53, 58
door latch positions 85
IEEE 12
insulating sheet 88
joining and splicing 40
opening door 52, 57
pressure relief plate 26
rating 56, 61
rating label 17
section clearance 26
support pan removal 62, 63
top entry conduit 44
unit removal 56
auxiliary contact adapters install 125
B
bottom entry conduit 43
bus splice check 99
bus torque specifications 42
bus-stab check 100
C
cable
installing 44
lugs 45
rating 44
cable bracing 46
glass tape 46
hardwood 47
nylon rope 47
check
air filters 83, 100
bus splice 99
bus stabs 100
cabling 81
circuit breakers 82
conduit 81
contactor and relay coils 101
disconnect handle 100
fuses 101
interlocking devices 100
locking devices 100
moisture 99
pilot lights 101
power contacts 101
wiring 81
check list 79
circuit breaker 82, 113
adjust position 118
horizontal handle unit 119
install 115, 121
install auxiliary contact adapters 125
removal 119
space saving design 119
conduit 43
bottom entry 43
top entry 44
contactor and relay coil check 101
cUL designation 15
D
defeater lever 71
defeating unit door interlock 69
dimensions 11, 23, 25, 26
disconnect handle check 100
door latch positions 85
door removal 53, 57
dust and dirt 101
E
electrical insulation resistance test 84
electrical spacing 91
end closing plate 15
energize the MCC 79, 97
energize unit
door open 71
F
flash protection 67
fuse check 101
G
general description 11
general spacing requirements 91
grounding 81
H
handle height 25
handling 23
height considerations 25
horizontal bus 12
splicing 39
horizontal handle 49
door interlock defeater screw 69
swing-out door latches 60
horizontal handle removal 57
132 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Index
horizontal handle unit
circuit breaker install 121
circuit breaker removal 119
I
incoming line brace 48
inspection timeline 99
install auxiliary contact adapters 125
installation 15
cable 44
conduit 43
horizontal handle 49
lugs 45
plug-in units 49
vertical handle 49
interlocking devices check 100
J
joining and splicing 39
bus torque 42
joining and splicing NEMA Type 12 motor
control centers 40
joining and splicing NEMA Type 3R and Type
4 units 40
L
labels
ArcShield 17
short circuit rating 16
UL 16
layout worksheet 92
lifting angle 26
lifting sections 23
line compartment 45
location planning 25
locking
horizontal handle 75
horizontal operating handle 73
large vertical handle 75
medium vertical handle 74
padlock 76
small vertical handle 74
units 76
vertical operating handle 72
locking device check 100
M
main disconnect 45
bottom entry connection 45
top entry connection 45
maintaining the MCC
after a fault condition 105
overview 99
MCC
dimensions 23
energizing 79, 97
joining and splicing exisiting motor control
centers 39
joining and splicing NEMA Type 12 motor
control centers 40
joining and splicing NEMA Type 3R and Type
4 units 40
joining and splicing new motor control
centers 39
maintenance 99
mounting 26
mounting dimensions 25
operation 24
product construction 109
section installation 15
securing 26
seismic requirements 38
storage 24
weights 23
MCC receiving, handling, and storage 22
measuring temperature 103
moisture check 99
mounting dimensions 25
10 in. wide 31
15 in. and 20 in. 27
15 in. and 20 in. corner sections 34
15 in. and 20 in. deep 40 in. wide 35
25 in. 30
30 in. and 40 in. 29
71 in. sections 37
9 in. wireway 30
NEMA 3R 32
NEMA 4 32
N
nameplate 12
NEMA Type 12 MCC
joining and splicing 40
NEMA Type 3R MCC
joining and splicing 40
mounting dimensions 32
NEMA Type 4 MCC
joining and splicing 40
mounting dimensions 32
NFPA 70E 67, 69, 97, 100
O
operating handle
locking the horizontal operating handle in
the OFF/O position 73
locking the units with the operating handle
in the ON/I position 73
locking the veritical operating handle in the
OFF/O position 72
opening the door when the handle is in the
ON/I position 69
operation 24
order information 107
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 133 Index
P
pilot light check 101
plug-in unit 11
plug-in unit removal
horizontal operating handle 57
vertical operating handle 52
power contacts check 101
power-factor correction capacitors 80, 98
pre-energizing check procedure 79
pre-energizing checklist 80
preparing MCC 80
product overview 11
publications 9
pull boxes 40
Q
qualified persons 79
R
rearranging sections 15
receiving 22
remove support pan 62
remove units
horizontal handle 57
SecureConnect 50
vertical handle 52
removing large units 55, 60
renewal parts 107
S
sections
adding 15
installation 15
lifting 23
numbering 15
rearranging 15
SecureConnect 50
seismic requirements 38
bolt down 38
IEEE 344 38
weld down 39
sequence numbering 14
series
lettering 20
number and series ID 17
shipping weights 23
export 23
standard 23
short circuit rating label 16
sections 16
units 16
shutters 56, 61
space factor 11
space saving design
circuit breaker install 121
circuit breaker removal 119
spacing requirements within the MCC 91
storage 24
support 104
support pan removal 62
ArcShield 62
swing-out door latches 60
switch lubrication 102
T
temperature
guidance 103
measurement 103
test
electrical insulation resistance 84
top entry conduit 44
U
UL label 16
UL/CSA marking 15
unit
construction 109
description 93
door removal 53, 57
horizontal handle removal 57
interlock 76, 77
interlock lever 71
latches 54
overheating 104
partially removed and locked 76, 77
removal 55
removed and locked 77, 78
space factor 11
type 11
vertical handle removal 52
unit door interlock 69
unit interlock 77
unit removal 60
using a padlock 76
V
vertical bus 12
vertical handle 49
vertical handle unit removal 52
W
weights 23
wiring 54, 55, 59, 84
integrity 84
134 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 Index
Notes:
Publication 2100-IN012G-EN-P - August 2016 PN-PN-123456 Supersedes Publication 2100-IN012F-EN-P - January 2015 Copyright © 2016 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.
Rockwell Automation Support
Use the following resources to access support information.
Documentation Feedback
Y our comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document, complete the How Are W e Doing? form at http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/du/ra-du002_-en-e.pdf.
Technical Support Center Knowledgebase Articles, How-to Videos, FAQs, Chat, User Forums, and Product Notification Updates. https://rockwellautomation.custhelp.com/ Local Technical Support Phone Numbers Locate the phone number for your country. http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/get-support-now.page Direct Dial Codes Find the Direct Dial Code for your product. Use the code to route your call directly to a technical support engineer. http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/direct-dial.page
Literature Library Installation Instructions, Manuals, Brochures, and Technical Data. http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/literature-library/overview.page Product Compatibility and Download
Center (PCDC)
Get help determining how products interact, check
features and capabilities, and find associated firmware. http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/pcdc.page .
Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş., Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752 İçerenköy, İstanbul, T el: +90 (216) 5698400 Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/about-us/sustainability-ethics/product-environmental-compliance.page.
Allen-Bradley, ArcShield, CENTERLINE, IntelliCENTER, Rockwell Automation, Rockwell Software, and SecureConnect are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies. www.rockwellautomation.com
Power, Control and Information Solutions Headquarters
Americas: Rockwell Automation, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204-2496 USA, Tel: (1) 414.382.2000, Fax: (1) 414.382.4444 Europe/Middle East/ Africa: Rockwell Automation NV, Pegasus Pack, De Kleetlaan 12a, 1831 Diegem, Belgium, Tel: (32) 2 663 0600, Fax: (32) 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific: Rockwell Automation, Level 14, Core F, Cyberport 3, 100 Cyberport Road, Hong Kong, Tel: {852) 2887 4788, Fax: {852) 2508 1846 Publication 2100-IN037B-EN-P - April 2003 1
Supersedes Publication 2100-5.25 - March 1992 © 2003 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.
Instructions
CENTERLINE® Motor Control Centers
NEMA Type 12 Sealing Instructions
For NEMA Type 12 structures only
Procedure 1. Remove the tube of caulking (mastic) sealer from the splice kit. Cut the nozzle at the first notch (1/8” from the end).
2. Read the application directions on the tube. Apply a continuous bead of caulking, 1/8” wide, around the outside edge of the sideplate of the fixed motor control center. See Figure 1.
Figure 1 Correct Application of Caulking
Apply 1/8” wide
continuous bead of
caulking sealer. Do
not allow “skin” to
form on caulking
before joining the
sections.
t!b w
www.rockwellautomation.com
Corporate Headquarters
Rockwell Automation, 777 East Wisconsin Avenue, Suite 1400, Milwaukee, WI, 53202-5302 USA Tel: (1) 414.212.5200, Fax: (1) 414.212.5201 Headquarters for Allen-Bradley Products, Rockwell Software Products and Global Manufacturing Solutions Americas: Rockwell Automation, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204-2496 USA, Tel: (1) 414.382.2000, Fax: (1) 414.382.4444 Headquarters for Dodge and Reliance Electric Products
Americas: Rockwell Automation, 6040 Ponders Court, Greenville, SC 29615-4617 USA, Tel: (1) 864.297.4800, Fax: (1) 864.281.2433 1 Instructions
Receiving, Handling, and Storing Motor
Control Centers
Receiving
1. Upon delivery of the motor control center, inspect the shipment for lost items and any damage that may have occurred during transit. If the package appears to be damaged, it may be necessary to unpack the equipment and inspect it for further damage.
2. In the event that there is evidence of loss or damage, the buyer must follow the procedure outlined below:
• Note on the delivery receipt that the equipment being received is damaged.
• Contact the carrier that made the delivery and schedule an inspection.
• Inform the local Rockwell Automation representative that the equipment is damaged.
• Retain all product packaging for review by the carrier’s inspector.
For further assistance, contact Rockwell Automation support at (440) 646-5800. Navigate through the call tree by selecting option 2 for Allen-Bradley products, option 5 for motor control centers, and then option 1 for hardware support.
IMPORTANT Delivery of equipment from Rockwell Automation to the carrier is considered delivery to the buyer. The carrier becomes liable for any damage that occurs during transit. It is then the buyer’s responsibility to notify the proper party if damage is found. The buyer may forfeit any right to
recovery for loss or damages by failing to comply with the following steps.
~
W'
Publication 2100-IN040B-EN-P - October 2002
2 Receiving, Handling, and Storing Motor Control Centers Handling
The following guidelines are provided to help avoid personal injury and equipment damage during handling and facilitate moving the motor control center at the job site.
Due to varying motor control center configurations, a number of different shipping skids are used. To prevent distortion and minimize tipping of the motor control center during the moving process, the shipping skid should remain bolted to the motor control center until the motor control center is delivered to its final installation area.
Handle the motor control center carefully in order to avoid damage to the components, sections, and finish. Keep the motor control center in an upright position. The motor control center should not have been tipped or laid flat during shipment. Before moving the motor control center, make sure that the route is clear of all obstructions and that fellow workers are a safe distance away.
The motor control center should be handled by a “qualified person” as defined by NEMA standards. For this definition and other references on the handling of motor control centers, refer to NEMA standards publication number ICS
2.3, Instructions for the Handling, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of Motor Control Centers.
Forklifting
Standard motor control centers, front-mounted (15” or 20” deep) in 20” through 60” widths, have shipping skids that facilitate the insertion of lift truck forks, with fork access from the narrow end.
Non-standard motor control centers have flat shipping skids. Forklift flat shipping skids from the front or broad side. When forklifting a flat shipping skid, use a pry bar (Johnson bar) to lift the skid enough to insert the forks under it.
ATTENTION
!
Motor control centers are top- and front-heavy. To avoid personal injury and structural damage to the motor control center, never attempt to lift or move the motor control center by any means other than those listed in this
publication.
Publication 2100-IN040B-EN-P - October 2002
Receiving, Handling, and Storing Motor Control Centers 3 Refer to and follow the forklifting procedure outlined below.
1. Ensure that the forklift truck can handle the weight and size of the motor control center safely.
2. Forklift only from underneath the shipping skid, using the skid to support the load. Carefully position the motor control center on the forks for proper balance, noting that motor control centers are top- and front-heavy. Make sure that the forks support the load. Keep the load against the carriage. Tilt the load backward toward the lift truck’s mast.
3. Use a belt to secure the motor control center to the forklift truck.
4. Start and stop the forklift truck gradually and slowly, avoiding jerky movements. When traveling with the load, drive slowly with the forks carried as low as possible, consistent with safe operation.
For further information on the use of forklift trucks, refer to National Safety Council Data Sheet I-653. Figure 1 Forklifting a standard motor control center Overhead lifting
Overhead lifting provides a convenient method for moving motor control centers. This handling method is recommended for motor control centers supplied with lifting angles (including NEMA Type 3R construction with optional lifting angle). Refer to Figure 2 and Figure 3 and follow the overhead lifting procedure outlined below.
DANGER
TOP HEAVY
Mast and carriage
Forklift only from
underneath skid
Shipping skid
BELT TO FORKLIFT
BEFORE LIFTING
AND MOVING
Publication 2100-IN040B-EN-P - October 2002
4 Receiving, Handling, and Storing Motor Control Centers
1. Attach rigging to lifting means.
2. Do not pass ropes or cables through the support holes in the lifting angle. Use slings with load-rated hooks or shackles.
3. Select or adjust the rigging lengths to compensate for any unequal weight distribution of the load and support the motor control center in an upright position.
4. Reduce tension on the rigging and compression on the lifting angle by ensuring the angle between the lifting cables and vertical plane does not exceed 45° .
ATTENTION
!
Ensure that the load rating of the lifting device is
sufficient to handle the load safely. Refer to the
shipping weights on the packing slip enclosed in the
shipment.
ATTENTION
!
Some motor control centers contain heavy, mounted
equipment, such as transformers, that could be
adversely affected if tilted.
Publication 2100-IN040B-EN-P - October 2002
Receiving, Handling, and Storing Motor Control Centers 5 Figure 2 Overhead lifting a front mounted motor control center
Figure 3 Overhead lifting a motor control center with back-to-back construction
Publication 2100-IN040B-EN-P - October 2002
6 Receiving, Handling, and Storing Motor Control Centers Lifting sling
Using a lifting sling is the preferred method for overhead lifting of export packaged sections, but it may be used for all types of sections, including NEMA Type 3R without lifting angle. Refer to (export packaged) and (NEMA Type 3R without lifting angle) and follow the lifting sling procedure below.
1. Place the lifting sling under the shipping platform.
2. The spreader bar must have a larger span (overhang) than the motor control center load.
3. Carefully stabilize the motor control center during handling. All rigging must be designed to support the load (refer to shipping weights) with the appropriate safety factor.
Figure 4 Lifting sling on export packaged motor control center
Publication 2100-IN040B-EN-P - October 2002
Receiving, Handling, and Storing Motor Control Centers 7 Figure 5 Lifting sling on NEMA Type 3R motor control center without lifting angle Rod or pipe rollers
With the aid of pinch bars, pipe rolling provides a simple method of moving motor control centers on one floor level if there is no significant incline. This method of handling can be used for all types of sections. Refer to and follow the procedure outlined below.
1. Carefully ease the shipping platform over the pipes until the pipes support the full weight of the motor control center.
2. Roll the motor control center to its designated location. Use extreme caution to steady the load and prevent it from tipping.
Publication 2100-IN040B-EN-P - October 2002
8 Receiving, Handling, and Storing Motor Control Centers Figure 6 Pipe rolling a motor control center with back-to-back construction Storing If it is necessary to store the motor control center for any length of time, take the following precautions:
1. Wrap the motor control center in a covering of heavy-duty plastic or similar material to prevent the entry of dirt and dust.
2. Motor control centers not installed and energized immediately should be stored in a clean, dry place. Maintain a storage temperature between -30° C and +65° C. If the storage temperature fluctuates or humidity exceeds 60%, use a space heater to prevent condensation. It is preferable to store a motor control center in a heated building that offers adequate air circulation and protection from dirt and water.
3. Motor control centers that are designed for indoor applications do not have sufficient packaging for outdoor storage. If they are to be stored outdoors, install temporary electrical heating to prevent condensation and add packaging for protection from the outside elements. A space heater rated at 200 watts per section is adequate for the average motor control center. All loose packaging and flammable materials should be removed prior to energizing space heaters.
4. Unenergized motor control centers for outdoor use should be kept dry internally by installing temporary heating (see item 3 above) or energizing optional self-contained space heaters.
5. Space heater and thermostat kits (kit number 2100-NH1) may be ordered from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor.
Publication 2100-IN040B-EN-P - October 2002
Receiving, Handling, and Storing Motor Control Centers 9 Publication 2100-IN040B-EN-P - October 2002
10 Receiving, Handling, and Storing Motor Control Centers Publication 2100-IN040B-EN-P - October 2002
Receiving, Handling, and Storing Motor Control Centers 11 Publication 2100-IN040B-EN-P - October 2002 12
Supersedes Publication 2100-5.5 - January 1991 © 2002 Rockwell International Corporation. Printed in the U.S.A. www.rockwellautomation.com
Corporate Headquarters
Rockwell Automation, 777 East Wisconsin Avenue, Suite 1400, Milwaukee, WI, 53202-5302 USA, Tel: (1) 414.212.5200, Fax: (1) 414.212.5201
Headquarters for Allen-Bradley Products, Rockwell Software Products and Global Manufacturing Solutions Americas: Rockwell Automation, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204-2496 USA, Tel: (1) 414.382.2000, Fax: (1) 414.382.4444 Europe/Middle East/Africa: Rockwell Automation SA/NV, Vorstlaan/Boulevard du Souverain 36, 1170 Brussels, Belgium, Tel: (32) 2 663 0600, Fax: (32) 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific: Rockwell Automation, 27/F Citicorp Centre, 18 Whitfield Road, Causeway Bay, Hong Kong, Tel: (852) 2887 4788, Fax: (852) 2508 1846
Headquarters for Dodge and Reliance Electric Products
Americas: Rockwell Automation, 6040 Ponders Court, Greenville, SC 29615-4617 USA, Tel: (1) 864.297.4800, Fax: (1) 864.281.2433 Europe/Middle East/Africa: Rockwell Automation, Brühlstraße 22, D-74834 Elztal-Dallau, Germany, Tel: (49) 6261 9410, Fax: (49) 6261 17741 Asia Pacific: Rockwell Automation, 55 Newton Road, #11-01/02 Revenue House, Singapore 307987, Tel: (65) 6356-9077, Fax: (65) 6356-9011
Technical Data
Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference
Catalog Number 2100
Application Notes
This guide contains cabling dimensions for main incoming line compartments, fusible disconnect switch mains, and circuit breaker mains in Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE motor control centers. Lug pad dimensions are included for main incoming line compartments. The fusible disconnect and circuit breaker mains drawing include dimensions for standard lugs, and optional lugs (if specified).
Topic Page
Application Notes 1
Catalog Numbers 2
Incoming Lines 3
Fusible Disconnects 11
Circuit Breakers 27
Conduit Entry - Top 37
Conduit Entry - Bottom 40
Additional Resources 45
IMPORTANT Although this guide is accurate at the time of printing, there are differences between these drawings and the actual product, due to recent design enhancements. Always refer to the Job-specific Drawings (Form 385) for the most accurate drawings and dimensions.
IMPORTANT Reference dimensions include a tolerance of ±1/8 inches (±3.2 mm). ■
G» Allen-Bradley
Rockwell
Qi) Allen-Bradley • Rockwell Software Automation
2 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference Catalog Numbers
Every CENTERLINE motor control center unit is defined by a catalog number. For mains, these catalog numbers are of the following form:
The catalog numbers appear on the unit label, located on the unit bottom plate. For assembled motor control centers, catalog numbers for each unit are also listed on the Job-specific Drawings (Form 385) that ship with the order.
Type of Main Catalog Bulletin Number Catalog Number Example Incoming Line 2191M 2191MT-CAC-54
Fusible Disconnect 2192M 2192MB-GAC-29R
Circuit Breaker 2193M 2193MT-FJC-54WT-83C500
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 3 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference Incoming Lines
(1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 1 - 300 A Incoming Line Compartment, Top Entry,
1.0 Space Factor(1) Figure 2 - 300 A Incoming Line Compartment, Bottom Entry,
1.0 Space Factor(1)
Figure 3 - 600 A Incoming Line Compartment, Top Entry,
1.0 Space Factor
(1)
Figure 4 - 600 A Incoming Line Compartment, Bottom Entry,
1.0 Space Factor
(1)
12,94
[329]
11.94 [303]
l
4 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 5 - 800 A Incoming Compartment Top Entry, 1.5 Space Factor(1)
Figure 6 - 800 A Incoming Compartment Bottom Entry,
1.5 Space Factor
(1)
Figure 7 - 800 A Incoming Compartment Top Entry in Horizontal Wireway
(additional 12 in. Pull Box required to meet NEC wire bending requirements)(1)
Figure 8 - 800…1200 A Incoming Compartment Top Entry
1.0 Space Factor
(additional 12 in. Pull Box required to meet NEC wire
bending requirements)
(1)
19.44 [494]
2. 19
[56]
3.00 [76]
~
7 11.06 + [281]
.38
[10]
,r-1
rl;-.
10.56 [246] [268]
I
-7 i
0 .38 t [10]
11.06 [281]
11.1 9
[284]
7 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 5 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 9 - 800 A Incoming Line Compartment Top Entry,
1.5 Space Factor(1)
Figure 10 - 800 A Incoming Line Compartment Bottom Entry,
1.5 Space Factor(1)
Figure 11 - 800…1200 A Incoming Line Compartment Top Entry,
2.0 Space Factor
(1)
Figure 12 - 800…1200 A Incoming Line Compartment Bottom Entry, 2.0 Space Factor
(1)
17.06 [ 1;·
[433]
I
20.88 [530]
!
6 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 12 - 600…1600 A Incoming Line Section Top Entry,
6.0 Space Factor(1)
Figure 13 - 600…1600 A Incoming Line Section Bottom Entry,
6.0 Space Factor
(1)
Figure 14 - 2000 A Incoming Line Section Top Entry,
6.0 Space Factor
(1)
Figure 15 - 2000 A Incoming Line Section Bottom
Entry, 6.0 Space Factor
(1)
• •
• •
I -
37.69 [957]
6.50 [165]
6.50 [1 65]
I.
37.69 [957]
6.50 [165]
6.50 [165]
D
4.31 [109]
6.50 [165]
37.56 T
6.50 [165]
37,56
6.50 [165]
1.91 [49]
rit1. , , , ., r11,f l:i
6.50 [165]
D
I_,...JL D____j__r_i~~-1.L.,
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 7 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 17- 600…1200 A Corner Incoming Line Section
Top Entry, 6.0 Space Factor(1)
Figure 18 - 600…1200 A Corner Incoming Line Section
Bottom Entry, 6.0 Space Factor
(1)
Figure 19 - 1600 A Corner Incoming Line Section Top
Entry, 6 Space Factor
(1)
Figure 20 - 1600 A Corner Incoming Line Section
Bottom Entry, 6 Space Factor
(1)
37.69 [957]
6.50 [165]
(4)- .562 D~.
[14)
l.j13 1.75 [29)
[44) .95
[24) 1.91
[49)
(4)- .562 D~.
[14)
37.69 [957]
6.50 [165]
1.jl3 1.75 [29)
[44) .95
[24) 1.91
[49)
8.00 [203]
7.44 [189]
6.50 [I 65]
37.56 [954]
8.00 [203]
L~ _ ___._,
6.50 [1 65]
37.56 [954]
7.44 [189]
L~ _ ___._,
8 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 21 - 600…1200 A, 10 in. Wide Incoming Line Section Top Entry, 6.0 Space Factor (left-hand version shown)(1)
Figure 22 - 600…1200 A, 10 in. Wide Incoming Line Section Bottom Entry, 6.0 Space Factor (left-hand version shown) (1)
1.69 [43]
1.75 11i1 [44] J_
1--.65
11 71
--.~'-- +<> .. r s11
(4)- .562 DV\ _; [ I
[14] ---j 3.00 1--
11--[
75 -----"I-] _ ,
30.94 [786]
7.44 [189]
7.44 [189 ]
0 6.1 9
(157]
3.50 (89]
D
1.75 [44]
1.69 [43[
(4)- .562 DV\
7.44 [1 89 ]
30.63 [778]
[14]
7.44 [189]
L ---------------
3.50 [89]
6.1 9
(157]
D
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 9 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
3.00 (76.2)
2.562
(65.1)
3.310
(84.07)
0.75 ± 0.010
(19.10 ± 0.25)
1.875 ± 0.010
(47.63 ± 0.25)
5.687 ± 0 .031
(144.45 ±0.79)
Figure 23 - #6-350 kcmil, One Cable Mechanical Lug Figure 24 - #6-350 kcmil, Two Cable Mechanical Lug Figure 25 - 350…800 kcmil, One Cable Mechanical Lug
Figure 26 - #4/0-600 kcmil, One Cable Mechanical Lug Figure 27 - #4/0-600 kcmil, Two Cable Mechanical Lug Figure 28 - #4/0-600 kcmil, Two Cable Mechanical Lug
.13
54]
.32
59]
10 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 29 - 250 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lug Figure 30 - 250 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lug Figure 31 - 350 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lug Figure 32 - 350 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lug Figure 33 - 500 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lug Figure 34 - 500 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lug Figure 35 - 750 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lug Figure 36 - 750 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lug Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 11 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference Fusible Disconnects
(1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 37 - 30 A Main Fusible Disconnect Top Entry, 1.5 Space Factor with #14…#8 AWG Mechanical Lugs, 1 per Phase(1)
Figure 38 - 30 A Main Fusible Disconnect Bottom Entry, 1.5 Space Factor with #14…#8 AWG Mechanical Lugs, 1 per Phase
(1)
Figure 39 - 60 A Main Fusible Disconnect Top Entry, 1.5 Space Factor with #14…#8 AWG Mechanical Lugs, 1 per Phase
(1)
Figure 40 - 60 A Main Fusible Disconnect Bottom Entry, 1.5 Space Factor with #14…#8 AWG Mechanical Lugs, 1 per Phase
(1)
12 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 41 - 100 A Main Fusible Disconnect Top Entry, 1.5 Space Factor with #8…1/0 AWG Mechanical Lugs, 1 per Phase(1)
Figure 42 - 100 A Main Fusible Disconnect Bottom Entry, 1.5 Space Factor with #8…1/0 AWG Mechanical Lugs, 1 per Phase
(1)
Figure 43 - 200 A Main Fusible Disconnect Top Entry, 2.0 Space Factor with #6…4/0 AWG or #6…250 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 1 per Phase (1)
Figure 44 - 200 A Main Fusible Disconnect Bottom Entry, 2.0 Space Factor with #6…4/0 AWG or #6…250 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 1 per Phase (1)
6.88 [175]
4.56 [11 6]
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 13 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 45 - 400 A Main Fusible Disconnect Top Entry, 2.5 Space Factor with Two Cable 1/0…250 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 1 per Phase(1) Figure 46 - 400 A Main Fusible Disconnect Bottom Entry, 2.5 Space Factor with Two Cable 1/0…250 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 1 per Phase (1)
Figure 47 - 400 A Main Fusible Disconnect Top Entry, 2.5 Space Factor with 250 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lugs, 2 per Phase
(1)
Figure 48 - 400 A Main Fusible Disconnect Top Entry, 2.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lugs, 1 per Phase (additional 12 in. Pull Box required to meet NEC wire bending requirements)(1)
12,62
[321]
I
0 0
0 7 4.56
I [11 51
=
5.25 [1 33]
4.12 [105]
0 ds- ~--_____2._◊
[170]
t ,tt----nr'---',LJ~ -
=
4.56 [11 6]
3.75 [95]
0 z
i 7
7 4. 19
[1 061 - I
14 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 49 - 400 A Main Fusible Disconnect Top Entry, 2.5 Space Factor with 250 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lugs, 2 per Phase(1)
Figure 50 - 400 A Main Fusible Disconnect Top Entry, 2.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lugs, 1 per Phase (additional 12 in. Pull Box required to meet NEC wire bending requirements)(1)
Figure 51 - 600 A Main Fusible Disconnect Top Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with #2…600 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 2 per Phase (1)
Figure 52 - 600 A Main Fusible Disconnect Bottom Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with #2…600 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 2 per Phase
(1)
I _l_
8.63 [219]
18.50 °
[ 470]
0 0
~
5.06 [129 ]
4.00 [102]
~
7.69 [1 95]
5.81 [148]
,I;~
l_
7.06 [179]
17.75 [45 1]
T
7 5.81
[148]
7.69 [195]
7 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 15 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 53 - 600 A Main Fusible Disconnect, Top Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lugs, 2 per Phase(1)
Figure 54 - 600 A Main Fusible Disconnect, Bottom Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lugs, 2 per Phase
(1)
Figure 55 - 600 A Main Fusible Disconnect, Top Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lugs, 2 per Phase
(1)
Figure 56 - 600 A Main Fusible Disconnect, Bottom Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lugs, 2 per Phase
(1)
~
7.69 [195]
5.81 [148]
16.25 [413]
T _______...--____L....c!c!cl j_il
16 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 57 - 600 A Main Non-fusible Disconnect, Top Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with #2…600 kcmil Mechincal Lugs, 2 per Phase (1) Figure 58 - 600 A Main Non-fusible Disconnect, Bottom Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with #2…600 kcmil Mechincal Lugs, 2 per Phase (1)
Figure 59 - 600 A Main Non-fusible Disconnect, Top Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lugs, 2 per Phase
(1)
Figure 60 - 600 A Main Non-fusible Disconnect, Bottom Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lugs, 2 per Phase (1)
---------------------, ,------------- ~- -- -- -- ~- -- _- --er- _,-, 1 7.59]
i o
24.25 [616]
f o
22.75 [578]
0 [195
[195]
1 7.69
25.88 [657]
O 0
l ~~----+--,
24.44 [621 ]
l ,-------,--1-J.......4~=?- .L__~
5.81 [148]
7.59 [195]
5.81 [148]
7.59 [195]
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 17 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 61 - 600 A Main Non-fusible Disconnect, Top Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lugs, 2 per Phase(1) Figure 62 - 600 A Main Non-fusible Disconnect, Bottom Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lugs, 2 per Phase (1)
Figure 63 - 800 A Main Fusible Disconnect, Top Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with #6…350 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 3 per Phase (1)
Figure 64 - 800 A Main Fusible Disconnect, Bottom Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with #6…350 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 3 per Phase
(1)
,-----------------~ ,------------- ~- -- _- _- _- _- _- --fr- _-, =
7.69 [195]
fo
22.13 [562]
_L
18.88 °
[480]
=
5.81 [1 48]
7.69 [195]
5.81 [1 48]
23.75 [603]
l ~~~
18. 13
[ 461]
T
5.81 [148]
7.69 [1 95]
5.81 [148]
7.69 [1 95]
18 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 65 - 800 A Main Fusible Disconnect, Top Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lugs, 3 per Phase(1)
Figure 66 - 800 A Main Fusible Disconnect, Bottom Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lugs, 3 per Phase
(1)
Figure 67 - 800 A Main Fusible Disconnect, Top Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lugs, 3 per Phase
(1)
Figure 68 - 800 A Main Fusible Disconnect, Bottom Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lugs, 3 per Phase
(1)
~
7.69 [195]
5.81 [148]
5.81 [1 48]
7.69 [195]
5.81 [1 48]
7.69 [1 95]
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 19 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 69 - 800 A Main Non-fusible Disconnect, Top Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with #6…350 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 3 per Phase (1) Figure 70 - 800 A Main Non-fusible Disconnect, Bottom Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with #6…350 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 3 per Phase (1)
Figure 71 - 800 A Main Non-fusible Disconnect, Top Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lugs, 3 per Phase(1) Figure 72 - 800 A Main Non-fusible Disconnect, Bottom Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lugs, 3 per Phase (1)
io
24.56 [624]
fo
22.75 [578]
0 l
7.69 - [1 95]
5.81 [148]
~
7.69 [1 95]
5.81 - [148]
26.25 [667]
0 0
l .~ ~ ----+--
24.38 [619]
l~~~
5.81 [148]
7.69 [195]
5.81 [148]
7.69 [195]
20 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 73 - 800 A Main Non-fusible Disconnect, Top Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lugs, 3 per Phase(1) Figure 74 - 800 A Main Non-fusible Disconnect, Bottom Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lugs, 3 per Phase (1) Figure 75 - 1200 A Main Fusible Disconnect, Top Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with #6…350 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 4 per Phase
(1)
Figure 76 - 1200 A Main Fusible Disconnect, Bottom Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with #6…350 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 4 per Phase
(1)
22.13 [562]
I
18.88 °
[480]
l
7.69 [195]
5.81 [148]
1 7.69
1 [195]
23.75 [603]
l~~~
18.13 [461]
T
5.81 [148]
7.69 [1 95]
5.81 [148]
7.69 [1 95]
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 21 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 77 - 1200 A Main Fusible Disconnect, Top Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lugs, 4 per Phase(1) Figure 78 - 1200 A Main Fusible Disconnect, Bottom Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lugs, 4 per Phase
(1)
Figure 79 - 1200 A Main Fusible Disconnect, Top Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lugs, 4 per Phase
(1)
Figure 80 - 1200 A Main Fusible Disconnect, Bottom Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lugs, 4 per Phase
(1)
16.25 [41 3]
T
22 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 81 - 1200 A Main Non-fusible Disconnect, Top Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with #6…350 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 4 per Phase (1) Figure 82 - 1200 A Main Non-fusible Disconnect, Bottom Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with #6…350 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 4 per Phase (1)
Figure 83 - 1200 A Main Non-fusible Disconnect, Top Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lugs, 4 per Phase(1) Figure 84 - 1200 A Main Non-fusible Disconnect, Bottom Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lugs, 4 per Phase (1)
24.56 [624]
f o
22.75 [578]
0 1
7.69 [1 95]
5.81 [148]
1 7.69
[195]
5.81 [148]
26.25 [667]
0 0
l ~ ~ ---+--,
O 0
24.38 [619]
l ~~~
5.81 [148]
7.69 [195]
5.81 [148]
7.69 [195]
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 23 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 85 - 1200 A Main Non-fusible Disconnect, Top Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lugs, 4 per Phase(1) Figure 86 - 1200 A Main Non-fusible Disconnect, Bottom Entry, 3.5 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lugs, 4 per Phase (1)
Figure 87 - 1600 A Main Fusible or Non-fusible Disconnect, Top Entry,
6.0 Space Factor with #2…600 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 4 per Phase (1) Figure 88 - 1600 A Main Fusible or Non-fusible Disconnect, Bottom Entry, 6.0 Space Factor with #2…600 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 4 per Phase
(1)
fo
22.13 [562]
25.88 [657]
0 23.75
[603]
l ________J______~ ~
24.88 [632]
1 ,--------l..__~",o--------'---+-
5.81 [1 48]
7.69 [1 95]
0 0
0 0
00 00
24 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 89 - 1600 A Main Fusible or Non-fusible Disconnect, Top Entry,
6.0 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lugs, 5 per Phase (1) Figure 90 - 1600 A Main Fusible or Non-fusible Disconnect, Bottom Entry, 6.0 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lugs, 5 per Phase(1)
Figure 91 - 1600 A Main Fusible or Non-fusible Disconnect, Top Entry,
6.0 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lugs, 5 per Phase (1) Figure 92 - 1600 A Main Fusible or Non-fusible Disconnect, Bottom Entry, 6.0 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lugs, 5 per Phase(1)
24.44 [621]
23.75 [603]
11.44 [291]
11.44 [291]
9.69 [246]
000
10.94 [278]
10.94 [278]
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 25 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 93 - 2000 A Main Fusible or Non-fusible Disconnect, Top Entry,
6.0 Space Factor with #2…600 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 6 per Phase (1) Figure 94 - 2000 A Main Fusible or Non-fusible Disconnect, Bottom Entry, 6.0 Space Factor with #2…600 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 6 per Phase(1)
Figure 95 - 2000 A Main Fusible or Non-fusible Disconnect, Top Entry,
6.0 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lugs, 6 per Phase (1) Figure 96 - 2000 A Main Fusible or Non-fusible Disconnect, Bottom Entry, 6.0 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lugs, 6 per Phase(1)
25.88 [657]
24.44 [621]
11.31 [287]
11.31 [287]
9.56 [243]
000
24.88 [632]
l .,........l..,.1----4!M~ ~
10.81 [275]
10.81 [275]
26 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 97 - 2000 A Main Fusible or Non-fusible Disconnect, Top Entry,
6.0 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lugs, 6 per Phase (1) Figure 98 - 2000 A Main Fusible or Non-fusible Disconnect, Bottom Entry, 6.0 Space Factor with 500 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lugs, 6 per Phase
(1)
23.75 [603] 11.31
[287]
I 0.81
[275]
0 0
0 0
00 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 27 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference Circuit Breakers
(1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
11.13 (283) 7.28
(185)
7.28 (185)
5.16 (131)
7.24 (184)
7.24 (184)
5.05 (128)
10.57 (268.5)
Figure 99 - 150 A Main Circuit Breaker, Top Entry, 1.5 Space Factor, with #14…#1/0 AWG Mechanical Lugs, 1 per Phase, 15…125 A Trips(1)
Figure 100 - 150 A Main Circuit Breaker, Bottom Entry, 1.5 Space Factor, with #14…#1/0 AWG Mechanical Lugs, 1 per Phase, 15…125 A Trips(1)
Figure 101 - 250 A Main Circuit Breaker, Top Entry, 1.5 Space Factor, with #10…250 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 1 per Phase, 70…250 A Trips(1)
Figure 102 - 250 A Main Circuit Breaker, Bottom Entry, 1.5 Space Factor, with #4…250 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 1 per Phase, 70…250 A Trips(1)
28 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
16.88 (428.75) 6.90
(175.25)
6.90 (175.25)
11.38 (289)
6.15 (156.2)
6.15 (156.2)
6.96 (177)
6.96 (177)
15.94 (405)
11.38 (289)
Figure 103 - 400 A Main Circuit Breaker, Top Entry, 2.0 Space Factor, with 250…500 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 1 per Phase, 300 A (1) Figure 104 - 400 A Main Circuit Breaker, Bottom Entry, 2.0 Space Factor, with 250…500 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 1 per Phase, 300 A Trip(1)
Figure 105 - 400 A Main Circuit Breaker, Top Entry, 2.0 Space Factor, with 2/0…250 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 2 per Phase, 400 A Trip (1)
Figure 106 - 400 A Main Circuit Breaker, Bottom Entry, 2.0 Space Factor,with 2/0…250 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 2 per Phase, 400 A Trip(1)
0 0
0 i
0 _L ~~ --
0 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 29 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
11.16 (283.5)
7.64 (194)
6.12 (155.4)
11.68 (296.7)
7.64 (194)
6.12 (155.4)
11.61 (283.5)
6.46 (164.1)
10.94 (278)
6.4 (162.6)
Figure 107 - 400 A Main Circuit Breaker, Top Entry, 2.0 Space Factor, with 250 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lugs, 2 per Phase, 300…400 A Trips (optional Pull Box provides an additional 12 in. of bending space) (1) Figure 108 - 400 A Main Circuit Breaker, Top Entry, 2.0 Space Factor, with 250 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lugs, 2 per Phase, 300…400 A Trips (optional Pull Box provides an additional 12 in. of bending space) (1) Figure 109 - 400 A Main Circuit Breaker, Top Entry, 2.0 Space Factor, with 500 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lugs, 1 per Phase, 300 A Trips (optional Pull Box provides an additional 12 in. of bending space)(1) Figure 110 - 400 A Main Circuit Breaker, Top Entry, 2.0 Space Factor, with 500 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lugs, 1 per Phase, 300 A Trips (optional Pull Box provides an additional 12 in of bending space)(1) 7 i
---j
0 0
7 I
7 0
*r;~
_L f--,-- ------+-1-+--------,- -------<
7 i
---j
i
---j
7 I
7 30 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
6.90 (175.26)
14.36 (364.7) 5.15
(130.8)
14.44 (366.8)
5.15 (130.8)
6.90 (175.26)
6.90 (175.26)
5.15 (130.8)
14.44 (366.8)
5.15 (130.8)
6.90 (175.26)
14.36 (364.7)
Figure 111 - 800 A Frame Main Circuit Breaker, Top Entry, 2.0 Space Factor, with 3/0…350 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 2 per Phase, 600 A Trips(1)
Figure 112 - 800 A Frame Main Circuit Breaker, Bottom Entry, 2.0 Space Factor, with 3/0…350 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 2 per Phase, 600 A Trips(1)
Figure 113 - 800 A Frame Main Circuit Breaker, Top Entry, 2.0 Space Factor, with 250…500 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 2 per Phase, 600 A Trips(1)
Figure 114 - 800 A Frame Main Circuit Breaker, Bottom Entry, 2.0 Space Factor, with 250…500 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 2 per Phase, 600 A Trips(1)
------------7 ~--------~~~==~~
0 0
0 0
0 0
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 31 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 115 - 800 A Frame Main Circuit Breaker, Top Entry, 2.0 Space Factor, with 500 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lugs, 2 per Phase, 600 A Trips (additional 12 in. Pull Box required to meet NEC wire bending requirements)(1)
Figure 116 - 800 A Frame Main Circuit Breaker, Top Entry, 2.0 Space Factor, with 500 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lugs, 2 per Phase, 600 A Trips (additional 12 in. Pull Box required to meet NEC wire bending requirements)(1)
7 6.69
7 6.69
[170] [170]
*r-~
7 i 7
.r-~
7 i 7
7 5.06 7 5.00
[129] [1 27]
l_ l_
6.25 0 5.56 0
[159] [141]
0 0
0 0
32 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
16.90 (430)
5.62 (143)
4.93 (125)
17.40 (442)
5.81 (148)
5.06 (129)
Figure 117 - 800 A Main Circuit Breaker, Top Entry, 2.5 Space Factor, with #2/0…250 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 3 per Phase, 800 A Trips(1) Figure 118 - 800 A Main Circuit Breaker, Bottom Entry, 2.5 Space Factor, with #2/0...350 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 3 per Phase, 800 A Trips(1)
16.90 (430)
6.12 (156)
5.43 (138)
4.81 (123)
17.40 (442)
4.81 (123)
5.43 (138)
6.12 (156)
Figure 119 - 800 A Main Circuit Breaker, Top Entry, 2.5 Space Factor, with #2/0 - 400 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 3 per Phase, 800 A Trips(1) Figure 120 - 800 A Main Circuit Breaker, Bottom Entry, 2.5 Space Factor, with #2/0 - 400 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 3 per Phase, 800 A Trips(1)
0 0
0 I
~
0 ~ ,, l
0 ...
0 0
0 _L l_________L____ L,---------j
I
l ________l_j_~='='?------L--------.-----10 -----i __Ji____=__~ ~ 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 33 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
4.18 (107)
7.62 (194)
6.00 (153)
4.53 (115)
3.94 (100)
7.62 (194)
6.00 (153)
4.53 (115)
Figure 121 - 800 A Main Circuit Breaker, Top Entry, 2.5 Space Factor, with 500 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lugs, 3 per Phase, 800 A Trips (additional 12 in. Pull Box required to meet NEC wire bending requirements)(1)
Figure 122 - 800 A Main Circuit Breaker, Top Entry, 2.5 Space Factor, with 500 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lugs, 3 per Phase, 800 A Trips (additional 12 in. Pull Box required to meet NEC wire bending requirements)(1)
Figure 123 - 1200 A Main Circuit Breaker, Top Entry, 3.5 Space Factor, with #4/0 - 500 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 4 per Phase, 400…1200 Trips(1)
Figure 124 - 1200 A Main Circuit Breaker, Bottom Entry, 3.5 Space Factor, with #4/0 - 500 kcmil Mechanical Lugs, 4 per Phase, 400…1200 Trips(1)
7 ,r-1 i
_L_ f----,---+--f--+- ~--------<
0 0
0 ~
7.00 [178]
6.31 [160]
i o 0
D
22.44 5.44 [570] [ml
I 4.69
[1 19]
.r- 1
_L_ >----,---+--+--+- ~-------<
0 0
0 22,31
[567]
l ~~------'c-------
7 _ _}
4,63
[11 8]
5.38 [137]
6.19 [1 57]
6.94 [1 76]
34 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
16.20 (412)
9.23 (235)
7.73 (197)
6.30 (160)
4.80 (122)
16.34 (415)
4.80 (122)
6.30 (160)
7.73 (197)
9.23 (235)
15.54 (395)
9.23 (235)
7.73 (197)
6.30 (160)
4.80 (122)
15.68 (398)
4.80 (122)
6.30 (160)
7.73 (122)
9.23 (235)
Figure 125 - 1200 A Main Circuit Breaker, Top Entry, 3.5 Space Factor, with 500 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lugs, 3 or 4 per Phase, 400…1200 Trips(1)
Figure 126 - 1200 A Main Circuit Breaker, Bottom Entry, 3.5 Space Factor, with 500 kcmil Panduit Crimp Lugs, 3 or 4 per Phase, 400…1200 Trips(1)
Figure 127 - 1200 A Main Circuit Breaker, Top Entry, 3.5 Space Factor, with 500 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lugs, 4 per Phase, 600…1200 Trips (1)
Figure 128 - 1200 A Main Circuit Breaker, Bottom Entry, 3.5 Space Factor, with 500 kcmil Burndy Crimp Lugs, 4 per Phase, 600…1200 Trips(1)
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 35 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference
10.10(256.5)
11.75 (298.5)
13.40 (340.4)
15.05 (382.3)
24.82(630.4)
24.82(630.4)
10.10(256.5)
11.75(298.5)
13.40 (340.4)
15.05(382.3)
25.81(655.6)
24.72 (627.9)
25.71 (653.0)
10.10 (256.5)
11.75 (298.5)
13.40 (340.4)
15.05 (382.3)
24.72(627.9)
10.10 (256.5)
11.75 (298.5)
13.40 (340.4)
15.05 (382.3)
Figure 129 - 3000 A R-frame Main Circuit Breaker, Top Entry, 8 Cables per Phase
Figure 130 - 3000 A R-frame Main Circuit Breaker, Bottom Entry, 8 Cables per Phase
Figure 131 - 2500 A R-frame Main Circuit Breaker, Top Entry, 100%, 7 Cables per Phase
Figure 132 - 2500 A R-frame Main Circuit Breaker, Bottom Entry, 100%, 7 Cables per Phase
L Ll::::=. = ===::::!J
36 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference
24.86(631.4) 25.85
(656.6)
4.61 (117.1)
5.77 (146.6)
8.47 (215.1)
24.82 (630.4) 25.81(655.6)
4.61 (117.1)
5.77 (146.6)8.47
(215.1)
24.82(630.4)
4.61 (117.1)
5.77 (146.6)
24.86 (631.4)
4.61(117.1)
5.77 (146.6)
Figure 135 - 2000 A and Less R-frame, Top Entry, 6 Cables per Phase Figure 136 - 2000 A and Less R-frame, Bottom Entry, 6 Cables per Phase
Figure 133 - 2500 A R-frame, Top Entry, 80% 7 Cables per Phase Figure 134 - 2500 A R-frame, Bottom Entry, 80% 7 Cables per Phase 7 L IJ:::::=. ====iJ
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 37 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference Conduit Entry - Top
(1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 137 - Top Horizontal Ground Bus Location Front View(1) Figure 138 - Standard and Incoming Line Section, Top Entry, NEMA Type 1, 1 (with gasket), or 12, Single Section, Top View(1) fi
12.00 [305]
I
I
I
6.00 0
[1 52]
i
Dashed Lin e Indicates
Optiona l Pull box
t
101 0 0
0 0
D
~ ~
1.00 or 2.00
[25] [ 50] Optiona l Horizontal Ground Bu s
Wireway Baffle
'A' ~
r12li 'C'
Used With ---~
Incoming Line Sections
25 [61 I
Crosshatched Area Indicates Optiona l
Horizontal Ground Bus
Dimension 20"
Wide
20.00 'A' [508 ]
15,00 'B' [381]
17,72 'C' [450]
4.38 'D' [Ill]
'[' 7,00
[1 78]
12,97 'F' [329]
I
l_l_
3.38 ~
[86 ]
t
15" Deec 20 " Deec
25" 30 " 35" 20 " 25" 30" 35"
Wide Wide Wide Wide Wide Wide Wide
25.00 30.00 35.00 20,00 25.00 30,00 35.00
[635 ] [762] [889] [508 ] [635 ] [762] [889 ]
15,00 15.00 15.00 20,00 20,00 20,00 20,00
[38 1 I [38 1 I [38 1] [508 ] [508 ] [508 ] [508 ]
22,72 27.72 32.72 17,72 22,72 27,72 32,72
[5 77 ] [ 704] [831 ] [450] [5 77 ] [ 704] [831 I
9.38 4.38 9.38
- -
[238]
- -
[Ill] [238 ]
7,00 7.00 7.00
- - - -
[1 78 ] [1 78] [1 78 ]
12,97 12,97 12,97 17,97 17,9 7 17,97 17.97
[329] [329] [329] [456] [456] [456] [ 456]
38 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 139 - Standard and Incoming Line Section, Top Entry, NEMA Type 1, 1 (with gasket), or 12, Back-to-Back Construction, Top View(1) Figure 140 - Standard and Incoming Line Corner Section, Top Entry, NEMA Type 1, 1 (with gasket), or 12, Top View Crosshatched Area Indicates Optional
Horizontal Ground Bus
Wireway Baffle
1.14 (29]
'A'~
,__--+--- 'C'
(Front)
................ ................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . :::::•>?~~;~ ;:~n1·>:< ............... ...............
Used With -------< >------------- ___,
Incoming Line Sections
.25
[6)
7.38 •• + ••••••••••••••••••
• + •••••• + ••• + •
Crosshatched Area Indicates Optional
Horizontal Ground Bus
Crosshatched Area
Indicates Optional
Horizontal Ground Bus
'A' 'B'
1.14 [29)
.81
[21 )
6.81 7.38
[173) [187)
.06 .25
[2) [6)
'F'
'B'
Dimension
'A'
'B'
'C'
'D'
'['
'F'
Wireway Baffle
Used With
20"
Wide
2000
[508]
29.78 [756]
17.72 [450]
4.38 [111]
7.00 [1 78]
12.97 [329]
Incoming Line Sections
30" Deeo
25" 30"
Wide Wide
25.00 30.00
[635] [762]
29.78 29.78
[756] [756]
22.72 27.72
[577] [704]
9.38 --
[238]
7.00 --
[1 78]
12.97 12.97
[329] [ 329]
40" Deeo
35" 20" 25" 30" 35"
Wide Wide Wide Wide Wide
35.00 2000 25.00 30.00 35.00
[889] [508] [635] [762] [889]
29.78 39.78 39.78 39.78 39.78
[756] [1010] [1010] [1010] [1010]
32.72 17.72 22.72 27.72 32.72
[831] [450] [577] [704] [831]
4.38 9.38
--
[111] [238]
-- --
7.00 7.00 -- -- --
[178] [178]
12.97 17.97 17.97 17.97 17.97
[329] [456] [456] [456] [456]
Section Deoth
Dimension 15" 20"
Deep Deep
'A' 25.12 30.12
[638] [765]
'B' 22.75 27.75
[578] [ 705]
'C' 15.00 20.00
[381] [508]
7.34 12.34 'D' [186] [313]
7.41 12.41 '['
[188] [ 315]
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 39 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 141 - 10 in. Wide Incoming Line Section, Top Entry, NEMA Type 1, 1 (with gasket), or 12, Top View Section Depth
Dimension 15" 20"
Deep Deep
'A' 14,86 19.86
[377] [504]
'B' 12.71 17.71
[323] [450]
40 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference Conduit Entry - Bottom
(1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 142 - Bottom Horizontal Ground Bus Location, Front View(1) Figure 143 - Standard and Incoming Line Section, Bottom Entry, NE MA Type 1, 1(with gasket), or 12, Single Section, Top View(1) Crosshatched Area Indicates Optional
Horizontal Ground Bus
--------------- - -
-----------
D
0 0
t
0 •
lol 0 o I
6.00 0
152]
L
0 1.00 or 2. 00
[25] [ 50] Optional Hori zo ntal Groun d Bu s
.55 I.I J Slots [14] [19]
1.1 4
[29]
'G' 'H' '8'
1.76 3.15
[45] [83]
Dimension
'A'
'B'
'C'
'D'
'['
'F'
'G'
'H'
20"
Wide
2000
[508]
15.00 [381]
17.72 [450]
10.00 [254]
4.38 [Ill]
7.00 [1 78]
11.56 [294]
9. 13
[232]
0 t p 4.31
[ 109]
0 U_
15" Deeo
25" 30"
Wide Wide
25.00 30.00
[635] [ 762]
15.00 15.00
[381] [381]
22.72 27.72
[577] [ 704]
12.50 15.00
[318] [381]
4.38 -
[Ill]
7.00 -
[1 78]
11 .56 11.56
[294] [294]
9. 13 9. 13
[232] [ 232]
20" Deeo
35" 20" 25" 30" 35"
Wide Wid e Wide Wide Wide
35.00 2000 25.00 30.00 35.00
[889] [508] [ 635] [ 762] [ 889]
15.00 2000 20.00 2000 2000
[381] [508] [508] [508] [508]
32.72 17.72 22.72 27.72 32.72
[831] [450] [577] [ 704] [831]
17.50 10.00 12.50 15.00 17.50
I 445] [254] [318] [381] [445]
4.38 4.38
-
[Ill] [Ill]
- -
7.00 7.00
- - -
[1 78] [1 78]
11.56 16.56 16.56 16.56 16.56
[294] [421] [421] [421] [421]
9. 13 14.13 14.13 14.13 14.13
[232] [ 359] [ 359] [359] [359]
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 41 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 144 - Standard and Incoming Line Section, Bottom Entry, NEMA Type 1, 1 (with gasket), or 12, Back-to-Back Construction, Top View(1) Figure 145 - Standard and Incoming Line Corner Section, Bott om Entry, NEMA Type 1, 1 (with gasket), or 12, Top View Crosshatched Area Indicates Optional ,56
3.25 [831
'H'
Horizontal Ground Bus [141
1.76 [451
'G'
.25
[6]
'D'
(Front)
...................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...................... : : : : : : : : : : : : : : : ~?:~:!::: ~i:n? ::::::::::::::::
• + + •• + + •• + + •• + + •• + + •• +
••• + ••• + ••• + ••• + ••• + ••
. _,_ .......... .
,: ,.;,:.; ·L;od And · :,
: •. ·: ·: : ~o~t~ol_W]ri~g: • D
Crosshatched Area Indicates Optional
Hori zontal Ground Bus
2.63 [67]
1.1 3
[29 1
'A'
Slots
1.14 [29]
7.38 [1 871
.25
[6]
'G' 'H'
1.76 3.25
[45] [83 ]
'B'
'B' -------,
Dimension
'A'
'B'
'C'
'D'
'['
'F'
'G'
'H'
1.41 20"
Wide
20.00 [508]
29,78
[756]
17,72
[450]
10.00 [254]
4.38 [Ill]
7.00 [1 78 ]
11.56 [294]
9,13
[232]
(2) - .58 D~.
[1 5]
'D'
~----t,D-' ~,--••• -•••• -!;}--•••• ----t:.--••• ~ •••• ;-_ -_:: =: :=: :__::i::--: -+-[ O'[: J . .. .. . . . .. . . A~ I
Crosshatched Area
Indica tes Optional
Horizonta l Ground Bus
'A' 'B'
1.41 [36]
~---+-
1.14 [29 ]
-~J"I
6 ~
115,ij'li
.......
~--'<c--- .63 D~.
[1 6]
30" 0ee o 40" 0ee o
25" 30" 35" 20" 25" 30" 35"
Wide Wide Wide Wide Wide W ide W ide
25,00 30,00 35,00 20.00 25,00 30,00 35,00
[635] [762] [889] [508] [635] [762] [889]
29,78 29,78 29,78 39,78 39,78 39,78 39,78
[756] [75 6] [756] [1010] [1010] [1010] [1010]
22,72 27,72 32,72 17,72 22,72 27,72 32,72
[577] [ 704] [831] [450] [577] [ 704] [831]
12.50 15,00 17,50 10.00 12.50 15,00 17,50
[318] [381] [445] [254] [318] [381] [ 445]
4.38 4.38 4.38
- --
[Ill]
-- -
[Ill] [Ill]
7.00 7.00 7.00
-- - - --
[1 78] [1 78] [1 78 ]
11.56 11.56 11.56 16.56 16.56 16.56 16.56
[294] [294] [294] [421 I [421 I [421 I [ 421 I
9.13 9.13 9.13 14.13 14.13 14.13 14.13
[232] [232] [232] [359] [359] [359] [359]
Section Deoth
Dimension 15" 20"
Deep Deep
25.12 30.12 'A' [638] [ 765]
'B' 21.35 26.35
[542] [669]
15.00 20.00 'C' [181 I [508]
12.65 15.15 'D' [121 I [385]
7.41 12.41 '['
[1 88] [315]
42 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference Figure 146 - 10 in. Wide Incoming Line Section, Bottom Entry, NEMA Type 1, 1 (with gasket), or 12 Top View Section Depth
Dimension 15" 20"
Dee p Deep
'A' 14.86 19.86
[377] [504]
'B' 12.71 17.71
[323] [450]
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 43 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference (1) Optional ground bus location. The front face of the 1/4 in. ground bus is located 7.41 in. (188 mm) from the cabinet front. Incoming cable pull is not correctly represented in the diagram.
Figure 147 - Standard and Incoming Line Section, Bottom Entry, NEMA Type 1, 1 (with gasket), or 12, with Optional External Mounting Channels, Single Section, Top View(1)
Figure 148 - Standard and Incoming Line Section, Bottom Entry, NEMA Type 1, 1 (with gasket), or 12, with Optional External Mounting Channels, Back-to-Back Construction, Top View(1) Crosshatched Area Indicates Optional
Horizonta l Ground Bus .63 D" [161 "·
3.54 2.04
[90 1 [521
'H' 'G'
:-:-:-:-: • L~a'd And. :-:-:-:-:
:::::: .. C_o~tr~I _Wi_rin_g . . : : : : : : :
: : : : '.: '.::::: . ~n c_o~i~g. Li_ne.s . . : : : : : : : : : : : :
+ ••• + ••• + ••• + •••••••••
• + + •• + + •• + + •• + + ••• + •• +
+ ••• + ••• +.
~-+-- -----------------------------------
.25
[61
Crosshatched Area In dicates Optional
Horizonta l Ground Bus
'F'
1.14 [29]
7.38 [1871
.25
[61
'G' 'H'
2.04 [52]
3.54 [90]
'B'
Dimension
'A'
'B'
'C'
'D'
'['
'F'
'G'
'H'
Dimension
'A'
'B'
'C'
'D'
'['
'F'
'G'
'H'
20"
Wide
20.00 [508 ]
15.00 [38 1]
17.72 [450]
10.00 [254]
4.38 [Ill ]
7.00 [178]
11.56 [294]
8.46 [2 15]
20"
Wide
20.00 [508]
29.78 [756]
17.72 [450]
10.00 [254]
4.38 [Ill ]
7.00 [178]
11.56 [294]
8.46 [2 15]
15" Deeo
25" 30"
Wide
25.00 [635]
15.00 [381]
22.72 [577]
12.50 [3 18]
4.38 [Ill ]
7.00 [178]
11 .56
[294]
8.46 [2 15]
30"
25"
Wide
25.00 [635]
29.78 [756]
22.72 [577]
12.50 [3 18]
4.38 [Ill ]
7.00 [178]
11.56 [294]
8.46 [2 15]
Wide
30.00 [762]
15.00 [381]
27.72 [704]
15.00 [381]
11 .56
[294]
8.46 [215]
Deep
30"
Wide
30.00 [762]
29.78 [75 6]
27.72 [704]
15.00 [38 1]
-
-
11 .56
[294]
8.46 [215]
35"
Wide
35.00 [889]
15.00 [38 1]
32.72 [83 1]
17.50 [445]
11.56 [294]
8.46 [2 15]
35"
Wide
35.00 [889]
29.78 [756]
32.72 [831]
17.50 [445]
-
-
11.56 [294]
8.46 [2 15]
20"
Wide
20.00 [508]
20.00 [508]
17.72 [450]
10.00 [254]
4.38 [Ill ]
7.00 [178]
16.56 [421]
13.46 [342]
20"
Wide
20.00 [508]
39.78 [1010]
17.72 [450]
10.00 [254]
4.38 [Ill ]
7.00 [178]
16.56 [421]
13.46 [342]
20" Deeo
25" 30"
Wide
25.00 [635]
20.00 [508]
22.72 [5 77]
12.50 [318]
4.38 [Ill]
7.00 [178]
16.56 [421]
13.46 [342]
40"
25"
Wide
25.00 [635]
39.78 [1010]
22.72 [577]
12.50 [3 18]
4.38 [Ill ]
7.00 [178]
16.56 [421]
13.46 [342]
Wide
30.00 [762]
20.00 [508]
27.72 [704]
15.00 [38 1]
16.56 [42 1]
13.46 [342]
Deep
30"
Wide
30.00 [762]
39.78 [1010]
27.72 [704]
15.00 [38 1]
-
-
16.56 [42 1]
13.46 [342]
35"
Wide
35.00 [889]
20.00 [508]
32.72 [831]
17.50 [ 445]
16.56 [ 42 1]
13.46 [342]
35"
Wide
35.00 [889]
39.78 [1010]
32.72 [83 1]
17.50 [ 445]
-
-
16.56 [ 42 1]
13.46 [342]
44 Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference Figure 149 - Standard and Incoming Line Corner Section, Bottom Entry, NEMA Type 1, 1 (with gasket), or 12, with Optional External Mounting Channels, Top View
Figure 150 - 10 in. Wide Incoming Line Sectio n, Bottom Entry, NEMA Type 1, 1 (with gasket), or 12, with Optional External Mounting Channels, Top View Crosshatched Area
In dicates Optional
Horizonta l Ground Bus
'A' 'B'
1.14 [19]
-
3.00 [76]
1.25 [32]
3.1 7
h
---
i:i:i:i:i:i:i:i:iiii
.; • Space For . ,: • 'B' 'A'
:, :, Incoming . < < _U
••••• Cables •••••• l
]••·············•J
,1r ur111 J_
l ii~~ l
1000
[254]
~
[2) - .58 D~.
[1 5]
.63 D~.
[1 6]
Dimension
'A'
'B'
Section Depth
Dimension 15" 20"
Deep Deep
~
25.1 2 30.1 2 'A' [638] [765]_
~
20.98 25.98 'B' [533] [660]_
15.00 20.00 'C' [381] [508]
12.65 15.1 5 'D' [32 1] [385]
7.41 12.41 '['
[1 88] [315]
Section Depth
15" 20"
Deeo Deep
14.86 19,86
[377] [504]
8.59 13.59
[218] [345]
Rockwell Automation Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015 45 Bulletin 2100 CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Mains and Incoming Lines Dimension Reference Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related products from Rockwell Automation.
Y ou can view or download publications at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/. T o order paper copies of technical documentation, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative.
Resource Description
Form 385 - Motor Control Center Layout and Specification Specific drawings and dimensions for your MCC.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1 Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system.
Product Certifications website, http://www.ab.com Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other certification details.
Allen-Bradley, Rockwell Software, Rockwell Automation, CENTERLINE, and LISTEN. THINK. SOLVE are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
T rademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.
Publication 2100-TD018B-EN-P - March 2015
Supersedes Publication 2100-4.2 - October 1998 Copyright © 2015 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.
Important User Information
Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and operation of this equipment before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws, and standards.
Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are required to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.
If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation, Inc., is prohibited.
Documentation Feedback
Y our comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document, complete this form, publication RA-DU002, available at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/.
Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş., Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752 İçerenköy, İstanbul, T el: +90 (216) 5698400 Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/about-us/sustainability-ethics/product-environmental-compliance.page. www.rockwellautomation.com
Power, Control and Information Solutions Headquarters
Americas: Rockwell Automation, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204-2496 USA, Tel: (I) 414.382.2000, Fax: (I) 414.382.4444 Europe/Middle East/ Africa: Rockwell Automation NY, Pegasus Park, De Kleetlaan 12a, 1831 Diegem, Belgium, Tel: {32) 2 663 0600, Fax: (32) 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific: Rockwell Automation, Level 14, Core F, Cyberport 3, 100 Cyberport Road, Hong Kong, Tel: (852) 2887 4788, Fax: {852) 2508 1846 Instructions Industrial
Control
Equipment
MAINTENANCE OF INDUSTRIAL CONTROL EQUIPMENT
ATTENTION: Servicing energized Industrial Control Equipment can be hazardous. Severe injury or death can result from electrical shock, burn, or unintended actuation of controlled equipment. Recommended practice is to disconnect and lockout control equipment from power sources, and release stored energy, if present. Refer to National Fire Protection Association Standard No. NFPA70E, Part II and (as applicable) OSHA rules for Control of Hazardous Energy Sources (LockouVTagout) and OSHA Electrical Safety Related Work Practices for safety related work practices, including procedural requirements for lockout-tagout, and appropriate work practices, personnel qualifications and training requirements where it is not feasible to de-energize and lockout or tagout electric circuits and equipment before working on or near exposed circuit parts.
Periodic Inspection - Industrial
control equipment should be inspected
periodically. Inspection intervals should
be based on environmental and
operating conditions and adjusted as
indicated by experience. An initial
inspection within 3 to 4 months after
installation is suggested. See National
Electrical Manufacturers Association
(NEMA) Standard No. ICS 1 .3,
Preventive Maintenance of Industrial
Control and Systems Equipment, for
general guidelines for setting-up a
periodic maintenance program. Some
specific guidelines for Allen-Bradley
products are listed below.
Contamination - If inspection reveals
that dust, dirt, moisture or other
contamination has reached the control
equipment, the cause must be
eliminated. This could indicate an
incorrectly selected or ineffective
enclosure, unsealed enclosure openings
(conduit or other) or incorrect operating
procedures. Replace any improperly
selected enclosure with one that is
suitable for the environmental conditions
- refer to NEMA Standard No. 250,
Enclosures for Electrical Equipment for
enclosure type descriptions and test
criteria. Replace any damaged or
embrittled elastomer seals and repair or
replace any other damaged or
malfunctioning parts (e.g., hinges,
fasteners, etc.). Dirty, wet or
contaminated control devices must be
replaced unless they can be cleaned
effectively by vacuuming or wiping.
Compressed air is not recommended
for cleaning because it may displace
dirt, dust, or debris into other parts or
equipment, or damage delicate parts.
Cooling Devices - Inspect blowers
and fans used for forced air cooling.
Replace any that have bent, chipped, or
missing blades, or if the shaft does not
turn freely. Apply power momentarily to
check operation. If unit does not
operate, check and replace wiring, fuse,
or blower or fan motor as appropriate.
Clean or change air filters as
recommended in the product manual.
Also, clean fins of heat exchangers so
convection cooling is not impaired.
Hazardous Location Enclosures -
ATTENTION: Explosion hazard.
Always disconnect power before
opening enclosures in hazardous
locations. Close and secure such
I enclosures before reapplying power.
NEMA Types 7 and 9 enclosures require
careful handling so machined flanges do
not get damaged. For removable
covers, remove the cover and set aside
with machined surface up. For hinged
covers, open the cover fully and restrain
in the full open position if necessary.
Clean and examine the flanges on both
the body and cover before reassembly.
If there are scratches, nicks, grooves or
rust on the mating surfaces, replace the
body or cover as necessary. Examine all
bolts and replace any that have
damaged threads. Also check mating
threads for damage and replace
enclosure if necessary. Covers and
bodies of some enclosures are
manufactured as matched sets (not
interchangeable). The manufacturer
should be consulted before replacing a
cover or body unless it is specified by
the manufacturer as interchangeable.
Operating Mechanisms - Check for
proper functioning and freedom from
sticking or binding. Replace any broken,
deformed or badly worn parts or
assemblies according to individual
product renewal parts lists. Check for
and retighten securely any loose
fasteners. Lubricate if specified in
individual product instructions.
Note: Allen-Bradley magnetic starters,
contactors and relays are designed to
operate without lubrication - do not
lubricate these devices because oil or
grease on the pole faces (mating
surfaces) of the operating magnet may
cause the device to stick in the "ON"
mode. Some parts of other devices are
factory lubricated - if lubrication during
use or maintenance of these devices is
needed, it will be specified in their
individual instructions. If in doubt,
consult your nearest Allen-Bradley
Sales Office for information. See page
10-1.
Contacts - Check contacts for
excessive wear and dirt accumulations.
Vacuum or wipe contacts with a soft
cloth if necessary to remove dirt.
Contacts are not harmed by
discoloration and slight pitting. Contacts
should never be filed, as dressing only
shortens contact life. Contact spray
cleaners should not be used as their
residues on magnet pole faces or in
operating mechanisms may cause
sticking, and on contacts can interfere
with electrical continuity. Contacts
should only be replaced after silver has
become badly worn. Always replace
contacts in complete sets to avoid
misalignment and uneven contact
pressure.
Vacuum Contactors - Contacts of
vacuum contactors are not visible, so
contact wear must be checked indirectly.
Vacuum bottles should be replaced
when:
1. The estimated number of operations
equals one million, or
2. The contact life line indicator shows
need for replacement, or
3. The vacuum bottle integrity tests
show need for replacement.
Replace all vacuum bottles in the
contactor at the same time to avoid
misalignment and uneven contact wear.
If the vacuum bottles do not require
replacement, check and adjust
overtravel to the value listed on the
maintenance instructions.
Terminals - Loose connections in
power circuits can cause overheating
that can lead to equipment malfunction
or failure. Loose connections in control
circuits can cause control malfunctions.
Loose bonding or grounding
connections can increase hazards of
electrical shock and contribute to
electromagnetic interference (EMI).
Check the tightness of all terminals and
bus bar connections and tighten
securely any loose connections.
Replace any parts or wiring damaged by
overheating, and any broken wires or
bonding straps.
Arc Hoods - Check for cracks, breaks,
or deep erosion. Arc hoods and arc
chutes should be replaced if damaged
or deeply eroded.
Maintenance of Industrial Control Equipment
Continued
Coils - If a coil exhibits evidence of
overheating (cracked, melted or burned
insulation), it must be replaced. In that
event, check for and correct overvoltage
or undervoltage conditions, which can
cause coil failure. Be sure to clean any
residues of melted coil insulation from
other parts of the device or replace such
parts.
Batteries - Replace batteries
periodically as specified in product
manual or if a battery shows signs of
electrolyte leakage. Use tools to handle
batteries that have leaked electrolyte;
most electrolytes are corrosive and can
cause burns. Dispose of the old battery
in accordance with instructions supplied
with the new battery or as specified in
the manual for the product.
Pilot Lights - Replace any burned out
lamps or damaged lenses.
Photoelectric Switches - The lenses
of photoelectric switches require
periodic cleaning with a soft dry cloth.
Reflective devices used in conjunction
with photoelectric switches also require
periodic cleaning. Do not use solvents
or cleaning agents on the lenses or
reflectors. Replace any damaged lenses
and reflectors.
Solid State Devices -
' ATTENTION: Use of other than
I
factory recommended test equipment
for solid state controls may result in
I
damage to the control or test
equipment or unintended actuation of
. the controlled equipment. Refer to
I
paragraph titled HIGH VOLTAGE
TESTING.
- -- -
'1' RoclaMell Automation
Allen-Bradley
Solid state devices require little more
than a periodic visual inspection.
Discolored, charred or burned
components may indicate the need to
replace the component or circuit board.
Necessary replacements should be
made only at the PC board or plug-in
component level. Printed circuit boards
should be inspected to determine
whether they are properly seated in the
edge board connectors. Board locking
tabs should also be in place. Solid state
devices must also be protected from
contamination, and cooling provisions
must be maintained - refer to
paragraphs titled CONTAMINATION and
COOLING DEVICES on previous page.
Solvents should not be used on printed
circuit boards.
High Voltage Testing - High voltage
insulation resistance (IR) and dielectric
withstanding voltage (DWV) tests should
not be used to check solid state control
equipment. When measuring IR or DWV
of electrical equipment such as
transformers or motors, a solid state
device used for control or monitoring
must be disconnected before performing
the test. Even though no damage is
readily apparent after an IR or DWV
test, the solid state devices are
degraded and repeated application of
high voltage can lead to failure.
Locking and Interlocking Devices -
Check these devices for proper working
condition and capability of performing
their intended functions. Make any
necessary replacements only with
Allen-Bradley renewal parts or kits.
Adjust or repair only in accordance with
Allen-Bradley instructions.
Maintenance After a Fault
Condition - Opening of the short
circuit protective device (such as fuses
or circuit breakers) in a properly
coordinated motor branch circuit is an
indication of a fault condition in excess
of operating overload. Such conditions
can cause damage to control
equipment. Before restoring power,
the fault condition must be corrected
and any necessary repairs or
replacements must be made to restore
the control equipment to good working
order. Refer to NEMA Standards
Publication No. ICS-2, Part ICS2-302 for
procedures.
Replacements - Use only
replacement parts and devices
recommended by Allen-Bradley to
maintain the integrity of the equipment.
Make sure the parts are properly
matched to the model, series and
revision level of the equipment.
Final Check Out - After maintenance
or repair of industrial controls, always
test the control system for proper
functioning under controlled conditions
that avoid hazards in the event of a
control malfunction.
For additional information, refer to
NEMA ICS 1.3, PREVENTIVE
MAINTENANCE OF INDUSTRIAL
CONTROL AND SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT, published by the
National Electrical Manufacturers
Association, and NFPA70B,
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
MAINTENANCE, published by the
National Fire Protection Association.
Allen-Bradley, a Rockwell Automation Business, has been helping its customers improve productivity and quality for more than 90 years. We design, manufacture and support a broad range of automation products worldwide. They include logic processors, power and motion control devices, operator interfaces, sensors and a variety of software. Rockwell is one of the world's leading technology companies. ~
Worldwide representation. ----------------(~l:t:;0P97' le-\-!-+-,''--,,' ) Argentina• Australia• Austria• Bahrain• Belgium • Brazil• Bulgaria• Canada• Chile• China, PRC• Colombia• Costa Rica• Croatia• Cyprus• Czech Republic• Denmark Ecuador• Egypt• El Salvador• Finland• France• Germany• Greece• Guatemala• Honduras• Hong Kong• Hungary• Iceland• India• Indonesia• Ireland• Israel• Italy Jamaica• Japan •Jordan• Korea• Kuwait• Lebanon • Malaysia• Mexico• Netherlands• New Zealand • Norway• Pakistan• Peru • Philippines • Poland • Portugal Puerto Rico• Qatar• Romania• Russia-CIS • Saudi Arabia• Singapore• Slovakia• Slovenia• South Africa, Republic• Spain •Sweden• Switzerland •Taiwan• Thailand Turkey• United Arab Emirates• United Kingdom• United States• Uruguay• Venezuela• Yugoslavia Allen-Bradley Headquarters, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204 USA, Tel: (1) 414 382-2000 Fax: (1) 414 382-4444 Publication IC4106 - December 1994
Supersedes Publication IC-906 - February 1991 Copyright 1994 Allen-Bradley Company, Inc., a Rockwell International company. Printed in USA Safety Guidelines for the
Application, Installation, and
Maintenance of Solid-State
Control
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 NEMA Standard Text. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 Section 1 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Section 2 General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.1 Ambient Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.2 Electrical Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.3 Off-State Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
2.4 Polarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.5 Rate of Rise-Voltage or Current (DV/DT or DI/DT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.6 Surge Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.7 Transient Overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Section 3 Application Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.1 General Application Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.2 Circuit Isolation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.3 Special Application Considerations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.4 Planning Electrical Noise Rejection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.5 Countering the Effects of Off-State Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.6 Avoiding Adverse Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.7 The Need for Education – Knowledge Leads to Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Section 4 Installation Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.1 Installation and Wiring Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4.2 Enclosures (Cooling and Ventilating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.3 Special Handling of Electrostatic Sensitive Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4.4 Compatibility of Devices with Applied Voltages and Frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.5 Testing Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
4.6 Startup Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Section 5 Preventive Maintenance and Repair Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5.2 Preventive Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
5.3 Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5.4 Safety Recommendations for Maintenance Personnel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 LISTEN.
THINK.
SOLVE~
Rockvvell
@ Allen-Bradley • Rockwell Software Automation
Publication SGI-1.1 - April 2009
2 Foreword This Rockwell Automation publication is formatted to harmonize with NEMA Standards Publication No. ICS 1.1-1987, also titled Safety Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid-State Control. The text of the NEMA Standard has been reprinted verbatim, with NEMA’s permission, in the left column, captioned “NEMA Standard Text”. The right column, captioned “Explanatory Information”, contains Rockwell Automation comments and explanation. The comments provide supplementary information to the NEMA Standard to help the reader better understand the characteristics of industrial equipment employing solid-state technology. Rockwell Automation is solely responsible for the explanatory comments, which are not part of the NEMA Standard.
NEMA Standards Publication No. ICS 1.1-1984 (R1988, R1993, R1998, R2003) is available from the National Electrical Manufacturers Association, 2101 L Street, N.W ., Washington, D.C. 20037.
Comments
Rockwell Automation comments on each section of the NEMA publication will appear after that section, with a “Comments” heading.
NEMA Standard Text
Scope This Standards Publication is intended to provide general guidelines for the application, installation, and maintenance of solid-state control in the form of individual devices or packaged assemblies incorporating solid- state components. The emphasis of the guidelines is personnel safety.
Applicable NEMA standards and product related instructions should be carefully followed.
Comments: Scope
The scope of this Allen-Bradley Publication (SGI-1.1) is identical to the scope of NEMA Standards Publication No. ICS 1.1, quoted above.
Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009
Section 1: Definitions 3
Section 1: Definitions
Electrical Noise – Unwanted electrical energy that has the possibility of producing undesirable effects in the control, its circuits and system.
Electrical noise includes Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) and Radio Frequency Interference (RFI).
Electrical Noise Immunity – The extent to which the control is protected from a stated electrical noise.
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) – Electromagnetic disturbance that manifests itself in performance degradation, malfunction, or failure of electronic equipment. (IEC)
Off-State Current – The current that flows in a solid-state device in the off-state condition.
Off-State Condition – The conditions of a solid-state device when no control signal is applied.
On-State Condition – The condition of a solid-state device when conducting.
Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) – RFI is used interchangeably with EMI.
EMI is a later definition that includes the entire electromagnetic spectrum, whereas RFI is more restricted to the radiofrequency band, generally considered to be between 10k and 10G Hz. (IEC)
Surge Current – A current exceeding the steady state current for a short time duration, normally described by its peak amplitude and time duration.
Transient Overvoltage – The peak voltage in excess of steady state voltage for a short time during the transient conditions (e.g., resulting from the operations of a switching device).
Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009
4 Section 2: General Authorized Engineering Information Section 2: General Authorized Engineering
Information
General (Sections 2 through 5 are classified as Authorized Engineering Information 11-15-1984.) Solid-state and electro-mechanical controls can perform similar control functions, but there are certain unique characteristics of solid-state controls which must be understood.
In the application, installation and maintenance of solid-state control, special consideration should be given to the characteristics described in 2.1 through
2.7. General: Comments
Solid-state devices provide many advantages such as high speed, small size, and the ability to handle extremely complex functions. However, they differ from electromechanical devices in the basic operating characteristics and sensitivity to environmental influences. In addition, solid-state devices exhibit different failure mechanisms when overstressed.
The comments which follow are intended to provide additional information to help the reader better understand the operating characteristics, environmental limitations, and failure modes of industrial equipment that incorporates solid-state technology. Those who select, install, use, and service such equipment should apply that knowledge to make appropriate decisions that will optimize the performance and safety of their applications.
2.1 Ambient Temperature Care should be taken not to exceed the ambient temperature range specified by the manufacturer.
Comments: 2.1 — Ambient Temperature
Temperature of the air immediately surrounding an open solid-state device is the ambient temperature -which must be considered. When equipment is installed in an enclosure, the enclosure internal air temperature is the ambient temperature which must be considered. Solid-state component manufacturers usually publish the component failure rate for an ambient temperature of 40º C. A useful rule of thumb is: The failure rate of solid-state components doubles for every 40º C rise in temperature.
This rule of exponential increases in failure rate is a strong incentive for the user to keep the ambient temperature as low as possible.
See also sections 3.6.1, and 3.6.2.
2.2 Electrical Noise Performance of solid-state controls can be affected by electrical noise. In general, complete systems are designed with a degree of noise immunity. Noise immunity can be determined through tests such as described in 3.4.2.
Manufacturer recommended installation practices for reducing the effect of noise should be followed.
Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009
Section 2: General Authorized Engineering Information 5 Comments: 2.2 —Electrical Noise
Solid-state devices are generally more susceptible to electrical noise interference than their electromechanical counterparts. The reasons are straightforward. The operating mechanism for electromechanical devices requires a deliberate input of electrical energy that can be converted into a sustained mechanical force that is strong enough to close the hard contacts and maintain the closure for the duration on the ON cycle. Most random electrical noise signals lack the energy content to produce that magnitude of mechanical force. The operating mechanism for solid-state devices is totally different. The deliberate electric energy input is used to disturb the placement of the electrically charged particles within the molecular structure. This molecular displacement changes the electrical characteristic from that of an insulator to that of a conductor or vice versa.
The required energy level is very low. In addition, a sustained signal is not required for components such as SCRs, triacs, and logic gates because these types are self-latching. Most random electrical noise signals are of the momentary low-energy type. Since it is difficult to separate deliberate signals from random noise, the devices are thereby more susceptible. This is cause for special concern regarding the electrical environment and possible need for noise rejection measures. See sections 3.4, 3.4.1, 3.4.2, and 3.4.3.
2.3 Off-State Current Solid-state controls generally exhibit a small amount of current flow when in the off-state condition. Precautions must be exercised to ensure proper circuit performance and personnel safety. The value of this current is available from the manufacturer.
Comments: 2.3— Off-State Current
Off-state current is also referred to as leakage current in the literature. A solid-state “contact” is a solid block of material that is switched from ON to OFF by a change internally from a conductor to an insulator. Since a perfect insulator does not exist, there is always some leakage current present as long as voltage is applied to the device. The presence of leakage current indicates that OFF does not mean OPEN. The reader is warned that simply turning a solid-state device OFF does not remove the possibility of a shock hazard. Solid-state and electromechanical devices used as inputs to solid-state controls must be compatible with the solid-state equipment with which they are used. Solid-state devices have inherent off-state current, as explained in the preceding paragraph.
Electromechanical devices may also permit a small amount of current to flow when the device is in the “open” position due to poor insulation characteristics, which may be subject to further deterioration with age and use. An example is a switching device that employs a carbon brush in contact with an insulating segment of the switch in the off-state, such that a conductive film may be deposited by the brush on the insulating segment. Any input device that could produce an erroneous signal of sufficient magnitude to cause a malfunction of the solid-state equipment, such as unintended turn ON or inability to turn OFF, should not be used with solid-state controls.
See also section 3.5.2.
Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009
6 Section 2: General Authorized Engineering Information
2.4 Polarity Incorrect polarity of applied voltages may damage solid-state controls. The correct polarity of solid-state controls should be observed.
Comments: 2.4 —Polarity
In some instances incorrect polarity can cause damage to controlled equipment or unintended actuation of outputs. This could result in personal injury due to an unexpected response of the controlled equipment or process.
See also section 3.3.2.
2.5 Rate of Rise-Voltage or
Current
(DV/DT or DI/DT) Solid-state controls can be affected by rapid changes of voltage or current if the rate of rise (DV/DT and/or DI/DT) is greater than the maximum permissible value specified by the manufacturer.
Comments: 2.5 —Rate of Rise-Volt age or Current (DV/DT or DI/DT) The DV/DT rating specifies the maximum rate at which voltage may be applied to the power terminals of a solid-state device. Voltage applied at a rate exceeding the DV/DT rating can switch the device ON without an input signal being applied. Electrical noise with high frequency content is one source of rapidly changing voltage.
Another common source of high DV/DT is an inductive load that is switched off faster than the stored energy can be dissipated. This fast switching produces “inductive kick voltages” that might exceed the DV/DT limit.
The DI/DT rating specifies the maximum rate at which current flow may be increased when switching from OFF to ON. Currents that increase faster than the DI/DT rating cause localized hot spots due to current crowding in a small area until the entire cross section can become conductive.
This results in gradual degradation of the device. Subsequent operations generally result in over dissipation and short circuit failures even under normal load conditions. The most common situations for high DI/DT are low load impedance, or capacitance loads.
Manufacturers of solid-state equipment usually include internal means to limit the rate of rise of voltage and current. Nonetheless, the user should be aware that additional external means may be necessary to adjust to the specific conditions of some installations.
2.6 Surge Current Current of a value greater than that specified by the manufacturer can affect the solid-state control. Current limiting means may be required.
Comments: 2.6 — Surge Current
The manufacturer may specify allowable surge current. Common practice is to specify the peak sinusoidal current that can be allowed for one-half cycle at line frequency. The intent behind this practice is to give the user Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009
Section 2: General Authorized Engineering Information 7 information for selecting an appropriate fuse or other current limiting means.
Applications that require short-term overcurrent capability (e.g., motor starting) must observe the manufacturers restrictions on the number of times the device can be subjected to overcurrent in a specified time interval. The user should be aware that this specification may vary depending upon whether the conditions call for hot starts or cold starts.
Hot start means that the solid-state component is at or near the normal operating temperature due to previous operation history when the overcurrent condition occurs. Cold start means that the solid-state component is at or below 40º C when the overcurrent condition occurs.
2.7 Transient Overvoltage Solid-state controls may be affected by transient overvoltages which are in excess of those specified by the manufacturer. Voltage limiting means should be considered and may be required.
Comments: 2.7 — Tr ansient Overvoltage
Solid-state devices are especially sensitive to excessive voltage. When the peak voltage rating is exceeded, even for a fraction of a second, permanent damage can occur. The crystalline structure of the device may be irretrievably altered and the device may no longer be able to turn OFF.
The external symptom of this situation is exactly the same as that of an electromechanical device with welded contacts.
Minimum Holding Current
Another characteristic of concern is the minimum holding current requirement for triacs and SCRs. When the load current falls below the minimum value, typically 25...100 mA, the triac or SCR ceases conduction and passes only off-state current until again triggered. Thus, it may not be possible for the circuit to turn on or conduct full-load current for very light loads. In these instances, a load resistor called a bleeder resistor may be connected to the output to provide the minimum load. In some equipment special circuitry is provided to overcome this problem.
Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009
8 Section 3: Application Guidelines
Section 3: Application Guidelines
3.1 General Application
Precautions
3.1.1 Circuit Considerations
The consequences of some malfunctions such as those caused by shorted output devices, alteration, loss of memory, or failure of isolation within components or logic devices, require that the user be concerned with the safety of personnel and the protection of the electronics.
It is recommended that circuits which the user considers to be critical to personnel safety, such as “end of travel” circuits and “emergency stop” circuits, should directly control their appropriate functions through an electromechanical device independent of the solid-state logic. Such circuits should initiate the stop function through deenergization rather than energization of the control device. This provides a means of circuit control that is independent of system failure.
Comments: 3.1.1 —Circ uit Considerations
The predominant failure mode of solid-state devices is in the ON condition. This failure mode and the other types of failures mentioned in the NEMA Standard are the reasons for the precautions that are recommended for safetycritical circuits on systems that control potentially hazardous processes or machine operations. Alternatively, if solid-state is used for circuits designated as safety-critical, the circuits should be designed to provide safety equivalent to the recommended “hard-wired” electromechanical circuits. In such cases consideration should be given to techniques such as: redundancy, feedback loops, diagnostics, interlocking and read-only memory for critical parts of a program.
De-energization rather than energization of the control device should be specified for STOP circuits so broken wires or corroded contacts do not go undetected. E-stop push buttons or pull cords should be installed at appropriate locations on a machine to provide operators with a rapid and convenient means for removing power from devices that control machine motion.
3.1.2 Power Up/Power Down Considerations
Consideration should be given to system design so that unsafe operation does not occur under these conditions since solid-state outputs may operate erratically for a short period of time after applying or removing power.
Comments: 3.1.2 Power Up/Power Down Considerations
Response of a system during power up/power down can create hazards not encountered during normal operation. Erratic operation of solid-state outputs due to the changing voltage of DC power supplies during start up is one example. To avoid unpredictable outputs, many power supplies incorporate a power turn-on time delay circuit. This allows power supply output voltage to reach its specified value before being applied to Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009
Section 3: Application Guidelines 9
solid-state logic and output circuits. If this protection is not part of the DC supplies for a system, a timing circuit external to the power supply can be added to delay the application of power to output devices.
Removing all power or losing all power from a system simultaneously usually does not result in a hazard since the power for machine operation is also being removed. However, when power other than electrical power is being controlled, a power interlock circuit may be required to protect against unexpected machine motion. Power interlocks with automatic shutdown should be included if erratic or hazardous operation results due to loss of one power supply in a system with multiple supplies.
Automatic power supply sequencing should be employed in systems that require the application or removal of power in a specific sequence. If the STOP or E-STOP sequence normally employs dynamic braking, alternative safeguards, such as automatic mechanical braking upon loss of power, should be provided if coasting stops are hazardous.
If hazardous operation can result from unexpected restoration of power during a power outage or a system shutdown, the system should include a feature that requires a deliberate operator action before power is reapplied to the system.
3.1.3 Redundancy and Monitoring
When solid-state devices are being used to control operations, which the user determines to be critical, it is strongly recommended that redundancy and some form of checking be included in the system. Monitoring circuits should check that actual machine or process operation is identical to controller commands; and in the event of failure in the machine, process, or the monitoring system, the monitoring circuits should initiate a safe shutdown sequence.
Comments: 3.1.3 Redundancy and Monitoring
The normal operating mechanism for solid-state components depends upon a deliberate electrical signal input altering the internal molecular structure of the semiconductor material.
Unfortunately, spurious input signals may also alter the internal molecular structure without any means for external detection that this has happened.
Therefore, solid-state devices are subject to malfunction due to random causes that are undetectable. Because of this, redundancy and monitoring are the most highly recommended means for counteracting this situation.
When redundancy is used, dissimilar components not susceptible to common cause failure should be used for the redundant elements if a common cause could produce simultaneous failure of those elements in a dangerous mode.
A “safe shutdown sequence” can involve much more than disconnecting electrical power for some machinery and processes. Examples include machines with high inertia and hazardous access points, processes that become unstable at shutdown unless a specific sequence is followed, etc.
The control system for such applications should be configured to deal Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009
10 Section 3: Application Guidelines
with the particular hazard(s) through use of special features such as automatic transfer of control functions to redundant devices in the event of failure of primary controls; alarm circuits and diagnostics to signal and identify failures that require repair in order to maintain redundancy; emergency power sources with automatic transfer upon loss of primary power source; or other appropriate features.
3.1.4 Overcurrent Protection
To protect triacs and transistors from shorted loads, a closely matched short circuit protective device (SCPD) is often incorporated. These SCPDs should be replaced only with devices recommended by the manufacturer.
Comments: 3.1.4 —Overcurrent Protection
Even a closely matched short-circuit protective device (SCPD) will generally protect a solid-state device only against shorted loads, an accidental short to ground, or a phase-to-phase short. Depending upon the application, additional protective measures may be needed to protect the solid-state devices against small to moderate overcurrents. Consult with the manufacturer if necessary.
3.1.5 Overvoltage Protection
To protect triacs, SCRs and transistors from overvoltages, it may be advisable to consider incorporating peak voltage clamping devices such as varistors, zener diodes, or snubber networks in circuits incorporating these devices.
Comments: 3.1.5 — O vervoltage Protection
See section 2.7.
3.2 Circuit Isolation
Requirements
3.2.1 Separating Voltages
Solid-state logic uses low level voltage (e.g., less than 32V DC) circuits. In contrast, the inputs and outputs are often high level (e.g., 120V AC) voltages.
Proper design of the interface protects against an unwanted interaction between the low level and high level circuits; such an interaction can result in a failure of the low voltage circuitry. This is potentially dangerous. An input and output circuitry incorporating effective isolation techniques (which may include limiting impedance or Class 2 supplied circuitry) should be selected.
Comments: 3.2.1 —Se parating Voltages
For specifications of Class 2 circuitry, refer to Article 725 of the National Electrical Code, NFPA 70.
Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009
Section 3: Application Guidelines 11
3.2.2 Isolation Techniques
The most important function of isolation components is to separate high level circuits from low level circuits in order to protect against the transfer of a fault from one level to the other.
Isolation transformers, pulse transformers, reed relays, or optical couplers are typical means to transmit low level logic signals to power devices in the high level circuit. Isolation impedance means also are used to transmit logic signals to power devices.
Comments: 3.2.2 — Isolation Techniques
In addition to utilizing the various components discussed in the left column, specific wiring techniques should be applied to assure separation of power circuit wires from logic circuit wires. If at all possible, logic wires should be run in a conduit that is segregated for that purpose only. Multiple conductors in a shielded cable is an appropriate substitute for separate conduits. Another common practice is to run the logic signals through twisted pairs of wire.
Regardless of the circumstances, wires carrying logic signals should never be wrapped in the same bundle with wires that carry power signals.
3.3 Special Application
Considerations
3.3.1 Converting Ladder Diagrams
Converting a ladder diagram originally designed for electromechanical systems to one using solid-state control must account for the differences between electromechanical and solid-state devices. Simply replacing each contact in the ladder diagram with a corresponding solid-state "contact" will not always produce the desired logic functions or fault detection and response. For example, in electromechanical systems, a relay having a mechanically linked normally open (N.O.) and normally closed (N.C.) contact can be wired to check itself. Solid-state components do not have a mutually exclusive N.O.-N.C. arrangement. However, external circuitry can be employed to sample the input and "contact" state and compare to determine if the system is functioning properly.
Comments: 3.3.1 —Conver ting Ladder Diagrams
The example cited in this section of the NEMA Standard illustrates only one of a number of reasons for special care in converting an electromechanical (relay) ladder diagram to a programmable controller (PC) program. Some other basic considerations are:
A PC program is an instruction to the PC’s central processing unit to allow it to perform the logic functions and sequences for a particular application. Typically, the PC’s logic level components are electrically isolated from the actual input, sensor and actuator devices, as contrasted with electromechanical controls which usually include contacts and coils of the actual plant floor devices in the control schematic. Therefore a PC program normally functions as open-loop control, unless feedback loops from the plant floor devices to separate inputs of the PC are provided and programmed to cause corrective action if inconsistencies are detected.
Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009
12 Section 3: Application Guidelines
Programmers of PC systems should evaluate functional and safety implications of all control paths and provide appropriate feedback arrangements as needed.
In an electromechanical implementation of a ladder diagram, power is available to every rung at all times, so that the logic of the various rungs is executed continually and simultaneously, limited of course by the operating delays inherent in the electromechanical devices. By contrast, a typical PC examines the status of input devices (I/O scan), then executes the user program in sequence (program scan), then changes outputs accordingly in the next I/O scan. Therefore, the sequential order of a PC program can be of more importance and significance than in its electromechanical counterpart, particularly when special instructions such as "immediate" inputs or outputs are programmed as some PC’s permit.
Also, differences in response characteristics of components, differences in system architecture, and the scan time associates with a PC system can combine to change timing characteristics of a circuit significantly. In particular, care must be taken in handling momentary or rapidly changing inputs to a PC system which might be missed between scans. Simple transfer of a ladder diagram without consideration of these characteristics of PC’s may produce unintended and possibly hazardous results.
Programmers should consult the user's manual in order to understand the characteristics of the particular PC being used, and provide appropriate features in the program to accommodate them.
Another concern is the operating mode of devices connected to input terminals. Input signals must be arranged so loss of signal due to a broken wire or corroded contact does not go undetected and create a hazardous condition. In particular, stop functions should be initiated by opening a normally closed external circuit rather than closing a normally open circuit even though the system is capable of being programmed to accept either type of input.
The considerations described in this section apply to the creation of "new" programs as well as conversion of existing ladder diagrams.
3.3.2 Polarity and Phase Sequence
Input power and control signals should be applied with polarity and phase sequence as specified by the manufacturer. Solid-state devices can be damaged by the application of reverse polarity or incorrect phase sequence.
Comments: 3.3.2 —Polar ity and Phase Sequence
Additionally, incorrect polarity or phase sequence connection may cause erratic response by solid-state controls, with potential hazards to personnel. Frequently, such a system contains a detection circuit that illuminates an indicator when incorrect phase sequence is applied. Phase sequence may be corrected by interchanging any two system input power leads. It is advisable to check rotation of motors whenever input power leads are disconnected and reconnected in a system.
Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009
Section 3: Application Guidelines 13
3.4 Planning Electrical
Noise Rejection
The low energy levels of solid-state controls may cause them to be vulnerable to electrical noise. This should be considered in the planning stages.
3.4.1 Assessing Electrical Environment
Sources of noise are those pieces of equipment that have large, fast changing voltages or currents when they are energized or de-energized, such as motor starters, welding equipment, SCR type, adjustable speed devices and other inductive devices. These devices, as well as the more common control relays and their associated wiring, all have the capability of inducing serious current and voltage transients on their respective power lines. It is these transients which nearby solid-state controls must withstand and for which noise immunity should be provided.
An examination of the proposed installation site of the solid-state control should identify equipment that could contaminate power lines. All power lines that will be tapped by the proposed solid-state control should be examined for the presence, severity, and frequency of noise occurrences. If found, system plans should provide for the control of such noise.
Comments: 3.4.1 — Assessi ng Electrical Environment
Noise can also occur in the form of electromagnetic radiation, or due to improper grounding practices. Section C.3.4.3 explains these forms of noise and precautionary measures that should be taken for protection against them.
In many instances a system may begin to malfunction some time after it has been installed and is working properly. This may be due to recent installation of new equipment capable of inducing noise into presently operating systems. Thus, it is not sufficient to merely evaluate a system at the time of installation. Periodic rechecks should be made, especially as other equipment is moved, modified, or newly installed. When installing a solid-state system, it is wise to assume various noise sources exist and install the system to guard against possible interference.
3.4.2 Selecting Devices to Provide Noise Immunity
Installation planning is not complete without examination of the noise immunity characteristics of the system devices under consideration. Results of tests to determine relative immunity to electrical noise may be requested from the manufacturer. Two such standardized tests are the ANSI (C37.90a-1974) Surge Withstand Capability Test and the NEMA (ICS.1-1983) noise test referred to as The Showering Arc Test. These are applied where direct connection of solid-state control to other electromechanical control circuits is intended. Circuits involving analog regulating systems or high speed logic are generally more sensitive to electrical noise; therefore, isolation and separation of these circuits is more critical.
Further information on electrical noise and evaluation of the severity of noise may be found in ANSI/IEEE Publication No. 518-1982.
Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009
14 Section 3: Application Guidelines
Where severe power line transients are anticipated or noted, appropriate filters such as commercially available line filter, isolation transformers, or voltage limiting varistors, should be considered.
All inductive components associated with the system should be examined for the need for noise suppression.
Comments: 3.4.2 —Selecting Devi ces to Provide Noise Immunity Inductive devices are capable of generating high voltage transients when switched off. In addition to possibly causing damage to solid-state devices by exceeding the semiconductor voltage rating, the high voltage transient can be coupled to other portions of a system where it appears as noise.
Fortunately, it is fairly easy to limit the effects of this type of noise with some form of suppression device. When necessary, in addition to suppression devices often provided in solid-state equipment, an external suppressor should be connected as close as possible to the source of the transient for maximum attenuation.
NOTE: A surge suppressor increases drop-out time of an
electromechanical device.
3.4.3 Design of Wiring for Maximum Protection
Once the installation site and power conductors have been examined, the system wiring plans that will provide noise suppression should be considered.
Conducted noise enters solid-state control at the points where the control is connected to input lines, output lines, and power supply wires.
Input circuits are the circuits most vulnerable to noise. Noise may be introduced capacitatively through wire to wire proximity, or magnetically from nearby lines carrying large currents. In most installations, signal lines and power lines should be separate. Further, signal lines should be appropriately routed and shielded according to manufacturer's recommendations.
When planning system layout, care must be given to appropriate grounding practice. Because design differences may call for different grounding, the control manufacturer's recommendations should be followed.
C.3.4.3 Design of Wiring for Maximum Protection
Noise can also occur in the form of electromagnetic radiation. Examples include radio frequency (RF) energy emanating from portable transceivers (walkie-talkie) and fixed station transmitters of various types. Close coupling is not required; the various lines entering the system act as receiving antennas. Tests described in 3.4.2 may not be sufficient to demonstrate noise immunity to radio frequency signals. Variations in building construction and equipment installation make it impossible for equipment manufacturers to perform meaningful tests of radio frequency sources. RF fields are affected by concentrating masses of metal such as steel beams, piping, conduit, metal enclosures, and equipment used in production such as fork lift trucks and products being transported on conveyors.
Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009
Section 3: Application Guidelines 15
If the installation site will be subjected to this type of noise, thorough testing should be performed to assure that the solid-state system has sufficient noise immunity for the expected levels of radio frequency energy. Corrective measures should be taken if necessary. These include shielding of solid-state circuits and/or connected wiring and the establishment of restrictions to provide safe operating distances between the solid-state equipment and the RF sources.
Grounding practices in industry are frequently misunderstood and often ignored. Poor grounding can lead to many problems in solid-state systems.
Intentionally grounding one circuit conductor of any electrical supply system is widely accepted and is generally required by electrical codes.
However, the non-current carrying parts of a system which enclose equipment and conductors must also be grounded. In addition to complying with various codes and standards, proper equipment grounding achieves several desirable objectives:
1. It reduces the potential difference between conductive surfaces to minimize electric shock hazard exposure for personnel.
2. It provides a path for passage of fault current to operate protective devices in the supply circuit.
3. It attenuates the electrical noise and transients that can reach enclosed equipment and also reduces the electrical noise which the equipment can contribute to its surroundings.
3.5 Countering the Effects of
Off-State Current
3.5.1 Off-State Current
Solid-state components, such as triacs, transistors, and thyristors, inherently have in the off-state a small current flow called "off-state current".
Off-state current may also be contributed by devices used to protect these components, such as RC snubbers.
Comments: 3.5.1 — Off-State Current
See section 2.3.
3.5.2 Off-State Current Precautions
Off-state currents in a device in the off-state may present a hazard of electrical shock and the device should be disconnected from the power source before working on the circuit or load.
Comments: 3.5.2 — Off- State Current Precautions
The off-state current of a power switching device such as a solid-state motor controller can be lethal. Simply switching off power via a stop push button in a control circuit is not a sufficient precaution, since off-state current will continue to flow through solid-state devices which remain connected to the supply. Good practice requires disconnection of all Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009
16 Section 3: Application Guidelines
power from equipment before working on or near exposed circuit parts. (See NFPA 70E, Part II.)
It should not be assumed that a shock hazard does not exist simply because a solid-state circuit operates at low voltage levels. Standing on a wet floor or working in a damp location can lower a person's body impedance to the extent that off-state current from low voltage also presents an electrical shock hazard.
If it is necessary to work on energized equipment, the guidelines detailed in section 5.2 for Preventive Maintenance should be followed. In addition to the specific procedures for personnel safety, care is needed when making measurements in energized systems. First, there is a possibility of damage to delicate instruments due to off-state current. Second, the off-state current can lead to false conclusions when using sensitive instruments to check for "contact continuity."
Precautions should be taken to prevent the off-state current of an output device which is in the off-state from energizing an input device.
When a device (solid-state or electromechanical) that can produce a leakage current in the off-state is used to provide the input to a solid-state control, the precautions explained in section C.2.3 apply.
3.6 Avoiding Adverse
Environmental Conditions
3.6.1 Temperature
Solid-state devices should only be operated within the temperature ranges specified by the manufacturer. Because such devices generate heat, care should be taken to see that the ambient temperature at the device does not exceed the temperature range specified by the manufacturer.
The main source of heat in a solid-state system is the energy dissipated in the power devices. Since the life of the equipment can be increased by reducing operating temperature, it is important to observe the manufacturer's "maximum/minimum ambient temperature" guidelines, where ambient refers to the temperature of the air providing the cooling. The solid-state equipment must be allowed to stabilize to within the manufacturer's recommended operating temperature range before energizing control functions.
When evaluating a system design, other sources of heat in the enclosure which might raise the ambient temperature should not be overlooked. For example, power supplies, transformers, radiated heat, sunlight, furnaces, incandescent lamps, and so forth should be evaluated.
In instances where a system will have to exist in a very hot ambient environment, special cooling methods may have to be employed. Techniques that are employed include cooling fans (with adequate filtering), vortex coolers, heat exchanges, and air conditioned rooms.
Over-temperature sensors are recommended for systems where special cooling is employed. Use of air conditioning should include means for prevention of condensing moisture.
Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009
Section 3: Application Guidelines 17
Comments: 3.6.1 — Temperature
Operation above the maximum rated temperature will usually result in many failures in a short time. Nuisance type malfunctions can also be encountered as a result of elevated ambient temperature. These malfunctions, when they occur, are usually temporary and normal operation resumes when temperatures are lowered.
Some solid-state devices temporarily cease to function when ambient temperature is below their minimum rated operating temperature.
Operation in cold environments should be avoided or heaters should be installed in the equipment enclosures to bring the system up to the minimum specified operating temperature before applying power to the system.
Air circulating in a non-ventilated enclosure with equipment operating will be at a higher temperature than the room in which it is installed. A temperature differential of 10...20º C can be expected in a typical industrial installation. See also section 2.1.
3.6.2 Contaminants
Moisture, corrosive gases and liquids, and conductive dust can all have adverse effects on a system that is not adequately protected against atmospheric contaminants.
If these contaminants are allowed to collect on printed circuit boards, bridging between the conductors may result in malfunction of the circuit. This could lead to noisy, erratic control operation, or at worst, a permanent malfunction.
A thick coating of dust could also prevent adequate cooling on the board or heat sink, causing malfunction. A dust coating on heat sinks reduces their thermal efficiency.
Preventive measures include a specially conditioned room or a properly specified enclosure for the system.
Comments: 3.6.2 — Contaminants
Modules for solid-state systems usually consist of electronic devices mounted on printed circuit boards with relatively close spacing between conductors. Moisture in the form of humidity is one of the atmospheric contaminants which can cause failure. If moisture is allowed to condense on a printed circuit board, the board metallizations could "electroplate" across the conductor spacings when voltage is applied. In low-impedance circuits, this conductive path would immediately burn open, then reform to be burned open again. This action can lead to erratic operation. In high impedance circuits, a short circuit may appear resulting in a permanent malfunction. Specifications for equipment often include a relative humidity exposure limit, but appropriate precautions should be taken to prevent condensation. Failures due to moisture are often accelerated in the presence of corrosive gases or vapors. These increase the conductivity of the moisture layer allowing electromigration to occur more rapidly and at lower potentials.
Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009
18 Section 3: Application Guidelines
3.6.3 Shock and Vibration
Excessive shock or vibration may cause damage to solid-state equipment.
Special mounting provisions may be required to minimize damage.
Comments: 3.6.3 — Shock and Vibration
Solid-state systems usually have good resistance to shock and vibration since they contain no moving parts. However, at relatively high levels of shock or vibration, circuit boards may disengage from mating connectors if not restrained sufficiently. Circuit boards can crack, components can come out of sockets or component leads can break loose from a solder connection to the board. Mounting position is usually of little significance to solid-state devices except in instances where air flow is required for cooling.
3.7 The Need for Education -
Knowledge Leads to Safety
Planning for an effective solid-state circuit requires enough knowledge to make basic decisions that will render the system safe as well as effective.
Everyone who works with a solid-state control should be educated in its capabilities and limitations. This includes in-plant installers, operators, service personnel, and system designers.
Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009
Section 4: Installation Guidelines 19
Section 4: Installation Guidelines
4.1 Installation and Wiring
Practice
4.1.1 Proper installation and field wiring practices are of prime importance to the application of solid-state controls. Proper wiring practice will minimize the influence of electrical noise, which may cause malfunction of equipment.
User and installers should familiarize themselves with the follow installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws, and standards. The manufacturer of the device or component in question should be consulted whenever conditions arise that are not covered by the manufacturer's instructions.
4.1.2 Electrical noise is a very important consideration in any installation of solid-state control. While wiring practices may vary from situation to situation, the following are basic to minimizing electrical noise:
1. Sufficient physical separation should be maintained between electrical noise sources and sensitive equipment to assure that the noise will not cause malfunctioning or unintended actuation of the control.
2. Physical separation should be maintained between sensitive signal wires and electrical power and control conductors. This separation can be accomplished by conduits, wiring trays, or as otherwise recommended by the manufacturer.
3. Twisted-pair wiring should be used in critical signal circuits and noise producing circuits to minimize magnetic interference.
4. Shielded wire should be used to reduce the magnitude of the noise coupled into the low level circuit by electrostatic or magnetic coupling.
5. Provisions of the 1984 National Electrical Code
➊ with respect to
grounding should be followed. Additional grounding precautions may be required to minimize electrical noise. These precautions generally deal with ground loop currents arising from multiple ground paths. The manufacturer's recommendations should be followed.
➊Available from National Fire Protection Association, Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269 Comments: 4.1.2
A great deal of effort goes into the design of solid-state equipment to achieve a reasonable degree of noise immunity. Filters, shielding, and circuit design are all used. It is, however, impossible to design equipment which is impervious to every form of noise found in the industrial setting.
Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009
20 Section 4: Installation Guidelines
When installing a system using solid-state technology it is wise to assume that electrical noise exists and install the equipment in accordance with the recommended guidelines to minimize problems.
See also section 3.4.1.
4.2 Enclosures Suitable enclosures and control of the maximum operating temperature, both of which are environmental variables, may be needed to prevent malfunction of solid state control.
The manufacturer's recommendations should be followed for the selection of enclosures, ventilation, air filtering (if required), and ambient temperature.
These recommendations may vary from installation to installation, even within the same facility.
Comments: 4.2 — En closures (Cooling and Ventilating)
NEMA Standards Publication No. 250 (please reference the latest edition), classifies enclosures by type number and specifies their design test requirements.Suitable enclosures and control of the maximum operating temperature, both of which are environmental variables, may be needed to prevent malfunctions of solid-state control.
See also sections 2.1 and 3.6.1.
4.3 Special Handling of
Electrostatic Sensitive
Devices
Some devices may be damaged by electrostatic charges. These devices are identified and should be handled in the special manner specified by the manufacturer.
NOTE: Plastic wrapping material used to ship these devices may be conductive and should not be used as insulating material.
Comments: 4.3 — Special Handling of Electrostatic Sensitive Devices Many problems due to electrostatic discharge (ESD) occur due to handling of modules during installation or maintenance.
In addition to specific guidelines provided by an equipment supplier, the following general guidelines can help reduce damage due to ESD.
1. Use a grounding bracelet if possible to minimize charge build-up on personnel.
2. Handle a module by the edges without touching components or printed circuit paths.
3. Store modules with ESD sensitive components in the conductive packaging used for shipping the modules. Also, use conductive packaging when returning static sensitive modules for repair.
Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009
Section 4: Installation Guidelines 21
4.4 Compatibility of Devices
with Applied Voltages and
Frequencies
Prior to energization, users and installers should verify that the applied voltage and frequency agree with the rated voltage and frequency specified by the manufacturer.
NOTE: Incorrect voltage or frequency may cause a malfunction of, or damage to the control.
4.5 Testing Precautions When testing solid-state control, the procedures equipment should be electrically equivalent to that recommended by the manufacturer for the test procedure. A low impedance voltage tester should not be used.
High voltage insulation tests and dielectric tests should never be used to test solid-state devices. If high voltage insulation of field wiring is required, solid-state devices should be disconnected. Ohmmeters should only be used when and as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
Testing equipment should be grounded; if it is not, special precautions should be taken.
Comments: 4.5 —Test ing Precautions
Make-do test devices such as incandescent lamps or neon lamps should not be used for checking voltages in solid-state systems. Incandescent lamps have low impedance; the low impedance of these devices can effectively change a voltage level from a logic "1" condition to a logic "0" condition when attempting to make a measurement. Unexpected machine motion can result if an output to a controlled device is energized as a result. Neon lamps do not respond to voltages typically used in logic circuits (e.g., 32V DC or less). Use of a neon lamp tester could lead to false conclusions about the voltage level present in a circuit.
High input impedance meters are required to obtain accurate voltage measurements in high impedance circuits. Unless otherwise specified by the manufacturer, a meter with an input impedance of ten megohms or greater is recommended for making voltage measurements. The meter must also have sufficient sensitivity to measure logic level voltages; some meters do not respond to low voltages.
4.6 Startup Procedures Checks and tests prior to startup and startup procedures recommended by the manufacturer should be followed.
Comments: 4.6 —S tartup Procedures
Startup procedures can provide important benefits for safety with new installation, or after modifications or repairs. A "dry run" under controlled conditions can verify proper installation and functioning of the control system before it is turned over to operating personnel.
Many programmable solid-state systems have the capability for simulating operation in a mode known as "test" mode or "dry run" mode. These modes allow a user to check a program and correct obvious programming errors with outputs disabled. Unexpected machine motion and possible damage to workpieces and equipment is thus avoided. These modes can also be used to verify proper system operation after a repair.
Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009
22 Section 4: Installation Guidelines
Many programmable systems provide capability for "force on" and "force off" of inputs and outputs. Use of these functions can reduce troubleshooting and maintenance time by enabling personnel to bypass certain operations without physically operating switches on a machine.
Care must be taken when using "force" functions to avoid exposing personnel to hazardous machine motions or process operations.
For controllers operating a machine tool or robot, running a part program at a fraction of the programmed operating speed with a workpiece of soft material is considered "good practice". This allows an operator to observe possible interference of tooling with the part and make corrections to the program. A workpiece of soft material such as wood, plastic, or machinable wax will minimize risk of tool damage if there is a tool crash with the workpiece.
Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009
Section 5 : Preventive Maintenance and Repair Guidelines 23 Section 5 : Preventive Maintenance and
Repair Guidelines
5.1 General A well-planned and executed maintenance program is essential to the satisfactory operation of solid-state electrical equipment. The kind and frequency of the maintenance operation will vary with the kind and complexity of the equipment as well as with the nature of the operating conditions.
Maintenance recommendations of the manufacturer or appropriate product standards should be followed.
Useful reference publications for setting up a maintenance program are NFPA 70B-1983, Maintenance of Electrical Equipment, and NFPA 70E-1983, Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces.
5.2 Preventive Maintenance The following factors should be considered when formulating a maintenance program:
1. Maintenance must be performed by qualified personnel familiar with the construction, operation, and hazards involved with the control.
2. Maintenance should be performed with the control out of operation and disconnected from all sources of power. If maintenance must be performed while the control is energized, the safety related practices of NFPA 70E should be followed.
3. Care should be taken when servicing electrostatic sensitive components.
The manufacturer's recommendations for these components should be followed.
4. Ventilation passages should be kept open. If the equipment depends upon auxiliary cooling, e.g., air, water, or oil, periodic inspection (with filter replacement when necessary) should be made of these systems.
5. The means employed for grounding or insulating the equipment from ground should be checked to assure its integrity (see 4.5).
6. Accumulations of dust and dirt on all parts, including on semiconductor heat sinks, should be removed according to the manufacturer's instructions, if provided; otherwise, the manufacturer should be consulted. Care must be taken to avoid damaging any delicate components and to avoid displacing dust, dirt, or debris in a way that permits it to enter or settle into parts of the control equipment.
Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009
24 Section 5 : Preventive Maintenance and Repair Guidelines
7. Enclosures should be inspected for evidence of deterioration.
Accumulated dust and dirt should be removed from the top of the enclosures before opening doors or removing covers.
8. Certain hazardous materials removed as part of maintenance or repair procedure (e.g., polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs) found in some liquid- filled capacitors) must be disposed of as described in Federal regulations.
C.5.2 Preventive Maintenance
Lithium batteries are frequently used for memory backup in solid-state equipment due to their excellent shelf life and high energy-to-weight ratio.
Lithium is a highly reactive metal that can cause burns if there is contact with skin. The batteries are sealed so there is seldom a problem of contact with lithium as long as reasonable care is exercised when handling them.
They should only be used in their intended application and not subjected to rough handling. When batteries are replaced in equipment, the batteries removed should be disposed of in accordance with supplier's instructions.
The Department of Transportation has certain regulations that prohibit shipment of equipment with batteries installed if the batteries contain 0.5 gram or greater of lithium. The batteries must be removed from equipment and shipped separately in a container approved by the Department of Transportation. Additional Department of Transportation restrictions apply to the shipment of lithium batteries.
NEMA Standards Publication No. ICS 1.3 - 1986, Preventive Maintenance of Industrial Control and System Equipment, is recommended for personnel responsible for maintenance of equipment.
5.3 Repair If equipment condition indicates repair or replacement, the manufacturer's instruction manual should be followed carefully. Diagnostic information within such a manual should be used to identify the probable source of the problem, and to formulate a repair plan. The level of field repair recommended by the manufacturer should be followed.
When solid-state equipment is repaired, it is important that any replacement part be in accordance with the recommendations of the equipment manufacturer. Care should be taken to avoid the use of parts which are no longer compatible with other changes in the equipment. Also, replacement parts should be inspected for deterioration due to "shelf life" and for signs of rework or wear which may involve factors critical to safety.
After repair, proper startup procedures should be followed. Special precautions should be taken to protect personnel from hazards during startup.
Comments: 5.3 — Repair
Follow manufacturer's instructions exactly when replacing power semiconductors mounted on heatsinks since improper installation may become the source of further difficulties. Torque semiconductors or bolts retaining semiconductors to the value specified using a torque wrench.
Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009
Section 5 : Preventive Maintenance and Repair Guidelines 25 Too much pressure against a heatsink can damage a semiconductor while too little can restrict the amount of heat transferred from the semiconductor to the heatsink and result in operation at higher temperature with decreased reliability.
Exercise care when removing modules from a system during maintenance.
Failed modules are frequently returned to the manufacturer for repair. Any physical damage sustained during removal may result in more expensive repair or render the module unrepairable if damage is too great.
Modules with electrostatic sensitive components should be handled by the edges without touching components or printed circuit conductors. Use packaging material supplied with the replacement module when shipping the module to the manufacturer for repair.
When the scope of repairs exceeds the manufacturer's recommendations for field repair, the module(s) should be returned to the manufacturer for repair. Doing so will help to ensure that only properly selected components are used, and that all necessary hardware and firmware revisions are incorporated into the repair. Failure to make necessary updates may result in safety, compatibility or performance problems which may not become apparent for some time after the repaired module has been placed back in service. When firmware is protected by copyright law, updates can be provided legally only by the manufacturer or licensee.
See also section 4.3.
5.4 Safety Recommendations
for Maintenance Personnel
All maintenance work should be done by qualified personnel familiar with the construction, operation, and hazards involved with the equipment. The appropriate work practices of NFPA 70E should be followed.
Publication SGI-1.1 - August 2009
26 Section 5 : Preventive Maintenance and Repair Guidelines
Publication SGI - 1.1 — January 2010
Supercedes Publication SGI - 1.1 — April 1990 Copyright ©2010 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Printed in USA. www-.rockwellautoination.coin
Power, Control and Information Solutions Headquarters
Americas: Rockwel l Automation, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204 USA, Tel: ( 1) 414.382.2000, Fax: (1) 414.382.4444 Europe/Middle East/ Africa: Rockwell Automation, Vorsclaan/Bou levard du Souverain 36, 1170 Brussels, Belgium, Tel: (32) 2 663 0600 , Fax: (32) 2 663 0640 Asia Pacific: Rockwell Automation, Level 14, Core F, Cyberport 3, 100 Cyberport Road, Hong Kong, Tel: (852) 288 7 4788, Fax: (852) 2508 1846 Power & Energy Management
Important Publication Change
The CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Catalog,
publication 2100-CA001
has been replaced by…
The CENTERLINE 2100 Motor Control Centers Program Guide, publication 2100-CA004
Contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative for more information.
■
I) Allen-Bradley
Rockwell
~ Al/en-Bradley • Rockwell Software Automation
Manuals
Rockwell Automation Order Number:
6506422918
Date:
5/6/2026
Circuit Breakers
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Bulletin Numbers 140G, 140MG
Selection Guide
- -• • •
■
G» Allen-Bradley
~ Allen-Bradley • Rockwell Software
Rockwell
Automation
2 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Molded Case Circuit Breakers
What’s Inside
Summary of Changes
This publications reflects additions and corrections of product information throughout. It incorporates content from previous technical data publications (140G-TD100 and 140G-TD047), and contains new information for current-limiting molded case circuit breakers.
Additional Resources
These documents contain additional information concerning related products from Rockwell Automation.
You can view or download publications at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/literature-library/overview.page. To order paper copies of technical documentation, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative.
Topic Page
Overview 3
Product Selection 19
Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection 19
Current-limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection 55 Motor Circuit Protectors Product Selection 67
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Product Selection 73
Molded Case Switches 76
Mounting System Adapters Product Selection 77
Accessories 79
Replacement Parts 99
Specifications 103
Trip and Let-through Current Curves 129
Approximate Dimensions 189
Resource Description
Circuit Breaker Protection for Automation Systems, publication 140G-BR001 Overview of full line of Allen-Bradley circuit breaker offerings.
Circuit Breaker Selectivity Guide, publication 140G-TD050 Aids in selecting circuit breaker pairs for line and load side protection.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, publication 1770-4.1 Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system.
Product Certifications website, http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/certification/ overview.page
Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other certification details.
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 3 Overview
What is a Circuit Breaker?
What is a circuit breaker? This is the first question to answer in understanding Molded Case Circuit Breakers. The definition of a circuit breaker varies between the standards
organizations, but the most commonly used definitions are:
The National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) defines circuit br
eakers as “devices designed to open and
close a circuit by non-automatic means, and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined overcurrent
without injury to itself when properly applied within its rating.”
The International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) Standard IEC 60947-2 defines a circ
uit breaker as “a mechanical
switching device, capable of making, carrying and breaking currents under normal circuit conditions and also making, carrying for a specified time and breaking currents under specified abnormal circuit conditions such as those of short- circuit.”
There are also similar definitions, that further identify circuit breakers by type of construc
tion and functionality. Within the
IEC specification for circuit breakers, there are several distinctions of types of circuit breakers by classification:
Utilization Category
Interrupting medium
• Air break
• Vacuum break
• Gas break
Design
• Open case
• Moulded (molded) case
Method of controlling the operating mechanism
• Dependent manual operation
• Independent manual operation
• Dependent power operation
• Independent power operation
• Stored energy operation
Type of overcurrent release
• Instantaneous
• Definite time delay
• Inverse time delay
In reviewing
the attributes just listed, it is understandable
that many people are confused about which type of circuit breaker to use, where to use it, and how to select it properly.
In this section, we will focus on the definition, application and selection of Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs) with an inverse time delay as applied to industrial control panels.
This publication focuses on the application and select
ion of
MCCBs, Motor Protection Circuit Breakers (MPCBs) and Motor Circuit Protectors (MCPs). The primary focus will be on products that are packaged in a molded case design, but much of the information can be applied to other circuit breakers that are commonly found in control panels.
Definitions
Each of the product categories we mentioned earlier is
packaged in a molded case and confusion develops because of the physical similarity of the products.
The Molded Case Circuit Breaker is a specific type of circuit breaker. NE
MA defines circuit breakers as devices designed to
open or close a circuit by nonautomatic means, and to open the circuit automatically on a predetermined overcurrent without damage to itself when properly applied within its rating. The term “molded case” simply refers to the
construction of the circuit breaker and refers to the fact that the circuit breaker is an assembled unit in a supporting housing of an insulating material.
Within the realm of MCCBs, three distinct product variations exist, each with specific
protection properties and uses
within the industrial control panel. The main categories are:
Molded Case Circuit Breakers or Feeder Breakers
MCCBs are intended to provide overcurrent protection for conductors and equipment by opening automatically before the current reaches a value and duration that will cause an excessive or dangerous temperature in conductors or
conductor insulation. Additionally, these devices can serve as the main disconnecting means for a control panel. This
protection pertains to low level overcurrent, and short-circuit current. Traditionally these types of circuit breakers are generically described as thermal magnetic devices, though an increasing number of these devices are also electronic circuit breakers which provide the same type of protection, with the exception that the electronics allow the protection curves to be customized to the specific application. In the United States, the National Electrical Code (NEC) defines how 4 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Overview
this protection is selected in Sections 240-2, 240-3 and 240-4.
In Canad
a there are similar references in the Canadian Electric Code, C22.1-12. For IEC applications, IEC 60204-1 provides guidance for the construction of industrial control panels.
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers
As application-specific variations of the MCCB, motor
protection circuit breakers (MPCBs) combine the short-circuit and isolation functionality of the MCCB with the motor
overcurrent protection of a traditional overload relay. These devices are traditionally used in two-component starter applications, with a contactor to control a motor load. MPCBs are UL 489 Listed as circuit breakers and verified as motor overload relays. Allen-Bradley MPCBs are UL Listed as 100% breakers, allowing utilization of the full range of motor protection provided. Note: most circuit breakers applied in North America are 80% rated, meaning they can only be used continuously at 80% of their thermal rating. Allen-Bradley MPCBs are 100% rated, which allows full use of the circuit breakers’ thermal capacity in motor protection applications.
Motor Circuit Protectors
Another application-specific version of the MCCB, the motor circuit protector (MCP) is a magnetic trip only version of the MCCB. These circuit breakers provide no overload protection and, as a result, when applied in motor circuit need to be applied with a controller in order to provide short-circuit and overcurrent protection. In the United States, the MCP is UL Listed with a controller and together they form a
combination starter. The advantage of this combination is the choice in overload protection that can be applied to the starter. Listed combinations can include thermal as well as electronic overload relays, providing users with protection that is customized for their application. The MCP can also be provided in several variations, including high magnetic trip versions that allow them to be used with high-efficiency motors, reducing the chance of nuisance tripping due to the characteristic high inrush currents associated with these motors.
Where are each of these breakers used? Figure
1 represents a
typical multi-starter control panel. Note that the main disconnecting means is
an MCCB, which is acting as both the
main disconnect and feeder protection. There are several branches within this control panel. Both MCPs and MPCBs are being used to provide the branch a circuit breaker as a device in the case of the MCP, and branch short-circuit protection as well as overload protection in the case of the MPCB.
Molded Case Switch
The function of a Molded Case Switch is to disconnect the downstream circuit in which it is installed. In the OFF position, the switch ensures sufficient electrical isolation to the circuit. Its mechanical function is the same as that of a circuit breaker with both an ON and OFF feature controlled with a toggle switch. It features the same overall dimensions and can accept the same electrical and mechanical
accessories as an MCCB.
Typical applications include the followin
g:
• Local isolation at a motor installation
• Disconnect to isolate a single/group of machines
• Bus-tie isolation
Molded case switches are not designed to automatically
break under
short circuit or overload conditions. For this
reason, you must protect the line side with a coordinated device that protects against short circuits.
Figure 1 - Typical Multi-starter Control Panel
Molded case circuit
breaker with thermal
magnetic protection
Molded case circuit
breaker with magnetic -
only trip unit Molded case circuit
breakers with thermal
magnetic protection
starter
contactor
overload relay Resistive loads (examples:
heating elements,
lighting)
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 5 Overview
Breaker Theory and Construction
When used in an industrial control panel application, the purpose of the MCCB is to provide overcurrent protection.
This definition can be divided into short-circuit protection and thermal
overcurrent protection. A short circuit can range
from hundreds of amps to over 100,000 A, depending upon the power source and where the short circuit would occur in the circuit.
An arc chamber is integral to all MCCBs. This arc chamber is similar in all form
s of the circuit breakers and performs several
important functions in providing short-circuit protection.
This chamber surrounds the switching contacts within the circuit breaker and the contacts open during a short circuit.
The opening of these contacts generates an arc. The arc chamber and its components, the arc chutes and splitter plates, draw the arc away from the contacts, dividing and cooling the arc. Ultimately, this leads to the extinguishing of the arc and the circuit opening and current flow stopping.
One of the remarkable elements is that this entire operation occurs in milliseconds, with short-circuit currents that can be 100,000 A or greater, depending upon the available current in the circuit.
Figure 2 - Conventional Contact Design Compared to Reverse Loop Contact Design.
Depending upon the design of the circuit breaker and
intended short-cir
cuit interruption capability, there are
differences in the construction of the contact assemblies.
Figure 2 shows the most commonly used contact assemblies Modern circuit breakers use the reverse loop design because it uses the magnetic for
ces created by current flowing in
opposite direction to assist in the opening of the contacts under short-circuit conditions. Additionally, the amount of repulsive force generated is proportional to the value of the short-circuit current being experienced by the circuit breaker.
This allows faster interruption time as the short-circuit currents increase.
Using these magnetic trip units, we are able t
o provide short-
circuit protection that can be represented in a curve as shown in Figure 3.
Figure 3 - Example of Magnetic Time vs. Current Curve
This document is not designed to be a reference to circuit breaker design
. However, we are discussing the construction
of the arc chamber because it is important to understand that MCCBs with a 25 kA interrupting rating will require fewer arc splitters and smaller arc chutes to interrupt a short circuit than will a comparable device rated for 100 kA of
interruption.
Therefore, when selecting an MCCB for a specifi
c application,
it is very important to take into consideration the amount of Conventional Contact Design
Current Flow
Magnetic Force
Reverse Loop Contact Designconventional contact design reverse loop contact design current flow
magnetic force
Current (A)
10 1.0
0.1 .01
I
Time (sec)
6 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Overview
short-circuit current available and then select the circuit breaker with an interrupting rating sufficient to meet the requirements of the application.
The MCCB also provides thermal protection for the control panel an
d, as we will see later, the branch circuit. This thermal protection can be provided either through the use of
bimetallic heater elements similar to those found in overload relays or through the use of electronics, which simulate the operation of heater element and can provide adjustable
overcurrent protection for the application.
Reverse-Fed Circuit Breaker
Due to physical equipment arrangements in panelboards,
switchboards, and industrial control panels, it is often desirable to reverse feed a molded case circuit breaker. For this application, the circuit breaker must be tested and listed accordingly.
All Bulletin 140G circuit breakers may be reverse fed. When reverse feeding
these devices, the line and load side
terminals need to be identified properly.
Figure 4 - Reverse Feed Configuration
Table 1 - Maximum Voltage for Reverse-fed Circuit
Breakers
Interrupting Ratings
The maximum amount of fault current supplied by a system can be calculated at any point in that system. One rule must be followed for applying the correct circuit breaker. The interrupting rating of the breaker must be equal to or greater than the amount of fault current that can be delivered at that point in the system where the breaker is applied. The
interrupting rating of the breaker is the maximum amount of fault current it can safely interrupt without damaging itself. A breaker’s interrupting rating always decreases as the voltage increases. Interrupting rating is one of the most critical factors in the breaker selection process. Figure
5 shows a closeup of
this rating information.
Figure 5 - Interrupting Rating Nameplate Information
Bulletin 140G,
140MG Frame Size
Maximum Voltage [V AC](1)
UL/CSA IEC
G 600Y/347 690
H 480 480
I 600Y/347 690
J 600 600
K 600 690
M 600 690
N, NS 600 690
R 600 690
Motor
L3 L1 L2
T1 T3 T2
(1) NEC Article 404.7 states “Where these switch or ci rcuit breaker handles are operated vertically rather than rotationally or horizontally, the up position of the handle shall be the (on) position.” Refer to applicable codes and standards for specific application requirements •• •
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 7 Overview
Neutral Pole Ratings
When applying 4 pole MCCBs, the neutral pole is rated at 100% for thermal magnetics, and adjustable 100%, 50% or 0% for electronics.
Figure 6 - Neutral Pole Configuration
Certifications
To provide customers with third-party assurance that Rockwell Automation MCCBs meet industry standards, our circuit
breakers comply with various global standards. The Bulletin 140G MCCB and 140MG MCP and MPCBs comply with UL,
CSA and IEC standards and as such, are UL Listed, CSA
Certified, and CCC Certified.
Other certifications exist for the family of MCCBs. The certification of
these products is an ongoing process and
additional ratings and certifications are continually being pursued. For information about compliance with a particular standard, contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor.
In each of the product sections, the latest certificatio ns at the
time of publication are listed for the specific product type.
Molded Case Circuit Breaker Thermal Protection
MCCBs provide thermal overcurrent protection and short- circuit protection. These devices provide this protection by using mechanical means with heater elements, or by using electronics to detect current flow and model the associated heat generated by the current.
When electronic MCCBs are applied, the ability to adjust the thermal trip
rating to shape the trip curve is available and the
result is that there are fewer trip units required to cover a wider range of current. Note: while a trip unit may have the capability of protecting the current range, in many cases a rating plug is used to limit the range of adjustability.
Table
2 and Table 3 illustrate the available thermal magnetic and electronic trip units and adjustment ranges available with the 140G family
of MCCBs.
For all 4 pole 140G MCCB and Molded Case Switches, the neutral is the left outside pole N L1 L3L2
1 8 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Overview
Table 2 - Trip Units and Adjustment Ranges for140G Molded Case Circuit Breakers, 10…225 A Frame
Size
Type(1)
(1) T-M = Thermal Magnetic; E = Electronic
Rated Current [A](2)
(2) X = Denotes fixed thermal and Fixed Magnetic; O = denotes adjustable thermal and adjustable magnetic 10 15 16 20 24 25 30 32 35 40 45 50 56 60 63 64 70 77 80 87 90 100 105 110 112 120 122 125 140 150 157 160 175 200 210 225 G T-M X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X(4)
(4) IEC only. G-Frame is Adjustable Thermal.
H
T-M
X X X X X X X X X X X X
O
O
O
O
O
O(3)
(3) IEC only.
E
(3)
I T-M X X X X X X X X X X X X X
J
T-M
X X X X X X X X X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
E
K
T-M
E
M
T-M
E
N/NS E
R E
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 9 Overview
Table 3 - Trip Units and Adjustment Ranges for140G Molded Case Circuit Breakers, 240…3000 A Frame
Size
Typ
e(1)
(1) T-M = Thermal Magnetic; E = Electronic
Rated Current [A](2)
(2) X = Denotes fixed thermal and Fixed Magnetic; O = denotes adjustable thermal and adjustable magnetic 240 250 252 280 300 320 350 400 420 480 560 600 630 800 900 1000 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 1900 2000 2100 2200 2400 2500 2600 2700 2800 2900 3000 G T-M
H
T-M
E
I T-M
J
T-M
E
K
T-M O
O
E
M
T-M
O
O
E
N/NS E
R E
10 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Overview
Applying Molded Case Circuit Breakers to North
American Guidelines
The MCCB is most commonly used as either a feeder breaker or a single circuit breaker where disconnecting, short-circuit, and thermal protection functionality is required. When selecting an MCCB, you need to consider the following items. • Application voltage
• Available short-circuit current
• Amperage of the load or wiring to be prote cted
Additionally, local code requirements will also need to be taken into consideration and these requirements may ultimately affect the type and functionality of the MCCB selected.
Molded Case Circuit Breakers
• Magnetic and thermal trip currents may be fixed or adjustable • Must be sized per NEC/CEC rules
• May be used for motor circuits, but 140MG (MCP) is first choice • Motor Current (thermal rating)
– ≤ 250% motor
full load amperes (FLA)
– ≤ 300% for motors ≤ 100 A if the circuit trips on start – ≤ 400% for motors ≥ 100 A if the circuit breaker trips on start • Magnetic trip current is generally set at 1000% (10x) of circuit breaker thermal ratings • May be UL Listed as part of UL 508/UL 60947-4-1
• May also be used for motor control-circuit transformers, but Bulletin 1489 miniature circuit breakers (MCBs) are a more appropriat
e choice
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers are relatively new to the North American market. These devices are considered motor protection circuit breakers (MPCBs) outside of North America. Within North America they are defined as manual Type E self- protecting combination motor controllers.
• Sized at 100% of the motor full-load current (FLA)
• Motor current setting is adjustable (thermal rating)
• IEC & UL/CSA ca
libration requirements require overload to trip at 120 & 125% FLA • Motor is able to run into the Service Factor when s et at 100% of the motor current • Magnetic Trip Current setting is adjustable (magnetic rating) • Adjustable at 1300% (13x) highest motor current setting on circuit breaker • Higher Magnetic Trip Current settings are available if circuit breaker trips on start (140M-C2T-***) • Example of an MPCB using 140M-C2E-C 10:
– Motor Current is adjustable from 6.3…10 A
– Set at 100% FLA for proper motor protection
– Magnetic Trip Current is fixed at 130 A
– This is where circuit breaker begins to trip in a “short-circuit” condition • NEC/CEC (Canadian Electrical C ode) do not specifically recognize this classification of circuit breaker and, therefore, do not describe how to size them (for example,100% FLA sizing) Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 11 Overview
Motor Circuit Protectors
Motor circuit protectors (MCPs) are the most popular choice for motor circuits in the North American market. they have been used in combination starters and Motor Control Center unit inserts (buckets) for many years • Motor current setting (thermal) is not spe cified by NEC/CEC • MCPs are magnetic only
• Thermal capability should be greater than or equal to motor FLA and less than or equal to overload relay setting • Motor overload protection must be provided separate ly • MCPs are UL Recognized
• Must be tested
and list ed with specific contactors and overloads
• UL Listing is obtained as part of UL 508/UL 60947-4-1 • Magnetic trip current is adjustable
• Adjustability is required by UL489 standard
• Must be sized
per NEC/CEC rules
– ≤ 800% motor
FLA f or standard efficiency motors
– ≤ 1300% motor FLA allowed if motor will not start
– ≤ 1100% motor FLA
for high efficiency motors
– ≤ 1700% motor FLA allowed if motor will not start
• Provide choice in overload protection
Selecting a Circuit Breaker, When Application is to Follow U.S. Guidelines The next step is selecting a breaker for use in an industrial control panel. In the following section we will focus on the MCCB for use as a feeder and as a branch circuit protective device.
Selecting The MCCB for Use as The Main Disconnect or Feeder A typical industrial control panel is a feeder circuit as defined by the NEC, where a feeder is composed of the wires between the service entrance of the panel or line side of the MCCB and the line side of the branch protective devices.
In many industrial control applications, motor control is involved. In that case, the application must then follow Article 430 of the NEC, which states that breakers for feeders having mixed loads, e.g. heating (lighting and heat appliances) and motors should have ratings suitable for carrying the heating loads, plus the capacity required by the motor loads.
For motor loads, NEC Article 430 states that breakers for motor feeders shall have a rating not greater than the sum of the highest breaker
rating of any of its branches and the full-load currents of all other motors served by the feeder.
Feeder Breaker Thermal Rating Selection Example
This assumes that the circuit breaker selected has a voltage rating equal or greater than the application and that the interrupting rating is equal or greater to the available short-circuit current. The panel contains a main feeder breaker supply with three motor branch circuits.
In our application, the feeder is supplying a 3-motor system at a voltage of 480V. • Motor 1 is 10 Hp. Current value from Table 430.250 of the NEC is 14 A. • Motor 2 is 5 Hp. Current value from Table 430.250 of the NEC is 7.6 A. • Motor 1 is 5 Hp. Current value from Table 430.250 of the NEC is 7.6 A.
Calculat
ion of panel wiring includes:
• For single motors: Per [430 .22], size motor branch circuit conductors no smaller than 125 percent of the motor FLC rating listed in Table 430.147 or 430.148 (Figure 430-4). Size the branch circuit short-circuit and ground-fault protection device per 240.6(A) and 430.52(C)(1) Ex. 1.
12 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Overview
• For multiple motors. Per [430.24], size multiple motor conductors as follows. First, multiply the full-load current rating of the highest-load motor by 1.25. Then, add up the full-load current ratings of all the other motors in the group. Add these two numbers. That’s your motor load for calculating ampacity. Add any other loads on that conductor, to calculate total conductor ampacity.
Current Calculation is:
Motor 1 (14 A* 1.25) 17.5 A
Motor 2 7.6 A
Motor 3 7.6 A
Total 32.7 A
Since the total load comes to 32.7 A and there is not a commercially availa ble breaker available for 32.7 A, the NEC allows the next largest standard-sized breaker to be used. Therefore, a 35 A MCCB could be selected to protect this control panel. Note:
each motor branch also needs protection.
Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers Used as Branch Short-circuit Devices It is also possible to use an MCCB as a branch protective device for a motor load, and while we will show the calculation for applying an MCCB in this manner, there are other circuit breakers, such as the MCP and MPCB, that are better suited for this application. After the calculation for sizing is completed, it should be apparent that even though this is technically correct, in some cases, the motor protection and wire protection can be less than ideal.
Per NEC Article 430.52(B), the motor branch circuit short-circuit and ground fau lt device shall be capable of carrying the starting current of the motor. Further, 430.52(C) indicates that the protective device that has a rating or setting not exceeding the value calculated according to the values given in Table 430.52 shall be used. In the case of an inverse time MCCB, such as the 140G, the calculation for the maximum setting or rating of the protective device is 250% of the motor being protected. Figure 1 on page 4 shows an example of this type of configuration.
Example
An MCCB is being used to protect a branch motor circuit with a 10 Hp 460V motor. Using Table 430.250 of the NEC, a value of FLC of 14 A is supplied for this motor.
Calculating the maximum branch circuit protective device rating or setting is:
14 A * 250% = 35 A
Therefore, the maximum size MCCB that c ould be used in this example is 35 A. This is the maximum rating and therefore smaller devices could be selected for this application. A point to consider is that generally MCCBs have a magnetic trip of approximately 10X the rating of the MCCB. When starting, motors usually exhibit an inrush characteristic of 6 to 10 times the full load rating of the motor, depending on the type of motor being used. In this case, the circuit breaker trip point is approximately 350 A and the motor starting current of locked rotor current is approximately 140 A if a 10x ratio of running to starting current is assumed. A smaller breaker could be selected without concern for nuisance tripping. In that case, there may be more concern about the thermal protection provided by the circuit breaker being based on a 35 A breaker with only a 14 A load. The motor and the wiring may not be adequately protected if larger wire isn’t selected or if a motor overload relay is not used.
MCCB Application and Sizing
The Bulletin 140G MCCBs are traditionally used for protection of branch and feeder circuit in an industrial control application. In the role of a feeder circuit breaker, the MCCB provides isolation and short-circuit protection for the panel and thermal protection for the feeder wires and as a branch circuit breaker provides the same protection for the branch wires in the panel.
For illustrative purposes, the feeder will be shown at the wiring from the load side of the main or feeder MCCB to the line connection of the branch short-circuit protective devices to which the feeder is supplying power.
The following example is a generic interpretation of the US National Electr ical Code (NEC), and should be used only as a
reference for applying the MCCB. Final authority regarding the sizing and components used is governed by local and/or Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 13 Overview
national electrical standards and the Jurisdiction Having Authority. Consult these standards before installing or designing any electrical system using short-circuit protective devices (SCPDs).
While this discussion is not intended to be a comprehensive guidebook to designing industrial control panels, we will present several categories of typical applications where a feeder SCPD device will be applied:
• A panel where only motor loads are being fed by the breaker • A panel where fixed loads are being fed by the breaker • A panel where
mixed loads are being protected by the feeder breaker
In all cases
, the examples given here are for reference and users should refere nce their local electrical code requirements, as they may vary from location to location. The applier should verify that their selection and installation complies with local codes, regulations, and/or standards.
A feeder is composed of the conductors of a wiring system between the ser vice equipment or the generator switchboard of an
isolated plant and the branch circuit overcurrent device.
NEC Article 220 states:
Where a feeder supplies continuous loads or an
y combination of continuous and noncontinuous loads, the rating of the overcurrent device shall not be less than the noncontinuous load plus 125% of the continuous load. Exception: Where the assembly including the overcurrent devices protecting the feeder(s) are listed for operation at 100% of their rating, neither the ampere rating of the overcurrent device nor the ampacity of the feeder conductors shall be less than the sum of the continuous load plus the noncontinuous load. Only breakers listed for 100% application, and so labeled can be applied under the exception (for example N Frame and R Frame 140G devices that are specifically marked and rated 100%). Breakers without a 100% application listing and label are applied at 80% of rating.
NEC Article 430 states:
Breakers for feeders having mixed loads; e.g., heating (lighting and heat appliances) and motors, should have ratings suitable for carrying the heating loads plus the capacity required by the motor loads…breakers for motor feeders shall have a rating not greater than the sum of the highest breaker rating of any of its branches and the full load currents of all other motors served by the feeder.
A molded case circuit breaker is rated in rms ampere s at a specific ambient temperature. This ampere rating is the maximum continuous current it may carry in the ambient temperature for which it is calibrated. To minimize the need for derating, Allen-Bradley thermal magnetic breakers are calibrated for an ambient temperature of 40 °C (104 °F), which is the average temperature within an enclosure. If the enclosure ambient temperature is known to exceed 40 °C, the breaker used should either be specially calibrated for that temperature, or be derated accordingly. 80% Continuous Rated
All 140G Molded Case Circuit Breakers are rated for 80% continuous load unless marked for 100% loads. The NEC requires that only 100% rated continuous load be marked special with the load designation. In all general applications the unmarked circuit breaker is to be applied at no more than 80% continuous load of its rated current (In). Typically 100% rated current MCCBs are devices with electronic trip units. The 140G product line has 100% rated electronic trip MCCBs. Visit www.rockwellautomation.com for specific devices.
Cable Selection
UL Listed circuit breakers rated 125 A or less shall be marked as being suitable for 60 °C (140 °F), 75 °C (167 °F) only or 60/75 °C (140/167 °F) wire. All Allen-Bradley breakers rated 125 A or less are marked for 60/75 °C wire. All UL Listed circuit breakers rated over 125 A are suitable for 75 °C conductors. Conductors rated for higher temperatures may be used, but must not be loaded to carry more current than the 75 °C ampacity of that size conductor for equipment marked or rated 75 °C, or the 60 °C ampacity of that size conductor for equipment marked or rated 60 °C. However, the full 90 °C (194 ºF) ampacity may be used when applying derating factors, so long as the actual load does not exceed the lower of the derated ampacity or the 75 °C or 60 °C ampacity that applies.
14 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Overview
Unusual Operating Conditions
Operation below 0 °C
Bulletin 140G MCCBs may be applied in ambient temperatures (near the MCCB within an enclosure) below 0 °C. Applications below 0 °C must consider the possibility of ice forming within or on the MCCB and interfering with the internal or external operating mechanisms. All ratings below 0 °C are based on the absence of freezing water or other elements.
Trip Unit Temperatures
Thermal magnetic circuit breakers are temperature sensitive. At ambient temperatures below 40 °C (104 °F), circuit breakers may carry more current than their continuous current rating. Nuisance tripping is not a problem under these lower temperature conditions, although consideration should be given to closer protection coordination to compensate for the additional current- carrying capability. In addition, the actual mechanical operation of the breaker could be affected if the ambient temperature is significantly below the 40 °C standard.
For ambient temperatures above 40 °C, breakers should carry less current than their continuous current rating. Under this condition, the circuit breaker should be derated for the higher ambient temperature.
Electronic trip units are insensitive to ambient te mperatures within a certain temperature range. The temperature range for most electronic trip units is -25 °C…+70 °C (-13 ˚F …+158 ˚F). Allen-Bradley MCCBs are designed to include temperature protective circuits that initiate a tripping operation and provide self-protection, should the internal temperature rise to an unsafe level.
Circuit Breaker Temperatures
The temperature of the air immediately surrounding a circuit breaker is the ambient temperature. All Allen-Bradley standard breakers are calibrated to a 40 °C ambient temperature. For any ambient temperature application significantly above or below 40 °C, it is recommended that rerating of the circuit breaker be considered or Ro ckwell Automation be consulted about any possible re-rating.
Altitude
Low voltage circuit breakers must be derated for voltage and interrupting rating at altitudes above 2000 m (6560 ft) above sea level. The thinner air at higher altitudes reduces cooling and dielectric characteristics compared to the denser air found at lower altitudes.
Use the following Table 4 and Table 5 to derate as appropriate.
Table 4 - Voltage Rating
Table 5 - Current Rating
Voltage Rating
Operational Voltage Ue [V]
Altitude 2000 m
(6560 ft)
3000 m
(9840 ft)
4000 m
(13,120 ft)
5000 m
(16,400 ft)
Al
l Frames 100% 90% 79% 67%
Current Rating
Rated Uninterrupted Current Iu [A]
Altitude 2000 m
(6560 ft)
3000 m
(9840 ft)
4000 m
(13,120 ft)
5000 m
(16,400 ft)
All Frames 100% 98% 93% 90%
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 15 Overview
Unusual Mounting Configurations
Generally, circuit breakers may be mounted in any position, up or down, horizontal or vertical, without affecting the tripping characteristics or interrupting rating. However, mounting circuit breakers in a vertical position with the ON position other than UP will be in violation of Article 240-81 of the NEC.
Tropicalization
The 140G/MG Circuit breakers are tested in compliance with IEC Standards, making these devices suitable for hot-humid conditions defined in IEC 60721-2-1, climatograph 8. These devices include:
• Moldings of glass fiber reinforced synthetic resins
• Metallic parts treated for anti-corrosion
• Zinc plating protected by a conversion layer (hexavalent-chromium free) • Electronic circuits protected for anti-condensation
Electromagnetic Compatibility
The 140G/MG Circuit Breakers electronic trip units and electronic residual current releases are in compliance with EN 60947-2 Appendix B and Appendix F and European Directive No. 2004/108/EC regarding EMC – electromagnetic compatibility.
Maintenance Mode (MM)
Maintenance Mode (MM) offers a preset set of protection parameters. MM allows systems testing when the molded case circuit breaker is energized or ON. This feature is a manual adjustment on the molded case circuit breaker, via a DIP switch. Preset values for Maintenance Mode are indicated in the selection guide for each frame size.
Shock and Vibration
Allen-Bradley Molded Case Circuit Breakers are shock tested to conform with IEC 60068-2-27, and vibration tested to IEC 60068-2-6.
Table 6 - MCCB Shock and Vibration Test Values
Bul. 140G MCCB Frame Size Vibration Shock (peak acceleration) G
2 …13.2 Hz ±1 mm;
13.2…100 Hz ±0.7 g
150m/s2 peak; pulse duration 11 ms
H
I
J
K 120m/s2 peak; pulse duration 11 ms
M —
N/NS —
R — —
16 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Overview
Allen-Bradley Molded Case Circuit Breakers
The Bulletin 140G family of Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs) offers a wide range of features include thermal/magnetic and electronic protection devices, high interrupting/breaking capacities and complete line of factory and field installed accessories.
The Bulletin 140G MCCBs are ideal for use in line protection of control panels.
Molded case circuit breakers have the following features:
• 10…3000 A current range
• 3- and 4-pole devices
• Space
-saving dimensions
• End cap/bolt-on termi nals are standard
• Thermal/Magnetic protection: 15…800 A
• Electronic protection: 10…3000 A
• Approved for global application: UL, CSA, CCC, and IEC performance interrupting/breaking capacity • Wide range of mounting options
• Extensive range of factory- or field-installed accessories Standards Compliance and Certifications
Standards Compliance Certifications
IEC 60947-2 CE Marked
UL489 CCC
CSA22.2, No. 5 CSA Certified
UL Listed
HACR Type
G-Frame H-Frame I-Frame J-Frame
K-Frame M-Frame N-, NS-Frame R-Frame
• • •
• •
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 17 Overview
Product Overview
Frame Size
G-Frame H-Frame I-Frame J-Frame K-Frame M-Frame N-Frame NS-Frame R-Frame Rated Current In 125 A (160 A - IEC) 125 A (160 A - IEC) 225 A 250 A 400 A 800 A 1200 A 1200…1250 A 2000…3000 A No. of Poles 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 Dimensions [mm (in.)]
Height 130 (5.19) 130 (5.19) 150 (5.90) 160 (6.23) 205 (8.07) 268 (10.55) 268 (10.55) 268 (10.55) 382 (15.04) Width,
3-Pole 76.2 (3) 90 (3.54) 105 (4.13) 105 (4.13) 139.5 (5.49) 210 (8.27) 210 (8.27) 210 (8.27) 428 (16.85) Width,
4-Pole 101.2 (3.98) 120 (4.72) 140 (5.51) 140 (5.51) 186 (7.32) 280 (11.02) 280 (11.02) 280 (11.02) 554 (21.81) Depth 70 (2.75) 82.5 (3.25) 70 (2.75) 82.5 (3.25) 103.5 (4.07) 103.5 (4.07) 125 (4.92) 125 (4.92) 231 (9.09) Interrupting Rating [kA]
240V 50 65 100 65 100 150 200 200 50 65 65 100 150 200 100 150 200 200 100 200 200 65 100 150 65 100 150 125 480V 25 35 65 25 35 65 100 150 25 35 25 35 65 100 35 65 100 150 50 65 100 50 65 100 50 65 100 125 600V — 14 18 25 35 42 — 14 18 25 35 25 35 65 100 25 35 42 25 50 65 25 50 65 100 600Y/347V 10 14 25 — 10 10 — — — — — —
Breaking Capacity Icu [kA]
220…240V 65 85 100 65 85 100 150 200 65 85 65 85 100 150 85 100 150 200 70 100 200 85 100 200 85 100 200 130 415V 36 50 70 36 50 70 120 150 36 50 36 50 70 120 50 70 120 150 36 70 100 50 70 120 50 70 120 80 440V 30 36 50 36 50 65 100 150 36 40 36 50 65 100 40 65 100 180 35 50 65 50 65 100 50 65 100 80 690V 6 8 10 10 12 15 18 20 36 50 10 12 15 18 25 40 70 80 20 25 30 30 42 50 30 42 50 40 250V DC 36 50 10 36 50 70 85 100 36 50 36 50 70 85 — — — — — 500V DC 36 50 70 36 50 70 85 100 36 50 36 50 70 85 36 50 70 100 — — — — 750V DC — — — — 25 36 70 70 16 36 50 — — —
Protection Type:
Thermal
Magnetic ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — — —
Electronic
(LSI,LSIG) —
✓ — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Molded Case
Switch
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — ✓
MCP ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — —
MPCB — ✓ — ✓ — — — — —
Internal Accessories
Auxiliary Contact ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Alarm Contact ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ —
AX/AL Combo ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ —
Trip Unit Contact — ✓ ✓ — — ✓ ✓ ✓
Shunt Trip ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Shunt Close — — — — — — — ✓ ✓
UV Relay ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Field Installable ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
18 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Overview
Frame Size
G-Frame H-Frame I-Frame J-Frame K-Frame M-Frame N-Frame NS-Frame R-Frame External Accessories
End Cap (Bolt-
on) Terminals standard standard standard standard standard standard standard standard Terminal Lugs ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Multi-cable
Terminal Lugs
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — — — —
Extended
Termina
l ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ —
Spreader
Termina
l ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Rear Terminal — — — — — — ✓ ✓ ✓
25 mm Phase
barriers standard standard standard standard standard — — — — Extended Phase
barriers
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Back Plates standard standard standard standard standard standard — — — DIN Mounting ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — — — — —
Padlock ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Terminal Cover ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ —
Direct Rotary ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — —
Variable Depth
(Door) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — —
Internal NFPA 79 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — —
Flange Operator ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — —
Flange Cable ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — —
Motor Operator ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — ✓ ✓
Residual Current ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — — — —
Neutral Current — — — — ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Field Installable ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 19 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
125 A, G-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Catalog Number Explanation
Complete Circuit Breaker Assemblies with Factory-Installed Options Examples given in this section are not intended to be used for product selection. Use ProposalWorks™ to configure the molded case circuit breaker. These configurations are for selection of all factory-installed options for shunt trips, undervoltage release units, auxiliary contacts, and alarm contacts. Use the codes from Table g to add on to the molded case circuit breaker catalog number selected on the following pages to form a complete cat. no. with factory-installed options. ProposalWorks is available from http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/e-tools/overview.page. Note: Terminal lugs are not supplied and can be ordered separately. See page 85 for available lugs.
140G – G 6 C 4 – C70 – SD – KA
a b c d e f g g
a b c d
Bulletin Number Frame/Rating Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity (based on Ic at 480V) Protection Type
Code Description Code Description Code Description Code Description 140G Global Molded Case Circuit Breaker G 125 A 2 25 kA C Fixed thermal/fixed magnetic 3 35 kA E Adjust thermal/fixed magnetic
6 65 kA S Molded case switch (Isolator)
e f g
No. of Poles Current Range Factory-Installed Internal Options(1) (1) Select up to two internal options: 1 for left side mounting (s hunt trip or undervoltage release), 1 for right (auxiliary or alarm contact).
Code Description Code Description Shunt Trip and Undervoltage Release Units Auxiliary and Alarm Contacts 3 3 poles C e.g., C30 = 30 A Code Description Code Description 4 4 poles D e.g., D16 = 160 A SJ Shunt Trip, 24…30V AC/DC KA 1 Aux. Contact, 250V SK Shunt Trip, 48…60V AC/DC AA 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 250V SD Shunt Trip, 110…127V AC; 110…125V DC BA 2 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 250V SA Shunt Trip, 220…240V AC; 220…250V DC KJ 1 Aux. Contact, 24V SB Shunt Trip, 380…440V AC AJ 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 24V SC Shunt Trip, 480…525V AC
UJ Undervoltage Release, 24…30V AC/DC
UR Undervoltage Release, 48V AC/DC
UD Undervoltage Release, 110…127V AC; 110…125V DC
UA Undervoltage Release, 220…240V AC; 220…250V DC
UB Undervoltage Release, 380…440V AC
UC Undervoltage Release, 480…525V AC
No Digit No Selection
I
I
I
l
-
-
I
l
-
-
~
-
-
-
-
-
20 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Assembled Molded Case Circuit Breakers—125 A, G-Frame
Table 7 - Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity — Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Interrupting Rating (50/60
Hz), UL 489/
CSA C22.2, No. 5 [kA]
Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2
Icu [kA]/Ics %
Breaking Capacity (DC),
IEC 60947-2
Interrupting
Code(1)
(1) See Table 8 for Cat. No. selection.
240V 480V 600Y/
347V
220V(2)
(2) These ratings have not been tested for the CCC listing. 415V 440V(2) 690V 250V DC
(2- pole in s
eries)
500V DC
(3- pole in series)
Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] 50 25 10 65 75 36 100 36 50 6 75 36 100 36 100 G2
65 35 14 85 75 50 75 50 50 8 50 50 100 50 100 G3
100 65 25 100 75 70 50 65 50 10 50 70 75 70 75 G6
Table 8 - Thermal-Magnetic, Fixed Thermal-Fixed Magnetic Rated
Current
In [A]
Thermal Trip [A]
Ir = In (Fixed)
Magnetic Trip [A]
Im
Interrupting Code G2 Interrupting Code G3 Interrupting Code G6 Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No.
3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
15 15 500 140G-G2C3-C15 140G-G2C4-C15 140G-G3C3-C15 140G-G3C4-C15 140G-G6C3-C15 140G-G6C4-C15 16 16 500 140G-G2C3-C16 140G-G2C4-C16 140G-G3C3-C16 140G-G3C4-C16 140G-G6C3-C16 140G-G6C4-C16 20 20 500 140G-G2C3-C20 140G-G2C4-C20 140G-G3C3-C20 140G-G3C4-C20 140G-G6C3-C20 140G-G6C4-C20 25 25 500 140G-G2C3-C25 140G-G2C4-C25 140G-G3C3-C25 140G-G3C4-C25 140G-G6C3-C25 140G-G6C4-C25 30 30 500 140G-G2C3-C30 140G-G2C4-C30 140G-G3C3-C30 140G-G3C4-C30 140G-G6C3-C30 140G-G6C4-C30 32 32 500 140G-G2C3-C32 140G-G2C4-C32 140G-G3C3-C32 140G-G3C4-C32 140G-G6C3-C32 140G-G6C4-C32 35 35 500 140G-G2C3-C35 140G-G2C4-C35 140G-G3C3-C35 140G-G3C4-C35 140G-G6C3-C35 140G-G6C4-C35 40 40 500 140G-G2C3-C40 140G-G2C4-C40 140G-G3C3-C40 140G-G3C4-C40 140G-G6C3-C40 140G-G6C4-C40 45 45 500 140G-G2C3-C45 140G-G2C4-C45 140G-G3C3-C45 140G-G3C4-C45 140G-G6C3-C45 140G-G6C4-C45 50 50 500 140G-G2C3-C50 140G-G2C4-C50 140G-G3C3-C50 140G-G3C4-C50 140G-G6C3-C50 140G-G6C4-C50 60 60 600 140G-G2C3-C60 140G-G2C4-C60 140G-G3C3-C60 140G-G3C4-C60 140G-G6C3-C60 140G-G6C4-C60 63 63 630 140G-G2C3-C63 140G-G2C4-C63 140G-G3C3-C63 140G-G3C4-C63 140G-G6C3-C63 140G-G6C4-C63 70 70 700 140G-G2C3-C70 140G-G2C4-C70 140G-G3C3-C70 140G-G3C4-C70 140G-G6C3-C70 140G-G6C4-C70 80 80 800 140G-G2C3-C80 140G-G2C4-C80 140G-G3C3-C80 140G-G3C4-C80 140G-G6C3-C80 140G-G6C4-C80 90 90 900 140G-G2C3-C90 140G-G2C4-C90 140G-G3C3-C90 140G-G3C4-C90 140G-G6C3-C90 140G-G6C4-C90 100 100 1000 140G-G2C3-D10 140G-G2C4-D10 140G-G3C3-D10 140G-G3C4-D10 140G-G6C3-D10 140G-G6C4-D10 110 110 1100 140G-G2C3-D11 140G-G2C4-D11 140G-G3C3-D11 140G-G3C4-D11 140G-G6C3-D11 140G-G6C4-D11 125 125 1250 140G-G2C3-D12 140G-G2C4-D12 140G-G3C3-D12 140G-G3C4-D12 140G-G6C3-D12 140G-G6C4-D12 160(1)
(1) IEC only.
(2)
(2) Adjustable thermal trip. 112 A min., 136 A med., 160 A max. 1600 140G-G2E3-D16 140G-G2E4-D16 140G-G3E3-D16 140G-G3E4-D16 140G-G6E3-D16 140G-G6E4-D16
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 21 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
125 A, H-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Catalog Number Explanation
Complete Circuit Breaker Assemblies — 125 A, H-Frame
Examples given in this section are not intended to be used for product selection. Use ProposalWorks to configure the molded case circuit breaker. These configurations are for selection of all factory-installed options for shunt trips, undervoltage release units, auxiliary contacts, trip units, and alarm contacts. Use the codes from Table g to add on to the molded case circuit breaker cat. no. selected on the following pages to form a complete cat. no. with factory-installed options. ProposalWorks is available from http:// www.rockwellautomation.com/global/e-tools/overview.page. Note: Terminal lugs are not supplied and can be ordered separately. See page 85 for available lugs.
140G – H 3 C 3 – C60 – SD – AA
a b c d e f g g
a b c d
Bulletin Number Frame/Rating Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity (based on Ic at 480V) Protection Type
Code Description Code Description Code Description Code Description 140G Global Molded Case Circuit Breaker H 125 A 2 25 kA C Fixed thermal/fixed magnetic 3 35 kA F Adjust thermal/ adjust magnetic
6 65 kA H Electronic LSI- long, short, instant
0 100 kA I Electronic LSIG -Long, short instant, and ground fault 15 150 kA X Breaker frame
T Trip unit S Molded case switch (isolator)
e f g
No. of Poles Current Range Factory-Installed Internal Options(1) (1) Select up to two internal options: 1 for left side mounting (s hunt trip or undervoltage release), 1 for right (auxiliary or alarm contact).
Code Description Code Description Shunt Trip and Undervoltage Release Units Auxiliary and Alarm Contacts, Trip Units 3 3 poles C e.g., C30 = 30 A Code Description Code Description 4 4 poles D e.g., D16 = 160 A SJ Shunt Trip, 24…30V AC/DC KA 1 Aux. Contact, 250V Blank Frame only SK Shunt Trip, 48…60V AC/DC AA 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 250V SD Shunt Trip, 110…127V AC; 110…125V DC BA 2 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 250V SA Shunt Trip, 220…240V AC; 220…250V DC DA 1 Trip Unit Alarm Contact, 250V SB Shunt Trip, 380…440V AC FB 2 Aux. Contacts, 400V
SC Shunt Trip, 480…525V AC AB 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 400V UJ Undervoltage Release, 24…30V AC/DC KJ 1 Aux. Contact, 24V UR Undervoltage Release, 48V AC/DC AJ 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 24V UD Undervoltage Release, 110…127V AC; 110… 125V DC DJ 1 Trip Unit Alarm Contact, 24V UA Undervoltage Release, 220…240V AC; 220… 250V DC
UB Undervoltage Release, 380…440V AC
UC Undervoltage Release, 480…525V AC
No Digit No Selection
I
I
I
I
22 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Breaker Frames and Trip Units
Table 9 - Breaker Frames, 125 A Rated Current
Interrupting Rating (50/
60 Hz), UL 489/
CSA 22.2, No. 5
[kA](1)
Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2 Breaking Capacity (DC), IEC 60947-2 (1)
(1) DC rating is applicable for thermal-magnetic trip unit only.
Cat. No.
240V 480V 600V 220V(2)
(2) These ratings have not been tested for the CCC listing. 415V 440V(2) 690V 250V DC
(2- pole in series)
500V DC
(3 P
oles in series)
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
3 Poles 4 Poles
65 25 14 65 100 36 100 36 100 10 100 36 100 36 100 140G-H2X3 140G-H2X4 100 35 18 85 100 50 100 50 100 12 100 50 100 50 100 140G-H3X3 140G-H3X4 150 65 25 100 100 70 100 65 100 15 100 70 100 70 100 140G-H6X3 140G-H6X4 200 100 35 150 100 120 100 100 100 18 75 85 100 85 100 140G-H0X3 140G-H0X4 200 150 42 200 100 150 100 150 100 20 75 100 100 100 100 140G-H15X3 140G-H15X4 Table 10 - Trip Units, Thermal-Magnetic
Rated Current In
[A]
Thermal Trip [A]
Ir
Magnetic Trip [A]
Im
Protection Type Cat. No.
3 Poles 4 Poles
50 50 500 C (Fixed) 140G-HTC3-C50 140G-HTC4-C50
60 60 600 C (Fixed) 140G-HTC3-C60 140G-HTC4-C60
63 63 630 C (Fixed) 140G-HTC3-C63 140G-HTC4-C63
70 70 700 C (Fixed) 140G-HTC3-C70 140G-HTC4-C70
80 56...80 400…800 F (Adjustable) 140G-HTF3-C80 140G-HTF4-C80 90 63…90 450…900 F (Adjustable) 140G-HTF3-C90 140G-HTF4-C90 100 70…100 500…1000 F (Adjustable) 140G-HTF3-D10 140G-HTF4-D10 110 77…110 550…1100 F (Adjustable) 140G-HTF3-D11 140G-HTF4-D11 125 87…125 625…1250 F (Adjustable) 140G-HTF3-D12 140G-HTF4-D12 Table 11 - Trip Units, Electronic LSI (Long, Short, Instantaneous) Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type Cat. No.
L S I 3 Poles 4 Poles
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In 60 24…60 3, 12, 36, 60 60…600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 60…600 140G-HTH3-C60 140G-HTH4-C60 100 40…100 3, 12, 36, 60 100…1000 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 100…1000 140G-HTH3-D10 140G-HTH4-D10 125 50…125 3, 12, 36, 60 125…1250 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 125…1250 140G-HTH3-D12 140G-HTH4-D12 Frame Trip Unit MCCB
+ =
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 23 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Assembled Molded Case Circuit Breakers — 125 A, H-Frame Table 12 - Trip Units, Electronic LSIG (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault) Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type Cat. No.
L S I G 3 Poles 4 Poles
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In I4=0.2…1 x In t4=sec. 60 24…60 3, 12, 36, 60 60…600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 60…600 12…60 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-HTI3-C60 140G-HTI4-C60 100 40…100 3, 12, 36, 60 100…1000 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 100…1000 20…100 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-HTI3-D10 140G-HTI4-D10 125 50…125 3, 12, 36, 60 125…1250 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 125…1250 25…125 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-HTI3-D12 140G-HTI4-D12 Table 13 - Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity — Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Interrupting Rating
(50/60 Hz), UL 489/
CSA 22.2, No. 5 [kA]
Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2 Breaking Capacity (DC), IEC 60947-2
Interrupting
Code(1)
(1) See Table 14 and Table 15 for Cat. No. selection.
240V 480V 600V 220V(2)
(2) These ratings have not been tested for the CCC listing. 415V 440V(2) 690V 250V DC (2 Poles in
series)
500V DC (3 P oles in
series)
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
65 25 14 65 100 36 100 36 100 10 100 36 100 36 100 H2
100 35 18 85 100 50 100 50 100 12 100 50 100 50 100 H3
150 65 25 100 100 70 100 65 100 15 100 70 100 70 100 H6 200 100 35 150 100 120 100 100 100 18 75 85 100 85 100 H0 200 150 42 200 100 150 100 150 100 20 75 100 100 100 100 H15 Table 14 - Thermal-Magnetic, Fixed and Adjustable
Rated Current In
[A]
Thermal Trip [A]
Ir
Magnetic Trip [A]
Im
Interrupting Code H2 Interrupting Code H3 Interrupting Code H6 Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No.
3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
15 15 400 140G-H2C3-C15 140G-H2C4-C15 140G-H3C3-C15 140G-H3C4-C15 140G-H6C3-C15 140G-H6C4-C15 16 16 400 140G-H2C3-C16 140G-H2C4-C16 140G-H3C3-C16 140G-H3C4-C16 140G-H6C3-C16 140G-H6C4-C16 20 20 400 140G-H2C3-C20 140G-H2C4-C20 140G-H3C3-C20 140G-H3C4-C20 140G-H6C3-C20 140G-H6C4-C20 25 25 400 140G-H2C3-C25 140G-H2C4-C25 140G-H3C3-C25 140G-H3C4-C25 140G-H6C3-C25 140G-H6C4-C25 30 30 400 140G-H2C3-C30 140G-H2C4-C30 140G-H3C3-C30 140G-H3C4-C30 140G-H6C3-C30 140G-H6C4-C30 32 32 400 140G-H2C3-C32 140G-H2C4-C32 140G-H3C3-C32 140G-H3C4-C32 140G-H6C3-C32 140G-H6C4-C32 35 35 400 140G-H2C3-C35 140G-H2C4-C35 140G-H3C3-C35 140G-H3C4-C35 140G-H6C3-C35 140G-H6C4-C35 40 40 400 140G-H2C3-C40 140G-H2C4-C40 140G-H3C3-C40 140G-H3C4-C40 140G-H6C3-C40 140G-H6C4-C40 50 50 500 140G-H2C3-C50 140G-H2C4-C50 140G-H3C3-C50 140G-H3C4-C50 140G-H6C3-C50 140G-H6C4-C50 60 60 600 140G-H2C3-C60 140G-H2C4-C60 140G-H3C3-C60 140G-H3C4-C60 140G-H6C3-C60 140G-H6C4-C60 63 63 630 140G-H2C3-C63 140G-H2C4-C63 140G-H3C3-C63 140G-H3C4-C63 140G-H6C3-C63 140G-H6C4-C63 70 70 700 140G-H2C3-C70 140G-H2C4-C70 140G-H3C3-C70 140G-H3C4-C70 140G-H6C3-C70 140G-H6C4-C70 80 56...80 400…800 140G-H2F3-C80 140G-H2F4-C80 140G-H3F3-C80 140G-H3F4-C80 140G-H6F3-C80 140G-H6F4-C80 90 63…90 450…900 140G-H2F3-C90 140G-H2F4-C90 140G-H3F3-C90 140G-H3F4-C90 140G-H6F3-C90 140G-H6F4-C90 100 70…100 500…1000 140G-H2F3-D10 140G-H2F4-D10 140G-H3F3-D10 140G-H3F4-D10 140G-H6F3-D10 140G-H6F4-D10 110 77…110 550…1100 140G-H2F3-D11 140G-H2F4-D11 140G-H3F3-D11 140G-H3F4-D11 140G-H6F3-D11 140G-H6F4-D11 125 87…125 625…1250 140G-H2F3-D12 140G-H2F4-D12 140G-H3F3-D12 140G-H3F4-D12 140G-H6F3-D12 140G-H6F4-D12 160(1)
(1) IEC only.
112…160 800…1600 140G-H2F3-D16 140G-H2F4-D16 140G-H3F3-D16 140G-H3F4-D16 140G-H6F3-D16 140G-H6F4-D16 24 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Table 15 - Thermal-Magnetic, Fixed and Adjustable
Rated
Current In
[A]
Thermal Trip [A]
Ir
Magnetic Trip [A]
Im
Interrupting Code H0 Interrupting Code H15
Cat. No. Cat. No.
3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
15 15 400 140G-H0C3-C15 140G-H0C4-C15 140G-H15C3-C15 140G-H15C4-C15 16 16 400 140G-H0C3-C16 140G-H0C4-C16 140G-H15C3-C16 140G-H15C4-C16 20 20 400 140G-H0C3-C20 140G-H0C4-C20 140G-H15C3-C20 140G-H15C4-C20 25 25 400 140G-H0C3-C25 140G-H0C4-C25 140G-H15C3-C25 140G-H15C4-C25 30 30 400 140G-H0C3-C30 140G-H0C4-C30 140G-H15C3-C30 140G-H15C4-C30 32 32 400 140G-H0C3-C32 140G-H0C4-C32 140G-H15C3-C32 140G-H15C4-C32 35 35 400 140G-H0C3-C35 140G-H0C4-C35 140G-H15C3-C35 140G-H15C4-C35 40 40 400 140G-H0C3-C40 140G-H0C4-C40 140G-H15C3-C40 140G-H15C4-C40 50 50 500 140G-H0C3-C50 140G-H0C4-C50 140G-H15C3-C50 140G-H15C4-C50 60 60 600 140G-H0C3-C60 140G-H0C4-C60 140G-H15C3-C60 140G-H15C4-C60 63 63 630 140G-H0C3-C63 140G-H0C4-C63 140G-H15C3-C63 140G-H15C4-C63 70 70 700 140G-H0C3-C70 140G-H0C4-C70 140G-H15C3-C70 140G-H15C4-C70 80 56...80 400…800 140G-H0F3-C80 140G-H0F4-C80 140G-H15F3-C80 140G-H15F4-C80 90 63…90 450…900 140G-H0F3-C90 140G-H0F4-C90 140G-H15F3-C90 140G-H15F4-C90 100 70…100 500…1000 140G-H0F3-D10 140G-H0F4-D10 140G-H15F3-D10 140G-H15F4-D10 110 77…110 550…1100 140G-H0F3-D11 140G-H0F4-D11 140G-H15F3-D11 140G-H15F4-D11 125 84…120 625…1250 140G-H0F3-D12 140G-H0F4-D12 140G-H15F3-D12 140G-H15F4-D12 160(1)
(1) IEC only.
112…160 800…1600 140G-H0F3-D16 140G-H0F4-D16 140G-H15F3-D16 140G-H15F4-D16 Table 16 - Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity — Electronic Circuit Breakers Interrupting Rating (50/60 Hz), UL 489/
CSA 22.2, No. 5 [kA] Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2 Interrupting
Code(1)
(1) See Table 17 through Table 20 for Cat. No. selection. 240V 480V 600V 220V(2)
(2) These ratings have not been tested for the CCC listing. 415V 440V(2) 690V
Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] 65 25 14 65 100 36 100 36 100 10 100 H2
100 35 18 85 100 50 100 50 100 12 100 H3
150 65 25 100 100 70 100 65 100 15 100 H6
200 100 35 150 100 120 100 100 100 18 100 H0
200 150 42 200 100 150 100 150 100 20 75 H15
Table 17 - Electronic LSI (Long, Short, Instantaneous)
Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code H2 Interrupting Code H3 L S I Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles 25 10…25 3, 12, 36, 60 25…250 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 25…250 140G-H2H3-C25 140G-H2H4-C25 140G-H3H3-C25 140G-H3H4-C25 60 24…60 3, 12, 36, 60 60…600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 60…600 140G-H2H3-C60 140G-H2H4-C60 140G-H3H3-C60 140G-H3H4-C60 100 40…100 3, 12, 36, 60 100…1000 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 100…1000 140G-H2H3-D10 140G-H2H4-D10 140G-H3H3-D10 140G-H3H4-D10 125 50…125 3, 12, 36, 60 125…1250 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 125…1250 140G-H2H3-D12 140G-H2H4-D12 140G-H3H3-D12 140G-H3H4-D12 160(1)
(1) IEC only.
64…160 3, 12, 36, 60 160…1600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 160…1600 140G-H2H3-D16 140G-H2H4-D16 140G-H3H3-D16 140G-H3H4-D16 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 25 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Table 18 - Electronic LSI (Long, Short, Instantaneous)
Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code H6
L S I Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In 3 Poles 4 Poles 25 10…25 3, 12, 36, 60 25…250 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 25…250 140G-H6H3-C25 140G-H6H4-C25 60 24…60 3, 12, 36, 60 60…600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 60…600 140G-H6H3-C60 140G-H6H4-C60 100 40…100 3, 12, 36, 60 100…1000 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 100…1000 140G-H6H3-D10 140G-H6H4-D10 125 50…125 3, 12, 36, 60 125…1250 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 125…1250 140G-H6H3-D12 140G-H6H4-D12 160(1)
(1) IEC only.
64…160 3, 12, 36, 60 160…1600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 160…1600 140G-H6H3-D16 140G-H6H4-D16 Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code H0 Interrupting Code H15 L S I Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles 25 10…25 3, 12, 36, 60 25…250 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 25…250 140G-H0H3-C25 140G-H0H4-C25 140G-H15H3-C25 140G-H15H4-C25 60 24…60 3, 12, 36, 60 60…600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 60…600 140G-H0H3-C60 140G-H0H4-C60 140G-H15H3-C60 140G-H15H4-C60 100 40…100 3, 12, 36, 60 100…1000 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 100…1000 140G-H0H3-D10 140G-H0H4-D10 140G-H15H3-D10 140G-H15H4-D10 125 50…125 3, 12, 36, 60 125…1250 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 125…1250 140G-H0H3-D12 140G-H0H4-D12 140G-H15H3-D12 140G-H15H4-D12 160(1)
(1) IEC only.
64…160 3, 12, 36, 60 160…1600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 160…1600 140G-H0H3-D16 140G-H0H4-D16 140G-H15H3-D16 140G-H15H4-D16 Table 19 - Electronic LSIG (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault) Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code H2 Interrupting Code H3 L S I G Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…
1 x In
t1=sec. I2=1…
10 x In
t2=sec. I3=1…
10 x In
I4=0.2…
1 x In
t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
25 10…25 3, 12, 36, 60 25…250 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 25…250 5…25 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-H2I3-C25 140G-H2I4-C25 140G-H3I3-C25 140G-H3I4-C25 60 24…60 3, 12, 36, 60 60…600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 60…600 12…60 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-H2I3-C60 140G-H2I4-C60 140G-H3I3-C60 140G-H3I4-C60 100 40…100 3, 12, 36, 60 100…1000 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 100…1000 20…100 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-H2I3-D10 140G-H2I4-D10 140G-H3I3-D10 140G-H3I4-D10 125 50…125 3, 12, 36, 60 125…1250 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 125…1250 25…125 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-H2I3-D12 140G-H2I4-D12 140G-H3I3-D12 140G-H3I4-D12 160(1)
(1) IEC only.
64…160 3, 12, 36, 60 160…1600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 160…1600 32…160 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-H2I3-D16 140G-H2I4-D16 140G-H3I3-D16 140G-H3I4-D16 Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code H6
L S I G Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In I4=0.2…1 x In t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles 25 10…25 3, 12, 36, 60 25…250 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 25…250 5…25 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-H6I3-C25 140G-H6I4-C25 60 24…60 3, 12, 36, 60 60…600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 60…600 12…60 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-H6I3-C60 140G-H6I4-C60 100 40…100 3, 12, 36, 60 100…1000 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 100…1000 20…100 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-H6I3-D10 140G-H6I4-D10 125 50…125 3, 12, 36, 60 125…1250 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 125…1250 25…125 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-H6I3-D12 140G-H6I4-D12 160(1)
(1) IEC only.
64…160 3, 12, 36, 60 160…1600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 160…1600 32…160 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-H6I3-D16 140G-H6I4-D16 26 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Table 20 - Electronic LSIG (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault) Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code H0 Interrupting Code H15 L S I G Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…
1 x In
t1=sec. I2=1…
10 x In
t2=sec. I3=1…
10 x In
I4=0.2…
1 x In
t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
25 10…25 3, 12, 36, 60 25…250 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 25…250 5…25 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-H0I3-C25 140G-H0I4-C25 140G-H15I3-C25 140G-H15I4-C25 60 24…60 3, 12, 36, 60 60…600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 60…600 12…60 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-H0I3-C60 140G-H0I4-C60 140G-H15I3-C60 140G-H15I4-C60 100 40…100 3, 12, 36, 60 100…1000 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 100…1000 20…100 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-H0I3-D10 140G-H0I4-D10 140G-H15I3-D10 140G-H15I4-D10 125 50…125 3, 12, 36, 60 125…1250 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 125…1250 25…125 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-H0I3-D12 140G-H0I4-D12 140G-H15I3-D12 140G-H15I4-D12 160(1)
(1) IEC only.
64…160 3, 12, 36, 60 160…1600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 160…1600 32…160 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-H0I3-D16 140G-H0I4-D16 140G-H15I3-D16 140G-H15I4-D16 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 27 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
225 A I-Frame Case Circuit Breakers
Catalog Number Explanation
Complete Circuit Breaker Assemblies — 225 A, I-Frame
Examples given in this section are not intended to be used for product selection. Use ProposalWorks to configure the molded case circuit breaker. These configurations are for selection of all factory-installed options for shunt trips, undervoltage release units, auxiliary contacts, and alarm contacts. Use the codes from Table g to add on to the molded case circuit breaker cat. no. selected on the following pages to form a complete cat. no. with factory-installed options. ProposalWorks is available from http:// www.rockwellautomation.com/global/e-tools/overview.page. Note: Terminal lugs are not supplied and can be ordered separately. See page 85 for available lugs.
140G – I 3 C 3 – C60 – SA – KA
a b c d e f g g
a b c d
Bulletin Number Frame/Rating Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity (based on Ic at 480V) Protection Type
Code Description Code Description Code Description Code Description 140G Global Molded Case Circuit Breaker I 225 A 2 25 kA C Fixed thermal/fixed magnetic 3 35 kA S Molded case switch (Isolator)
e f g
No. of Poles Current Range Factory-Installed Internal Options (1) (1) Select up to two internal options: 1 for left side mounting (s hunt trip or undervoltage release), 1 for right (auxiliary or alarm contact).
Code Description Code Description Shunt Trip and Undervoltage Release Units Auxiliary and Alarm Contacts 3 3 poles C e.g., C30 = 30 A Code Description Code Description 4 4 poles D e.g., D16 = 160 A SJ Shunt Trip, 24…30V AC/DC KA 1 Aux. Contact, 250V SK Shunt Trip, 48…60V AC/DC AA 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 250V SD Shunt Trip, 110…127V AC; 110…125V DC BA 2 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 250V SA Shunt Trip, 220…240V AC; 220…250V DC KJ 1 Aux. Contact, 24V SB Shunt Trip, 380…440V AC AJ 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 24V SG Shunt Trip, 480…525V AC
UJ Undervoltage Release, 24…30V AC/DC
UR Undervoltage Release, 48V AC/DC
UD Undervoltage Release, 110…127V AC; 110…125V DC
UA Undervoltage Release, 220…240V AC; 220…250V DC
UB Undervoltage Release, 380…440V AC
UC Undervoltage Release, 480…525V AC
No Digit No Selection
•• •
I I
I I
28 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Assembled Molded Case Circuit Breakers — 225 A I-Frame
Table 21 - Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity — Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Interrupting Rating
(50/60 Hz), UL 489/
CSA 22.2, No. 5 [kA]
Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2 Breaking Capacity (DC), IEC 60947-2
Interrupting
Code(1)
(1) See Table 22 for Cat. No. selection.
240V 480V 600Y/
347V
220V(2)
(2) These ratings have not been tested for the CCC listing. 415V 440V(2) 690V 250V DC
(2 Poles in
series)
500V DC
(3 Poles in series)
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
50 25 10 50 75 36 75 25 75 5 50 36 100 36 100 I2
65 35 10 85 50 50 50 40 50 6 50 50 75 50 75 I3
Table 22 - Thermal-Magnetic, Fixed
Rated Current
In [A]
Thermal Trip [A]
Ir = In (Fixed)
Magnetic Trip [A]
Im
Interrupting Code I2 Interrupting Code I3
Cat. No. Cat. No.
3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
60 60 600 140G-I2C3-C60 140G-I2C4-C60 140G-I3C3-C60 140G-I3C4-C60 63 63 630 140G-I2C3-C63 140G-I2C4-C63 140G-I3C3-C63 140G-I3C4-C63 70 70 700 140G-I2C3-C70 140G-I2C4-C70 140G-I3C3-C70 140G-I3C4-C70 80 80 800 140G-I2C3-C80 140G-I2C4-C80 140G-I3C3-C80 140G-I3C4-C80 90 90 900 140G-I2C3-C90 140G-I2C4-C90 140G-I3C3-C90 140G-I3C4-C90 100 100 1000 140G-I2C3-D10 140G-I2C4-D10 140G-I3C3-D10 140G-I3C4-D10 110 110 1100 140G-I2C3-D11 140G-I2C4-D11 140G-I3C3-D11 140G-I3C4-D11 125 125 1250 140G-I2C3-D12 140G-I2C4-D12 140G-I3C3-D12 140G-I3C4-D12 150 150 1500 140G-I2C3-D15 140G-I2C4-D15 140G-I3C3-D15 140G-I3C4-D15 160 160 1600 140G-I2C3-D16 140G-I2C4-D16 140G-I3C3-D16 140G-I3C4-D16 175 175 1750 140G-I2C3-D17 140G-I2C4-D17 140G-I3C3-D17 140G-I3C4-D17 200 200 2000 140G-I2C3-D20 140G-I2C4-D20 140G-I3C3-D20 140G-I3C4-D20 225 225 2250 140G-I2C3-D22 140G-I2C4-D22 140G-I3C3-D22 140G-I3C4-D22 •• • • •
---
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 29 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
250 A, J-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Catalog Number Explanation
Complete Circuit Breaker Assemblies — 250 A, J-Frame
Examples given in this section are not intended to be used for product selection. Use ProposalWorks to configure the molded case circuit breaker. These configurations are for selection of all factory-installed options for shunt trips, undervoltage release units, auxiliary contacts, trip units, and alarm contacts. Use the codes from Table g to add on to the molded case circuit breaker cat. no. selected on the following pages to form a complete cat. no. with factory-installed options. ProposalWorks is available from http:// www.rockwellautomation.com/global/e-tools/overview.page. Note: Terminal lugs are not supplied and can be ordered separately. See page 85 for available lugs.
140G – J 3 C 3 – C60 – SD – AA
a b c d e f g g
a b c d
Bulletin Number Frame/Rating Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity (based on Ic at 480V) Protection Type
Code Description Code Description Code Description Code Description 140G Global Molded Case Circuit
Breaker
J 250 A 2 25 kA C Fixed thermal/ fixed magnetic
3 35 kA E Adjust thermal/ fixed magnetic
6 65 kA F Adjust thermal/ adjust magnetic
0 100 kA H Electronic LSI-long, short, instant
T Trip unit I Electronic LSIG -long, short, instant, and ground fault X Breaker frame
S Molded case switch (isolator)
e f g
No. of Poles Current Range Factory-Installed Internal Options (1) (1) Select up to two internal options: 1 for left side mounting (s hunt trip or undervoltage release), 1 for right (auxiliary or alarm contact).
Code Description Code Description Shunt Trip and Undervoltage Release Units Auxiliary and Alarm Contacts, Trip Units 3 3 poles C e.g., C30 = 30 A Code Description Code Description 4 4 poles D e.g., D16 = 160 A SJ Shunt Trip, 24…30V AC/DC KA 1 Aux. Contact, 250V Blank Frame only SK Shunt Trip, 48…60V AC/DC AA 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 250V SD Shunt Trip, 110…127V AC; 110…125V DC BA 2 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 250V SA Shunt Trip, 220…240V AC; 220…250V DC DA 1 Trip Unit Alarm Contact, 250V SB Shunt Trip, 380…440V AC FB 2 Aux. Contacts, 400V
SC Shunt Trip, 480…525V AC AB 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 400V UJ Undervoltage Release, 24…30V AC/DC KJ 1 Aux. Contact, 24V UR Undervoltage Release, 48V AC/DC AJ 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 24V UD Undervoltage Release, 110…127V AC; 110…125V DC DJ 1 Trip Unit Alarm Contact, 24V UA Undervoltage Release, 220…240V AC; 220…250V DC
UB Undervoltage Release, 380…440V AC
UC Undervoltage Release, 480…525V AC
No Digit No Selection
I
I
30 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Breaker Frames and Trip Units
Table 23 - Breaker Frames, 250 A Rated Current
Interrupting Rating (50/60
Hz), UL 489/CSA 22.2, No. 5
[kA]
Breaking Capacity (50/6 0 Hz), IEC 60947-2 Breaking Capacity (DC), IEC 60947-2 (1) (1) DC rating is applicable for thermal-magnetic trip unit only.
Cat. No.
240V 480V 600V
220V(2)
(2) These ratings have not been tested for the CCC listing. 415V 440V(2) 690V 250V DC (2 Poles in
series)
500V DC (3 Poles in
series)
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu] 3 Poles 4 Poles
65 25 14 65 100 36 100 36 100 10 100 36 100 36 100 140G-J2X3 140G-J2X4 100 35 18 85 100 50 100 50 100 12 100 50 100 50 100 140G-J3X3 140G-J3X4 150 65 25 100 100 70 100 65 100 15 100 70 100 70 100 140G-J6X3 140G-J6X4 200 100 35 150 100 120 100 100 100 20 100 85 100 85 100 140G-J0X3 140G-J0X4 Table 24 - Trip Units, Thermal-Magnetic
Rated Current
In [A]
Thermal Trip [A]
Ir
Magnetic Trip [A]
Im
Protection Type Cat. No.
3 Poles 4 Poles
25 25 400 C (Fixed) 140G-JTC3-C25 140G-JTC4-C25
30 30 400 C (Fixed) 140G-JTC3-C30 140G-JTC4-C30
32 32 400 C (Fixed) 140G-JTC3-C32 140G-JTC4-C32
35 35 400 C (Fixed) 140G-JTC3-C35 140G-JTC4-C35
40 40 400 C (Fixed) 140G-JTC3-C40 140G-JTC4-C40
50 50 500 C (Fixed) 140G-JTC3-C50 140G-JTC4-C50
60 60 600 C (Fixed) 140G-JTC3-C60 140G-JTC4-C60
63 63 630 C (Fixed) 140G-JTC3-C63 140G-JTC4-C63
70 70 700 C (Fixed) 140G-JTC3-C70 140G-JTC4-C70
80 56…80 400…800 F (Adjustable) 140G-JTF3-C80 140G-JTF4-C80 90 63…90 450…900 F (Adjustable) 140G-JTF3-C90 140G-JTF4-C90 100 70…100 500…1000 F (Adjustable) 140G-JTF3-D10 140G-JTF4-D10 110 77…110 550…1100 F (Adjustable) 140G-JTF3-D11 140G-JTF4-D11 125 87.5…125 625…1250 F (Adjustable) 140G-JTF3-D12 140G-JTF4-D12 150 105…150 750…1500 F (Adjustable) 140G-JTF3-D15 140G-JTF4-D15 160 112…160 800…1600 F (Adjustable) 140G-JTF3-D16 140G-JTF4-D16 175 122.5…175 875…1750 F (Adjustable) 140G-JTF3-D17 140G-JTF4-D17 200 140…200 1000…2000 F (Adjustable) 140G-JTF3-D20 140G-JTF4-D20 225 157.5…225 1125…2250 F (Adjustable) 140G-JTF3-D22 140G-JTF4-D22 250 175…250 1250…2500 F (Adjustable) 140G-JTF3-D25 140G-JTF4-D25 Frame Trip Unit MCCB
+ =
..
o J e•
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 31 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Assembled Molded Case Circuit Breakers — 250 A J-Frame
Table 25 - Trip Units, Electronic LSI (Long, Short, Instantaneous) Rated Current
In [A]
Protection Type Cat. No. Cat. No.
L S I 3 Poles 4 Poles
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In 40 16…40 3, 12, 36, 60 40…400 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 40…400 140G-JTH3-C40 140G-JTH4-C40 60 24…60 3, 12, 36, 60 60…600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 60…600 140G-JTH3-C60 140G-JTH4-C60 100 40…100 3, 12, 36, 60 100…1000 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 100…1000 140G-JTH3-D10 140G-JTH4-D10 150 60…150 3, 12, 36, 60 150…1500 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 150…1500 140G-JTH3-D15 140G-JTH4-D15 250 100…250 3, 12, 36, 60 250…2500 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 250…2500 140G-JTH3-D25 140G-JTH4-D25 Table 26 - Trip Units, Electronic LSIG (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault) Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type Cat. No. Cat. No.
L S I G 3 Poles 4 Poles
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In I4=0.2…1 x In t4=sec. 40 16…40 3, 12, 36, 60 40…400 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 40…400 8…40 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-JTI3-C40 140G-JTI4-C40 60 24…60 3, 12, 36, 60 60…600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 60…600 12…60 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-JTI3-C60 140G-JTI4-C60 100 40…100 3, 12, 36, 60 100…1000 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 100…1000 20…100 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-JTI3-D10 140G-JTI4-D10 150 60…150 3, 12, 36, 60 150…1500 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 150…1500 30…150 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-JTI3-D15 140G-JTI4-D15 250 100…250 3, 12, 36, 60 250…2500 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 250…2500 50…250 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-JTI3-D25 140G-JTI4-D25 Table 27 - Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity — Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Interrupting Rating (50/60
Hz), UL 489/CSA 22.2, No. 5
[kA]
Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2 Breaking Capacity (DC), IEC 60947-2 (1) (1) DC rating is applicable for thermal-magnetic trip unit only.
Interrupting
Code(2)
(2) See Table 28 for Cat. No. selection.
240V 480V 600V
220V(3)
(3) These ratings have not been tested for the CCC listing. 415V 440V(3) 690V 250V DC (2- pole in
series)
500V DC (3 Poles in
series)
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
65 25 14 65 100 36 100 36 100 10 100 36 100 36 100 J2
100 35 18 85 100 50 100 50 100 12 100 50 100 50 100 J3
150 65 25 100 100 70 100 65 100 15 100 70 100 70 100 J6 200 100 35 150 100 120 100 100 100 20 100 85 100 85 100 J0 32 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Table 28 - Thermal-Magnetic, Fixed and Adjustable
Rated Current
In [A]
Thermal Trip [A]
Ir
Magnetic Trip [A]
Im
Interrupting Code J2 Interrupting Code J3
Cat. No. Cat. No.
3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
25 25 400 140G-J2C3-C25 140G-J2C4-C25 140G-J3C3-C25 140G-J3C4-C25 30 30 400 140G-J2C3-C30 140G-J2C4-C30 140G-J3C3-C30 140G-J3C4-C30 32 32 400 140G-J2C3-C32 140G-J2C4-C32 140G-J3C3-C32 140G-J3C4-C32 35 35 400 140G-J2C3-C35 140G-J2C4-C35 140G-J3C3-C35 140G-J3C4-C35 40 40 400 140G-J2C3-C40 140G-J2C4-C40 140G-J3C3-C40 140G-J3C4-C40 50 50 500 140G-J2C3-C50 140G-J2C4-C50 140G-J3C3-C50 140G-J3C4-C50 60 60 600 140G-J2C3-C60 140G-J2C4-C60 140G-J3C3-C60 140G-J3C4-C60 63 63 630 140G-J2C3-C63 140G-J2C4-C63 140G-J3C3-C63 140G-J3C4-C63 70 70 700 140G-J2C3-C70 140G-J2C4-C70 140G-J3C3-C70 140G-J3C4-C70 80 56…80 400…800 140G-J2F3-C80 140G-J2F4-C80 140G-J3F3-C80 140G-J3F4-C80 90 63…90 450…900 140G-J2F3-C90 140G-J2F4-C90 140G-J3F3-C90 140G-J3F4-C90 100 70…100 500…1000 140G-J2F3-D10 140G-J2F4-D10 140G-J3F3-D10 140G-J3F4-D10 110 77…110 550…1100 140G-J2F3-D11 140G-J2F4-D11 140G-J3F3-D11 140G-J3F4-D11 125 87.5…125 625…1250 140G-J2F3-D12 140G-J2F4-D12 140G-J3F3-D12 140G-J3F4-D12 150 105…150 750…1500 140G-J2F3-D15 140G-J2F4-D15 140G-J3F3-D15 140G-J3F4-D15 160 112…160 800…1600 140G-J2F3-D16 140G-J2F4-D16 140G-J3F3-D16 140G-J3F4-D16 175 122.5…175 875…1750 140G-J2F3-D17 140G-J2F4-D17 140G-J3F3-D17 140G-J3F4-D17 200 140…200 1000…2000 140G-J2F3-D20 140G-J2F4-D20 140G-J3F3-D20 140G-J3F4-D20 225 157.5…225 1125…2250 140G-J2F3-D22 140G-J2F4-D22 140G-J3F3-D22 140G-J3F4-D22 250 175…250 1250…2500 140G-J2F3-D25 140G-J2F4-D25 140G-J3F3-D25 140G-J3F4-D25 Rated Current
In [A]
Thermal Trip [A]
Ir
Magnetic Trip [A]
Im
Interrupting Code J6 Interrupting Code J0
Cat. No. Cat. No.
3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
25 25 400 140G-J6C3-C25 140G-J6C4-C25 140G-J0C3-C25 140G-J0C4-C25 30 30 400 140G-J6C3-C30 140G-J6C4-C30 140G-J0C3-C30 140G-J0C4-C30 32 32 400 140G-J6C3-C32 140G-J6C4-C32 140G-J0C3-C32 140G-J0C4-C32 35 35 400 140G-J6C3-C35 140G-J6C4-C35 140G-J0C3-C35 140G-J0C4-C35 40 40 400 140G-J6C3-C40 140G-J6C4-C40 140G-J0C3-C40 140G-J0C4-C40 50 50 500 140G-J6C3-C50 140G-J6C4-C50 140G-J0C3-C50 140G-J0C4-C50 60 60 600 140G-J6C3-C60 140G-J6C4-C60 140G-J0C3-C60 140G-J0C4-C60 63 63 630 140G-J6C3-C63 140G-J6C4-C63 140G-J0C3-C63 140G-J0C4-C63 70 70 700 140G-J6C3-C70 140G-J6C4-C70 140G-J0C3-C70 140G-J0C4-C70 80 56…80 400…800 140G-J6F3-C80 140G-J6F4-C80 140G-J0F3-C80 140G-J0F4-C80 90 63…90 450…900 140G-J6F3-C90 140G-J6F4-C90 140G-J0F3-C90 140G-J0F4-C90 100 70…100 500…1000 140G-J6F3-D10 140G-J6F4-D10 140G-J0F3-D10 140G-J0F4-D10 110 77…110 550…1100 140G-J6F3-D11 140G-J6F4-D11 140G-J0F3-D11 140G-J0F4-D11 125 87.5…125 625…1250 140G-J6F3-D12 140G-J6F4-D12 140G-J0F3-D12 140G-J0F4-D12 150 105…150 750…1500 140G-J6F3-D15 140G-J6F4-D15 140G-J0F3-D15 140G-J0F4-D15 160 112…160 800…1600 140G-J6F3-D16 140G-J6F4-D16 140G-J0F3-D16 140G-J0F4-D16 175 122.5…175 875…1750 140G-J6F3-D17 140G-J6F4-D17 140G-J0F3-D17 140G-J0F4-D17 200 140…200 1000…2000 140G-J6F3-D20 140G-J6F4-D20 140G-J0F3-D20 140G-J0F4-D20 225 157.5…225 1125…2250 140G-J6F3-D22 140G-J6F4-D22 140G-J0F3-D22 140G-J0F4-D22 250 175…250 1250…2500 140G-J6F3-D25 140G-J6F4-D25 140G-J0F3-D25 140G-J0F4-D25 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 33 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Table 29 - Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity — Electronic Circuit Breakers Interrupting Rating (50/60 Hz), UL 489/
CSA C22.2, No. 5
[kA] Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2
Interrupting
Code(1)
(1) See Table 30 through Table 32 for Cat. No. selection. 240V 480V 600V 220V(2)
(2) These ratings have not been tested for the CCC listing. 415V 440V(2) 690V
Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] 65 25 14 65 100 36 100 36 100 10 100 J2
100 35 18 85 100 50 100 50 100 12 100 J3
150 65 25 100 100 70 100 65 100 15 100 J6
200 100 35 150 100 120 100 100 100 20 100 J0
Table 30 - Electronic LSI (Long, Short, Instantaneous)
Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code J2 Interrupting Code J3 L S I Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles 40 16…40 3, 12, 36, 60 40…400 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 40…400 140G-J2H3-C40 140G-J2H4-C40 140G-J3H3-C40 140G-J3H4-C40 60 24…60 3, 12, 36, 60 60…600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 60…600 140G-J2H3-C60 140G-J2H4-C60 140G-J3H3-C60 140G-J3H4-C60 100 40…100 3, 12, 36, 60 100…1000 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 100…1000 140G-J2H3-D10 140G-J2H4-D10 140G-J3H3-D10 140G-J3H4-D10 150 60…150 3, 12, 36, 60 150…1500 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 150…1500 140G-J2H3-D15 140G-J2H4-D15 140G-J3H3-D15 140G-J3H4-D15 250 100…250 3, 12, 36, 60 250…2500 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 250…2500 140G-J2H3-D25 140G-J2H4-D25 140G-J3H3-D25 140G-J3H4-D25 Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code J6 Interrupting Code J0 L S I Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles 40 16…40 3, 12, 36, 60 40…400 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 40…400 140G-J6H3-C40 140G-J6H4-C40 140G-J0H3-C40 140G-J0H4-C40 60 24…60 3, 12, 36, 60 60…600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 60…600 140G-J6H3-C60 140G-J6H4-C60 140G-J0H3-C60 140G-J0H4-C60 100 40…100 3, 12, 36, 60 100…1000 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 100…1000 140G-J6H3-D10 140G-J6H4-D10 140G-J0H3-D10 140G-J0H4-D10 150 60…150 3, 12, 36, 60 150…1500 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 150…1500 140G-J6H3-D15 140G-J6H4-D15 140G-J0H3-D15 140G-J0H4-D15 250 100…250 3, 12, 36, 60 250…2500 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 250…2500 140G-J6H3-D25 140G-J6H4-D25 140G-J0H3-D25 140G-J0H4-D25 Table 31 - Electronic LSIG (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault) Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code J2 Interrupting Code J3 L S I G Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…
1 x In
t1=sec. I2=1…
10 x In
t2=sec. I3=1…
10 x In
I4=0.2…
1 x In
t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
40 16…40 3, 12, 36, 60 40…400 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 40…400 8…40 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-J2I3-C40 140G-J2I4-C40 140G-J3I3-C40 140G-J3I4-C40 60 24…60 3, 12, 36, 60 60…600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 60…600 12…60 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-J2I3-C60 140G-J2I4-C60 140G-J3I3-C60 140G-J3I4-C60 100 40…100 3, 12, 36, 60 100…1000 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 100…1000 20…100 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-J2I3-D10 140G-J2I4-D10 140G-J3I3-D10 140G-J3I4-D10 150 60…150 3, 12, 36, 60 150…1500 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 150…1500 30…150 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-J2I3-D15 140G-J2I4-D15 140G-J3I3-D15 140G-J3I4-D15 250 100…250 3, 12, 36, 60 250…2500 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 250…2500 50…250 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-J2I3-D25 140G-J2I4-D25 140G-J3I3-D25 140G-J3I4-D25 34 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Table 32 - Electronic LSIG (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault) Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code J6 Interrupting Code J0 L S I G Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…
1 x In
t1=sec. I2=1…
10 x In
t2=sec. I3=1…
10 x In
I4=0.2…
1 x In
t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
40 16…40 3, 12, 36, 60 40…400 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 40…400 8…40 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-J6I3-C40 140G-J6I4-C40 140G-J0I3-C40 140G-J0I4-C40 60 24…60 3, 12, 36, 60 60…600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 60…600 12…60 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-J6I3-C60 140G-J6I4-C60 140G-J0I3-C60 140G-J0I4-C60 100 40…100 3, 12, 36, 60 100…1000 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 100…1000 20…100 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-J6I3-D10 140G-J6I4-D10 140G-J0I3-D10 140G-J0I4-D10 150 60…150 3, 12, 36, 60 150…1500 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 150…1500 30…150 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-J6I3-D15 140G-J6I4-D15 140G-J0I3-D15 140G-J0I4-D15 250 100…250 3, 12, 36, 60 250…2500 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 250…2500 50…250 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-J6I3-D25 140G-J6I4-D25 140G-J0I3-D25 140G-J0I4-D25 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 35 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
400 A, K-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Catalog Number Explanation
Complete Circuit Breaker Assemblies — 400 A, K-Frame
Examples given in this section are not intended to be used for product selection. Use ProposalWorks to configure the molded case circuit breaker. These configurations are for selection of all factory-installed options for shunt trips, undervoltage release units, auxiliary contacts, and alarm contacts. Use the codes from Table g to add on to the molded case circuit breaker cat. no. selected on the following pages to form a complete cat. no. with facto ry-installed options. ProposalWorks is available from http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/e-tools/overview.page. Note: Terminal lugs are not supplied and can be ordered separately. See page 85 for available lugs.
140G – K 3 F 3 – D30 – SD – AA
a b c d e f g g
a b c d
Bulletin Number Frame/Rating Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity (based on Ic at 480V) Protection Type
Code Description Code Description Code Description Code Description 140G Global Molded Case Circuit
Breaker
K 400 A 3 35 kA F Adjust thermal/ adjust magnetic
6 65 kA H Electronic LSI -long, short, instant
0 100 kA I Electronic LSIG -long, short instant, and ground fault 15 150 kA K Electronic LSIG-MM -long, short, instant, ground fault, and MM T Trip unit S Molded case switch (isolator)
X Breaker Frame
e f g
No. of Poles Current Range Factory-Installed Internal Options(1) (1) Select up to two internal options: 1 for left side mounting (s hunt trip or undervoltage release), 1 for right (auxiliary or alarm contact).
Code Description Code Description Shunt Trip and Undervoltage Release Units Auxiliary and Alarm Contacts, Code Description Code Description
3 3 poles D30 e.g., 300 A SJ Shunt Trip, 24…30V AC/DC AA 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 250V 4 4 poles D40 e.g., 400 A SK Shunt Trip, 48…60V AC/DC CA 3 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 250V Blank Frame only SD Shunt Trip, 110…127V AC; 110… 125V DC AB 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 400V SA Shunt Trip, 220…240V AC; 220… 250V DC FB 2 Aux. Contacts, 400V SB Shunt Trip, 380…440V AC CJ 3 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 24V SC Shunt Trip, 480…525V AC
UJ Undervoltage Release, 24…30V AC/DC
UR Undervoltage Release, 48V AC/DC
UD Undervoltage Release, 110…127V AC; 110…125V DC
UA Undervoltage Release, 220…240V AC; 220…250V DC
UB Undervoltage Release, 380…440V AC
UC Undervoltage Release, 480…525V AC
No Digit No Selection
•• •• •••
~
I
I
36 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Breaker Frames and Trip Units
Table 33 - Breaker Frames, 400 A Rated Current
Interrupting Rating (50/60 Hz), UL 489/
CSA 22.2, No. 5 [kA] Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2 Breaking Capacity (DC), IEC 60947-2 (1)
(1) DC rating is applicable for thermal-magnetic trip unit only.
Cat. No.
240V 480V 600V
2 Poles in
series
3 Poles in
series 220V(2)
(2) These ratings have not been tested for the CCC listing. 415V 440V(2) 690V 500V DC
(3 Poles in series)
500V DC(1) 600V DC(1) Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu] 3 Poles 4 Poles
100 35 25 35 25 85 100 50 100 40 100 25 100 36 100 140G-K3X3 140G-K3X4 150 65 35 50 35 100 100 70 100 65 100 40 100 50 100 140G-K6X3 140G-K6X4 200 100 65 65 50 200 100 120 100 100 100 70 100 70 100 140G-K0X3 140G-K0X4 200 150 100 100 65 200 100 200 100 180 100 80 100 100 100 140G-K15X3 140G-K15X4 Table 34 - Trip Units, Thermal-Magnetic
Rated Current
In [A]
Thermal Trip [A]
Ir
Magnetic Trip [A] Im Protection Type Cat. No.
3 Poles 4 Poles
300 210…300 1500…3000 F (Adjustable Thermal/ Adjustable Magnetic) 140G-KTF3-D30 140G-KTF4-D30 400 280…400 2000…4000 F (Adjustable Thermal/ Adjustable Magnetic) 140G-KTF3-D40 140G-KTF4-D40 Table 35 - Trip Units, Electronic LSI (Long, Short, Instantaneous) Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type Cat. No.
L S I 3 Poles 4 Poles
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In 300 120…300 3, 6, 9, 18 180…3000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 450…3600 140G-KTH3-D30 140G-KTH4-D30 400 160…400 3, 6, 9, 18 240…4000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 600…4800 140G-KTH3-D40 140G-KTH4-D40 Table 36 - Trip Units, Electronic LSIG (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault) Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type Cat. No. Cat. No.
L S I G 3 Poles 4 Poles
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In I4=0.2…1 x In t4=sec. 300 120…300 3, 6, 9, 18 180…3000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 450…3600 60…300 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-KTI3-D30 140G-KTI4-D30 400 160…400 3, 6, 9, 18 240…4000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 600…4800 80…400 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-KTI3-D40 140G-KTI4-D40 Table 37 - Trip Units, Electronic LSIG-MM (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault - Maintenance Mode)(1) (1) See page 39 for a list of the preset values for Maintenance Mode.
Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type Cat. No.
L S I G 3 Poles 4 Poles
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=0.6…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1.5…12 x In I4=0.2…1 x In t4=sec. 300 120…300 3, 6, 9, 18 180…3000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 450…3600 60…300 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-KTK3-D30 140G-KTK4-D30 400 160…400 3, 6, 9, 18 240…4000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 600…4800 80…400 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-KTK3-D40 140G-KTK4-D40 Frame Trip Unit MCCB
+ =
• 0
.,
•
'
0 •
I I I
-
-
I I I
I I
I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 37 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Assembled Molded Case Circuit Breakers — 400 A K-Frame
Table 38 - Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity — Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Interrupting Rating (50/60 Hz), UL
489/CSA 22.2, No. 5 [kA] Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2 Breaking Capacity (DC), IEC 60947-2 (1)
(1) DC rating is applicable for thermal-magnetic trip unit only.
Interrupting
Code(2)
(2) See Table 39 for Cat. No. selection.
240V 480V 600V
2 Poles in
series
3 Poles in
series 220V(3)
(3) These ratings have not been tested for the CCC listing. 415V 440V(3) 690V 500V DC (3 Poles in
series)
500V DC 600V DC
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
100 35 25 35 25 85 100 50 100 40 100 25 100 36 100 K3
150 65 35 50 35 100 100 70 100 65 100 40 100 50 100 K6
200 100 65 65 50 200 100 120 100 100 100 70 100 70 100 K0 200 150 100 100 65 200 100 200 100 180 100 80 100 100 100 K15 Table 39 - Thermal-Magnetic, Adjustable and Adjustable
Rated
Current In
[A]
Thermal Trip [A]
Ir
Magnetic Trip [A] Im Protection Type
Interrupting Code K3 Interrupting Code K6
Cat. No. Cat. No.
3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
300 210…300 1500…3000 F (Adjustable Thermal/ Adjustable Magnetic) 140G-K3F3-D30 140G-K3F4-D30 140G-K6F3-D30 140G-K6F4-D30 400 280…400 2000…4000 F (Adjustable Thermal/ Adjustable Magnetic) 140G-K3F3-D40 140G-K3F4-D40 140G-K6F3-D40 140G-K6F4-D40 Rated
Current In
[A]
Thermal Trip [A]
Ir
Magnetic Trip [A] Im Protection Type
Interrupting Code K0 Interrupting Code K15
Cat. No. Cat. No.
3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
300 210…300 1500…3000 F (Adjustable Thermal/ Adjustable Magnetic) 140G-K0F3-D30 140G-K0F4-D30 140G-K15F3-D30 140G-K15F3-D30 400 280…400 2000…4000 F (Adjustable Thermal/ Adjustable Magnetic) 140G-K0F3-D40 140G-K0F4-D40 140G-K15F3-D40 140G-K15F3-D40 Table 40 - Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity — Electronic Circuit Breakers Interrupting Rating (50/60 Hz), UL 489/
CSA 22.2, No. 5 [kA] Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Code(1)
(1) See Table 41 through Table 43for Cat. No. selection. 240V 480V 600V 220V(2)
(2) These ratings have not been tested for the CCC listing. 415V 440V(3) 690V
Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] 100 35 25 85 100 50 100 40 100 25 100 K3
150 65 35 100 100 70 100 65 100 40 100 K6
200 100 65 200 100 120 100 100 100 70 100 K0
200 150 100 200 100 200 100 180 100 80 100 K15
38 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Table 41 - Electronic LSI (Long, Short, Instantaneous)
Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code K3 Interrupting Code K6 L S I Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles 300 120…300 3, 6, 9, 18 180…3000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 450…3600 140G-K3H3-D30 140G-K3H4-D30 140G-K6H3-D30 140G-K6H4-D30 400 160…400 3, 6, 9, 18 240…4000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 600…4800 140G-K3H3-D40 140G-K3H4-D40 140G-K6H3-D40 140G-K6H4-D40 Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code K0 Interrupting Code K15 L S I Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles 300 120…300 3, 6, 9, 18 180…3000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 450…3600 140G-K0H3-D30 140G-K0H4-D30 140G-K15H3-D30 140G-K15H4-D30 400 160…400 3, 6, 9, 18 240…4000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 600…4800 140G-K0H3-D40 140G-K0H4-D40 140G-K15H3-D40 140G-K15H4-D40 Table 42 - Electronic LSIG (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault) Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code K3 Interrupting Code K6 L S I G Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…
1 x In
t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In
I4=0.2…
1x In
t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
300 120…300 3, 6, 9, 18 180…3000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 450…3600 60…300 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-K3I3-D30 140G-K3I4-D30 140G-K6I3-D30 140G-K6I4-D30 400 160…400 3, 6, 9, 18 240…4000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 600…4800 80…400 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-K3I3-D40 140G-K3I4-D40 140G-K6I3-D40 140G-K6I4-D40 Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code K0 Interrupting Code K15 L S I G Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…
1 x In
t1=sec. I2=1…10
x In
t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In
I4=0.2…
1 x In
t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
300 120…300 3, 6, 9, 18 180…3000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 450…3600 60…300 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-K0I3-D30 140G-K0I4-D30 140G-K15I3-D30 140G-K15I4-D30 400 160…400 3, 6, 9, 18 240…4000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 600…4800 80…400 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-K0I3-D40 140G-K0I4-D40 140G-K15I3-D40 140G-K15I4-D40 Table 43 - Electronic LSIG-MM (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault - Maintenance Mode) Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code K3 Interrupting Code K6 L S I G Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…
1 x In
t1=sec. I2=1…10
x In
t2=sec. I3=1…
10 x In
I4=0.2…
1 x In
t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
300 120…300 3, 6, 9, 18 180…3000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 450…3600 60…300 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-K3K3-D30 140G-K3K4-D30 140G-K6K3-D30 140G-K6K4-D30 400 160…400 3, 6, 9, 18 240…4000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 600…4800 80…400 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-K3K3-D40 140G-K3K4-D40 140G-K6K3-D40 140G-K6K4-D40 Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code K0 Interrupting Code K15 L S I G Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…
1 x In
t1=sec. I2=1…
10 x In
t2=sec. I3=1…
10 x In
I4=0.2…
1 x In
t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
300 120…300 3, 6, 9, 18 180…3000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 450…3600 60…300 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-K0K3-D30 140G-K0K4-D30 140G-K15K3-D30 140G-K15K4-D30 400 160…400 3, 6, 9, 18 240…4000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 600…4800 80…400 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-K0K3-D40 140G-K0K4-D40 140G-K15K3-D40 140G-K15K4-D40 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 39 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Maintenance Mode (MM)
Maintenance Mode (MM) offers a preset set of protection parameters. MM allows systems testing when the molded case circuit breaker is energized or ON. The following table lists the preset values for Maintenance Mode.
Figure 7 - Maintenance Mode Basic Wiring Diagram
Rated Current In
[A]
L S I G MM
I1=1 x In t1=MAX sec. I2=OFF t2=OFF sec. I3=4 x In I4=OFF t4=OFF sec. I5=2.5 x In 300 300 18 — — 1200 — — 750
400 400 18 — — 1600 — — 1000
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8 MM Output
(Customer Connection)
Terminal
Block
Terminal
Block
(Customer Connection)
MM Input
24V
-+
3 4
140G-K-CC
Connector
140G-K-CIC
ConnectorX3
X4
140G-K
Electronic Trip Unit
LSIG-MM
Requires Cat. No. 140G-K-CC and 140G-K-CIC terminal connectors.
I I
-- ,.._
• • - I
~ • - - I
- I .. - .. - I -- • • - I
• • - I
= I • • - • • - ✓
-
- ,.._ -
• - I - • - I - - • - I
= - • I
= I • • - • • I .. - I
- ✓ - .. -
40 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
800 A, M-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Catalog Number Explanation
Complete Circuit Breaker Assemblies — 800 A, M-Frame
Examples given in this section are not intended to be used for product selection. Use ProposalWorks to configure the molded case circuit breaker. These configurations are for selection of all factory-installed options for shunt trips, undervoltage release units, auxiliary contacts, and alarm contacts. Use the codes from Table g to add on to the molded case circuit breaker cat. no. selected on the following pages to form a complete cat. no. with facto ry-installed options. ProposalWorks is available from http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/e-tools/overview.page. Note: Terminal lugs are not supplied and can be ordered separately. See page 85 for available lugs.
140G – M 6 K 3 – D60 – SD – AA
a b c d e f g g
a b c d
Bulletin Number Frame/Rating Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity (based on Ic at 480V) Protection Type
Code Description Code Description Code Description Code Description 140G Global Molded Case Circuit
Breaker
M 800 A 5 50 kA F Adjust thermal/ adjust magnetic
6 65 kA H Electronic LSI -long, short, instant
0 100 kA I Electronic LSIG -long, short, instant, and ground fault T Trip unit K Electronic LSIG-MM -long, short, instant, ground fault, a nd MM X Breaker frame
S Molded case switch (isolator)
e f g
No. of Poles Current Range Factory-Installed Internal Options (1) (1) Select up to two internal options: 1 for left side mounting (s hunt trip or undervoltage release), 1 for right (auxiliary or alarm contact).
Code Description Code Description Shunt Trip and Undervoltage Release Units Auxiliary and Alarm Contacts Code Description Code Description
3 3 poles D60 e.g., 600 A SJ Shunt Trip, 24…30V AC/DC AA 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 250V 4 4 poles D63 e.g., 630 A SK Shunt Trip, 48…60V AC/DC CA 3 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 250V D80 e.g., 800 A SD Shunt Trip, 110…127V AC; 110… 125V DC FB 2 Aux. Contacts, 400V Blank Frame only SA Shunt Trip, 220…240V AC; 220… 250V DC AB 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 400V SB Shunt Trip, 380…440V AC CJ 3 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 24V SC Shunt Trip, 480…525V AC
UJ Undervoltage Release, 24…30V AC/DC
UR Undervoltage Release, 48V AC/DC
UY Undervoltage Release, 60V AC/DC
UD Undervoltage Release, 110…127V AC; 110…125V DC
UA Undervoltage Release, 220…240V AC; 220…250V DC
UB Undervoltage Release, 380…440V AC
UC Undervoltage Release, 480…525V AC
No Digit No Selection
I
I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 41 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Breaker Frames and Trip Units
Table 44 - Breaker Frames, 800 A Rated Current
Interrupting Rating (50/60 Hz), UL 489/
CSA 22.2, No. 5[kA] Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2 Breaking Capacity (DC), IEC 60947-2 (1)
(1) DC rating is applicable for thermal-magnetic trip unit only.
Cat. No.
240V 480V 600V
3 Poles in series 220V(2)
(2) These ratings have not been tested for the CCC listing. 415V 690V 750V DC (3 Poles in series)
600V DC(1) Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu] 3 Poles 4 Poles
100 50 25 20 85 100 50 100 22 75 16 75 140G-M5X3 140G-M5X4 200 65 35 35 100 100 70 100 25 75 36 75 140G-M6X3 140G-M6X4 200 100 42 50 200 75 100 75 30 75 50 75 140G-M0X3 140G-M0X4 Table 45 - Trip Units, Thermal-Magnetic
Rated Current
In [A]
Thermal Trip [A]
Ir
Magnetic Trip [A] Im Protection Type Cat. No.
3 Poles 4 Poles
600 420…600 3000…6000 F (Adjustable Thermal/ Adjustable Magnetic) 140G-MTF3-D60 140G-MTF3-D60 800 560…800 4000…8000 F (Adjustable Thermal/ Adjustable Magnetic) 140G-MTF3-D80 140G-MTF4-D80 Table 46 - Trip Units, Electronic LSI (Long, Short, Instantaneous) Rated Current
In [A]
Protection Type Cat. No.
L S I 3 Poles 4 Poles
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=0.6…10 x In t2=sec. I3
(1)
(1) 600 A I3 max =12 In; 800 A I3 max = 10.5 In
600 240…600 3, 6, 12, 18 360…6000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 900…7200 140G-MTH3-D60 140G-MTH4-D60 800 320…800 3, 6, 9, 18 480…8000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 1200…8400 140G-MTH3-D80 140G-MTH4-D80 Table 47 - Trip Units, Electronic LSIG (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault) Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type Cat. No.
L S I G 3 Poles 4 Poles
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=0.6…10 x In t2=sec. I3
(1)
(1) 600 A I3 max =12 In; 800 A I3 max = 10.5 In
I4=0.2…1 x In t4=sec.
600 240…600 3, 6, 12, 18 360…6000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 900…7200 120…600 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-MTI3-D60 140G-MTI4-D60 800 320…800 3, 6, 9, 18 480…8000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 1200…8400 160…800 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-MTI3-D80 140G-MTI4-D80 Table 48 - Trip Units, Electronic LSIG-MM (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault - Maintenance Mode(1)) (1) See page 44 for a list of the preset values for Maintenance Mode.
Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type Cat. No.
L S I G 3 Poles 4 Poles
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=0.6…10 x In t2=sec. I3=(2)
(2) 600 A I3 max =12 In; 800 A I3 max = 10.5 In
I4=0.2…1 x In t4=sec.
600 240…600 3, 6, 12, 18 360…6000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 900…7200 120…600 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-MTK3-D60 140G-MTK4-D60 800 320…800 3, 6, 9, 18 480…8000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 1200…8400 160…800 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-MTK3-D80 140G-MTK4-D80 Frame Trip Unit MCCB
=+
. . . . .
. .
C c)
•
42 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Assembled Molded Case Circuit Breakers — 800 A, M-Frame Table 49 - Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity — Thermal-Magnetic and Electronic Circuit Breakers Interrupting Rating (50/60 Hz), UL 489/CSA 22.2, No. 5 [kA] Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2 Breaking Capacity (DC), IEC 60947-2(1)
(1) DC ratings applicable to ther mal magnetic trip unit only.
Interrupting
Code(2)
(2) See Table 50 through Table 54 for Cat. No. selection 240V 480V 600V
3 Poles in series 220V(3)
(3) These ratings have not been tested for the CCC listing. 415V 690V 750V DC (3 Poles in series)
600V DC(1) Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
100 50 25 20 85 100 50 100 22 75 16 75 M5
200 65 35 35 100 100 70 100 25 75 36 75 M6
200 100 42 50 200 75 100 75 30 75 50 75 M0
Table 50 - Thermal-Magnetic
Rated
Current In
[A]
Thermal
Trip [A]
Ir
Magnetic Trip
[A] Im
Protection Type
Interrupting Code M5 Interrupting Code M6 Interrupting Code M0 Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No.
3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
600 420…600 3000…6000
F (Adjustable Thermal/
Adjustable Magnetic)
140G-M5F3-D60 140G-M5F4-D60 140G-M6F3-D60 140G-M6F4-D60 140G-M0F3-D60 140G-M0F4-D60 630(1)
(1) IEC only.
441…630 3150…6300 140G-M5F3-D63 140G-M5F4-D63 140G-M6F3-D63 140G-M6F4-D63 140G-M0F3-D63 140G-M0F4-D63 800 560…800 4000…8000 140G-M5F3-D80 140G-M5F4-D80 140G-M6F3-D80 140G-M6F4-D80 140G-M0F3-D80 140G-M0F4-D80 Table 51 - Electronic LSI (Long, Short, Instantaneous)
Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code M5 Interrupting Code M6 L S I Cat. No. Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=0.6…10 x In t2=sec. I3=(1)
(1) 600 A, 630 A I3max =12 In; 800 A I3 max = 10.5 In
3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
600 240…600 3, 6, 12, 18 360…6000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 900…7200 140G-M5H3-D60 140G-M5H4-D60 140G-M6H3-D60 140G-M6H4-D60 630(2)
(2) IEC only.
252…630 3, 6, 12, 18 378…6300 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 945…7560 140G-M5H3-D63 140G-M5H4-D63 140G-M6H3-D63 140G-M6H4-D63 800 320…800 3, 6, 9, 18 480…8000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 1200…8400 140G-M5H3-D80 140G-M5H4-D80 140G-M6H3-D80 140G-M6H4-D80 Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code M0
L S I Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=0.6…10 x In t2=sec. I3
(1)
(1) 600 A, 630 A I3 max =12 In; 800 A I3 max = 10.5 In
3 Poles 4 Poles
600 240…600 3, 6, 12, 18 360…6000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 900…7200 140G-M0H3-D60 140G-M0H4-D60 630(2)
(2) IEC only.
252…630 3, 6, 12, 18 378…6300 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 945…7560 140G-M0H3-D63 140G-M0H4-D63 800 320…800 3, 6, 9, 18 480…8000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 1200…8400 140G-M0H3-D80 140G-M0H4-D80 •
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 43 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Table 52 - Electronic LSIG (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault) Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code M5 Interrupting Code M6 L S I G Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…
1 x In
t1=sec. I2=0.6…
10 x In
t2=sec. I3=(1)
(1) 600 A, 630 A I3 max =12 In, 800 A I3 max = 10.5 In
I4=0.2…
1 x In
t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
600 240…600 3, 6, 12,
18 360…6000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25,
0.5 900…7200 120…600 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-M5I3-D60 140G-M5I4-D60 140G-M6I3-D60 140G-M6I4-D60 630(2)
(2) IEC only.
252…630 3, 6, 12,
18 378…6300 0.05, 0.1, 0.25,
0.5 945…7560 126…630 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-M5I3-D63 140G-M5I4-D63 140G-M6I3-D63 140G-M6I4-D63 800 320…800 3, 6, 9, 18 480…8000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25,
0.5 1200…8400 160…800 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-M5I3-D80 140G-M5I4-D80 140G-M6I3-D80 140G-M6I4-D80 Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code M0
L S I G Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=0.6…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…
10 x In
(1)
(1) 600 A, 630 A I3max =12 In, 800 A I3 max = 10.5 In
I4=0.2…1 x In t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles
600 240…600 3, 6, 12, 18 360…6000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 900…7200 120…600 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-M0I3-D60 140G-M0I4-D60 630(2)
(2) IEC only.
252…630 3, 6, 12, 18 378…6300 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 945…7560 126…630 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-M0I3-D63 140G-M0I4-D63 800 320…800 3, 6, 9, 18 480…8000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 1200…8400 160…800 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-M0I3-D80 140G-M0I4-D80 Table 53 - Electronic LSIG-MM (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault - Maintenance Mode) Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code M5 Interrupting Code M6 L S I G Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1
x In
t1=sec. I2=0.6
…10 x In
t2=sec. I3=1…1
0 x In
(1)
(1) 600 A, 630 A I3max =12 In, 800 A I3 max = 10.5 In
I4=0.2…1
x In
t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
600 240…600 3, 6, 12, 18 360…
6000
0.05, 0.1,
0.25, 0.5
900…
7200 120…600 0.1, 0.2, 0.4,
0.8 140G-M5K3-D60 140G-M5K4-D60 140G-M6K3-D60 140G-M6K4-D60 630(2)
(2) IEC only.
252…630 3, 6, 12, 18 378…
6300
0.05, 0.1,
0.25, 0.5
945…
7560 126…630 0.1, 0.2, 0.4,
0.8 140G-M5K3-D63 140G-M5K4-D63 140G-M6K3-D63 140G-M6K4-D63 800 320…800 3, 6, 9, 18 480…
8000
0.05, 0.1,
0.25, 0.5
1200…
8400 160…800 0.1, 0.2, 0.4,
0.8 140G-M5K3-D80 140G-M5K4-D80 140G-M6K3-D80 140G-M6K4-D80 Table 54 - Electronic LSIG-MM (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault - Maintenance Mode) Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code M0
L S I G Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=0.6…
10 x In
t2=sec. I3=1…
10 x In
(1)
(1) 600 A, 630 A I3max =12 In, 800 A I3 max = 10.5 In
I4=0.2…1 x In t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles
600 240…600 3, 6, 12, 18 360…6000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 900…7200 120…600 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-M0K3-D60 140G-M0K4-D60 630(2)
(2) IEC only.
252…630 3, 6, 12, 18 378…6300 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 945…7560 126…630 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-M0K3-D63 140G-M0K4-D63 800 320…800 3, 6, 9, 18 480…8000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 1200…8400 160…800 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-M0K3-D80 140G-M0K4-D80 44 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Maintenance Mode (MM)
Maintenance Mode (MM) offers a preset set of protection parameters. MM allows systems testing when the molded case circuit breaker is energized or ON. The following table lists the preset values for Maintenance Mode.
Figure 8 - Maintenance Mode Basic Wiring Diagram
Rated Current In
[A]
L S I G MM
I1=1 x In t1=MAX sec. I2=OFF t2=OFF sec. I3=4 x In I4=OFF t4=OFF sec. I5=2.5 x In 600 600 18 — — 2400 — — 1500
630(1)
(1) IEC only.
630 18 — — 2520 — — 1575
800 800 18 — — 3200 — — 2000
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8 MM Output
(Customer Connection)
Terminal
Block
Terminal
Block
(Customer Connection)
MM Input
24V
-+
3 4
140G-K-CC
Connector
140G-K-CIC
ConnectorX3
X4
140G-K
Electronic Trip Unit
LSIG-MM
Requires Cat. No. 140G-K-CC and 140G-K-CIC terminal connectors. ~
- ,..._
• • - I
- I • • - .. - I -- - .. - I -- • • - I - • • I
- I • • - ✓ • •
- l -L,
~
- ,..._ - • .. I -- - • - I - • - I - - • - I
- I • • - • • - I - - .. - I .. - ✓ -
~
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 45 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
1200 A, N-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Catalog Number Explanation
Complete Circuit Breaker Assemblies — 1200 A, N-Frame
Examples given in this section are not intended to be used for product selection. Use ProposalWorks to configure the molded case circuit breaker. These configurations are for selection of all factory-installed options for shunt trips, undervoltage release units, auxiliary contacts, and alarm contacts. Use the codes from Table h to add on to the molded case circuit breaker cat. no. selected on the following pages to form a complete cat. no. with facto ry-installed options. ProposalWorks is available from http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/e-tools/overview.page. Note: Terminal lugs are not supplied and can be ordered separately. See page 85 for available lugs.
140G – N 5 H 3 – E12 – – SD – AB
a b c d e f g h h
a b c d
Bulletin Number Frame/Rating Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity (b
ased on Ic at 480V) Protection Type
Code Description Code Description Code Description Code Description 140G Global Molded Case
Circuit Breaker
N 1200 A 5 50 kA H Electronic LSI-long, short, and instant 6 65 kA I Electronic LSIG -long, short, instant, and ground fault 0 100 kA K Electronic LSIG-MM -long, short, instant, ground fault, and MM T Trip unit S Molded case switch (isolator)
e f g h
Poles Current Range Rating(1)
(1) For more information about 80% and 100% ratings, please see page 13.
Factory-Installed Internal Options(2)
(2) Select up to two internal options: 1 for lower right side moun ting (shunt trip or undervoltage release), 1 for upper right (auxiliary or alarm contact).
Code Description Code Description Code Description Shunt Trip and Undervoltage Release Units Code Description
3 3 poles E12 1200 A rating plug, standard No Digit 80% Rated SJ Shunt Trip, 24V AC/DC 4 4 poles Z1 100% Rated SK Shunt Trip, 48V AC/DC
SD Shunt Trip, 110…120V AC/DC
SA Shunt Trip, 220…240V AC/DC
SB Shunt Trip, 380V AC
SC Shunt Trip, 415…440V AC
UJ Undervoltage Release, 24V AC/DC
UD Undervoltage Release, 110…120V AC/DC
UA Undervoltage Release, 220…240V AC/DC
UB Undervoltage Release, 380…400V AC
UC Undervoltage Release, 415…440V AC
No Digit No Selection
Auxiliary and Alarm Contacts
Code Description
AJ 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 24V
FJ 2 Aux. Contacts, 24V
AB 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 400V
FB 2 Aux. Contacts, 400V
I
I
46 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Assembled Molded Case Circuit Breakers — 1200 A, N-Frame Table 55 - Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity — Electronic Circuit Breakers Interrupting Rating (50/60 Hz), UL 489/
CSA 22.2, No. 5 [kA] Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2 Interrupting
Code(1)
(1) See Table 56 through Table 61 for Cat. No. selection 240V 480V 600V
220V 415V 440V 500V 690V
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[kA]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[kA]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[kA]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[kA]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[kA]
65 50 25 85 85 50 50 50 50 40 40 30 30 N5
100 65 50 100 100 70 70 65 65 50 50 42 32 N6
150 100 65 200 200 120 120 100 100 85 64 50 38 N0
Table 56 - Electronic LSI (Long, Short, Instantaneous) - 80% Rated(1) (1) For more information about 80% and 100% r atings, please see page 13.
Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type(2)
(2) Listed I1, I2, I3, and I4 values are based on a 1200 A rating plug value.
Interrupting Code N5 Interrupting Code N6
L S I Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4… 1 x In
t1=[tsec.] @
6 x I1
I2=0.6… 10 x In
t2=[tsec.] @
10 x In
I3=1.5… 12 x In 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
1200 480…1200 3,6,12,18 OFF , 720...12000 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 0.8 OFF , 1800...14400 140G-N5H3-E12 140G-N5H4-E12 140G-N6H3-E12 140G-N6H4-E12 Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type(1)
(1) Listed I1, I2, I3, and I4 values are based on a 1200 A rating plug value.
Interrupting Code N0
L S I Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=[tsec.] @ 6 x I1 I2=0.6… 10 x In t2=[tsec.] @ 10 x In I3=1.5…12 x In 3 Poles 4 Poles 1200 480…1200 3,6,12,18 OFF , 720...12000 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 0.8 OFF ,1800...14400 140G-N0H3-E12 140G-N0H4-E12 Table 57 - Electronic LSIG (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault) - 80% Rated(1) (1) For more information about 80% and 100% r atings, please see page 13.
Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type(2)
(2) Listed I1, I2, I3, and I4 values are based on a 1200 A rating plug value.
Interrupting Code N5 Interrupting Code N6
L S I G Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…
1 x In
t1=[tsec.]
@ 3 x I1
I2=0.6…
10 x In
t2=[tsec.] @
10 x In
I3=1.5…
15 x In
I4=0.2…
1 x In
t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
1200 480…1200
3, 12, 24,
36, 48, 72,
108, 144
OFF ,
720...12000 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 0.8 OFF,
1800...18000
OF F ,
240…1200
0.1, 0.2,
0.4, 0.8 140G-N5I3-E12 140G-N5I4-E12 140G-N6I3-E12 140G-N6I4-E12 Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type(1)
(1) Listed I1, I2, I3, and I4 values are based on a 1200 A rating plug value.
Interrupting Code N0
L S I G Cat. No.
I1=0.4…
1 x In
t1=[tsec.] @ 3 x I1
I2=0.6…
10 x In
t2=[tsec.] @
10 x In
I3=1.5…
15 x In
I4=0.2…
1 x In
t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles
1200 480… 1200 3, 12, 24, 36, 48, 72,
108, 144 OFF , 720...12000 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 0.8 OFF , 1800…18000 OFF , 240…1200 0.1, 0.2, 0.4,0.8 140G-N0I3-E12 140G-N0I4-E12 ~~ . -
I I I I I -
I
I
-
-
J l I I l I I I J I J l I
I I I
'
'
I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 47 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Table 58 - Electronic LSIG-MM (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault - Maintenance Mode) - 80% Rated(1) (2) (1) See page 48 for maintenance mode adjustment.
(2) For more information about 80% and 100% ratings, please see page 13.
Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type(3)
(3) Listed I1, I2, I3, and I4 values are based on a 1200 A rating plug value.
Interrupting Code N5 Interrupting Code N6
L S I G Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…
1 x In
t1=[tsec.] @
3 x I1
I2=0.6…
10 x In
t2=[tsec.] @
10 x In
I3=1.5…
15 x In
I4=0.2…
1 x In
t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
1200 480…1200
3, 12, 24, 36,
48, 72, 108,
144
OFF ,
720...12000
0.1, 0.25, 0.5,
0.8 OFF ,
1800...18000
OFF ,
240…1200
0.1, 0.2, 0.4,
0.8 140G-N5K3-E12 140G-N5K4-E12 140G-N6K3-E12 140G-N6K4-E12 Rated
Current In
[A](1)
(1) See page 48 for maintenance mode adjustment
Protection Type(2)
(2) Listed I1, I2, I3, and I4 values are based on a 1200 A Rating plug value.
Interrupting Code N0
L S I G Cat. No.
I1=0.4…
1 x In
t1=[tsec.] @ 3 x I1
I2=0.6…
10 x In
t2=[tsec.] @
10 x In
I3=1.5… 15 x In I4=0.2…1 x In t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles
1200 480…1200 3, 12, 24, 36, 48, 72,
108, 144 OFF , 720...12000 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 0.8 OFF , 1800…18000 OFF , 240…1200 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-N0K3-E12 140G-N0K4-E12 Table 59 - Electronic LSI (Long, Short, Instantaneous) - 100% Rated(1) (1) For more information about 80% and 100% r atings, please see page 13.
Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type(2)
(2) Listed I1, I2, I3, and I4 values are based on a 1200 A Rating plug value.
Interrupting Code N5 Interrupting Code N6
L S I Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In
t1=[tsec.] @
6 x I1
I2=0.6…
10 x In
t2=[tsec.] @
10 x In
I3=1.5…12 x In 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
1200 480…1200 3, 6, 12, 18 OFF ,
720…12000 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 0 .8 OFF , 1800… 14400 140G-N5H3-E12-Z1 140G-N5H4-E12-Z1 140G-N6H3-E12-Z1 140G-N6H4-E12-Z1 Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type(1)
(1) Listed I1, I2, I3, and I4 values are based on a 1200 A Rating plug value.
Interrupting Code N0
L S I Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=[tsec.] @ 6 x I1 I2=0.6… 10 x In t2=[tsec.] @ 10 x In I3=1.5…12 x In 3 Poles 4 Poles 1200 480…1200 3, 6, 12, 18 OFF , 720…12000 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 0.8 OFF , 1800… 14400 140G-N0H3-E12-Z1 140G-N0H4-E12-Z1 Table 60 - Electronic LSIG (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault) - 100% Rated(1) (1) For more information about 80% and 100% r atings, please see page 13.
Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type(2)
(2) Listed I1, I2, I3, and I4 values are based on a 1200 A Rating plug value.
Interrupting Code N5 Interrupting Code N6
L S I G Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…
1 x In
t1=[tsec.] @
3 x I1
I2=1…
10 x In
t2=[tsec.] @
10 x In
I3=1.5…
15 x In
I4=0.2…
1 x In
t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
1200 480…1200 3, 12, 24, 36,
48, 72,108, 144
OFF , 720…
120
00 0.1, 0.25, 0.5,
0.8 OFF , 1800…
18000
OF F ,
240…1200
0.1, 0.2,
0.4, 0.8 140G-N5I3-E12-Z1 140G-N5I4-E12-Z1 140G-N6I3-E12-Z1 140G-N6I4-E12-Z1 48 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Maintenance Mode (MM)
Maintenance Mode (MM) offers a preset set of protection parameters. MM allows systems testing when the molded case circuit breaker is energized or ON. The following table lists the preset values for Maintenance Mode.
Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type(1)
(1) Listed I1, I2, I3, and I4 values are based on a 1200 A Rating plug value.
Interrupting Code N0
L S I G Cat. No.
I1=0.4…
1 x In
t1=[tsec.] @
3 x I1
I2=1…
10 x In
t2=[tsec.] @
10 x In
I3=1.5…
15 x In
I4=0.2…
1 x In
t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles
1200 480…1200 3, 12, 24, 36, 48,
72, 108,144
OFF , 720…
12000 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 0.8 OFF , 1800…
18000 OFF , 240…1200 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-N0I3-E12-Z1 140G-N0I4-E12-Z1 Table 61 - Electronic LSIG-MM (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault - Maintenance Mode) - 100% Rated(1) (1) For more information about 80% and 100% r atings, please see page 13.
Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type(2)
(2) Listed I1, I2, I3, and I4 values are based on a 1200 A Rating plug value.
Interrupting Code N5 Interrupting Code N6
L S I G Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…
1 x In
t1=[tsec.] @
3 x I1
I2=1…
10 x In
t2=[tsec.]
@ 10 x In
I3=1.5…
15 x In
I4=0.2…
1 x In
t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
1200 480…
1200
3, 12, 24, 36,
48, 72,108,144
OFF ,
720…
12000
0.1, 0.25,
0.5, 0.8
OF F ,
1800…
18000
OFF ,
240…1200
0.1, 0.2,
0.4, 0.8 140G-N5K3-E12-Z1 140G-N5K4-E12-Z1 140G-N6K3-E12-Z1 140G-N6K4-E12-Z1 Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type(1)
(1) Listed I1, I2, I3, and I4 values are based on a 1200 A Rating plug value.
Interrupting Code N0
L S I G Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In
t1=[tsec.] @
3 x I1
I2=1…10 x In
t2=[tsec.] @
10 x In
I3=1.5…
15 x In
I4=0.2…1 x In t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles
1200 480…1200 3, 12, 24, 36, 48,
72, 108,144 OFF , 720… 12 000 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 0.8 OFF , 1800… 18000 OFF , 240…1200 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-N0K3-E12-Z1 140G-N0K4-E12-Z1 Rated Current In [A] L S I G MM
I1=1 x In t1=MAX sec. I2=OFF t2=OFF sec. I3=4 x In I4=OFF t4=OFF sec. I5=2.5 x In 1200 480…1200 3…144 — — — — — 3000
Trip Units, Electronic LSI (Long, Short, Instantaneous), LSIG (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault), LSIG-MM (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault - Maintenance Mode) Rated Current In [A] Protection Type Cat. No. (1)
(1) Supplied installed with each MCCB. The Cat. Nos. listed are replacement parts. 1200 H (LSI) 140G-NTH-E12
1200 I (LSIG) 140G-NTI-E12
1200 K (LSIG-MM) 140G-NTK-E12
Table 62 - Rating Plugs(1)
(1) 1200 A rating plug is supplied installed from the factory for all N frame MCCBs. For all other rating currents, the rating plug must be ordered separately for field installation.
Rated Current In [A] Cat. No. Rated Current In [A] Cat. No. Rated Current In [A] Cat. No. 400 140G-NRP-D40 800 140G-NRP-D80 1200 140G-NRP-E12
600 140G-NRP-D60 1000 140G-NRP-E10 1250 (IEC only) 140G-NRP-E125
I I I I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 49 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
1200 A, NS-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Catalog Number Explanation
Complete Circuit Breaker Assemblies — 1200 A, NS-Frame
Examples given in this section are not intended to be used for product selection. Use ProposalWorks to configure the molded case circuit breaker. These configurations are for selection of all factory-installed options for shunt trips, undervoltage release units, auxiliary contacts, and alarm contacts. Use the codes from Table h to add on to the molded case circuit breaker cat. no. selected on the following pages to form a complete cat. no. with facto ry-installed options. ProposalWorks is available from http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/e-tools/overview.page. Note: Terminal lugs are not supplied and can be ordered separately. See page 85 for available lugs.
140G – NS 5 H 3 – E12 – MJ – RK – SD
a b c d e f g g h
a b c d
Bulletin Number Frame/Rating Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity (based
on Ic at 480V) Protection Type
Code Description Code Description Code Description Code Description 140G Global Molded Case
Circuit Breaker
NS 1200 A 5 50 kA H Electronic LSI-long, short, instant 6 65 kA I Electronic LSIG -long, short, instant, and ground fault 0 100 kA K Electronic LSIG-D-MM -long, short, instant, ground fault, and MM T Trip unit S Molded case switch (isolator)
e f g
Poles Current Range Remote MCCB Operation(1)
(1) Select one internal option for inner right mounting (shunt trip or undervoltage release). For remote control MCCB operation, select the spring charging motor and operating voltage for shunt trip and shunt close coils from table h. Consult your local Rockwell automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor.
Code Description Code Description Spring Charge Motor Shunt Trip and Shunt Close Units 3 3 poles E12 1200 A rating plug, standard Code Description Code Description 4 4 poles MJ Spring Charge Motor, 24…30V AC/DC RJ Shunt Trip and Shunt Close, 24V AC/DC MK Spring Charge Motor, 48…60V AC/DC RK Shunt Trip and Shunt Close, 48V AC/DC MD Spring Charge Motor, 110…130V AC/DC RD Shunt Trip and Shunt Close, 110…120V AC/DC MA Spring Charge Motor, 220…250V AC/DC RA Shunt Trip and Shunt Close, 220…240V AC/DC MC Spring Charge Motor, 380…415V AC RB Shunt Trip and Shunt Close, 380…400V AC No Digit No Selection
h
Factory-Installed Internal Options
Shunt Trip Units Undervoltage Release Units Auxiliary and Alarm Contacts Code Description Code Description Code Description
SJ Shunt Trip, 24V AC/DC UJ Undervoltage Release, 24V AC/DC AJ 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 24V SK Shunt Trip, 48V AC/DC UD Undervoltage Release, 110…120V AC/DC FJ 2 Aux. Contacts, 24V SD Shunt Trip, 110…120V AC/DC UA Undervoltage Release, 220…240V AC/DC AB 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 400V SA Shunt Trip, 220…240V AC/DC UB Undervoltage Release, 380…400V AC FB 2 Aux. Contacts, 400V SB Shunt Trip, 380…400V AC UC Undervoltage Release, 415…440V AC No Digit No Selection No Digit No Selection No Digit No Selection
I
I
50 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Assembled Molded Case Circuit Breakers — 1200 A, NS-Frame Table 63 - Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity — Electronic Circuit Breakers Interrupting Rating (50/60 Hz), UL 489/CSA C22.2, No. 5[kA] Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2 Interrupting
Code(1)
(1) See table below for Cat. No. selection
240V 480V 600V
220V 415V 440V 500V 690V
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[kA]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[kA]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[kA]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[kA]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[kA]
65 50 25 85 85 50 50 50 50 40 40 30 30 NS5
100 65 50 100 100 70 70 65 65 50 50 42 32 NS6
150 100 65 200 200 120 120 100 100 85 64 50 38 NS0
Table 64 - Electronic LSI (Long, Short, Instantaneous)
Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type(1)
(1) Listed I1, I2, I3 values are based on a 1200 A Rating plug value.
Interrupting Code NS5 Interrupting Code NS6
L S I Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In
t1=[tsec.] @
6 x I1
I2=0.6…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1.5…12 x In 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles 1200(2)
(2) Rated current = 1200 A for UL Ratings.
480…1200 3, 6, 12, 18 OFF , 720…12000 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 0.8 OFF , 1800…14400 140G-NS5H3-E12 140G-NS5H4-E12 140G-NS6H3-E12 140G-NS6H4-E12 Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type(1)
(1) Listed I1, I2, I3 values are based on a 1200 A Rating plug value.
Interrupting Code NS0
L S I Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=[tsec.] @ 6 x I1 I2=0.6…10 x In t2=[tsec.] @ 10 x I1 I3=1.5…12 x In 3 Poles 4 Poles 1200(2)
(2) Rated current = 1200 A for UL Ratings; 1250 A for IEC. 480…1200 3, 6, 12, 18 OFF , 720…12000 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 0.8 OFF , 1800…14400 140G-NS0H3-E12 140G-NS0H4-E12 Table 65 - Electronic LSIG (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault) Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type(1)
(1) Listed I1, I2, I3, and I4 values are based on a 1200 A Rating plug value.
Interrupting Code NS5 Interrupting Code NS6
L S I G Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…
1 x In
t1=[tsec.]
@ 3 x I1
I2=0.6…
10 x In
t2=[tsec.] @
10 x I1
I3=1.5…
15 x In
I4=0.2…
1 x In
t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
1200(2)
(2) Rated current = 1200 A for UL Ratings.
480…1200 3, 6, 12, 18 OFF , 720…
12000
0.1, 0.25, 0.5,
0.8 OFF ,
1800…18000
OFF ,
240…1200
0.1, 0.2, 0.4,
0.8 140G-NS5I3-E12 140G-NS5I4-E12 140G-NS5I4-E12 140G-NS6I4-E12 Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type(1)
(1) Listed I1, I2, I3, and I4 values are based on a 1200 A Rating plug value.
Interrupting Code NS0
L S I G Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In
t1=[tsec.] @
3 x I1
I2=0.6…10 x In
t2=[tsec.] @ 10 x
I1
I3=1.5…15 x In I4=0.2…1 x In t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles
1200(2)
(2) Rated current = 1200 A for UL Ratings; 1250 A for IEC. 480…1200 3, 6, 12, 18 OFF , 720…12000 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 0.8 OFF , 1800…18000 OFF , 240…1200 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-NS0I3-E12 140G-NS0I4-E12 • ,., ,n; ..,
." I D
'
] . :
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 51 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Maintenance Mode (MM)
Maintenance Mode (MM) offers a preset set of protection parameters. MM allows systems testing when the molded case circuit breaker is energized or ON. The following table lists the preset values for Maintenance Mode.
Table 66 - Electronic LSIG-MM (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault - Maintenance Mode) Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type(1)
(1) Listed I1, I2, I3, and I4 values are based on a 1200 A Rating plug value.
Interrupting Code NS5 Interrupting Code NS6
L S I G Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…
1 x In
t1=[tsec.]
@ 3 x I1
I2=0.6…
10 x In
t2=[tsec.] @
10 x I1
I3=1.5…
15 x In
I4=0.2…
1 x In
t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles 3 Poles 4 Poles
1200(2)
(2) Rated current = 1200 A for UL Ratings.
480… 1200
3, 12, 24,
36, 48, 72,
108, 144
OFF ,
720…12000
0.1, 0.25, 0.5,
0.8 OFF ,
1800…18000
OFF , 240…
1200
0.1, 0.2, 0.4,
0.8 140G-NS5K3-E12 140G-NS5K4-E12 140G-NS6K3-E12 140G-NS6K4-E12 Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type(1)
(1) Listed I1, I2, I3, and I4 values are based on a 1200 A Rating plug value.
Interrupting Code NS0
L S I G Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In
t1=[tsec.] @
3 x I1
I2=0.6…10 x In
t2=[tsec.] @
10 x I1
I3=1.5…15 x In I4=0.2…1 x In t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles
1200(2)
(2) Rated current = 1200 A for UL Ratings; 1250 A for IEC. 480…1200
3, 12, 24, 36,
48, 72, 108,
144
OFF,
720…12000 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 0.8 OFF , 1800…18000 OFF , 240…1200 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-NS0K3-E12 140G-NS0K4-E12 Rated Current
In [A]
L S I G MM
I1=1 x In t1=MAX sec. I2=OFF t2=OFF sec. I3=4 x In I4=OFF t4=OFF sec. I5=2.5 x In 1200 480…1200 3…144 — — — — — 3000
Table 67 - Trip Units, Electronic LSI (Long, Short, Instantaneous), LSIG (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault), LSIG- MM (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault -Maintenance Mode)(1) (1) Supplied installed with each MCCB. The Cat. Nos. listed are replacement parts.
Rated Current In [A] Protection Type Cat. No.
1200 H (LSI) 140G-NTH-E12
1200 I (LSIG) 140G-NTI-E12
1200 K (LSIG-MM) 140G-NTK-E12
Table 68 - Rating Plugs(1)
(1) 1200 A rating plug is supplied installed from the fa ctory for all NS-Frame MCCBs. For all other rating currents, the rating plug must be ordered separately for field installation.
Rated Current In [A] Cat. No. Rated Current In [A]
400 140G-NRP-D40 1000 140G-NRP-E10
600 140G-NRP-D60 1200 140G-NRP-E12
800 140G-NRP-D80 1250(2)
(2) IEC only.
140G-NRP-E125
I I I I I I I
I I
52 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
2500…3000 A, R-Frame Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Catalog Number Explanation
Complete Circuit Breaker Assemblies — 2000…3000 A, R-Frame Examples given in this section are not intended to be used for product selection. Use ProposalWorks to configure the molded case circuit breaker. These configurations are for selection of all factory-installed options for spring charging motor with shunt trip and close [for remote control], or separate installation of shunt trip and undervoltage release units. Use the codes from Tables h and i to add on to the molded case circuit breaker cat. no. selected on the following pages to form a complete cat. no. with factory-installed options. ProposalWorks is available from http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/e-tools/ overview.page.
140G – R 12 I 3 – E25 – Z1 – MD – RD – SB
a b c d e f g h h i
a b c d
Bulletin Number Frame/Rating Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity (b
ased on Ic at 480V) Protection Type
Code Description Code Description Code Description Code Description 140G Global Molded Case
Circuit Breaker
R 2500…3000 A 12 125 kA I Electronic LSIG -Long, short, instant, and ground fault S Molded case switch (isolator)
e f g
Poles Current Range Rating(1)
(1) For more information about 80% and 100% ratings, please see page 13.
Code Description Code Description Code Description
3 3 poles E20 2000 A rating plug, installed No Digit 80% Rated 4 4 poles E25 2500 A rating plug, installed Z1 100% Rated E30 3000 A rating plug, installed
h h, cont'd. i
Remote MCCB Operation Remote MCCB Operation Factory-Installed Internal Options(1) (1) Select one internal option for inner right mounting (shunt trip or undervoltage release). For remote control MCCB operation, select the spring charging motor and operating voltage for shunt trip and shunt close coils from table i . Consult your local Rockwell automation sales office or Allen- Bradley distributor.
Spring Charge Motor Shunt Trip and Shunt Close Units Shunt Trip and Undervoltage Release Units Code Description Code Description Code Description
MJ Spring Charge Motor, 24…30V AC/DC RJ Shunt Trip and Shunt Close, 24V AC/DC SJ Shunt Trip, 24V AC/DC MK Spring Charge Motor, 48…60V AC/DC RK Shunt Trip and Shunt Close, 48V AC/DC SK Shunt Trip, 48V AC/DC MD Spring Charge Motor, 110…130V AC/DC RD Shunt Trip and Shunt Close, 110…120V AC/DC SD Shunt Trip, 110… 120V AC/DC MA Spring Charge Motor, 220…250V AC/DC RA Shunt Trip and Shunt Close, 220…240V AC/DC SA Shunt Trip, 220… 240V AC/DC MC Spring Charge Motor, 380…415V AC RB Shunt Trip and Shunt Close, 380…400V AC SB Shunt Trip, 380… 400V AC RC Shunt Trip and Shunt Close, 415…440V AC SC Shunt Trip, 415… 440V AC No Digit No Selection UJ Undervoltage Release, 24V AC/DC UD Undervoltage Release, 110…120V AC/DC
UA Undervoltage Release, 220…240V AC/DC
UB Undervoltage Release, 380…400V AC
UC Undervoltage Release, 415…440V AC
No Digit No Selection
ff:-~~ 1 I I
L
1~·-- I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 53 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Assembled Molded Case Circuit Breakers — 2000…3000 A, R-Frame \
Table 69 - Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity — Electronic Circuit Breakers Interrupting Rating (50/60 Hz), UL 489/
CSA C22.2, No. 5 [kA] Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2 Interrupting
Code(1)
(1) See tables on the followin g pages for Cat. No. selection. 240V 480V 600V 220V 415V 440V 500V 690V
Icu [kA] Ics [kA] Icu [kA] Ics [kA] Icu [kA] Ics [kA] Icu [kA] Ics [kA] Icu [kA] Ics [kA] 125 125 100 130 97.5 80 60 80 60 40 40 40 40 R12
Table 70 - Electronic LSIG (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault) - 80% Rated(1) (1) For more information about 80% and 100% r atings, please see page 13.
Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type(2)
(2) Listed I1, I2, I3, and I4 values are based on a 1200 A Rating plug value.
Interrupting Code R12
L S I G Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=0.6…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1.5…12 x In I4=0.2…1 x In t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles 2000 800…2000 3, 6, 12, 18 OFF , 1200…20000 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 0.8 OFF , 3000…24000 OFF , 400…2000 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-R12I3-E20 140G-R12I4-E20 2500(2) 1000…2500 3, 6, 12, 18 OFF , 1500…25000 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 0.8 OFF , 3750…30000 OFF , 500…2500 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-R12I3-E25 140G-R12I4-E25 3000 1200…3000 3, 6, 12, 18 OFF , 1800…30000 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 0.8 OFF , 4500…30000 OFF , 600…3000 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-R12I3-E30 140G-R12I4-E30 Table 71 - Electronic LSIG (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault) - 100% Rated(1) (1) For more information about 80% and 100% r atings, please see page 13.
Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code R12
L S I G Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=0.6…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1.5…12 x In I4=0.2…1 x In t4=sec. 3 Poles 4 Poles 2000(2)
(2) Listed I1, I2, I3, and I4 values are based on a 2000, 2500, and 3000 A rating plug value, respectively. 800…2000 3, 6, 12, 18 OFF … 20000 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 0.8 OFF , 3000…24000 OFF , 400…2000 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-R12I3-E20-Z1 140G-R12I4-E20-Z1 2500(2) 1000…2500 3, 6, 12, 18 OFF ,
1500…25000 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 0.8 OFF , 3750…30000 OFF , 500…2500 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-R12I3-E25-Z1 140G-R12I4-E25-Z1 3000(2) 1200…3000 3, 6, 12, 18 OFF ,
1800…30000 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 0.8 OFF , 4500…30000 OFF , 600…3000 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-R12I3-E30-Z1 140G-R12I4-E30-Z1 Table 72 - Rating Plugs(1)
(1) A 2000 A, 2500 A, or 3000 A rating plug is supplied installed from the factory for all R-Frame MCCBs. For all other rating c urrents, the rating plug must be ordered separately for field installation.
Rated Current In [A] Cat. No. Rated Current In [A] Cat. No. 1000 140G-NRP-E10 2000 140G-RRP-E20
1200 140G-NRP-E12 2500 140G-RRP-E25
1600 140G-RRP-E16 3000 140G-RRP-E30
54 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Notes:
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 55 Current-limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers
Product Selection
Catalog Number Explanation
Complete Circuit Breaker Assemblies— 125 A H-Frame, 250 A J-Frame, and 400 A K- Frame Devices
Examples given in this section are not intended to be used for product selection. Use ProposalWorks to configure the molded case circuit breaker. These configurations are for selection of all factory-installed options for shunt trips, undervoltage release units, auxiliary contacts, trip units, and alarm contacts. Use the codes from Table g to add on to the molded case circuit breaker cat. no. selected on the following pages to form a complete cat. no. with factory-installed options. ProposalWorks is available from http:// www.rockwellautomation.com/global/e-tools/overview.page. Note: Terminal lugs are not supplied and can be ordered separately. See page 85 for available lugs.
140G – HC 6 C 3 – C60 – SD – AA
a b c d e f g g
a b c d
Bulletin Number Frame/Rating Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity (based on Ic at 480V) Protection Type
Code Description Code Description Code Description Code Description 140G Global Molded Case Circuit Breaker HC 125 A 6 65 kA C Fixed thermal/fixed magnetic JC 250 A 0 100 kA F Adjust thermal/ adjust magnetic
KC 400 A T Trip unit H Electronic LSI- long, short, instant I Electronic LSIG -Long, short instant, and ground fault K Electronic LSIG -MM Long, short instant, ground
fault, and maintenance mode (K-Frame only)
X Breaker frame
I
I
56 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Current-limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection e f
No. of Poles Current Range
Code Description H- and J-Frame MCCBs
3 3 poles Code Description
C e.g., C30 = 30 A
D e.g., D16 = 160 A
Blank Frame only
K-Frame MCCBs
Code Description
D30 e.g., 300 A
D40 e.g., 400 A
Blank Frame only
g
H- and J-Frame Factory-Installed Internal Options(1)
(1) Select up to two internal options: 1 for left side mounting (s hunt trip or undervoltage release), 1 for right (auxiliary or alarm contact).
Shunt Trip and Undervoltage Release Units Auxiliary and Alarm Contacts, Trip Units Code Description Code Description
SJ Shunt Trip, 24…30V AC/DC KA 1 Aux. Contact, 250V
SK Shunt Trip, 48…60V AC/DC AA 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 250V SD Shunt Trip, 110…127V AC; 110…125V DC BA 2 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 250V SA Shunt Trip, 220…240V AC; 220…250V DC DA 1 Trip Unit Alarm Contact, 250V SB Shunt Trip, 380…440V AC FB 2 Aux. Contacts, 400V
SC Shunt Trip, 480…525V AC AB 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 400V UJ Undervoltage Release, 24…30V AC/DC KJ 1 Aux. Contact, 24V UR Undervoltage Release, 48V AC/DC AJ 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 24V UD Undervoltage Release, 110…127V AC; 110… 125V DC DJ 1 Trip Unit Alarm Contact, 24V UA Undervoltage Release, 220…240V AC; 220… 250V DC
UB Undervoltage Release, 380…440V AC
UC Undervoltage Release, 480…525V AC
No Digit No Selection
g
K-Frame Factory-Installed Internal Options(1)
(1) Select up to two internal options: 1 for left side mounting (s hunt trip or undervoltage release), 1 for right (auxiliary or alarm contact).
Shunt Trip and Undervoltage Release Units Auxiliary and Alarm Contacts Code Description Code Description
SJ Shunt Trip, 24…30V AC/DC AA 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 250V SK Shunt Trip, 48…60V AC/DC CA 3 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 250V SD Shunt Trip, 110…127V AC; 110…125V DC AB 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 400V SA Shunt Trip, 220…240V AC; 220…250V DC FB 2 Aux. Contacts, 400V SB Shunt Trip, 380…440V AC CJ 3 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 24V SC Shunt Trip, 480…525V AC
UJ Undervoltage Release, 24…30V AC/DC
UR Undervoltage Release, 48V AC/DC
UD Undervoltage Release, 110…127V AC; 110… 125V DC
UA Undervoltage Release, 220…240V AC; 220… 250V DC
UB Undervoltage Release, 380…440V AC
UC Undervoltage Release, 480…525V AC
No Digit No Selection
I
I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 57 Current-limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection H-Frame Current-limiting MCCBs
Breaker Frames and Trip Units
Table 73 - Current-limiting Breaker Frames, 125 A Rated Current Interrupting Rating (50/60
Hz), UL 489/
CSA 22.2, No. 5
[kA](1)
Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2 Breaking Capacity (DC), IEC 60947-2 (1)
(1) DC rating is applicable for thermal-magnetic trip unit only.
Cat. No.
240V 480V 600V
220V(2)
(2) These ratings have not been tested for the CCC listing. 415V 440V(2) 690V 250V DC
(2- pole in series)
500V DC
(3
Poles in series)
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
150 65 25 100 100 70 100 65 100 15 100 70 100 70 100 140G-HC6X3 200 100 35 150 100 120 100 100 100 18 75 85 100 85 100 140G-HC0X3 Table 74 - Trip Units, Thermal-Magnetic
Rated Current In [A] Thermal Trip [A]
Ir
Magnetic Trip [A]
Im
Protection Type Cat. No.
50 50 500 C (Fixed) 140G-HTC3-C50
60 60 600 C (Fixed) 140G-HTC3-C60
63 63 630 C (Fixed) 140G-HTC3-C63
70 70 700 C (Fixed) 140G-HTC3-C70
80 56...80 400…800 F (Adjustable) 140G-HTF3-C80
90 63…90 450…900 F (Adjustable) 140G-HTF3-C90
100 70…100 500…1000 F (Adjustable) 140G-HTF3-D10
110 77…110 550…1100 F (Adjustable) 140G-HTF3-D11
125 87…125 625…1250 F (Adjustable) 140G-HTF3-D12
Table 75 - Trip Units, Electronic LSI (Long, Short, Instantaneous) Rated Current
In [A]
Protection Type
Cat. No.L S I
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In 60 24…60 3, 12, 36, 60 60…600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 60…600 140G-HTH3-C60 100 40…100 3, 12, 36, 60 100…1000 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 100…1000 140G-HTH3-D10 125 50…125 3, 12, 36, 60 125…1250 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 125…1250 140G-HTH3-D12 Frame Trip Unit MCCB
+ =
I T I
- -
I
I
I
I I
I
I I
I I
I
-
I I I I I
I I I I I -
-
I -
-
I
I -
I
I -
I
I I I I -
T
58 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Current-limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection Assembled Current-limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers — 125 A, H-Frame Table 76 - Trip Units, Electronic LSIG (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault) Rated Current In
[A]
Protection Type
Cat. No.L S I G
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In I4=0.2…1 x In t4=sec. 60 24…60 3, 12, 36, 60 60…600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 60…600 12…60 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-HTI3-C60 100 40…100 3, 12, 36, 60 100…1000 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 100…1000 20…100 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-HTI3-D10 125 50…125 3, 12, 36, 60 125…1250 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 125…1250 25…125 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-HTI3-D12 Table 77 - Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity — Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Interrupting Rating
(50/60 Hz), UL 489/
CSA 22.2, No. 5 [kA]
Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2 Breaking Capacity (DC), IEC 60947-2
Interrupting
Code(1)
(1) See Table 78 for Cat. No. selection.
240V 480V 600V
220V(2)
(2) These ratings have not been tested for the CCC listing. 415V 440V(2) 690V 250V DC (2 Poles in
series)
500V DC (3 P oles in
series)
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
150 65 25 100 100 70 100 65 100 15 100 70 100 70 100 HC6 200 100 35 150 100 120 100 100 100 18 75 85 100 85 100 HC0 Table 78 - Thermal-Magnetic, Fixed and Adjustable
Rated Current In [A] Thermal Trip [A]
Ir
Magnetic Trip [A]
Im
Interrupting Code HC6 Interrupting Code HC0
Cat. No. Cat. No.
15 15 400 140G-HC6C3-C15 140G-HC0C3-C15
16 16 400 140G-HC6C3-C16 140G-HC0C3-C16
20 20 400 140G-HC6C3-C20 140G-HC0C3-C20
25 25 400 140G-HC6C3-C25 140G-HC0C3-C25
30 30 400 140G-HC6C3-C30 140G-HC0C3-C30
32 32 400 140G-HC6C3-C32 140G-HC0C3-C32
35 35 400 140G-HC6C3-C35 140G-HC0C3-C35
40 40 400 140G-HC6C3-C40 140G-HC0C3-C40
50 50 500 140G-HC6C3-C50 140G-HC0C3-C50
60 60 600 140G-HC6C3-C60 140G-HC0C3-C60
63 63 630 140G-HC6C3-C63 140G-HC0C3-C63
70 70 700 140G-HC6C3-C70 140G-HC0C3-C70
80 56...80 400…800 140G-HC6F3-C80 140G-HC0F3-C80
90 63…90 450…900 140G-HC6F3-C90 140G-HC0F3-C90
100 70…100 500…1000 140G-HC6F3-D10 140G-HC0F3-D10
110 77…110 550…1100 140G-HC6F3-D11 140G-HC0F3-D11
125 87…125 625…1250 140G-HC6F3-D12 140G-HC0F3-D12
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 59 Current-limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection Table 79 - Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity — Electronic Circuit Breakers Interrupting Rating (50/60 Hz), UL 489/
CSA 22.2, No. 5 [kA] Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2 Interrupting
Code(1)
(1) See Table 80 and Table 81 for Cat. No. selection.
240V 480V 600V 220V(2)
(2) These ratings have not been tested for the CCC listing. 415V 440V(2) 690V
Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] 150 65 25 100 100 70 100 65 100 15 100 HC6
200 100 35 150 100 120 100 100 100 18 75 HC0
Table 80 - Electronic LSI (Long, Short, Instantaneous)
Rated Current
In [A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code HC6 Interrupting Code HC0 L S I Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In 25 10…25 3, 12, 36, 60 25…250 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 25…250 140G-HC6H3-C25 140G-HC0H3-C25 60 24…60 3, 12, 36, 60 60…600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 60…600 140G-HC6H3-C60 140G-HC0H3-C60 100 40…100 3, 12, 36, 60 100…1000 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 100…1000 140G-HC6H3-D10 140G-HC0H3-D10 125 50…125 3, 12, 36, 60 125…1250 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 125…1250 140G-HC6H3-D12 140G-HC0H3-D12 Table 81 - Electronic LSIG (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault) Rated
Current
In [A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code HC6 Interrupting Code HC0
L S I G
Cat. No. Cat. No.I1=0.4…
1 x In
t1=sec. I2=1…
10 x In
t2=sec. I3=1…
10 x In
I4=0.2…
1 x In
t4=sec.
25 10…25 3, 12, 36, 60 25…250 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 25…250 5…25 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-HC6I3-C25 140G-HC0I3-C25 60 24…60 3, 12, 36, 60 60…600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 60…600 12…60 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-HC6I3-C60 140G-HC0I3-C60 100 40…100 3, 12, 36, 60 100…1000 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 100…1000 20…100 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-HC6I3-D10 140G-HC0I3-D10 125 50…125 3, 12, 36, 60 125…1250 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 125…1250 25…125 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-HC6I3-D12 140G-HC0I3-D12 60 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Current-limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection J-Frame Current-limiting MCCBs
Breaker Frames and Trip Units
Table 82 - Current-limiting Breaker Frames, 250 A Rated Current Interrupting Rating (50/60 Hz),
UL 489/CSA 22.2, No. 5 [kA] Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2 Breaking Capacity (DC), IEC 60947-2 (1) (1) DC rating is applicable for thermal-magnetic trip unit only.
Cat. No.
240V 480V 600V
220V(2)
(2) These ratings have not been tested for the CCC listing. 415V 440V(2) 690V 250V DC (2 Poles in
series)
500V DC (3 Poles in
series)
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
150 65 25 100 100 70 100 65 100 15 100 70 100 70 100 140G-JC6X3 200 100 35 150 100 120 100 100 100 20 100 85 100 85 100 140G-JC0X3 Table 83 - Trip Units, Thermal-Magnetic
Rated Current In
[A]
Thermal Trip [A]
Ir
Magnetic Trip [A]
Im
Protection Type Cat. No.
25 25 400 C (Fixed) 140G-JTC3-C25
30 30 400 C (Fixed) 140G-JTC3-C30
32 32 400 C (Fixed) 140G-JTC3-C32
35 35 400 C (Fixed) 140G-JTC3-C35
40 40 400 C (Fixed) 140G-JTC3-C40
50 50 500 C (Fixed) 140G-JTC3-C50
60 60 600 C (Fixed) 140G-JTC3-C60
63 63 630 C (Fixed) 140G-JTC3-C63
70 70 700 C (Fixed) 140G-JTC3-C70
80 56…80 400…800 F (Adjustable) 140G-JTF3-C80
90 63…90 450…900 F (Adjustable) 140G-JTF3-C90
100 70…100 500…1000 F (Adjustable) 140G-JTF3-D10
110 77…110 550…1100 F (Adjustable) 140G-JTF3-D11
125 87.5…125 625…1250 F (Adjustable) 140G-JTF3-D12
150 105…150 750…1500 F (Adjustable) 140G-JTF3-D15
160 112…160 800…1600 F (Adjustable) 140G-JTF3-D16
175 122.5…175 875…1750 F (Adjustable) 140G-JTF3-D17
200 140…200 1000…2000 F (Adjustable) 140G-JTF3-D20
225 157.5…225 1125…2250 F (Adjustable) 140G-JTF3-D22
250 175…250 1250…2500 F (Adjustable) 140G-JTF3-D25
Frame Trip Unit MCCB
+ =
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 61 Current-limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection Assembled Current-limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers — 250 A J-Frame Table 84 - Trip Units, Electronic LSI (Long, Short, Instantaneous) Rated Current In
[A]
Protection Type
Cat. No.L S I
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In 40 16…40 3, 12, 36, 60 40…400 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 40…400 140G-JTH3-C40 60 24…60 3, 12, 36, 60 60…600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 60…600 140G-JTH3-C60 100 40…100 3, 12, 36, 60 100…1000 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 100…1000 140G-JTH3-D10 150 60…150 3, 12, 36, 60 150…1500 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 150…1500 140G-JTH3-D15 250 100…250 3, 12, 36, 60 250…2500 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 250…2500 140G-JTH3-D25 Table 85 - Trip Units, Electronic LSIG (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault) Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type
Cat. No.L S I G
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In I4=0.2…1 x In t4=sec. 40 16…40 3, 12, 36, 60 40…400 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 40…400 8…40 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-JTI3-C40 60 24…60 3, 12, 36, 60 60…600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 60…600 12…60 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-JTI3-C60 100 40…100 3, 12, 36, 60 100…1000 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 100…1000 20…100 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-JTI3-D10 150 60…150 3, 12, 36, 60 150…1500 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 150…1500 30…150 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-JTI3-D15 250 100…250 3, 12, 36, 60 250…2500 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 250…2500 50…250 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-JTI3-D25 Table 86 - Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity — Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Interrupting Rating (50/60
Hz), UL 489/CSA 22.2, No. 5
[kA]
Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2 Breaking Capacity (DC), IEC 60947-2 (1) (1) DC rating is applicable for thermal-magnetic trip unit only.
Interrupting
Code(2)
(2) See Table 87 for Cat. No. selection.
240V 480V 600V
220V(3)
(3) These ratings have not been tested for the CCC listing. 415V 440V(3) 690V 250V DC (2- pole in
series)
500V DC (3 Poles in
series)
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
150 65 25 100 100 70 100 65 100 15 100 70 100 70 100 JC6 200 100 35 150 100 120 100 100 100 20 100 85 100 85 100 JC0 62 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Current-limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection Table 87 - Thermal-Magnetic, Fixed and Adjustable
Rated Current In [A] Thermal Trip [A]
Ir
Magnetic Trip [A]
Im
Interrupting Code JC6 Interrupting Code JC0
Cat. No. Cat. No.
25 25 400 140G-JC6C3-C25 140G-JC0C3-C25
30 30 400 140G-JC6C3-C30 140G-JC0C3-C30
32 32 400 140G-JC6C3-C32 140G-JC0C3-C32
35 35 400 140G-JC6C3-C35 140G-JC0C3-C35
40 40 400 140G-JC6C3-C40 140G-JC0C3-C40
50 50 500 140G-JC6C3-C50 140G-JC0C3-C50
60 60 600 140G-JC6C3-C60 140G-JC0C3-C60
63 63 630 140G-JC6C3-C63 140G-JC0C3-C63
70 70 700 140G-JC6C3-C70 140G-JC0C3-C70
80 56…80 400…800 140G-JC6F3-C80 140G-JC0F3-C80
90 63…90 450…900 140G-JC6F3-C90 140G-JC0F3-C90
100 70…100 500…1000 140G-JC6F3-D10 140G-JC0F3-D10
110 77…110 550…1100 140G-JC6F3-D11 140G-JC0F3-D11
125 87.5…125 625…1250 140G-JC6F3-D12 140G-JC0F3-D12
150 105…150 750…1500 140G-JC6F3-D15 140G-JC0F3-D15
160 112…160 800…1600 140G-JC6F3-D16 140G-JC0F3-D16
175 122.5…175 875…1750 140G-JC6F3-D17 140G-JC0F3-D17
200 140…200 1000…2000 140G-JC6F3-D20 140G-JC0F3-D20
225 157.5…225 1125…2250 140G-JC6F3-D22 140G-JC0F3-D22
250 175…250 1250…2500 140G-JC6F3-D25 140G-JC0F3-D25
Table 88 - Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity — Electronic Circuit Breakers Interrupting Rating (50/60 Hz), UL 489/
CSA C22.2, No. 5
[kA] Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2
Interrupting
Code(1)
(1) See Table 89 and Table 90 for Cat. No. selection.
240V 480V 600V 220V(2)
(2) These ratings have not been tested for the CCC listing. 415V 440V(2) 690V
Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] 150 65 25 100 100 70 100 65 100 15 100 JC6
200 100 35 150 100 120 100 100 100 20 100 JC0
Table 89 - Electronic LSI (Long, Short, Instantaneous)
Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code JC6 Interrupting Code JC0 L S I Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In 40 16…40 3, 12, 36, 60 40…400 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 40…400 140G-JC6H3-C40 140G-JC0H3-C40 60 24…60 3, 12, 36, 60 60…600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 60…600 140G-JC6H3-C60 140G-JC0H3-C60 100 40…100 3, 12, 36, 60 100…1000 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 100…1000 140G-JC6H3-D10 140G-JC0H3-D10 150 60…150 3, 12, 36, 60 150…1500 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 150…1500 140G-JC6H3-D15 140G-JC0H3-D15 250 100…250 3, 12, 36, 60 250…2500 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 250…2500 140G-JC6H3-D25 140G-JC0H3-D25 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 63 Current-limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection Table 90 - Electronic LSIG (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault) Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type Interrupting
Code JC6
Interrupting
Code JC0
L S I G
Cat. No. Cat. No.I1=0.4…
1 x In
t1=sec. I2=1…
10 x In
t2=sec. I3=1…
10 x In
I4=0.2…
1 x In
t4=sec.
40 16…40 3, 12, 36, 60 40…400 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 40…400 8…40 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-JC6I3-C40 140G-JC0I3-C40 60 24…60 3, 12, 36, 60 60…600 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 60…600 12…60 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-JC6I3-C60 140G-JC0I3-C60 100 40…100 3, 12, 36, 60 100…1000 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 100…1000 20…100 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-JC6I3-D10 140G-JC0I3-D10 150 60…150 3, 12, 36, 60 150…1500 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 150…1500 30…150 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-JC6I3-D15 140G-JC0I3-D15 250 100…250 3, 12, 36, 60 250…2500 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, 0.4 250…2500 50…250 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-JC6I3-D25 140G-JC0I3-D25 64 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Current-limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection K-Frame Current-limiting MCCBs
Breaker Frames and Trip Units
Table 91 - Current-limiting Breaker Frames, 400 A Rated Current Interrupting Rating (50/60 Hz), UL 489/
CSA 22.2, No. 5 [kA] Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2 Breaking Capacity (DC), IEC 60947-2 (1)
(1) DC rating is applicable for thermal-magnetic trip unit only.
Cat. No.
240V 480V 600V
2 Poles in
series
3 Poles in
series 220V(2)
(2) These ratings have not been tested for the CCC listing. 415V 440V(2) 690V 500V DC
(3 Poles in series)
500V DC(1) 600V DC(1) Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
150 65 35 50 35 100 100 70 100 65 100 40 100 50 100 140G-KC6X3 200 100 65 65 50 200 100 120 100 100 100 70 100 70 100 140G-KC0X3 Table 92 - Trip Units, Thermal-Magnetic
Rated Current In [A] Thermal Trip [A] Ir Magnetic Trip [A] Im Protection Type Cat. No. 300 210…300 1500…3000 F (Adjustable Thermal/ Adjustable Magnetic) 140G-KTF3-D30 400 280…400 2000…4000 F (Adjustable Thermal/ Adjustable Magnetic) 140G-KTF3-D40 Table 93 - Trip Units, Electronic LSI (Long, Short, Instantaneous) Rated Current
In [A]
Protection Type
Cat. No.L S I
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In 300 120…300 3, 6, 12, 18 180…3000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 450…3600 140G-KTH3-D30 400 160…400 3, 6, 12, 18 240…4000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 600…4800 140G-KTH3-D40 Table 94 - Trip Units, Electronic LSIG (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault) Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type
Cat. No.L S I G
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In I4=0.2…1 x In t4=sec. 300 120…300 3, 6, 12, 18 180…3000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 450…3600 60…300 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-KTI3-D30 400 160…400 3, 6, 12, 18 240…4000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 600…4800 80…400 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-KTI3-D40 Table 95 - Trip Units, Electronic LSIG-MM (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault - Maintenance Mode)(1) (1) See page 66 for a list of the preset values for Maintenance Mode.
Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type Cat. No.
L S I G 3 Poles
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=0.6…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1.5…12 x In I4=0.2…1 x In t4=sec. 300 120…300 3, 6, 12, 18 180…3000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 450…3600 60…300 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-KTK3-D30 400 160…400 3, 6, 12, 18 240…4000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 600…4800 80…400 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-KTK3-D40 Frame Trip Unit MCCB
+ =
•••••••
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 65 Current-limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection Assembled Current-limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers — 400 A K-Frame Table 96 - Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity — Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers Interrupting Rating (50/60 Hz), UL
489/CSA 22.2, No. 5 [kA] Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2 Breaking Capacity (DC), IEC 60947-2 (1)
(1) DC rating is applicable for thermal-magnetic trip unit only.
Interrupting
Code(2)
(2) See Table 97 for Cat. No. selection.
240V 480V 600V
2 Poles in
series
3 Poles in
series 220V(3)
(3) These ratings have not been tested for the CCC listing. 415V 440V(3) 690V 500V DC (3 Poles in
series)
500V DC 600V DC
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
Icu
[kA]
Ics
[%Icu]
150 65 35 50 35 100 100 70 100 65 100 40 100 50 100 KC6 200 100 65 65 50 200 100 120 100 100 100 70 100 70 100 KC0 Table 97 - Thermal-Magnetic, Adjustable and Adjustable
Rated Current
In [A]
Thermal Trip [A]
Ir
Magnetic Trip [A] Im Protection Type Interrupting Code KC6 Interrupting Code KC0 Cat. No. Cat. No.
300 210…300 1500…3000 F (Adjustable Thermal/ Adjustable Magnetic) 140G-KC6F3-D30 140G-KC0F3-D30 400 280…400 2000…4000 F (Adjustable Thermal/ Adjustable Magnetic) 140G-KC6F3-D40 140G-KC0F3-D40 Table 98 - Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity — Electronic Circuit Breakers Interrupting Rating (50/60 Hz), UL 489/
CSA 22.2, No. 5 [kA] Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2 Interrupting Code(1)
(1) See Table 99 through Table 101 on the following pages for Cat. No. selection. 240V 480V 600V 220V(2)
(2) These ratings have not been tested for the CCC listing. 415V 440V(3) 690V
Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] 150 65 35 100 100 70 100 65 100 40 100 KC6
200 100 65 200 100 120 100 100 100 70 100 KC0
Table 99 - Electronic LSI (Long, Short, Instantaneous)
Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code KC6 Interrupting Code KC0 L S I Cat. No. Cat. No.
I1=0.4…1 x In t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In 300 120…300 3, 6, 12, 18 180…3000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 450…3600 140G-KC6H3-D30 140G-KC0H3-D30 400 160…400 3, 6, 12, 18 240…4000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 600…4800 140G-KC6H3-D40 140G-KC0H3-D40
66 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Current-limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers Product Selection Maintenance Mode (MM)
Maintenance Mode (MM) offers a preset set of protection parameters. MM allows systems testing when the molded case circuit breaker is energized or ON. The following table lists the preset values for Maintenance Mode.
Figure 9 - Maintenance Mode Basic Wiring Diagram
Table 100 - Electronic LSIG (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault) Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code KC6 Interrupting Code KC0
L S I G
Cat. No. Cat. No.I1=0.4…
1 x In
t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In
I4=0.2…
1x In
t4=sec.
300 120…300 3, 6, 12, 18 180…3000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 450…3600 60…300 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-K6I3-D30 140G-K0I3-D30 400 160…400 3, 6, 12, 18 240…4000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 600…4800 80…400 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-K6I3-D40 140G-K0I3-D40 Table 101 - Electronic LSIG-MM (Long, Short, Instantaneous, Ground Fault - Maintenance Mode) Rated
Current In
[A]
Protection Type Interrupting Code KC6 Interrupting Code KC0
L S I G
Cat. No. Cat. No.I1=0.4…
1 x In
t1=sec. I2=1…10 x In t2=sec. I3=1…10 x In
I4=0.2…
1 x In
t4=sec.
300 120…300 3, 6, 12, 18 180…3000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 450…3600 60…300 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-K6K3-D30 140G-K0K3-D30 400 160…400 3, 6, 12, 18 240…4000 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.5 600…4800 80…400 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8 140G-K6K3-D40 140G-K0K3-D40 Rated Current In
[A]
L S I G MM
I1=1 x In t1=MAX sec. I2=OFF t2=OFF sec. I3=4 x In I4=OFF t4=OFF sec. I5=2.5 x In 300 300 18 — — 1200 — — 750
400 400 18 — — 1600 — — 1000
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8
1 2
3 4
5 6
7 8 MM Output
(Customer Connection)
Terminal
Block
Terminal
Block
(Customer Connection)
MM Input
24V
-+
3 4
140G-K-CC
Connector
140G-K-CIC
ConnectorX3
X4
140G-K
Electronic Trip Unit
LSIG-MM
Requires Cat. No. 140G-K-CC and 140G-K-CIC terminal connectors.
I I
-- ,.._
• • I
= I ~ • - • =
J - • I -- • • - I
• • - J
• • - I
- ✓ • •
~
~
,.._ - • - J - - • - J - - • - J - • - I
= I • • - • • I .. - J = ,;.
✓ - ..
~
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 67 Motor Circuit Protectors Product Selection
Motor Circuit Protectors
• Current range 0.16…1200 A
• End cap/bolt-on te rminals are standard
• UL Listed/Recognized for motor loads
• Short-circuit protection - magnetic trip
• Overload protec tion must be provided separately
• Visible trip indication
• High current limiting
• High switching capacity
The Bulletin 14
0MG Motor Circuit Protectors provide short-circuit protecti on for individual motor loads. Factory-installed internal accessories make installation and wiring easy.
General Information
Motor Circuit Protectors may provide the following protective and control functions. • Disconnect for motor branch circuit
• Branch-Circuit, short-circuit protection (magnetic protection) • Switching (manual)
In Nor
th America, electrical codes require that an i ndividual Motor Branch Circuit be protected by a UL/CSA Listed fuse, circuit breaker or self-protected combination motor controller. 140MG-G, H, I, J, K, M and N Frames
The 140MG-G, H, I, J, K, M and N-Frame motor circuit protectors are UL/CSA Recognized as circuit breakers. They are UL/CSA Recognized, rather than UL/CSA Listed, since they only provide short-circuit protection and not thermal overload protection for the motor.
Standards Compliance and Certifications
Standards Compliance Certifications
IEC 60947-2 CE Marked
UL489 CSA Certified (File No. LR1234)
CSA22.2, No. 5 UR Recognized (File No. E224135)
CCC
68 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Motor Circuit Protectors Product Selection
Catalog Number Explanation— 125 A, G-Frame and 150 A, I-Frame Examples given in this section are not intended to be used for product selection. Use these configurations only to select all factory-installed options for shunt trips, undervoltage release units, auxiliary contacts, and alarm contacts. Use the codes fr om Table f to add on to the motor circuit protector cat. no. selected on the previous pages to form a complete cat. no. for a complete assembly with factory-installed opti ons. Note: Terminal lugs are not supplied and can be ordered separately. See page 85 for available lugs.
140MG – I 8 P – C70 – SD – KA
a b c d e f f
a b c d
Bulletin Number Frame/Rating Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity (based on Ic at 480V) Protection Type
Code Description Code Description Code Description Code Description 140MG Global Motor Circuit Protector G 125 A 8 High break P Adjustable magnetic only (less than 13 x In ) I 150 A
e f
Current Range Factory-Installed Internal Options(1)
(1) Select up to two internal options: 1 for left side mounting (s hunt trip or undervoltage release), 1 for right (auxiliary or alarm contact).
Code Description Shunt Trip and Undervoltage Release Units Auxiliary and Alarm Contacts Code Description Code Description
B e.g., D30 = 3 A SJ Shunt Trip, 24…30V AC/DC KA 1 Aux. Contact, 250V C e.g., C30 = 30 A SK Shunt Trip, 48…60V AC/DC AA 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 250V D e.g., D12 = 120 A SD Shunt Trip, 110…127V AC; 110…125V DC BA 2 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 250V SA Shunt Trip, 220…240V AC; 220…250V DC KJ 1 Aux. Contact, 24V SB Shunt Trip, 380…440V AC AJ 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 24V SC Shunt Trip, 480…525V AC
UJ Undervoltage Release, 24…30V AC/DC
UR Undervoltage Release, 48V AC/DC
UD Undervoltage Release, 110…127V AC; 110…125V DC
UA Undervoltage Release, 220…240V AC; 220…250V DC
UB Undervoltage Release, 380…440V AC
UC Undervoltage Release, 480…525V AC
No Digit No Selection
I
l
'
I
I
- -
-
I
I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 69 Motor Circuit Protectors Product Selection
Catalog Number Explanation — 125 A, H-Frame and 250 A, J-Frame Complete Motor Circuit Protector Assemblies with Factory-Installed Options Examples given in this section are not intended to be used for product selection. Use these configurations only to select all factory-installed options for shunt trips, undervoltage release units, auxiliary contacts, and alarm contacts. Use the codes fr om Table f to add on to the motor circuit protector cat. no. selected on the previous pages to form a complete cat. no. for a complete assembly with factory-installed opti ons. Note: Terminal lugs are not supplied and can be ordered separately. See page 85 for available lugs.
140MG – J 8 P – D15 – SD – AA
a b c d e f f
a b c d
Bulletin Number Frame/Rating Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity (based on Ic at 480V) Protection Type
Code Description Code Description Code Description Code Description 140MG Global Motor Circuit Protector H 125 A 8 High break P Adjustable magnetic only (less than 13 x In ) J 250 A
e f
Current Range Factory-Installed Internal Options(1)
(1) Select up to two internal options: 1 for left side mounting (s hunt trip or undervoltage release), 1 for right (auxiliary or alarm contact).
Code Description Shunt Trip and Undervoltage Release Units Auxiliary and Alarm Contacts Code Description Code Description
B e.g., B30 = 3 A SJ Shunt Trip, 24…30V AC/DC KA 1 Aux. Contact, 250V C e.g., C30 = 30 A SK Shunt Trip, 48…60V AC/DC AA 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 250V D e.g., D20 = 200 A SD Shunt Trip, 110…127V AC; 110…125V DC BA 2 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 250V SA Shunt Trip, 220…240V AC; 220…250V DC DA 1 Trip Unit Alarm Contact, 250V SB Shunt Trip, 380…440V AC FB 2 Aux. Contacts, 400V
SC Shunt Trip, 480…525V AC AB 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 400V UJ Undervoltage Release, 24…30V AC/DC KJ 1 Aux. Contact, 24V UR Undervoltage Release, 48V AC/DC AJ 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 24V UD Undervoltage Release, 110…127V AC; 110…125V DC DJ 1 Trip Unit Alarm Contact, 24V UA Undervoltage Release, 220…240V AC; 220…250V DC
UB Undervoltage Release, 380…440V AC
UC Undervoltage Release, 480…525V AC
No Digit No Selection
I
I
I
I
I
I
70 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Motor Circuit Protectors Product Selection
Catalog Number Explanation — 400 A, K-Frame and 800 A, M-Frame Complete Motor Circuit Protector Assemblies with Factory-Installed Options Examples given in this section are not intended to be used for product selection. Use these configurations only to select all factory-installed options for shunt trips, undervoltage release units, auxiliary contacts, and alarm contacts. Use the codes fr om Table f to add on to the motor circuit protector cat. no. selected on the previous pages to form a complete cat. no. for a complete assembly with factory-installed opti ons. Note: Terminal lugs are not supplied and can be ordered separately. See page 85 for available lugs.
\
140MG – M 8 P – D40 – SD – AA
a b c d e f f
a b c d
Bulletin Number Frame/Rating Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity (based on Ic at 480V) Protection Type
Code Description Code Description Code Description Code Description 140MG Global Motor Circuit Protector K 400 A 8 High break P Adjustable magnetic only (less than 13 x In ) M 800 A
e f
Current Range Factory-Installed Internal Options(1)
(1) Select up to two internal options: 1 for left side mounting (s hunt trip or undervoltage release), 1 for right (auxiliary or alarm contact).
Code Description Shunt Trip and Undervoltage Release Units Auxiliary and Alarm Contacts Code Description Code Description
D30 e.g., 300 A SJ Shunt Trip, 24…30V AC/DC AA 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 250V D40 e.g., 400 A SK Shunt Trip, 48…60V AC/DC CA 3 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 250V D60 e.g., 600 A SD Shunt Trip, 110…127V AC; 110…125V DC AB 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 400V D80 e.g., 800 A SA Shunt Trip, 220…240V AC; 220…250V DC FB 2 Aux. Contacts, 400V Blank Frame only SB Shunt Trip, 380…440V AC CJ 3 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 24V SC Shunt Trip, 480…525V AC
UJ Undervoltage Release, 24…30V AC/DC
UR Undervoltage Release, 48V AC/DC
UD Undervoltage Release, 110…127V AC; 110…125V DC
UA Undervoltage Release, 220…240V AC; 220…250V DC
UB Undervoltage Release, 380…440V AC
UC Undervoltage Release, 480…525V AC
No Digit No Selection
I I I
I I I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 71 Motor Circuit Protectors Product Selection
Catalog Number Explanation — 1200 A, N-Frame
Examples given in this section are not intended to be used for product selection. Use these configurations only to select all factory-installed options for shunt trips, undervoltage release units, auxiliary contacts, and alarm contacts. Use the codes fr om Table f to add on to the motor circuit protector cat. no. selected on the previous pages to form a complete cat. no. for a complete assembly with factory-installed opti ons. Note: Terminal lugs are not supplied and can be ordered separately. See page 85 for available lugs.
140MG – N 8 P – E12 – SD – AB
a b c d e f f
a b c d
Bulletin Number Frame/Rating Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity (based on Ic at 480V) Protection Type
Code Description Code Description Code Description Code Description 140MG Global Motor Circuit Protector N 1200 A 8 High break P Adjustable magnetic only (less than 13 x In ) e f
Current Range Factory-Installed Internal Options(1)
(1) Select one internal option for inner right mounting (shunt trip or undervoltage release). For remote control MCCB operation, select the spring charging motor and operating voltage for shunt trip and shunt close coils from table f.
Code Description Shunt Trip and Undervoltage Release Units Auxiliary and Alarm Contacts E12 1200 A Code Description Code Description
SJ Shunt Trip, 24V AC/DC AJ 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 24V SK Shunt Trip, 48V AC/DC AB 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 400V SD Shunt Trip, 110…120V AC/DC FB 2 Aux., 400V
SA Shunt Trip, 220…240V AC/DC
SB Shunt Trip, 380V AC
SC Shunt Trip, 415…440V AC
UJ Undervoltage Release, 24V AC/DC
UD Undervoltage Release, 110…120V AC/DC
UA Undervoltage Release, 220…240V AC/DC
UB Undervoltage Release, 380…400V AC
UC Undervoltage Release, 415…440V AC
No Digit No Selection
I I
I I
I
I
I
I
T
I
72 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Motor Circuit Protectors Product Selection
Motor Circuit Protectors
Rated Operational
Current Ie [A]
Magnetic Trip Current [A] 3-phase Hp Ratings(1) Max. kW, 3-Phase — AC-3(1) Cat. No.(2)Cam Setting
A B C D E F G H I 200V 230V 460V 575V 230V 400/415V 500V 690V G-Frame
3 12 15 17 20 23 25 28 30 33 0.5 0.5 1.5 1 0.6 0.75 1.1 1.5 140MG-G8P-B30 7 28 34 40 46 53 59 65 71 77 0.75 1 2 3 1.1 2.2 3 4 140MG-G8P-B70 15 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 2 2 5 5 3 5.5 7.5 11 140MG-G8P-C15 30 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 3 5 10 10 5.5 11 15 22 140MG-G8P-C30 50 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 10 10 25 25 11 22 22 37 140MG-G8P-C50 70 210 280 350 420 490 560 630 700 770 15 15 40 40 15 30 37 55 140MG-G8P-C70 80 240 320 400 480 560 640 720 800 880 20 20 50 60 22 45 55 75 140MG-G8P-C80 100 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 25 25 60 75 30 55 75 100 140MG-G8P-D10 125 375 500 625 750 875 1000 1125 1250 1375 30 30 75 100 37 55 75 110 140MG-G8P-D12 H-Frame
3 12 15 17 20 23 25 28 30 33 0.5 0.5 1.5 1 0.6 0.75 1.1 1.5 140MG-H8P-B30 7 28 34 40 46 53 59 65 71 77 0.75 1 2 3 1.1 2.2 3 4 140MG-H8P-B70 15 45 60 75 90 105 120 135 150 165 2 2 5 5 3 5.5 7.5 11 140MG-H8P-C15 30 90 120 150 180 210 240 270 300 330 3 5 10 10 5.5 11 15 22 140MG-H8P-C30 50 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 10 10 25 25 11 22 22 37 140MG-H8P-C50 70 210 280 350 420 490 560 630 700 770 15 15 40 40 15 30 37 55 140MG-H8P-C70 80 240 320 400 480 560 640 720 800 880 20 20 50 60 22 45 55 75 140MG-H8P-C80 100 300 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 25 25 60 75 30 55 75 100 140MG-H8P-D10 125 625 703 781 859 938 1016 1094 1172 1250 30 30 75 100 37 55 75 110 140MG-H8P-D12 I-Frame
100 600 675 750 825 900 975 1050 1125 1200 25 25 60 75 30 55 75 100 140MG-I8P-D10 110 660 743 825 908 990 1073 1150 1238 1320 25 30 60 75 30 55 75 100 140MG-I8P-D11 125 750 844 938 1031 1125 1219 1313 1406 1500 30 30 75 100 37 55 75 110 140MG-I8P-D12 150 900 1013 1125 1238 1350 1463 1575 1688 1800 30 40 75 100 45 75 90 132 140MG-I8P-D15 J-Frame
150 750 844 938 1031 1125 1219 1313 1406 1500 30 40 75 100 45 75 90 132 140MG-J8P-D15 175 875 984 1094 1203 1313 1422 1531 1641 1750 40 40 100 125 55 90 110 160 140MG-J8P-D17 200 1000 1125 1250 1375 1500 1625 1750 1875 2000 50 50 125 150 55 110 132 160 140MG-J8P-D20 225 1125 1266 1406 1547 1688 1828 1969 2109 2250 50 60 125 150 90 110 160 200 140MG-J8P-D22 250 1250 1406 1563 1719 1875 2031 2188 2344 2500 60 75 150 200 132 132 160 250 140MG-J8P-D25 Rated Operational Current Ie [A] Magnetic Trip Current [A] 3-phase Hp Ratings(1) (1) The Hp and kW ratings shown are for reference only. The final se lection of the MCP should be made based on motor full load current and the requirements of local electrical codes.
Max. kW, 3-Phase — AC-3(1)
Cat. No.(2)
(2) The interrupting rating for MCPs is de pendent upon the controller used. Please see the global short-circuit ratings tables at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/global-sccr.page, or contact your local Rockwell Automation sales office or Allen-Bradley distributor.
I3 (adjustable) [A] 200V 230V 460V 575V 230V 400/415V 500V 690V K-Frame
300 300…3000 75 75 150 200 55 110 160 200 140MG-K8P-D30 400 400…4000 100 100 200 250 90 160 200 250 140MG-K8P-D40 M-Frame
600 600…6000 125 150 300 400 110 200 250 355 140MG-M8P-D60 800 800…8000 150 200 400 500 160 250 355 500 140MG-M8P-D80 N-Frame
1200(3)
(3) I3 is adjustable between 1…10x motor FLA. Values based on 1200 A rating plug. 1200…12000 250 300 600 700 200 250 500 710 140MG-N8P-E12
I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I
1111111111 I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I
I I I I I I I I I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 73 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers
Motor Protection Circuit Breakers have the following features:
• 10…150 A current range
• UL Listed for
motor loads
• Adjustment features
– Rated motor current adjustable from 0.4…1 x In
– Overload production [L] Class 3E, 5E, 10E, and 20E
– Unbalance L1, L2, L3 detect ion [U] adjustable either ON or OFF, alarm at 10% unbalance, trip at 50% unbalance, T=2 seconds
– Short-circuit protection [I], electronic magnetic trip adjustable from 6…13 x In • LED visible warnings and trip indication
• Manual settings using DIP switches
• End cap/bolt
-on te rminals are standard
Standards Compliance and Certifications
Standards Compliance Certifications
IEC 60947-2 CE Marked
UL489 CCC
CSA22.2, No. 5 CSA Certified (File No. LR1234)
UL 60947-4-1A UL Listed
HACR Type E197878
Cat. No. 140MG-H… Cat. No. 140MG-J…
74 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Catalog Number Explanation
Complete Motor Protection Circuit Breaker Assemblies with Factory-Installed Options Examples given in this section are not intended to be used for product selection. Use these configurations only to select all factory-installed options for shunt trips, undervoltage release units, auxiliary contacts, and alarm contacts. Use the codes fr om Table f to add on to the motor protection circuit breaker cat. no. selected on the previous pages to form a complete cat. no. for a complete assembly with factory-installed option s. Note: Terminal lugs are not supplied and can be ordered separately. See page 85 for available lugs.
140MG – J 8 E – D15 – SD – AA
a b c d e f f
a b c d
Bulletin Number Frame/Rating Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity (based on Ic at 480V) Protection Type
Code Description Code Description Code Description Code Description 140MG Motor Protection Circuit Breaker H 100 A 8 High break E LUI J 150 A
e f
Current Range Factory-Installed Internal Options(1)
(1) Select up to two internal options: 1 for left side mounting (s hunt trip or undervoltage release), 1 for right (auxiliary or alarm contact).
Code Description Shunt Trip and Undervoltage Release Units Auxiliary and Alarm Contacts Code Description Code Description
C e.g., C25 = 25 A SJ Shunt Trip, 24…30V AC/DC KA 1 Aux. Contact, 250V D e.g., D15 = 150 A SK Shunt Trip, 48…60V AC/DC AA 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 250V SD Shunt Trip, 110…127V AC; 110…125V DC BA 2 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 250V SA Shunt Trip, 220…240V AC; 220…250V DC DA 1 Trip Unit Alarm Contact, 250V SB Shunt Trip, 380…440V AC FB 2 Aux. Contacts, 400V
SC Shunt Trip, 480…525V AC AB 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 400V UJ Undervoltage Release, 24…30V AC/DC KJ 1 Aux. Contact, 24V UR Undervoltage Release, 48V AC/DC AJ 1 Aux., 1 Alarm Contact, 24V UD Undervoltage Release, 110…127V AC; 110…125V DC DJ 1 Trip Unit Alarm Contact, 24V UA Undervoltage Release, 220…240V AC; 220…250V DC
UB Undervoltage Release, 380…440V AC
UC Undervoltage Release, 480…525V AC
No Digit No Selection
I I I
I I I
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 75 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Table 102 - Interrupting Rating/Breaking Capacity
Interrupting Rating (50/60 Hz), UL 489/CSA C22.2, No. 5 [kA] Breaking Capacity (50/60 Hz), IEC 60947-2 240V 480V 600V 220V(1)
(1) These ratings have not been tested for the CCC listing. 415V 440V(1) 690V
Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] Icu [kA] Ics [%Icu] 150 65 25 100 100 70 100 65 100 15 100
Max. Rated Motor Current In [A] L (Motor FLC) U I Cat. No.(1) (1) Select the Motor Protection Circ uit Breaker based on the motor FLC.
I1 = 0.4…1 x In Trip Class 50% of I1 In = Instantaneous H-Frame
25 10…25
3E, 5E, 10E, 20E (approx. 2…20 s) ON or OFF Adjustable from 6…13 x In 140MG-H8E-C25
60 24…60 140MG-H8E-C60
100 40…100 140MG-H8E-D10
J-Frame
40 16…40
3E, 5E, 10E, 20E (approx. 2…20 s) ON or OFF Adjustable from 6…13 x In 140MG-J8E-C40
60 24…60 140MG-J8E-C60
100 40…100 140MG-J8E-D10
150 60…150 140MG-J8E-D15
I I
I I
76 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Motor Protection Circuit Breakers Product Selection
Molded Case Switches
Standards Compliance and Certifications
• 125…2500 A current range
• 3- and 4-pole devices
• End cap/bolt-on termi nals are standard
• These switches are lik e an MCCB, but they are not supplied with thermal overload protection
• Self Protecting, supplied with instantaneous magnetic trip override • Suitable for use as Motor Branch Circuit and Motor Disconnect • Must be protected on the supply side of the switch against short-circuits.
Standards Compliance Certifications
IEC 60947-1, -2 CE Marked
UL489 UL Listed
CSA22.2, No. 5 CSA Certified (File No. LR 1234)
HACR [G,H,I and J Frame] HACR Type E118548
UL 489, CSA C22.2, No. 5 IEC 60947-3 Cat. No.
Rated
Current In
[A]
Magnetic
Override
(1) [A]
(1) Does not provide overcurrent protecti on; may open above this current value Rated Voltage Rated Service Voltage Ue [V]
Rated
Service
Curr
ent
AC23
Rated
Service
C
urrent
DC23
Rated
insulation
voltag
e
Rated
impulse
withstand 3 Poles 4 Poles
AC (50/
60 Hz) [V] DC [V] AC (50/
60 Hz) DC Poles in
series Ie [A] Ie [A] Ui [V] Uimp [kV]
125 1500 600Y/347 500 690 500 4(2)
(2) 50V DC with 3 poles in series.
125 125 800 8 140G-G6S3-D12 140G-G6S4-D12
125 1500 600 500 690 500 3 125 125 1000 8 140G-H6S3-D12 140G-H6S4-D12 225 2700 600Y/347 500 690 500 3 200 200 800 8 140G-I3S3-D22 140G-I3S4-D22 250 3000 600 600 690 500 2 200 200 1000 8 140G-J0S3-D25 140G-J0S4-D25 400 5000 600 600 690 750 3 400 400 1000 8 140G-K15S3-D40 140G-K15S4-D40 800 10000 600 600 690 750 3 800 - 1000 8 140G-M6S3-D80 140G-M6S4-D80 1200 20000 600 — — — — — — — 140G-N6S3-E12 140G-N6S4-E12 2500 40000 600 — — — — — — — 140G-R12S3-E25 140G-R12S4-E25
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 77 Mounting System Adapters Product Selection
Mounting System Adapters
Catalog Number Explanation
Complete MCCB/MCP/MPCB Assemblies with Factory-installed Options Examples given in this section are not intended to be used for product selection. Use these configurations only to select the busbar adapter to be used with an MCCB or MCP . Use the codes from Table c to add on to the MCCB or MCP cat. no. selected previously to form a complete cat. no. for a complete assembly with busbar adapter.
Mounting Adapters for Bul. 140G MCCBs and 140MG MCPs—ordered separately for field assembly • Adapters clamp or plug directly on to the busbar
• For 5 mm or 10mm thick busbar
140G – G 6 F 3 – C10 – KA – MT
a b c
a b c
Bulletin Number Frame/Rating, Protection Type, Pole s, Current Range, Factory-installed Options Busbar Adapter Options Code Description
Configured from MCCB /MCP/MPCB selection tables
Code Description
140G Global Molded Case Circuit
Breaker MT Top feed (branch) connection for G- and H-Frame, supplied with factory-installed line- and load-side lugs
140MG Motor Circuit Protector MB Bottom feed (main) connection for G- and H-Frame, supplied with factory-installed line-
and load-side lugs
MU Universal (top or bottom) connection for J- and K-Frame, supplied unassembled. If
required, order terminal lugs separately (1 set only)
Description For Use With Thermal Current Ith [A] Width [mm] Cat. No.
Busbar adapter with flexible connection
top feed 140G/MG G- and H-Frame devices
125
90 141A-GHT
bottom feed 140G/MG G- and H-Frame devices 90 141A-GHB
Busbar adapter with rear connecting studs top or bottom feed 140G/MG J-Frame devices 250 105 141A-GJU Busbar adapter with rear connecting studs top or bottom feed 140G/MG K-Frame devices 400 140 141A-GKU Description Frame
Size For Us e With Pkg. Qty Cat. No.
Cu wire, two required per busbar adapter (1) 14…1/0 AWG or 2.5…70 mm2 G MCCB only
3 140G-G-TLC13
Cu wire, two required per busbar adapter (1) 14…1/0 AWG or 1.5…70 mm2 MCP only 140G-G-TLC13A Cu wire, two required per busbar adapter (1) 14…1/0 AWG or 2.5…95 mm2 H All 140G-H-TLC13 Al or Cu/Cu wire, one required per busbar adapter—multiple options available J, K All See page 85 't: <-\ \ '
I •· .. .. t, • •
.
'I •
~. _,
bb
---
78 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Mounting System Adapters Product Selection
Notes:
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 79 Accessories
Internal Electrical Accessories
Photos in this section are representative. Appearance of actual accessory may differ from the photo shown.
Auxiliary/Alarm Contact (AX/AL)
Functionality
Figure 10 through Figure 13 show the position of contacts at various points in the circuit breaker operation.
Figure 10 shows the position of the auxiliary contacts (AX), alarm contacts (AL), or thermal trip (TU) AL contacts when they are installed and the circuit breaker is ON or the AX contact not installed.
Figure 10 - Auxiliary, Alarm, or Trip Unit Alarm Con tact Position—Circuit Breaker ON Figure 11 shows the position of the contacts when the circuit breaker is OFF Figure 11 - Auxiliary, Alarm, or Trip Unit Alarm C ontact Position—Circuit Breaker OFF AX2 Auxiliary Contact
AL1 Alarm Contact
TU AL Alarm Contact
Diagram in bold indicates contact position when installed in the ON position Diagram in bold indicates contact position when installed in the OFF position G
24 ··r
06 08
:g :!l :!l ~
AA2 I
AL1 -~
TUAL - ~
;; :£ :g
4 21 95 05
·•· •
~
22~ r
:g
... r =
AL1 - ~
06 08
G>
I
TU AL -~
;; :£
121 95 05
80 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Accessories
Figure 12 shows the position of the contacts when the circuit breaker is TRIPPED via the TEST Button on the face of the circuit breaker or shunt trip or undervoltage release
Figure 12 - Auxiliary, Alarm, or Trip Unit Alarm Co ntact Position—Tripped via TEST Button Figure 13 shows the position of the contacts when the circuit breaker trip unit has TRIPPED. This can occur from fault current of thermal overload or via the Test button on the center pole of thermal-magnetic trip units.
Figure 13 - Auxiliary, Alarm, or Trip Unit Alarm Co ntact Position—Circuit Breaker Tripped Auxiliary/Alarm Contact Features
Auxiliary and alarm contacts are supplied in multiple variations for customer application. • Auxiliary Cont acts (AX) : Indicate ON/OFF status of the MCCB. • Alarm Contacts (AL): Indicate trip status of the MCCB. Alarm trip can be initiated by pressing the test button on the molded case circu
it breaker, a trip due to overcurrent, short circuit; or trip due to residual current, shunt, or undervoltage release signals.
• Thermal Trip Contacts (TU): Trips only when the MCCB has detected an overcurrent, short-circuit, or protection trip. H- and J-Frame MCCBs
have a button to test this feature. Available only for H, J, N, and NS frames.
These contacts are installed by removing the MCCB cover and accessing right- side pockets within the breaker with snap-in mounting provisions. Frames G…M are supplied with 1 meter (39 in.) pig tail wiring, with each terminal wire marked. Frames N and NS are wired internal to the breaker and are terminated for connection using a 3-pin quick connector.
Diagrams in bold indicate contact position when the circuit breaker is tripped via the test button
T est Button
Diagrams outlined in bold indicate contact position when the circuit breaker has tripped Trip Unit test button
22 1
24 ~G
I 98 ■ 06 • 08
1:1 ~ 1l :g
••• •
AX2
AL1 - -j
TUAL -~
" :£ i'l
121 I 95 I 05
22 1
2•
G
.98
G
•o8
N
~ ~ N 1l
AX2 I
AL1 -~ TU AL -~
"
:£ i'l
• 21 ' 95 ' 05
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 81 Accessories
Description Auxiliary
Contact
Alarm
Contact
Trip Unit
Alarm
Contact
Designation Diagram Frame Size Cat. No.
250V AC
1 Auxiliary contact 1 — — AX2 A G, H, I, J 140G-G-EA1A
1 Auxiliary or 1 alarm contact 1 or 1 — AX2 A G, H, I, J 140G-G-EA1AU(1) (1) This contact is supplied with unmarked wires. The contact can function as either an auxiliary or alarm contact, depending on connection method. — AL1 B
1 Auxiliary and 1 alarm contact 1 1 — AX2/AL1 D G, H, I, J 140G-G-EA1R1A 2 Auxiliary and 1 alarm contact 2 1 — AX1/AX2/AL1 E G, H, I, J 140G-G-EA2R1A 3 Auxiliary and 1 alarm contact 3 1 — AX1/AX2/AX3/AL1 F H, I, J 140G-H-EA3R1A 1 Trip unit alarm contact — — 1 TU AL C H, J 140G-H-EA1TA 3 Auxiliary and 2 alarm contacts 3 2 — AX1/AX2/AX3/AL1/AL2 G H, J 140G-H-EA3R2A 2 Auxiliary, 2 alarm, and 1 trip unit alarm
contacts 2 2 1 AX2/A X3/AL1/AL2/TU AL H H, J 140G-H-EA2R2TA 1 Auxiliary and 1 alarm contact 1 1 — AX1/AL1 J K, M 140G-K-EA1R1A 3 Auxiliary and 1 alarm contact 3 1 — AX1/AX2/AX3/AL1 F K, M 140G-K-EA3R1A 1 Trip unit alarm contact — — 1 TU AL L N, NS 140G-N-EA1TA 1 Trip unit alarm contact — — 1 TU AL L R 140G-R-EA1TA
24V DC, PLC
1 Auxiliary contact 1 — — AX2 A G, H, I, J 140G-G-EA1J
1 Auxiliary and 1 alarm contact 1 1 — AX2/AL1 D G, H, I, J 140G-G-EA1R1J 1 Trip unit alarm contact — — 1 TU AL C H, J 140G-H-EA1TJ 3 Auxiliary and 1 alarm contact 3 1 — AX1/AX2/AX3/AL1 F H, I, J 140G-H-EA3R1J 3 Auxiliary and 1 alarm contact 3 1 — AX1/AX2/AX3/AL1 F K, M 140G-K-EA3R1J 1 Auxiliary and 1 alarm contact 1 1 — AX1/AL1 N N 140G-N-EA1R1J 2 Auxiliary contacts 2 — — AX2/AX3 M N, NS 140G-N-EA2J
400V AC
1 Auxiliary and 1 alarm contact 1 1 — AX2/AL1 D H, J 140G-H-EA1R1B 2 Auxiliary contacts 2 — — AX1/AX2 I H, J 140G-H-EA2B
1 Auxiliary and 1 alarm contact 1 1 — AX1/AL1 J K, M 140G-K-EA1R1B 2 Auxiliary contacts 2 — AX1/AX2 I K, M 140G-K-EA2B
1 Auxiliary and 1 alarm contact 1 1 — AX1/AL1 N N 140G-N-EA1R1B 2 Auxiliary contacts 2 — — AX2/AX3 M N, NS 140G-N-EA2B
~ ~ I I a ·· -m
82 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Accessories
Figure 14 - Auxiliary/Alarm Contact Diagrams
32 34
34 AX3
32 31
31 21
21 22
22 AX2
24 24
24 24
AX2
22 22
21 21
D
H
96 98
98 95
95 AL1
96 16
AL2
15 15
18 18
16 16
18 18
15 15
AL2
16 24
AX2
11 11
14 AX1
14 12
12 22
22 21
21 31
31 32
AX3
32 24
96 34
34 AL1
95 95
98 98
96 G
0805
TU AL 06
06 05
08 96
98 98
95 95
AL1
96 11
24 AX2
11 14
AX1
14 12
12 22
22 21
21 31
31 32
AX3
32 24
96 34
34 AL1
95 95
98 98
96 F
06 96
24 AX2
11 11
14 AX1
14 12
12 22
22 21
21 24
AL1
95 95
98 98
96 E
08 05
06 TU AL
05 08
C
24 24
AX2
22 22
21 21
96 98
98 95
95 AL1
96 A B
24 AX2
11 11
14 AX1
14 12
12 22
22 21
21 24
I J
L
24 AX2
11 11
14 AX1
14 12
12 22
22 21
21 31
31 32
AX3 32
24 34
34 41
41 4442
K
AX4 42
44 TU AL
24 AX2 22
22 21
21 31
31 32
AX3 32
24 34
34 M N
AL1
AL1
11 41
11 41
AX1
12 44 14 42
12 44
14 42
1 1
1 1 ~ , 2~ r* 96~ ] 9.
AX1
--j
- ~
11 95
L
1 1
l
95 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 83 Accessories
Shunt Trip (SNT)
• Allows remote tripping of the MCCB by applying control voltage to the shunt trip coil. • Frames G, H, I, J, K, and M are supplied with 1 meter (39 in.) pig-tail wiring (each terminal wire is marked). • Frames N and NS are wired internal to the breaker and terminated for connection using a 3-pin quick connector.
Shunt Close (SNC)
• For use with motorized versions of the NS-Frame MCCB. • Allows remote closing of the MCCB when the spring motor is charged.
The shunt close un
it is wired internal to the MCCB and terminated for connection using a 3-pin quick connect.
Description Diagram(1)
(1) For N- and NS -Frame devices, te rminals C1 and C2 are designated C11 and C12.
Frame Size Cat. No.
12V DC
G, H, I, J
140G-G-SNR
24…30V AC/DC 140G-G-SNJ
48…60V AC/DC 140G-G-SNKY
110…127V AC/110…125V DC 140G-G-SND
220…240V AC/220…250V DC 140G-G-SNA
380…440V AC 140G-G-SNB
480…525V AC 140G-G-SNC
12V DC
K, M
140G-K-SNR
24…30V AC/DC 140G-K-SNJ
48…60V AC/DC 140G-K-SNKY
110…127V AC/110…125V DC 140G-K-SND
220…240V AC/220…250V DC 140G-K-SNA
380…440V AC 140G-K-SNB
480…525V AC 140G-K-SNC
24V AC/DC
N, NS
140G-N-SNJ
48V AC/DC 140G-N-SNKY
110…120V AC/DC 140G-N-SND
220…240V AC/DC 140G-N-SNA
380…400V AC 140G-N-SNB
Description Diagram Frame Size Cat. No.
24V AC/DC
NS
140G-NS-SNCJ
48V AC/DC 140G-NS-SNCKY
110…120V AC/DC 140G-NS-SNCD
220…240V AC/DC 140G-NS-SNCA
380…400V AC 140G-NS-SNCB
C1
C1C2
C2
SNT
SO
~+
-~
SNC
C2
C2
C1
C1
-~
~+
SO
-- -,---
p ~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
---♦---
' E-1
I
I
I
I
----+---
84 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Accessories
Undervoltage Release (UVR)
• Opens the MCCB when supply voltage drops below 0.7 of the UV relay, with a trip rating from 0.7…0.35. • The MCCB can be r eset when the supply voltage is higher than 0.85 of the relay rating. • When the UV is de-energized it is not possible to clo se the main contacts on the MCCB. • R Resistor is supplied with the MCCB when reset is required. • Frames G,H,I,J,K, and M are supplied with 1 meter (39 in.) pig-tail wiring (each terminal wire is marked). • Frames N and NS are internally wir ed to the breaker and terminated for connection using a 3-pin quick connector.
Residual Current Release Module (IEC Only)
The residual current release module provides protection against low levels of earth (ground) fault currents. It continuously monitors the insulation. Compliant with IEC 60947-2 annex B, IEC 61000 for protection against unwarranted tripping.
Current Transformer for Neutral Current
Description Diagram Frame Size Cat. No.
24…30V AC/DC
G, H, I, J
140G-G-UVJ
48V AC/DC 140G-G-UVKY
60V AC/DC 140G-G-UVY
110…127V AC/110…125V DC 140G-G-UVD
220…240V AC/220…250V DC 140G-G-UVA
380…440 V AC 140G-G-UVB
480…525 V AC 140G-G-UVC
24…30V AC/DC
K, M
140G-K-UVJ
48V AC/DC 140G-K-UVKY
60V AC/DC 140G-K-UVY
110…127V AC/110…125V DC 140G-K-UVD
220…240V AC/220…250V DC 140G-K-UVA
380…440 V AC 140G-K-UVB
480…525 V AC 140G-K-UVC
24V AC/DC
N, NS
140G-N-UVJ
60V AC/DC 140G-N-UVKY
110…120V AC/DC 140G-N-UVD
220…240V AC/DC 140G-N-UVA
380…400V AC 140G-N-UVB
415…440V AC 140G-N-UVC
Description Frame Size 3-Pole Cat. No. 4-Pole Cat. No.
• Alarm & Trip indication
• 0.03 A with 0.0 s override
• Current adjustment: 0.5…10 A
• Time adjustmen t: 0.0…3 s
• Test
G 140G-G-ELP1603 140G-G-ELP1604
H — 140G-H-ELP1604
I 140G-I-ELP2503 140G-I-ELP2504
J — 140G-J-EP2504
K — 140G-K-ELP
Rated Current [A] Frame Size Cat. No.
300 K(1)
(1) Order with connector (Cat. No. 140G-K-CC).
140G-K-NCTD30
400 K(1) 140G-K-NCTD40
600 M(1) 140G-M-NCTD60
800 M(1) 140G-M-NCTD80
400…1600 N, NS 140G-N-NCTE16
1000…3200 R 140G-R-NCTE30
R
~-
UVD2
D2
D1
D1
+~
SO
.. r
-- -+- --
' I
E-y
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I ~
I
I
-- + -
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 85 Accessories
Mechanical Accessories
Terminal Lugs
You can use mechanical terminal lugs to terminate line and load wiring to the MCCB. The 140G product line includes, as standard, the capability to terminate wiring using customer furnished “crimp-on” ring lug (ring tongue) or forked lug termination.
For customers who prefer terminating wiring to Mechanical Terminal Lugs, the 140G line offers a variety of mechanical terminals l
ugs to match the frame and application wiring.
Multiple tap terminal lugs are available for those customers terminating multiple wires to a MCCB pole, either to line or load connection. Use of a multi-tap connection can save on panel space, making wiring easier due to using (multiple) smaller diameter wire. For applications following the UL guidelines for panel short-circuit current rating (SCCR), the use of multiple wire termination on the load size permits the termination to be rated at the SCCR level of the circuit breaker, which may allow a higher SCCR than may be available using a separate power distribution block.
Description Conductor Type No. of
Conducto
rs
Wire Size Frame Size Cat. No. (Pkg. Qty. 3) Cat. No. (Pkg. Qty. 4)[mm2] [AWG] Cu wire 1 2.5…70 14…1/0
G
140G-G-TLC13(1)
(1) Molded case ci rcuit breaker only
140G-G-TLC14
Cu wire 1 15…70 14…1/0 140G-G-TLC13A(2)
(2) Motor circuit protector only.
—
Multiple cable - Cu wire 6 2.5…35 14…2 140G-G-MTL63(3)
(3) Includes the High T erminal cover. Multiple cable logs for use with load side connectors only. 140G-G-MTL64(3)
Cu wire 1 2.5…95 14…1/0 H 140G-H-TLC13 140G-H-TLC14
Multiple cable - Cu wire 6 2.5…35 14…2 140G-H-MTL63(3) 140G-H-MTL64(3) Al or Cu wire 1 2.5…50 14…1/0
I
140G-I-TLA13 140G-I-TLA14
Al or Cu wire 1 25…150 4…300 MCM 140G-I-TLA1A3 140G-I-TLA1A4 Cu wire 1 6…185 10…250 MCM 140G-I-TLC13 140G-I-TLC14
Multiple cable - Cu wire 6 2.5…35 12…2 140G-I-MTL63(3)(4) (4) Includes screw for customer supplied connection for voltage tap. 140G-I-MTL64(3)(4)
Al or Cu wire 1 2.5…50 14…1/0
J
140G-J-TLA13 140G-J-TLA14
Al or Cu wire 1 25…150 4…300 MCM 140G-J-TLA1A3 140G-J-TLA1A4 Cu wire 1 6…185 10…250 MCM 140G-J-TLC13 140G-J-TLC14
Cu wire 1 120…185 250…350 MCM 140G-J-TLC1A3 140G-J-TLC1A4 Multiple cable - Cu wire 6 2.5…35 12…2 140G-J-MTL63(3)(4) 140G-J-MTL64(3)(4) Al or Cu wire 1 120…240 250…500 MCM
K
140G-K-TLA13 140G-K-TLA14
Al or Cu wire 2 95…120 2/0…250 MCM 140G-K-TLA23(3) 140G-K-TLA24(3) Al or Cu wire 2 95…240 3/0…500 MCM 140G-K-TLA2A3 —
Cu wire 1 120…240 250…500 MCM 140G-K-TLC13(4) 140G-K-TLC14(4) Cu wire 2 95…120 2/0…250 MCM 140G-K-TLC23(3)(4) 140G-K-TLC24(3)(4) Multiple cable - Cu wire 6 16…50 6…1/0 140G-K-MTL63(3) 140G-K-MTL64(3) Al or Cu wire 2 120…240 250…500 MCM
M
140G-M-TLA23 140G-M-TLA24
Al or Cu wire 3 70…185 2/0…400 MCM 140G-M-TLA33(3) 140G-M-TLA34(3) Cu wire 2 85…185 3/0…350 MCM 140G-M-TLC23(4) 140G-M-TLC24(4) Cu wire 3 70…185 2/0…350 MCM 140G-M-TLC33(3)(4) 140G-M-TLC34(3)(4) Al or Cu wire 4 120…240 4/0…500 MCM N, NS 140G-N-TLA43(3) 140G-N-TLA44(3) Cu wire 4 120…240 4/0…500 MCM 140G-N-TLC43(3) 140G-N-TLC44(3) Al or Cu wire 6 50…400 1/0…750 MCM
R
140G-R-TLA63 —
Cu wire 6 50…400 1/0…750 MCM 140G-R-TLC63 —
I
l I
I I
- I l
I \
'
' l
~
I
l
:~ , ,m.
I
r
'
l
-
l F -
-
or -- r- ""11.£'
L__ I I
l l I
I
-
-
"' .._,,, ~ --
L__ I
..
\ \ \
I
'--- I
""t. ' I
I
l
..
I t
I I
-
-
I
-
I
1111
'--- l
' I l I
I
-
- - •
. ... ..,,z,... -
"l·y ..,_,; • ~
L--- I I
I l ~ -I I I -
~
,.-
.. ~ '
~ I I
I I f -
,,,,') -
~ -
.. .,. I
I
I
I
-
~ - -
4 00 l"
ooo
~
I I
1 I
- ~
-~=
I I
1 l
-
F
-
~:~~-s-~ .,. \ ~ •
l
C,
I
I I
T -
I I I
-
-
86 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Accessories
Extended Terminals
Spreader Terminals
Rear Terminals (IEC only)
Description Frame Size 3-Pole Cat. No. (Pkg. Qty. 3) 4-Pole Cat. No. (Pkg. Qty. 4) Extended T erminals for busbar or ring type connection
• G- & I-frame supplied with 100 mm phase barrier
• H- & J-frame supplied with insulator, 100 mm phase barrier, and terminal cover • K- & N-/NS-frame supplied with insulator and 100 mm phase barrier • M-frame terminals only
G 140G-G-EXT3 140G-G-EXT4
H 140G-H-EXT3 140G-H-EXT4
I 140G-I-EXT3 140G-I-EXT4
J 140G-J-EXT3 140G-J-EXT4
K 140G-K-EXT3(1)
(1) IEC only.
140G-K-EXT4(1)
M 140G-M-EXT3(1) 140G-M-EXT4(1)
N, NS 140G-N-EXT3(1) 140G-N-EXT4(1)
Description Frame Size 3-Pole Cat. No. (Pkg. Qty. 3) 4-Pole Cat. No. (Pkg. Qty. 4) Spreader Terminals for busbar or ring type connection
• G- & I-frame supplied with 200 mm phase barrier
• H- & J-frame supplied with insulator, 200 mm phase barrier • K- & N-/NS-frame supplied with insulator and 200 mm phase barrier • M- & R-frame terminals only
G 140G-G-EXS3 140G-G-EXS4
H 140G-H-EXS3 140G-H-EXS4
I 140G-I-EXS3 140G-I-EXS4
J 140G-J-EXS3 140G-J-EXS4
K 140G-K-EXS3(1)
(1) IEC only
140G-K-EXS4(1)
M — 140G-M-EXS4(1)
N, NS — 140G-N-EXS4(1)
R 140G-R-EXS3(1) 140G-R-EXS4(1)
Top Spreader Terminals for busbar or ring type connection • M-frame terminals only
• N/NS-frame supplied with insulator and 100 mm phase barrier M 140G-M-EXSLI3(1) —
N, NS 140G-N-EXSLI3(1) —
Bottom Spreader Terminals for busbar or ring type connection • M-frame terminals only
• N/NS-frame supplied with insulator and 100 mm phase barrier M 140G-M-EXSLO3(1) —
N, NS 140G-N-EXSLO3(1) —
Description Frame Size 3-Pole Cat. No. (Pkg. Qty. 3) 4-Pole Cat. No. (Pkg. Qty. 4) Rear flat horizontal terminals N, NS 140G-N-TLH3 140G-N-TLH4 Rear flat vertical terminals
N, NS 140G-N-TL V3 140G-N-TL V4
R(1)
(1) 2000 A (80/100%) and 2500 A (80%) MCCBs only.
140G-R-TL V3 140G-R-TL V4
-
I I
-
-1111
'
-
~
~-
-
_.!
•
-
~
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 87 Accessories
Phase Barriers
Phase barriers allow you to increase the insulation characteristics between the phases at the connections. Phase barriers provide additional electrical clearance between each phase when special connections extend past the circuit breaker housing.
They are mounted from the front, even with the circuit breaker already installed.
Terminal Covers
The terminal shield prevents accidental contact with live parts, they also provide phase-to-phase insulation.
Description Frame Size Length 3-Pole Cat. No. (Pkg. Qty. 4) 4-Pole Cat. No. (Pkg. Qty. 6) • Provides add itional clearance when
special connections that extend beyond
the frame of the MCCB are used.
• Frames G, H, I, J, and K are supplied
with 25
mm barriers as standard.
G, I
1 in. (25 mm) 140G-G-PB3M 140G-G-PB4M
4 in. (100 mm) 140G-G-PB3L 140G-G-PB4L
8 in. (200 mm) 140G-G-PB3H 140G-G-PB4H
H, J
1 in. (25 mm) 140G-H-PB3M 140G-H-PB4M
4 in. (100 mm) 140G-H-PB3L 140G-H-PB4L
8 in. (200 mm) 140G-H-PB3H 140G-H-PB4H
K, N, NS 4 in. (100 mm) 140G-K-PB3L 140G-K-PB4L
8 in. (200 mm) 140G-K-PB3H 140G-K-PB4H
M 4 in. (100 mm) 140G-M-PB3L 140G-M-PB4L
R 4 in. (100 mm) 140G-R-PB3L(1)
(1) Package Qty 2. Supplied for the line side only.
140G-R-PB4L(2)
(2) Package Qty 3. Supplied for the line side only.
8 in. (200 mm) 140G-R-PB3H(1) 140G-R-PB4H(2)
Description Frame Size Height 3-Pole Cat. No. (Pkg. Qty. 2) 4-Pole Cat. No. (Pkg. Qty. 2) • Provide IP40 finge r protection against
accidental contact with live parts.
• Terminal cov ers are pre-punched to ease
installation.
• Supplied as standard with the selection of
multiple cable t
erminal lugs.
G 2 in. (50 mm) 140G-G-TC3H 140G-G-TC4H
H 2 in. (50 mm) 140G-H-TC3H 140G-H-TC4H
I 2.36 in. (60 mm) 140G-I-TC3H 140G-I-TC4H
J 2.36 in. (60 mm) 140G-J-TC3H 140G-J-TC4H
K 2.36 in. (60 mm) 140G-K-TC3H 140G-K-TC4H
M 2.36 in. (60 mm) 140G-M-TC3H 140G-M-TC4H
N, NS 2.76 in. (70 mm) 140G-N-TC3H 140G-N-TC4H
Description Frame Size Cat. No. (Pkg. Qty. 2)
• T erminal Cover seal kit provides protection against tampering with installed termi nal cover. • Supplied with two (2) screws and two (2) seals.
• Sealing wire and lead to be supplied by the customer. • Quantity one required for Line cover, one required for Load cover.
G, H, I, J 140G-G-TS
K 140G-K-TS
M, N, NS 140G-M-TS
_, ., ~'
~
88 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Accessories
Ingress Protection
The table indicates the degrees of protection against intrusion and accidental cont act according to IEC 60529.
Variable Depth Rotary Operating Kits
When you install MCCBs as the main or feeder circuit breaker in an industrial control panel and you use a non-flanged enclosure, a common method of operating the circuit breaker using a rotary operator mechanism. The use of a rotary operator converts a rotary motion to a vertical motion that “toggles” the MCCB. In this situation, the rotary operator kit consists of:
• External operating handle
• Operating shaft
• Circuit breaker-mounted rotary operating mechanism
Using these kits al
lows external operation of the circuit breaker with the ca pability of turning the circuit breaker on/off, or resetting it without having to open the enclosure. Traditionally, these kits are sold with an operating shaft that allows you to use the kit with enclosures of various depths. The operating handles will also provide status indication when the circuit breakers trip.
NFPA 79 Operators
A NFPA 79-compliant Internal Rotary Operating Handle Kit for Bulletin 140G MCCBs, and Bulletin 140MG MCPs and MPCBs is available to address current requirements of the NFPA 79 standard. The NFPA 79 kits are available for G-, H-, I-, J-, K-, M-, and N- Frame Circuit Breaker product lines.
Compliance with the current NFPA 79 standard enables you to maintain contro l of the main disconnecting means when the door is open; an issue for rotary-operated through-the-door disconnect switches and circuit breakers.
This standard requires that the rotary main disconnec ting means be operable without the use of accessory tools or devices (independent of door position) and restates the requirement for an interlocking provision to prevent the closing of the disconnecting means while the enclosure door is open, unless the interlock is operated by a deliberate action. Without this requirement, rotary-operated devices may have a shaft protruding from the panel when the door is open. If the panel is powered and it is necessary to turn power off, it is difficult to de-energize the panel with the operating shaft alone. This standard is to reduce the possibility of personnel not being able to turn an energized panel off with the door opened.
Why is This Relatively Simple Product Important to You? The trend in the market is moving toward building smaller and less-expensive control panels. To achieve this, many panel builders and OEMs have started using rotary operators because they are easier to install and the non-flanged enclosure is Location Without Terminal Covers With High Terminal Covers (1) (1) High terminal covers have a height of 60 mm and are designated with a suffix “H” in the catalog number (140G-G-TC3H)
AI P40(2)
(2) Also with direct or variable depth rotary operator. —
BI P 2 0 (3)
(3) G through M frames.
IP40(2)
C— I P40(4)
(4) After installation.
C
B
A
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 89 Accessories
significantly less expensive. With the introduction of this internal handle, customers can now comply with the NFPA 79 requirement and use the less-expensive, non-flanged enclosure with circuit breakers.
Applications Where NFPA 79 Compliance is Required as an Upgrade From an installation perspective, the internal handle replaces the existing operating shaft. Externally, the same 140G handle is used.
In the case of an existing 140G installation, installing the kit can be as simple as removing the existing operating shaft, measuring it, and then cutting the new internal operating handle shaft to the same length. It is then installed in place of the existing operating shaft.
Easy to Use, No-Tools-Required Internal Handle Operation When the door is open, the kit provides an internal handle with a positive grip, allowing users to operate the breaker. If the enclosure were opened using the defeater on the external handle with the circuit breaker on, the user could then turn the breaker off using the internal handle, rather than using a tool to rotate the operating shaft.
Compliance with “Deliberate Action Required”
Finally, the handle complies with the NFPA 79 requirement to: “Prevent closing of the disconnecting means while the enclosure door is open, unless an interlock is operated by deliberate action. ” The internal handle must be pulled out before it can be turned, otherwise the handle itself will just ratchet on the shaft.
Rotary Variable Depth Operators
Description Frame Size Handle Color Shaft Length Cat. No.
• Supplied with external handle, operating shaft, and MCCB mounted operating mechanism.
• See page 90 to select as components.
• Frames G, H, I, and J use a Bul. 140U P-style handle. • Frames K, M, and N use a Bul. 140U medium style handle.
G, I
Black 12 in. (305 mm) 140G-G-RVM12B
Red/Yellow 140G-G-RVM12R
Black 21 in. (533 mm) 140G-G-RVM21B
Red/yellow 140G-G-RVM21R
H, J
Black 12 in. (305 mm) 140G-H-RVM12B
Red/yellow 140G-H-RVM12R
Black 21 in. (533 mm) 140G-H-RVM21B
Red/yellow 140G-H-RVM21R
K
Black 12 in. (305 mm) 140G-K-RVM12B
Red/yellow 140G-K-RVM12R
Black 22 in. (559 mm) 140G-K-RVM21B
Red/yellow 140G-K-RVM21R
M
Black 12 in. (305 mm) 140G-M-RVM12B
Red/yellow 140G-M-RVM12R
Black 22 in. (559 mm) 140G-M-RVM21B
Red/yellow 140G-M-RVM21R
N
Black 12 in. (305 mm) 140G-N-RVM12B
Red/yellow 140G-N-RVM12R
Black 22 in. (559 mm) 140G-N-RVM21B
Red/yellow 140G-N-RVM21R
. .
¾
r·
;;: -
---~
'
90 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Accessories
Rotary Variable Depth Operators with Internal NFPA 79 Operating Handle Variable Depth Rotary Components
Description Frame Size Handle Color Shaft Length Cat. No. • Supplied with external handle, NFPA handle with operating shaft, sup
port bracket, and MCCB mounted operating
mechanism.
• See page 90 to select as individual components.
• Frames G, H, I, and J use a Bul. 140U P-style handle. • Frames K, M, and N use a Bul. 140U medium style handle.
G, I
Black 12 in. (305 mm) 140G-G-NVM12B
Red/yellow 140G-G-NVM12R
Black 21 in. (533 mm) 140G-G-NVM21B
Red/yellow 140G-G-NVM21R
H, J
Black 12 in. (305 mm) 140G-H-NVM12B
Red/yellow 140G-H-NVM12R
Black 21 in. (533 mm) 140G-H-NVM21B
Red/yellow 140G-H-NVM21R
K
Black 12 in. (305 mm) 140G-K-NVM12B
Red/yellow 140G-K-NVM12R
Black 22 in. (559 mm) 140G-K-NVM21B
Red/yellow 140G-K-NVM21R
M
Black 12 in. (305 mm) 140G-M-NVM12B
Red/yellow 140G-M-NVM12R
Black 22 in. (559 mm) 140G-M-NVM21B
Red/yellow 140G-M-NVM21R
N
Black 12 in. (305 mm) 140G-N-NVM12B
Red/yellow 140G-N-NVM12R
Black 22 in. (559 mm) 140G-N-NVM21B
Red/yellow 140G-N-NVM21R
Description Handle Color Frame Size Cat. No.
• P-style handle for G, H, I, and J frames
• Medium handles for K, M, and N frames
• Rated 3/3R/4/4X/12
• Accepts 3 padlocks
Black/Grey G, H, I, J 140U-PB
Red/Y ellow 140U-PY
Black/Grey K, M, N 140U-HM4
Red/Y ellow 140U-HM4E
Description Shaft Length Frame Size Cat. No.
Extension Shaft
12 in. (305 mm) G, H, I, J 194R-S1
21 in. (533 mm) 194R-S2
12 in. (305 mm) K, M, N 194R-R7
22 in. (305 mm) 194R-R8
Description Shaft Length Frame Size Cat. No.
NFPA 79 internal operating handle with shaft
Internal handle permits operation of the molded case circuit breaker when the door is open in compliance with NFP
A 79.
12 in. (305 mm) G, H, I, J 140G-N1
21 in. (533 mm) 140G-N2
12 in. (305 mm) K, M, N 140G-N7
22 in. (305 mm) 140G-N8
Description Frame Size Cat. No.
Rotary Variable Depth Operating Mechanism
• Direct molded case circuit breaker mount
• G, H, I, and J frame use 194R-S1 or 194R-S2 shafts (140G-N1 or 140G-N2 NFPA) • K, M, and N frames use 194R-R7 or 194R-R8 shafts (140G-R7 or 140G-R8 NFPA) • Shaft secured with set screw or cotter pin
G, I 140G-G-RMX
H, J 140G-H-RMX
K 140G-K-RMX
M 140G-M-RMX
N 140G-N-RMX
Description Frame Size Cat. No.
Support Bracket
Supplied as standard with NFPA variable depth operator kits G, H, I, J 140G-G-OSB
K 140G-K-OSB
M 140G-M-OSB
N 140G-N-OSB
•
--
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 91 Accessories
Direct Rotary Operators
Auxiliary Contacts for Handle Mech anism Mounting
• Early make contacts are (typically) used with an undervoltage release. The contacts close before the main contacts in the MCCB. The early make contacts supply power the undervoltage release, which prevents nuisance tripping of the relay. • Early break contacts are used to remove system voltage from electronics that could be damaged by transient voltage caused by the opening of the main contacts in the MCCB. • Mounted inside rotary mechanism or direct handle, supplied with 1 meter (39 in.) pig-tail wiring (each terminal wire is marked)
Figure 15 - Auxiliary Contact Wiring Diagrams
Description Frame Size Handle Color Cat. No.
• Mount with direct handle
operation of the MCCB.
• Lockable in OFF p osition (three
padlocks max.).
G, I Black 140G-G-RMB
Red/yellow 140G-G-RMY
H, J
Black 140G-H-RMB
Red/yellow 140G-H-RMY
K Black 140G-K-RMB
Red/yellow 140G-K-RMY
M Black 140G-M-RMB
Red/yellow 140G-M-RMY
N
Black 140G-N-RMB
Red/yellow 140G-N-RMY
Description Diagram
(see Figure 15) For Use With Frame Size Pkg. Qty Cat. No.
Early Make Handle Auxiliary Contact ; Open 400V A • 140G-G-RMB, -RMY , RMX • 140G-H-RMB, -RMY , RMX G, H, I, J 2 140G-G-EAM1B
Early Break Handle Auxiliary Contact ; Close 400V B 2 140G-G-EAB1B Early Make Handle Auxiliary Contact ; Close 250V A • 140G-K-RMB, -RMY , RMX K 2 140G-K-EAM1A A • 140G-M-RMB, -RMY , RMX M 140G-M-EAM1A
37 37
38 38
S4/1
47 47
48 48
R
-~
~
SO
+
UVRD2
D2
D1
D1
A
S4/2
EARLY
MAKE
EARLY
MAKE
B
147
147
148
148
S4/4
EARLY
BREAK
138
138
137
137
S4/3
EARLY
BREAK
Early Make Handle Wiring Early Break Handle Wiring
--- , ---
E ~
~
92 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Accessories
Motor Operators
The operating mechanism enables remote opening and closing of the circuit breaker and is particularly suitable for use in power supply network supervisory control systems. It comes complete with a padlock device.
The motor operating mechanism is fitted on the front of the circuit breaker as an alternative to the front flange or rotary operating mechanism. M
otor-operated circuit breakers are normally used in applications where switching is done infrequently and generally are not used to replace contactors that are applied in series with the circuit breaker.
Description Frame Size Cat. No.
• Remotely opens, closes, and resets the MCCB.
• Supplied with auto/manual selector, test feature, and special tool for local operation of the MCCB.
24V DC
G, I
140G-G-EOPJ
48…60V DC 140G-G-EOPKY
110…125V AC/DC 140G-G-EOPD
220…250V AC/DC 140G-G-EOPA
380…440V AC 140G-G-EOPB
480…525V AC 140G-G-EOPC
• Remotely opens, closes, and resets the MCCB.
• Uses a stored energy motor for local control of the motor without the use of speci
al tools and include auto/
manual/lock selection, lever to recharge the motor, and open & close push button operation.
24V DC
H, J
140G-H-EOPJ
48…60V DC 140G-H-EOPKY
110…125V AC/DC 140G-H-EOPD
220…250V AC/DC 140G-H-EOPA
380…440V AC 140G-H-EOPB
480…525V AC 140G-H-EOPC
24V DC
K
140G-K-EOPJ
48…60V DC 140G-K-EOPKY
110…125V AC/DC 140G-K-EOPD
220…250V AC/DC 140G-K-EOPA
380V AC 140G-K-EOPB
24V DC
M
140G-M-EOPJ
48…60V DC 140G-M-EOPKY
110…125V AC/DC 140G-M-EOPD
220…250V AC/DC 140G-M-EOPA
380V AC 140G-M-EOPB
Description Frame Size Cat. No.
Spring Charging Motor
24…30V AC/DC
NS
140G-NS-SCMJ
48…60V AC/DC 140G-NS-SCMKY
100…130V AC/DC 140G-NS-SCMD
220…250V AC/DC 140G-NS-SCMA
380…415V AC 140G-NS-SCMB
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 93 Accessories
Flange-mounted Cable Operators—3-Pole Only
Flexible Cable Operators are useful accessories when you are installing a circuit breaker in a flanged enclosure and you need to control the MCCB externally. Traditionally in North America, flange operators that consist of operating rods or special mounting plates for the breakers have been used. In each case, the circuit breaker must be mounted directly or nearly directly behind the external handle, which is located on the flange. This type of installation is reliable; however, the positioning of the circuit breaker is less than ideal in terms of working room, especially in small enclosures.
The Flexible Cable Operator uses a similar flange-mounted operating handle to control the MCCB; however, rather than operating rods, the breaker is operated by a flexible cable, which provides flexibility in the circuit breaker placement. In many industrial control panels, incoming power to the panel may actually be on the hinged side of the panel and when using traditional flange-mounted operators, you need to route the main feeder wires across the panel to the line side of the MCCB.
Using a flexible cable-operated MCCB allows you to install the MCCB closer to the incoming feeder wires.
Another application where Flexible Cable Operators are used is in conjunct ion with busbar mounting systems installed within an industrial control panel. When an MCCB is being used on the busbar system as the main disconnect or feeder protector, the location of the feeder breaker isn’t restricted to the area behind the flange.
Description Frame Size Handle Type Cable Length Cat. No. • For use with NEMA-s tyle flange
enclosures.
• Includes handle, MCCB operator, cable,
and necessary hardware.
• Pre-assembled for ease of installation.
• Replacement Hardware is listed on
page 100
G
Non-metallic Handle, Type 1/3/12/4/4X
3 ft. (0.91 m) 140G-G-FCX03
4 ft (1.3 m) 140G-G-FCX04
6 ft (1.9 m) 140G-G-FCX06
10 ft (3.0 m) 140G-G-FCX10
Stainless Steel Handle, Type 4/4X
3 ft. (0.91 m) 140G-G-FCS03
4 ft (1.3 m) 140G-G-FCS04
6 ft (1.9 m) 140G-G-FCS06
10 ft (3.0 m) 140G-G-FCS10
Painted Metal Handle, Type 1/12
3 ft. (0.91 m) 140G-G-FMX03
4 ft (1.3 m) 140G-G-FMX04
6 ft (1.9 m) 140G-G-FMX06
10 ft (3.0 m) 140G-G-FMX10
H
Non-metallic Handle, T ype 1/3/12/4/4X
3 ft. (0.91 m) 140G-H-FCX03
4 ft (1.3 m) 140G-H-FCX04
6 ft (1.9 m) 140G-H-FCX06
10 ft (3.0 m) 140G-H-FCX10
Stainless Steel Handle, Type 4/4X
3 ft. (0.91 m) 140G-H-FCS03
4 ft (1.3 m) 140G-H-FCS04
6 ft (1.9 m) 140G-H-FCS06
10 ft (3.0 m) 140G-H-FCS10
Painted Metal Handle, Type 1/12
3 ft. (0.91 m) 140G-H-FMX03
4 ft (1.3 m) 140G-H-FMX04
6 ft (1.9 m) 140G-H-FMX06
10 ft (3.0 m) 140G-H-FMX10
. ., a. p .
11l
f-
-
-
94 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Accessories
• For use with NEMA-style flange
enclosures.
• Includes handle, MCCB operator, cable,
and necessary hardware.
• Pre-assembled for ease of installation.
• Replacement Hardware is listed on
page 100
I
Non-metallic Handle, Type 1/3/12/4/4X
3 ft. (0.91 m) 140G-I-FCX03
4 ft (1.3 m) 140G-I-FCX04
6 ft (1.9 m) 140G-I-FCX06
10 ft (3.0 m) 140G-I-FCX10
Stainless Steel Handle, Type 4/4X
3 ft. (0.91 m) 140G-I-FCS03
4 ft (1.3 m) 140G-I-FCS04
6 ft (1.9 m) 140G-I-FCS06
10 ft (3.0 m) 140G-I-FCS10
Painted Metal Handle, Type 1/12
3 ft. (0.91 m) 140G-I-FMX03
4 ft (1.3 m) 140G-I-FMX04
6 ft (1.9 m) 140G-I-FMX06
10 ft (3.0 m) 140G-I-FMX10
• For use with NEMA-s tyle flange
enclosures.
• Includes handle, MCCB operator, cable,
and necessary hardware.
• Pre-assembled for ease of installation.
• Replacement Hardware is listed on
page 100
J
Non-metallic Handle, T ype 1/3/12/4/4X
3 ft. (0.91 m) 140G-J-FCX03
4 ft (1.3 m) 140G-J-FCX04
6 ft (1.9 m) 140G-J-FCX06
10 ft (3.0 m) 140G-J-FCX10
Stainless Steel Handle, Type 4/4X
3 ft. (0.91 m) 140G-J-FCS03
4 ft (1.3 m) 140G-J-FCS04
6 ft (1.9 m) 140G-J-FCS06
10 ft (3.0 m) 140G-J-FCS10
Painted Metal Handle, Type 1/12
3 ft. (0.91 m) 140G-J-FMX03
4 ft (1.3 m) 140G-J-FMX04
6 ft (1.9 m) 140G-J-FMX06
10 ft (3.0 m) 140G-J-FMX10
K
Non-metallic Handle, T ype 1/3/12/4/4X
3 ft. (0.91 m) 140G-K-FCX03
4 ft (1.3 m) 140G-K-FCX04
6 ft (1.9 m) 140G-K-FCX06
10 ft (3.0 m) 140G-K-FCX10
Stainless Steel Handle, Type 4/4X
3 ft. (0.91 m) 140G-K-FCS03
4 ft (1.3 m) 140G-K-FCS04
6 ft (1.9 m) 140G-K-FCS06
10 ft (3.0 m) 140G-K-FCS10
Painted Metal Handle, Type 1/12
3 ft. (0.91 m) 140G-K-FMX03
4 ft (1.3 m) 140G-K-FMX04
6 ft (1.9 m) 140G-K-FMX06
10 ft (3.0 m) 140G-K-FMX10
Description Frame Size Handle Type Cable Length Cat. No. ·~ •. p .
~
-
-
-
·~ •. p .
I ~
~
~
-
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 95 Accessories
Additional Accessories
• For use with NEMA-style flange
enclosures.
• Includes handle, MCCB operator, cable,
and necessary hard
ware.
• Pre-assembled for ease of installation.
• Replacement Hardware is listed on
page 100
M
Non-metallic Handle, T ype 1/3/12/4/4X
4 ft (1.3 m) 140G-M-FCX04
6 ft (1.9 m) 140G-M-FCX06
10 ft (3.0 m) 140G-M-FCX10
Stainless Steel Handle, Type 4/4X
4 ft (1.3 m) 140G-M-FCS04
6 ft (1.9 m) 140G-M-FCS06
10 ft (3.0 m) 140G-M-FCS10
Painted Metal Handle, Type 1/12
4 ft (1.3 m) 140G-M-FMX04
6 ft (1.9 m) 140G-M-FMX06
10 ft (3.0 m) 140G-M-FMX10
N Non-metallic Handle, T ype 1/3/12/4/4X
4 ft (1.3 m) 140G-N-FCX04
6 ft (1.9 m) 140G-N-FCX06
10 ft (3.0 m) 140G-N-FCX10
Left-hand flange-mount bracket
• relocates cable to left side
• ideal for enclosures
less than 15 in.
(38.1 cm) deep
M — — 140G-BML
N — — 140G-BNL
Description Frame Size Cat. No.
Trip Test B atte r y H, J, K, M (LSI, LSIG, MM)
N/NS (LSI) 140G-ELTT
Battery Unit
Used to interrogate the last trip of the MCCB when supplemen tal control power is not present or is lost.
Use with LSIG and LSIG-MM breakers
N, NS 140G-ELBU
Padlockable Handle Block
Padlocking Hasp
Lock-OFF only
G, I 140G-G-PL
H, J 140G-H-PL
N 140G-N-PL
NS 140G-NS-PL
R 140G-R-PL
Padlocking Flange
Supplied with toggle extension and escutcheon. L ock-OFF only K 140G-K-TPA
M 140G-M-TPA
Direct Mechanical Lock to Door N 140G-N-SINT
Description Frame Size Handle Type Cable Length Cat. No. ....
0 96 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Accessories
Description Frame Size 3-Pole Cat. No. 4-Pole Cat. No.
DIN Rail Adapter
Adapts to 35 mm DIN Rail
G 140G-G-DRA 140G-G-DRA4
H, J 140G-H-DRA 140G-H-DRA
I 140G-I-DRA 140G-I-DRA4
Escutcheon Plates
Finish Frame with Marking provision window. For flush
mounted (to door)
MCCB applications.
G 140G-G-EP3 140G-G-EP4
H 140G-H-EP3 140G-H-EP4
I 140G-I-EP3 140G-I-EP4
J 140G-J-EP3 140G-J-EP4
K 140G-K-EP
M 140G-M-EP
N, NS 140G-N-EP
R 140G-R-EP
IP54 Door protection
Transparent plastic cover flush mounted to the enclosure door. Mounted on
hinges and provided with a keyed lock.
N, NS 140G-N-BC12
R 140G-R-BC12
Description For Use With Cat. No.
Adapter Plate for replacement of 140U/140M, Frames G, H, and J 140U-G to 140G-G 140G-G-PRA140U-H to 140G-G
140U-H to 140G-H 140G-J-PRA140U-J to 140G-J
Panel Mount Terminal for customer wiring connection of maintenance mode MCCBs K, M 140G-K-CC
140G-K-CIC
Connector to mount shunt release in 3rd pole pocket for a 4-pole MCCB K, M (4-pole only) 140G-K-CC2 0 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 97 Accessories
Description For Use With Cat. No.
MCCB Ready-to-Close Auxiliary Contact
Signals that the MCCB is ready to accept closing command if:
• MCCB open
• spring charging motor is fully charged
• a shunt trip is de
-energized
• an undervoltage release is energized
• an opening solenoid
is armed
Form C, 24V PL
C
NS
140G-NS-RTCJ
Form C, 250V 140G-NS-RTCA
Spring Charging Motor (Charged)
Auxiliary contact signals that the motor is charged
Form C, 24V PLC
NS
140G-NS-SCJ
Form C, 250V 140G-NS-SCA
Trip Reset
Auxiliary contact allows remote reset of MCCB following an overcurren
t trip
Form C, 24…30V AC/DC, PLC
NS
140G-NS-RRJ
Form C, 110…130V AC/DC 140G-NS-RRD
Form C, 200…230V AC/DC 140G-NS-RRA
Mechanical Counter
Indicates number of times the MCCB has been toggled from ON to OFF .
NS 140G-N-MOC
R 140G-R-MOC
98 Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 Accessories
Bulletin 1494V Variable Depth Flange-
Mounted Circuit Breaker Operating
Mechanism
Components
Circuit Breaker Operating Mechanism
The mechanism listed must be combined with a connecting rod, operating handle, and a circuit breaker (supplied by customer) to obtain a functional device.
Connecting Rods
Operating Handle
Auxiliary Contacts
3-Pole Circuit Breaker(1)
(1) Circuit breakers to be provided by customer.
Operating Mechanism
Frame Size [A] Frame Size Cat. No.
125, 225, 250 G, H, I, J 1494V-M70
400 K 1494V-M71
800, 1200 M, N 1494V-M72
Circuit Breaker Frame Size [A] Enclosure Working Depth [in. (mm)] Cat. No.Minimum Maximum 125, 150, 225, 250 6-3/4 (172) 21-5/8 (549) 1494V-RA4
400 8-1/2 (216) 21-5/8 (549) 1494V-RA4
800, 1200 9-1/2 (241) 23 (584) 1494V-RB4
Handle Type Description Circuit Breaker Frame Size [A] Operating Handle Cat. No.
T ype 1, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 Nonmetallic 125, 150, 250, 400 1494F-P1 T ype 1, 3R, 4, 12 Painted Metal 125, 150, 250, 400 1494F-M1 Type 4, 4X Stainless Steel 125, 150, 250, 400 1494F-S1
T ype 1, 3R, 4, 12 Painted Metal 800, 1200 1494F-M2
Type 4, 4X Stainless Steel 800, 1200 1494F-S2
Description For Use With Contact Type Cat. No.
Auxiliary Contact Kit for Circuit Breakers (includes
contacts and
adapter) 125…1200 A Allen-Bradley Bul. 140G Circuit Breakers 1 N.O. 1495-N85 1 N.C. 1495-N86
Description For Use With Cat No.
Insulation Kit
140G-G, 140MG-G
140G-H, 140MG-H
140G-I, 140MG-I
140G-J, 140MG-J
1495-N87
Rockwell Automation Publication 140G-SG001E-EN-P - March 2017 99 Replacement Parts
Photos in this section are representative. Appearance of actual product may differ from the photo shown.
Replacement Parts, G…NS Frames
End Cap Kits
All 140G MCCBs are furnished with end caps mounted on the circuit breaker as standard. Replacement end cap kits are available.
Many customers prefer to use a “crimp-on” ring lug (ring tongue terminal) or forked terminal as the wire termination method to the MCCB. Ot
hers prefer wire connection to a terminal lug. A broad selection of terminal lugs are available to meet specific application requirements.